GC22 7064 13_Input_Output_Equipment_Installation_Physical_Planning_Mar93 13 Input Output Equipment Installation Physical Planning Mar93
GC22-7064-13_Input_Output_Equipment_Installation_Physical_Planning_Mar93 GC22-7064-13_Input_Output_Equipment_Installation_Physical_Planning_Mar93
User Manual: GC22-7064-13_Input_Output_Equipment_Installation_Physical_Planning_Mar93
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 518
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
-------.-----_
.... ------------,--.
IBM System/360, System/370,
4300, 9370, and ES/9000 Processors
GC22-7064-13
Input/Output Equipment
Installation Manual-Physical Planning
For questions or problems regarding this publication:
In the U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico, call
1-800-426-9021
In all countries, either mall the Readers' Comment Form or fax the
Readers' Comment Form to
~
1-914-432-9405
(fax number)
Note: In countries other than the U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico, dial the appropriate International access code before the above fax number.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------~
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under
"Notices" on page v.
,
'
'\
Fourteenth Edition (March 1993)
The drawings and specifications contained herein shall not be reproduced in whole or in part without written permission.
Information contained in this publication is subject to change from time to time. Any such change will be reported
in subsequent revisions or Technical Newsletters.
A form for reader's comments appears at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed, address
your comments to:
IBM Corporation, Department B98
PO Box 950
Poughkeepsie, NY 12602
U.S.A.
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
C Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1977, 1993. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users - Documentation related to restricted rights - Use, duplication or disclosure is
subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP S~hedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Table of Contents
Contents
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authorized Use of IBM Online Books
......................................
Electronic Emission Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trademarks and Service Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About This Publication .... .. .'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ... ,., . . . . . . ,
What Is Included in This Publication
Who Should Use This Publication . . . . . . . . , .. " . . . . . . . " . . . . . , ..
., ........ , . . . . , ... , . . . . . . . . . . . , ,
Where to Find More Information
. . . . . . . . .
.... ,....
,.,"",.
. , , . , .. ,
ix
ix
x
x
xi
xi
xi
xii
, . . . . . " . , . " . . .. '. , , , ,. , "
1
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling .Schematlcs
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link . , . " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3044-1
Models C01 and D01. . . . ~ . . . ... : . . .. . . , .', . , . . . . . '. ' . . , . . . . . . . . . .:.. 3044-1
3088 Multisystem CharmeJ Comm'unication Unit , .. '. , ... ' .. , : .. , . . . . . , ... , . . . . '.. 3088-1
MqdelsA1,1,and2 . . . . . . . . , ..................... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3088-1
3172 Interconnect Controller ~ . . . . . . , . . . . . : ............. : .... , . . . . . . . . ',. • . .. 3172-1
power Cord Specificatio~s . ~ •. ~.' . . . . ' .... ~ . '. ~.' .', ..... : '.' ... :., ..' . .. .. . . . . . 3172;'3
Cabling Sch~matic .. ,. ~ . "':' .' . . . . . . ';' ... : ~ ... , . '; '. ': ~"'. ~ : . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3172-3
3172 Interconnect Controller Model 2 .. :-' .. ~: .. ,' .. ', ... , . ,.' " .. ~. " ... ". . . . . . . ' 3172-5
Cabling Schematic , .. , . . . . . , . . . . , .. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3172-7
3203 Printer " ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . . . . . . 3203-1
Models 1 .and 2 . . . " . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , " ' , . . . , . . . , . , ' 3203-1
Model4 ,', , . , , , " , .. , ... , , , .. , , . , . . . . , , , . '.' . , . . . . , , , . , .. , . , .. 3203-2
Model 5 . . . . , . . . , . , " , . , . , . . . , . . . , ' ; " , . , . . . . " . , . . . , . . . , ' "
3203-3
3205 Color Display Console . . . . . , . . . " . . , . . , . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . , . , . . . , . . 3205-1
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard . , . , . . . . , ... ,., . . . . . . . , " ' , . . . . . . . . , . . . 3210-1
Model 1 , .. " .. , .... , . , " " ' , ... , ' , ... , .. ,." . . . . . ,." ... ,'"
3210-1
Model 2 ... , . " . " .. , .....' ..... , . , " , ... , . , . , ' , .. ,' ... , .. , ", . "
3210-2
3211 Printer " " " " , . . . . . . . . , . . . . , " ' , . , . . " . , . , , , , , , . . . , . .'. , , , , , ,. 3211-1
Moael1' '.' . '.' . . . . , , .. ' '...... , ,...; ... '... '. , , . ,.' ...' , . , , , . , . , . , ... , , "
3211-1
3213 Console Printer , ........... " .. ", . , .... '.' .. , . , .. , ... , . , . , , , , .. , 3213-1
Model. 1 " '.' . .;. , . .. . , , ',' .' " , . . . . . '. , . , . , . , , . . . . . . , , , . . . . . . . . , '. "
3213-1.
3215 Console Printer . . . . . . . . . , .. " . " . , . , . , . , . " . . . . . . , .. , .. , .. ,. 3215-1
Model 1 , . , ' , . . . . , . , ' , . , .. , .. , " , . , " , . , ;'. , . ~ , , , , . . . . . , . , , , , "
3215-1
3262 Line Printer " . , . . . . . . . . . . . . , ' , . " .. , " " , . . . . . . . ,., .. , .. " . 3262-1
Models 1 and 11
, . , " ' , . . . . , , . . . . . , , , , , . , , . , .. , , .. , . , .. , ., . , .. 3262-1
Model 5 .......... ... : . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . , . , ' 3262-3
: 3278 Display Console , . ; " " , . , ... " . , . . . . , " , ... , ' , . . . . . ' .. , . , , .. ,. 3278-1
Model2A ., .. : ... , ....,." .. , " " ' , . , .. " . , . . . . . . . . , . . . . . , . , ' 3278-1
3279 Color Display Console , . , . , . . . . " . '.' , , , , . . , . . , , . , , . , , . . , , . , . , . "
3279-1
Model 2C , . . : . . . . . , . . . . . . . . , . . . . , . . . , . . . , . . , . . . . . ' . . . , . . . " . . . , ' "
3279-1
3287 Priliter , . . , . . , ' , . . . . . " . . . , . , " " " , . . , . . . , " " , . . . . . . . , ' , . . 3287-1
Models 1 an'd:2.. , , , , . . . . . . . , . . , , , , , , , . , , , . , , , , , , . . . , , , , .'. " , , , "
3287-1
3289 Line Printer , .. ,., .. " . , .... , ' , . , ' , . . . . " .... , " , ... , ' , . , . . . . 3289-1
Model 4 . , " " , . . . . . . . . . . , . , " , . . . . . . , " " " , . . . , " ' , . , ' , . " . 3289-1
3310 Direct Access Storage Device , . . . . , " " " , . " . , ' , . " . " . , .. , " " , : 3310-1
Models A2, 81, and B2
.. , .. " ... , " " " , . " . " . , " , ... , " ' , . " . . 3310-1
Models A1 and A2 , . , . , . , ' , . " .. , " , . , " , .. , ' , . , . , " " ' .. , " ' "
3310-2
Models B1 and B2 "., ... ,., .... , " " ' , . , " " ' , . , . , ' , .. , " " " , . 3310-3
Models A1 and A2 Cabling Schematic " ' , . , " " " " " ' , . , . , ' , . , " , . , "
3310-4
3330 Disk Storage " . " . , " ' , . . . . , . " . " . , , , . , , , , . . . . , , . , . , . , , . , , , 3330-1
~
Copyright IBM Corp. 1977, 1993
III
Table of Contents
Models 1, 2, and 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3333 Disk Storage and Control
...................................... .
............................................. .
Models 1 and 11
Models 1 and 11 Cabling Schematic
................................. .
3340 Direct Access Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model A2 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3340 Models 81 and 82 - 3344 Models 82 and 82F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3350 Direct Access Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models A2 and A2F
........................................... .
................,...........................
Models 82 and 82F
Models C2 and C2F
........................................... .
Models A2, A2F, C2, and C2F Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3370 Direct Access Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models A1, A2, 81, and 82 (Maximum Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models A 1 and A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models 81 and 82
Models A1 and A2 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3375 Direct Access Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
......................... .
Models A1, 81, and D2 (Maximum Configuration)
Model A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models A 1 and D1 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3380 Direct Access Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3390 Direct Access Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models A14, A24, A34, A18, A28, A38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models 814, 824, 834, 818, 828, 838, 81C, 82C, and 83C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models A14, A24, A34, A18, A28, A38, 814, 824, 834, 818, 828, 838, 81C, 82C, and 83C .. .
Models A14, A24, A34, A18, A28, A38 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3410 Magnetic Tape Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models 1, 2, and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
.................................. .
Models 1, 2, and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models 1, 2, and 3 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models 3 through 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models 3 through 8 Cabling Schematic'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3422 Magnetic Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3422 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control Model A01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3422 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control Model A01 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3422 Magnetic Tape Unit Model 801
................................. .
3430 Magnetic Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3430 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control Model A1
.......................... .
3430 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control Model A1 Cabling Schematic
.............. .
3430 Magnetic Tape Unit Model 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , " " " " , .. , " "
3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3480 Control Unit Models A11 and A22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3480 Tape Unit Models 811 and 822
................................. .
3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ ... .
Models A01, A10, 802, 804, 820, and 840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models A02, A20, 802, 804, 820, and 840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Unit Models A01, A02, A10, and A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Unit Models 802, 804, 820, and 840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Iv
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3330-1
3333-1
3333-1
3333-3
3340-1
3340-1
3340-2
3340-3
3350-1
3350-1
3350-2
3350-3
3350-4
3370-1
3370-1
3370-2
3370-3
3370-4
3375-1
3375-1
3375-2
3375-3
3375-4
3375-5
3380-1
3390-1
3390-1
3390-2
3390-3
3390-5
3410-1
3410-1
3411-1
3411-1
3411-2
3420-1
3420-1
3420-2
3422-1
3422-2
3422-3
3422-4
3430-1
3430-2
3430-3
3430-4
3480-1
3480-2
3480-3
3480-4
3490-1
3490-1
3490-2
3490-4
3490-6
Table of Contents
Magnetic Tape Subsystem Enhanced Capability Models C10, C11, and C22 . . . . . . . . . . 3490-19
Cabling Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3490-22
Cabling Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3490-23
Magnetic Tape Subsystem Model D31 or D41 .. -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3490-25
Magnetic Tape Subsystem Model D32 or D42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3490-26
3504 Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3504-1
Models A1 and A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3504-1
3505 Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3505-1
Models 81 and 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3505-1
3505 Card Reader and 3525 Card Punch Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3505-2
3525 Card Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3525-1
Models P1, P2, and P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3525-1
3540 Diskette InpuUOutput Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3540-1
Models 81 and 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3540-1
3704 Communications Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3704-1
Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3704-2
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3705-1
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller and 3705 Expansion Module Cabling Schematic
3705-4
3705-80 Communications Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3705-7
3705-80 Communications Controller Cabling Schematic ....
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3705-9
3720 Communication Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3720-1
Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3720-1
3725 Communication Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3725/26-1
Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3725/26-1
3726 Communication Controller Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3725/26-3
3725 Model 1/3726 Maximum Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3725/26-5
3725 Model 1/3726 Communication Controller and Expansion Cabling Schematic . . . . . 3725/26-6
Cable Routing to 3725 Model 1/3726 Communication Controller and Expansion
.....
3725/26-7
3725 Model 1/3726 Communication Controller and Expansion Cable Ordering . . . . . . . 3725/26-8
3725 Model 1/3726 Standard Communication Cables for North America, Latin America,
and Taiwan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3725/26-9
3725 Model 1/3726 Custom-Length Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3725/26-10
3725 Communication Controller Model 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . :.. 3725/26-13
3725 Communication Controller Model 2 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3725/26-15
3725 Communication Controller Model 2 Cable Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3725/26-16
3725 Model 2 Standard Communication Cables for North America, Latin America, and
Taiwan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3725/26-17
3725 Model 2 Custom-Length Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3725/26-18
3727 Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3727-1
Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3727-3
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3745-1
3745 Cpmmunication Controller Models 130, 150, and 170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3745-1
3745 Models 210 through 61A and 3746 Expansion Unit Models A11 through 900 . . . . . . . 3745-17
3800 Printing Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3800-1
Models 1-3, 6, and 8 with 8urster-Trimmer-Stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3800-1
Models 1-3, 6, and 8 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3800-3
3803 Tape Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3803-1
Models 1, 2, and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3803-1
Models 1, 2, and 3 Cabling Schematic of Tape Switching 3803 Models 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . 3803-2
Models 1, 2, and 3 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3803-3
3811 Printer Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3811-1
Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3811-1
Model 1 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3811-2
3814 Switching Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3814-1
Models A1 through A4, 81 through 84, and C1 through C4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3814-1
Contents
V
Table of Contents
Models A1 through A4, B1 through B4, and C1 through C4 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . 3814-3
3820 Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3820-1
3825 Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3825-1
Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3825-4
3827 Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3827-1
Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3827-1
Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3827-4
3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3828-1
Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3828-4
3830 Storage Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3830-1
Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3830-1
Models 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3830-3
Models 1, 2, and 3 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3830-4
3835 Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3835-1
Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3835-4
3848 Cryptographic Unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3848-1
Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3848-2
3850 Mass Storage System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3850-1
3851 Mass Storage Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3851-1
Cabling Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3851-4
3880 Storage Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3880-1
Models 1 through 4, 11, 13,21, and 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3880-1
Models 1 through 4, 11, 13,21, and 23 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3880-3
3881 Optical Mark Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3881-1
Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3881-1
Model 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3881-2
Model 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3881-3
3886 Optical Character Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3886-1
Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3886-1
Model 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3886-2
Model 2 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3886-3
3890 Document Processor (50 HZ) . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3890-1
3890 Document Processor (60 HZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3890-8
3890/XP Document Processor . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3890-13
3890 Document Processor (All Models) Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3890-17
389X Optical Character Processor Unit (OCP)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389X-1
3891/XP Document Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3891-1
Details (By Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3891-2
Totals (Modules and Feature)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3891-2
3892 Document Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-1
3892 Document Processor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-2
Details (By Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-2
Totals (Modules and Feature)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-2
Acoustics and Noise-Emission Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-3
Power Requirements (kVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-3
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-3
Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-3
Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-3
38921XP Document Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-4
38921XP Document Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-6
Details (By Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-6
Totals (Modules and Feature)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-6
Acoustics and Noise-Emission Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-7
Power Requirements without Power Encoder (kVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-7
vi
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Table of Contents
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-7
Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-7
Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-7
Power Requirements with Power Encoder (kVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-7
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-7
Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-7 .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-7
Additional Power Requirements with Scanner
Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-7
Receptacle (for Scanner ICP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-8
Receptacle (for Scanner ISM)
Power Cord Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-8
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3892-8
3895 Document Readerllnscriber (60 HZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3895-1
Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3895-3
3896 Tape-Document Converter (60 HZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3896-1
3897 Image Capture Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-2
Plan View
3897 Cable Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-3
3897 Image Capture Processor Channel Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-4
Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-5
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-5
Heat Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-5
Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-5
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-5
Acoustics and Noise-Emission Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-5
Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-5
Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-5
Power Cord Style . . . . . . ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-6
Environment (Operating)
Shipping Dimensions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3897-6
3898 Image Processor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3898-1
Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3898-4
3900 Advanced Function Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3900-1
3990 Storage Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3990-1
Models 1, 2, and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3990-1
3995 Optical Library Dataserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3995-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3995-1
Models 111, 112, 131, 132, and 151
4245 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4245-1
Model1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4245-1
Models 12 and 20 (Channel Attached) and Models D12 and D20 (Coaxial Cable Attached,
Channel Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4245-3
4248 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4248-1
Models 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4248-1
5203 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5203-1
Model1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5203-1
5213 Console Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5213-1
Model 1 (with 3115-0, 3115-2, 3125-0. or 3125-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5213-1
5424 Multi-Function Card Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5424-1
Models A1, A2, K1, K2" and K3 (with SF 6510)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5424-1
5425 Multi-Function Card Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5425-1
Models A 1 and A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5425-1
6262 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6262-1
Models 014 and 022
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6262-1
Models 014 and 022 Cabling Schematic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6262-4
7012 POWERstation and POWER~erver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7012-1
Contents
vii
Table of Contents
Models 3xx .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Cabling for Parallel Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .~
7013 RISC System/6000 Models 5xx
...............................
Cabling for Parallel Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for ESCON Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7015 POWERserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models 9xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Cabling for Parallel Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for ESCON Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7770 Audio Response Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8809 Magnetic Tape Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models A 1, 2, and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models A1, 2, and 3 Cabling Schematic
................................
9032 ESCON Director Model 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9032 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9033 ESCON Director Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " . ..
9033 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9034 ESCON Converter Model 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9034 Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9035 ESCON Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9035 Cabling Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9037 Sysplex Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM 9343 Storage Controller Models C02, CC2, C04, CC4, 004, and DC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM 9343 Storage Controller Models C02, CC2, C04, CC4, 004, and DC4 Cabling Schematic .
9345 Direct Access Storage Device Models 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lo,
•
••
7012-1
7012-2
7013-1
7.013-2
7013-2
7015-1
7015-1
7015-3
7015-3
7770-1
7770-1
7770-2
8809-1
8809-1
8809-3
9032-1
9032-3
9033-1
9033-3
9034-1
9034-3
9035-1
9035-1
9035-3
9037-1
9343-1
9343-4
9345-1
Chapter 2. General Cabling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-1
Chapter 3. ESCON Cabling Information
Ordering Fiber Optic Jumper Cables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-1
3-1
Appendix A. Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
USA and Canada 60 Hz Power Receptacles and Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
IBM World Trade Power Receptacle and Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Power Receptacles by Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Power Receptacle Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ . . . . . . . A-9
Power Cord Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Appendix B. Customer-Supplied Cables
8-1
Appendix C. Template Index
C-1
Appendix D. Inch-ta-Mlillmeter Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1
Appendix E. Standard Symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
vIII
Input/output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
X-1
Notices
Notices
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends to
make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product,
program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may
be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe on any of
IBM's intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except
those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's responsibility.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The
furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license
inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Commercial Relations, IBM Corporation, Purchase, NY
10577.
Authorized Use of IBM Online Books
For online versions of this book, we authorize you to:
• Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for use within your enterpri~e,
provided you reproduce the copyright notice, all warning statements, and other required statements on each copy or partial copy.
• Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related IBM
product (which may be either machines you own, or programs, if the program's license terms
permit a transfer). You must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the documentation.
You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from this
authorization.
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not
apply to you.
Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization. Upon termination, you must
destroy your machine readable documentation.
(C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1977, 1993
Ix
Notices
Electronic Emission Notices
The following statement applies to this IBM product. The statement for other IBM products intended
for use with this product will appear in their accompanying manuals.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in' order to meet FCC emission
limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Trademarks and Service Marks
The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are trademarks or service marks of
the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries:
RISC System/6000
IBM
ES/9000
Enterprise System/9370
ES/9370
Sysplex Timer
System/360
ESCON
POWERstation
System/370
ESCON Director
POWERserver
PS/2
ES/3090
3090
ES/4381
X
Input/Output EquIpment InstallatIon Manual-PhysIcal PlannIng
About This Publication
This manual contains information needed for planning the physical installation of IBM input/output (1/0)
devices that attach to mid- to large-scale IBM processors. Some input output devices have separate
physical planning manuals. This manual provides references to the titles of those manuals.
What Is Included in This Publication
This publication contains the following chapters and appendices:
Chapter 1, "Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics" on page 1
Chapter 2, "General Cabling Information" on page 2-1
Chapter 3, "ESCON. Cabling Information" on page 3-1
Appendix A, "Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications" on page A-1
Appendix B, "Customer-Supplied Cables" on page B-1
Appendix C, "Template Index" on page C-1
Appendix 0, "Inch-te-Millimeter Conversion" on page 0-1
Appendix E, "Standard Symbols" on page E-1
Who Should Use This Publication
This publication is for IBM customers and those who assist in planning the installation of IBM
input/output equipment, such as architects, building planners, engineering consultants, electricians,
and data processing and facilities managers. In planning the installation, the customer may request
the assistance of an IBM Installation Planning Representative.
~
Copyright IBM Corp. 1977, 1993
xl
Where to Find More Information
This manual is a companion to and should be used with the following manuals:
• IBM System/360 Installation Manual-Physical Planning. GC22-6820
• IBM System/370 Installation Manual-Physical Planning. GC22-7004
• IBM General Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning. GC22-7072
• IBM System/370 3090 Processor Complex: Installation Manual-Physical Planning. GC22-7074
• IBM ES/3090 Processor Complex: Installation Manual-Physical Planning. GC22-7080
• IBM Enterprise System/9000 Planning for System Installation. GA24-4187
• IBM Enterprise System/90OD Models 180, 190, 210, 260, 320, 440, 480, 490, 570, and 610 Installation
Manual-Physical Planning. GC22-7084
• IBM Enterprise System/9OO0 Models 330,340,500,520, 580, 620, 640, 660, 720, 740, 820, 860, and 900
Installation Manual-Physical Planning. ,GC22-7083
• IBM 4321, 4331, 4361 Processors Installation Manual-Physical Planning. GA33-1577
• IBM 4341 and 4381 Processors Installation Manual- Physical Planning. GA24-4017
• IBM Enterprise System/9370 Installation Manual-Physical Planning. GA24-4031
For the input/output products. 1xxx and 2>00< series. not listed in this manual, see IBM Input/Output
Equipment Reference Installation Manual-Physical Planning: System/360, System/370, 4300 Processors,
GC22-7069.
The following publications may be used in conjunction with this manual depending on the specific
system configuration:
• IBM System/370 Input/Output Configura tor, GA22-7002 (contains I/O device priority data)
• IBM 3790 Communication System Installation Manual-Physical Planning. GA27-2769
• IBM 3270 Information Display System Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787
• Assembly of Coaxial Cable and Accessories for Attachment to IBM Products, GA27-2805
Additional information about specific systems and machines can be found in the following publications:
• IBM 3750 Switching System Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA 19-5003
• IBM 3600 Plant Communication System Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA24-3675
• IBM 8100 Information System Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2884
• IBM Communications Terminals Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-3006
• IBM Multiuse Communication Loop Planning and Installation Guide, GA27-3341
xII
InpUUQutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
The devices in this section are arranged in numeric order by I/O device, beginning with the 3044 Fiber
Optic Channel Extender and ending with the 9345 Direct Access Storage Device. The pages in this
section are numbered by I/O device. For example, the pages for the 3044 Fiber Optic Channel
Extender are numbered 3044-1 through 3044-8, and the pages for the next I/O device (the 3088 Multisystem Communication Unit) are numbered 3088-1 and 3088-2.
Standard symbols are used in the plan view diagrams.
~
Copyright IBM Corp. 1977, 1993
1
Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
\ 2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender link
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender
Link Models C01 and D01
Specifications
Front View (Not to Scale)
Dimensions:
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
mm
(inches)
1
15
~ (1/2)
Height
180
(7)
Side
455
(18)
190
Service Clearances:
(7-3/4)
mm
(inches)
180
~:
Front
220
(8-3/4)
Rear
255
(10)
Front
255
(10)
Right
Left
(-)
(-)
Weight:
11.5 kg (25 lb)
Heat Output:
120 W (400 BTU/hr) to air
(maximum)
Airflow:
1 m 3/min (30 cfm)
(7)
................................. 1
I. .. .. .... . ... ... . . ... .
. ............................ .1
I. ....................................................... 1
I. .......... .
. .......... I
220
(8-3/4)
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Plug
.Receptacle
Voltage
Power Cord Style
Length
0.12 (maximum)
1
NEMA 5-15P
NEMA 5-15R
120 (50/60 Hz)
G1
2.7 m (9 ft)
Note: The power cord to this unit has a separate grounding conductor. Power provided to
this unit must also provide a separate
grounding conductor.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
10°C-40.6°C (50°F-105°F)
ReI Humidity
80/0-80 %
Max Wet Bulb
26.7°C (80°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
10°C-51.7°C (50°F-125°F)
ReI Humidity
80/0-800/0
Max Wet Bulb
26.7°C (80°F)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3044-1
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link Models C01 and D01 Cabling
Schematic
0185 Channel (Byte/Block Multiplexer, Selector)
Control Unit
} Fiber Optics
Fiber Optics
3044-C01
3044-001
Front
Front
Group
No.
0185
0185
No. of
Cables
2
2
From
3044-COI
Control Unit
To
Channel
3044-001
Max Length
(ft)
61 (200)
122 (400)
m
Cable
Ordering
Provided by IBM
Supplied with control unit
Note: Group 3920 cables may be used if available. For cable distance limitations, see IBM 3044 FiberOptic Channel Extender Link Product Description, GA22-7097.
Minimum cable length from a 3800 Model 3 to a 3044 Model 001 is 30 m (100 ft).
Typical Configuration in One Building
o
1/1
1/1
Jumper Cable
.....................................
3044
Model CO,
CD
o
o
c:
3044
. Model 001
Control
Unit
Legend:
o Indicates white-capped connector on jumper cable
• Indicates completely black connector on lumper cable
Typical Configuration involving Two Buildings
- ...
0
en
en
Qi
0
0
.r:.
Q)
-
0:
>Jumper Cabl. K:
Building 1
!---
c:
c:
cd
u
-
3044
Model C01
Building 2
-
.................................
....................
_...............
!---
Distribution Panel
J
r-
Fiber Optic
Trunk Cable
-r
3044
~::~~~;,:~~:~:~:b::={ Model
001
I'--
Control
Unit
~
Distribution Panel
Legend:
o Indicates white-capped/labeled connector
• Indicates completely block connector
Note: See IBM 3044 Fiber-Optic Channel Extender Link: Fiber-Optic Cable Planning and Installation Guide,
GC22-7073, for additional information.
3044-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link Models C01 and 001 Rear Panels
Bus
out
Tag
Bus
in
Tag
if if if If
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
Information Plate
I I
I I
101 101 101 101 DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
i i i i i i i i DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
l1 l1 l1 l1 DDDDDDDDDD
0 0
0 0
0
0
I I
I I
I I
I I
0 0
0
I I
I I
0 0
0
C01
Rear Panel
I I
I I
CAUTION
TRANSIolITTER EIolITS INVISIBLE OPTICAL RADIATION.
DO NOT VIEW WITH IolAGNIFIER OR IolICROSCOPE.
EYE INJURY IolAY RESULT.
LInk Priority
Receive
Fiber Optic Connector
Transmit
High
Low
Bus
ou t
lia9
if if
I I
I I
11 11
000 0 0 0
0
ii
I I
I I
Information Plate
I I
I I
0
ii
I I
I I
11 11
DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDD
001
Rear Panel
Fiber Optic Connector
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3044-3
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender
Link Models C02 and 002
Specifications
Front View (Not to Scale)
Dimensions:
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
1
15
~(1/2)
190
I
mm
(inches)
Front
220
(8-3/4)
Side
455
(18)
Height
180
(7)
(7-3/4)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
mm
255
255
(inches)
(10)
(10)
H:::. ;I=- i- 11if I-~~
C)~II!:kI~:'OI 8
eEl=- I
I
[. -
..
--
--
. -..-
-'
c""_,,_""_""""",,.,,_.,,_._.,,"_._ "
.-
-_ -_ __
.... ....
._-"...,-- -_....
L---..J
Ie
=i
--.-
--
.-.
M._N"
t=
Left
(-)
(-)
Weight:
13.5 kg (29 Ib)
Heat Output:
100 W (350 BTU/hr) to air
(maximum)
(7)
EJI
I
180
Right
220
(8-3/4)
-
."
...
-" .. ,._. . . .M
...
__3
___.:3
--- 3
~- J---
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Plug
Receptacle
Voltage
Power Cord Style
Length
0.1 (maximum)
1
NEMA 5-15P, USA
NEMA 5-15R, USA
110/220 (50/60 Hz)
Gl
2.7m(9ft)
Note: IBM supplies a power cord with an
attached plug for the power outlet most used
in a given country. The power cord to this
unit has a separate grounding conductor.
Power provided to this unit must also provide
a separate grounding conductor.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
10°C-40.6°C (50°F-105°F)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
26.7°C (80°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
10°C-51.7°C (50°F-125°F)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
26.7°C (80°F)
3044-4
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link Models C02 and D02 Cabling
Schematic
0185 Channel (Block Multiplexer)
Control Unit
-----.-
Fiber Optics
} Fiber Optics
3044-C02
3044-D02
Front
Front
Note: Signal cables for the 3044 Model C02 can be ordered up to a length of 122 meters (400 feet). Signal
cables for the 3044 Model D02 are not provided; they must be supplied by the customer. For cable distance
limitations, see IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link Models C02 and D02 Product Description,
GA22-7129.
Group
No. of
Cables
2
2
No.
0185
0185
From
3044-C02
Control Unit
To
Channel
3044-002
Max Length
m (ft)
122 (400)
122 (400)
Cable
Ordering
Provided by IBM
Supplied with control unit
Typical Configuration in One Building
L_ _ J
oen
en
Q)
o
o
0:.
Q3
c:
c:
cd
.c
Jumper Cable
3044
3044
Model D02
Model C02
()
l~
Control
I Unit
______________________
~
Typical Configuration in Two Buildings
Building 1
oen
en
Q)
o
~
Building 2
Q3
c:
c:
cd
01
3044
3044
Model C02
Model D02
Distribution panel-.'/
Control
Unit
. Distribution Panel
Legend:
o Indicates white-capped/labeled connector
o Indicates completely black connector
Note: See IBM Fiber Optic Channel Link Planning and Installation Guide, GA23-0367.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3044-5
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link Models C02 and D02 Rear Panels
"\
°°
tJ~~~
°
~
DODD ~ ® 1I1'---?=====~1
°
UU
O nn
DDODD~~ ""
I- "
F=
0 - - - --0
0
0-----0
0,1
In
D-- D-- -
nnnnn·
\-
UUUUU
In
LT,a
g
Low
00
0 - - - --0
D-- -
-
----0
1111--0--------0-0-0-------0---11
0- - - --00000- -
nk
Prlor'tl
High
----0
----00
0-----0
0-----0
0-- - - --00000-- - _. --0
Tag Out
1=
-
~1I
1I1:r-f
I
u
t:rn~~
Bus Ou
I
n;:::
: DDDDU
Om
I
°
002
Rear Panel
0 - - - --0
0 - - - --0' 0 - - - - - 0 0 0 0 0 - - - --0
1111--0----_-_---0--0-0--_-_---0----11
Tog Out
i0}
0- - - --00000- -
- --0
1111....-.----'--------'1
:~mm~
3044~6
D,.~/J/).·/Fiber Optic Connector
- --0
I
JDDDDn
C02
Rear Panel
0 - - - --0
0
0-----0
InpuUOutput· Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Fiber Optic Connector
o
3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link
3044 FIBER OPTIC CHANNEL EXTENDER LINK
ENCLOSURE
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
SPECIFICATIONS
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
mm
(inches)
455
610
(24)
205
(S)
I~
50
I
(2)
I
I
160-.1
(6-1/4)
Height
645
(25-1/2)
Service Clearances:
,-~1(1S)
Front
Side
620
735
(24-1/4) (29)
mm
(inches)
Weight:
Front
610
(24)
Rear
610
(24)
Right
Left
(-)
(-)
60kg(1251b)
~----~----~----------
---1--------;;>m
Operating Idling
(bels)
(bels)
Operating Idling
(dB)
(dB)
6.7
700 -----t.wIF--- 750
(27-1/2)
(29-1/2)
(Cover to Cover)
(2 Places)
6.7
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Plug
Connector
ReceptacJe
52.0
52.0
I
T
No Yes
1.2 (50/60 Hz)
1
R&S, 3720U-2
R&S, 3913U-2
R&S, 3743U-2
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
15.6 oC-32.2oC
(60°F-90°F)
Rei Humidity 20%-80%
Max Wet Bulb 22.8 oC (73°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
10°C-43°C
Temperature
(50°F-110°F)
Rei Humidity 8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb 26.9 0 C (80°F)
3088 (Design Model)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3088-1
3088 Multisystem Channel Communication Unit
3088 MULTISYSTEM CHANNEL COMMUNICATION UNIT
MODELS A1, 1, AND 2 CABLING SCHEMATIC
, . . . . - - - - - - - - - . 0185 Chdnnel (Multiplexer. Selector)
2m-----I1------I~
1178 Power Sequence and Control
.3088-A1.-1.-2
Max Length
Group
No.
Frame
Exit
Connector
10
m
0185
0101
00001
0185
0101
0185
(ft)
Notes
122
(400)
1,2,3,4,6,7
Bus/tag
00003
122
(400)
1,2,3,4,6,7
Bus/tag
0101
00005
122
(400)
2,3,4,6,7
Bus/tag
0185
0101
00007
122
(400)
2,3,4,6,7
Bus/tag
0185
0101
00009
122
(400)
3,4,6,7
Bus/tag
0185
0101
00011
122
(400)
3,4,6,7
Bus/tag
0185
0101
00013
122
(400)
3,4,6,7
Bus/tag
0185
0101
00015
122
(400)
3,4,6,7
Bus/tag
1178
0102
00017
122
(400)
1,2,3,5,6
Pwr ctrl
1178
0102
00019
122
(400)
1,2,3,5,6
Pwr ctrl
1178
0102
00021
122
(400)
2,3,5,6
Pwr ctrl
1178
0102
00023
122
(400)
2,3,5,6
Pwr ctrl
1178
0102
00025
122
(400)
3,5,6
Pwr ctrl
1178
0102
00027
122
(400)
3,5,6
Pwr ctrl
1178
0102
00029
122
(400)
3,5,6
Pwr ctrl
1178
0102
00031
122
(400)
3,5,6
Pwr ctrl
Comments
Notes:
1. For 3088 Model Al (two-way) configurations. A maximum length of 23 meters (75 feet) for each cable group
will be provided without charge at initial installation of each Model A1.
2. For 3088 Modell (four-way) configurations. A maximum length of 23 meters (75 feet) for each cable group
will be provided without charge at initial installation of each ModelL
3. For 3088 Model 2 (eight-way) configurations. A maximum length of 31 meters (100 feet) for each cable group
will be provided without charge at initial installation of each Model 2.
4. When a 3088 is attached to channel 5, B, or F (lower priority block multiplexer channel) and when short cable
lengths (6.1 meters or 20 feet) are installed, the high-speed-transfer-mode data rate limiter must be set to
1.2 megabytes per second to avoid direct-access storage device (DASD) overrun problems on higher priority block
multiplexer channels on the same 303X director.
5. Power sequence and control cables are optional.
6. The 121.9-meter (400-foot) maximum length must be reduced by 5 meters (15 feet) for each control unit connected
between the system channel and the 3088. For detailed information, see the 3088 Multisystem Channel
Communication Unit Product Description, GA22-7081.
7. Channels that operate at a speed of 4.5 megabytes per second and communicate through the 3088 require
cable group 0185.
3088-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3172 Interconnect Controller
3172 Interconnect Controller
Front View (Not to Scale): English measurements are shown in parentheses.
The 3172 Interconnect Controller may be
installed in an IBM 9309 Rack or in an EIA
19-inch rack. The 3172 requires seven EIA units
of space. Provide the same service clearances
for an EIA rack as for a 9309 Rack.
9309 Rack:
Plan View (Not to Scale): English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX24-4046
(English Scale) or GX24-4047 (Metric Scale).
f
635
9309 Rack Installation: A maximum of
three 3172s may be installed in a 9309 Rack
Model 2. See the IBM 9309 Rack Enclosure
General Information and Site Preparation Guide
(Models 1 and 2), GA24-4103, for additional information.
780
~Qjt' rrr :°1--: f%T
I
I
121
(61
(3/4)
920
(36-1/4)
9309
650
-~:)
-.+
18
(31
60
-L +<25-"21 + (2.!L,52
(1~8di
I
915
(38) ---t
I
680+l~
(28):
1
7
I (2&.112)
F.;a;:J-L
(19)
-I
1 850
(65)
_lJ,
L - -_ _ _
Ff_ont
3172 Interconneci Controller
3172 Interconneci Controllers in a 9309 Rack
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3172-1
3172 Interconnect Controller
Power Requirements:
Specifications:
Dimensions:
Front
Side
Height
3172
mm
(in.)
Voltage
Phases
445
(17-%)
485
(19- V.)
250
(9-0/4 )
Hz
9309
mm
(in.)
660
(26)
920
(36-V. )
1 580
(62-V. )
installation in a 9309 Rack, multiply the kVA
requirement by the number of 3172s and add to
the rack specification.
See the IBM 9309 Rack Enclosure Generallnformation and Site Preparation Guide (Models 1 and
2), GA24-4103, for 3-phase power imbalance
information.
9309
Front
1 650
(65)
Rear
760
(30)
Left
915
(36)
Right
915
(36)
9309
1.0·
200-240
1 or 3
50/60
* Specifications given are for one 3172. For
Service Clearances:
mm
(in.)
3172·
0.7
200-240
1
50/60
kVA
Power Cord Style:
Weight:
See "3172 Interconnect Controller Power Cord
Specifications.
14 kg (31
Ib)
155 kg (340
Ib)
9309
II
Power Plug and Receptacle (USA and Canada):
3172
Plug
Heat Output:
250 W (850
BTU/hr)
60 W (200
BTU/hr)
9309
Airflow:'"
2.0 m 3 /min. (70 cfm)
N/A - convection cooling
3172
9309
Airflow is from front to rear. If installed in a rack
with a rear door, the door must have louvres or
slots for air exit.
Receptacle
9309
Plug
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
LwAd
Operating
Idling
(bels)
(bels)
5.7
3172-2
5.7
< LpA>m
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
44.0
44.0
I
T
No No
Receptacle
If the 3172 is purchased without
a 9309 Rack, a Russellstoll
3720U-2 plug or NEMA L6-15P
twistlock plug is provided for
the United States and Canada;
it is shipped without a plug for
other countries. If purchased
with a 9309 Rack, the 3172 is
provided with a plug for connection to the 9309 power
control compartment outlet.
Russell stoll , 3743U-2 or NEMA
L6-15R
NEMA L6-30P twistlock or
Russellstoll 3750 watertight
plug for the United States and
Canada.
Russellstoll, '3933/3753 or NEMA
L6-30R
Power Plug and Receptacle (All Other
Locations):
See the IBM 9309 Rack Enclosure General Information and Site Preparation Guide (Models 1 and
2), GA24-4103, for plug provided in other countries.
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3172 Interconnect Controller
Power Cord Specifications
Cable
Length
Cable
Nomi nal 00
All 68 Hz except
Chicago, Illinois,
USA; Japan
4.3 m
(14 ft)
7.3 nm
(8.287 in.)
8
68 Hz Chicago,
Illinois. USA
1.83 m
(6 ft)
7.3 nm
(8.287 in.)
8
68 Hz
Number of
Shields
Number of
Wires
3
3
Nomi nal
00
AWG
No. (nm2)
1.15 nm
(8.843 in.)
17
1.15 nm
(8.843 in.)
17
(1.8)
(1.8)
Environment, Operating:
Temperature: 10°C to 40°C (50°F to 105°F)
Relative Humidity: 80/0 to 800/0
Max Wet Bulb: 27°C (80°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature: 10°C to 51.7°e (50°F to 125°F)
Relative Humidity: 8% to 80%
Max Wet Bulb: 27°C (80°F)
Cabling Schematic
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Std
0185
Conn
ID
Conn
10
1
2
3
4
Channel 1
LANs
{
Channel 2
02001
0185
Notes:
1. The 3172 must have no more than 122 meters (400 feet) of channel cable between it and the host
computer. If there are other channel-attached devices located between the 3172 and the host, subtract 4.5 meters (15 feet) from the maximum allowable distance for each attached device.
2. Up to four LAN adapters can be installed in each 3172. See the materials provided with the LAN
adapters for information about the required cables.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3172-3
3172 Interconnect Controller
Bus In!
Tag In'
Channel Cable Attachment:
A 3172 purchased without the 9309 Rack is shipped with Y cables that connect to the channel cables.
Cables are either 1.8m (6 ft) or 2.7 m (9 ft) long. When the 3172 is purchased with the 9309 Rack,
channel cables attach to a tailgate installed at the rear of the 9309 Rack.
3172-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3172 Interconnect Controller Model 2
3172 Interconnect Controller Model 2
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
Front View (Not to Scale)
urements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX24-4046
(English Scale) or GX24-4047 (Metric Scale).
635
(26)
IBM 9309
Model 2
Rack
IBM 3172
Model 2
--L
~-H-
Interconnect
Controller
T
127
(6)
920
50
(36-1/4)
-L + (26-1/2) + (2!.L 162
ri:)l
' 1 - - - - - + - - 1 -1-'" (6)
660
(28)
:
I
--r-I
9309 Rack Installation: The 3172 Intercon-
I
. I
750
: (29-1/2)
L-------:--L
L482_1
,- - (19)
Front
nect Controller is installed in an IBM 9309 Rack.
The 3172 requires 7 EIA units of space.
1660
(66)
A maximum of three 3172s may be installed in a
9309 Rack Model 2. For more information about
the 9309 rack, see the IBM 9309 Rack Enclosure
General Information and Site Preparation Guide
(Models 1 and 2), GA24-4103.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3172-5
3172 Interconnect Controller Model 2
Acoustical Data:
Specifications: Dimensions:
Front
Side
Height
3172
mm
(in.)
483
(19.0)
680
(26.8)
306
(12.0)
9309
mm
(in.)
660
(26)
920
(36-%)
1 580
(62-%)
Service Clearances:
Noise-emission levels for three 3172 Model 2s
installed in a 9309 Rack are shown. Noiseemission levels are the same for SO-Hz and
SO-Hz units.
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
9309
mm
(in.)
Front
1 650
(65)
Rear
760
(30)
Right
915
(36)
Left
915
(36)
Weight:
14 kg (31 Ib)
155 kg (340 Ib)
3172
Plug
9309
Plug
Airflow:
5.3 m 3 /min. (187 cfm)
N/A - convection cooling
Receptacle
Airflow is from front to rear.
Power Requirements:
kVA
Voltage
Phases
Hz
9309
1.0
200-240
1 or 3
50/60
See the IBM 9309 Rack Enclosure General Information and Site Preparation Guide (Models 1 and
2), GA24-4103, for 3-phase power imbalance
information.
* Specifications given are for one 3172. For
installation in a 9309 Rack, multiply the values
by the number of 3172s and add to the rack
specification.
3172-6
Idling
(B)
6.5
Operatlng
(dB)
N/A
Idling
(dB)
N/A
Operatlng
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
49.0
49.0
The 3172 is provided with a
plug for connection to the 9309
power control compartment
outlet.
630 W (2100 BTU/hr)
60 W (200 BTU/hr)
3172·
0.7
200-240
1
50/60
m
LpAm
Power Plug and Receptacle (USA and Canada):
Heat Output:
3172·
9309
Operating
(B)
6.5
3172·
9309
3172·
9309
LWAd
NEMA L6-30P twistlock or
Russelistoli 3750 watertight
plug for the United States and
Canada.
Russelistoli, 3933/3753 or NEMA
L6-30R
Power Plug and Receptacle (All Other
Locations):
See the IBM 9309 Rack Enclosure General Information and Site Preparation Guide (Models 1 and
2), GA24-4103, for plugs provided in other countries.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature: 10°C to 40°C (SOOF to 10S0F)
Relative Humidity: 8% to 80%
Max Wet Bulb: 27°C (80°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature: 10°C to S1.7°C (SOOF to 12S0F)
Relative Humidity: 80/0 to 800/0
Max Wet Bulb: 27°C (80°F)
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Cabling Schematic
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Conn
STO
8185
1
2
Channel 1
3
4
Channel 2
10
Conn
10
LAN 1
LAN 2
2581
8185
Notes:
1. The 3172 must have no more than 122
meters (400 feet) of channel cable between it
and the host computer. If there are other
channel-attached devices located between
the 3172 and the host, subtract 4.5 meters
(15 feet) from the maximum allowable distance for each attached device.
2. Up to two LAN adapters can be installed in
each 3172. For information on the required
cables, see the IBM 3172 Interconnect Controller Planning Guide, GA27-3867.
Channel Cable Attachment:
A 3172 purchased without the 9309 Rack is
shipped with Y cables that connect to a tailgate
installed at the rear of the 9309 rack. Cables are
either 1.8 m (6 ft) or 2.7 m (9 ft) long. Channel
cables attach to the tailgate installed at the rear
of the 9309 Rack.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3172-7
This page is intentionally left blank.
3172-8
Input/Output EquIpment InstallatIon Manual-PhysIcal PlannIng
3203 Printer
3203 PRINTER MODELS 1 AND 2
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 tt)
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
S,
F
Inches
(cm)
H
20
(51)
46-1/4
(117)
F
R
Rt
L
30
(76)
38
(97)
0
(0)
24
(61)
56-1/4
(l43)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
Weight:
800Ib (370 kg)
Heat Output:
Note: No external cables are required for use with 3115-0
3115-2,3125-0, or 3125-2.
'
Airflow:
6,200 BTU/hr (I 600 kcal/hr)
350 cfm (IO m3/min)
Power Requirements:*
Hinges
Stocker Cover
(Swings open
like a door in
0
180 angle
flush against
control box
on machine)
I
7-l/2j'
~20"
(1-112'
kVA
Phases
50Hz
2.3
3
60Hz
2.1
3
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-100°F (16 0 C-380C)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
73°F (23°C)
Side View
Notes:
* Powered from and abutted to 3115-0,3115-2,
3125-0, or 3125-2 when SF 4650 is installed.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3203-1
3203 Printer
3203 PRINTER MODEL 4
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
2-1/2" x 6"
(2 Places)
11"
(2 Places)
2-3/4"
i
24-3/4"
(3 Places)
20"
F
S
H
56-1/4
(l43)
20
(51 )
46-1/4
(I17)
F
R
Rt
L
Inches
(cm)
30
(76)
38
(97)
o
(0)
24
(61)
Weight:
800 lb (370 kg)
Inches
(cm)
Service Clearances:
1-3/4"
(4 Places)
T
Heat Output:
Airflow:
Notes:
1. Route cables through a single 3" x 7" raised-floor cutout located
midway between the two 2-1/2" x 6" cable exits shown.
2. For cabling information, see 3138 or 3148.
6,200 BTU/hr (I 600 kcal/hr)
350 cfm (l0 m3 /min)
Power Requirements: *
kVA
Phases
50Hz
2.3
3
60Hz
2.1
3
Hinges
Stacker Cover
(Swings open
like a door in
0
180 angle
flush against
control box
on machine)
I 7-112j'
~20"
Side View
3203-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-100°F (16 oC-38oC)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
73°F (23°C)
Notes:
*Powered from 3138 or 3148 when SF 8075· or
SF 8076 is installed.
3203 Printer
3203 PRINTER MODEL 5
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
SPECIFICATIONS
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
660
(26)
r'
610
(24)
mm
(inches)
Front Side
2230
510
(87-3/4) (20)
Height
1170
(46-1/4)
---I-------l
--t
800
(31-1/2)
(2 Places)
-+-_ _---'--T_~;.n_--'--_=_4a~190
I
I
1
I
(7-1/2)1
~~--~L-__~~~~~~~~:
810
(32)
I
I
I
l.-610~~--
1 430---.+0011-(56-1/4)
(24)
f o 4 - - - - 2 230
(87-3/4)
----~
(41_~~4)
Front
810
(32)
Right
610
(24)
Rear
970
(38)
Left
610
(24)
I
Heat Output:. 2400 W (8 150 BTU/hr)
I
Airflow: 15m 3 /min (530 cfm)
(2-3/4) 1
LL__ _____ ::
mm
(inches)
Weight: 485 kg (1,070 lb)
I
..-_+-(17-1/2)
445
Service Clearances:
I
--~
610j
(24)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM
General Information Manual: Installation ManualPhysical Planning, GC22-7072.
LWAd
Stacker
m
Hinges
I
Side View
S.tacker Cover
ISwings open
like a door in
lBO° angle
flush against
back of
printerl.
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
8.1
--
64
Power Requirements:
Voltages
50Hz
200,220,
235,380,
408 V
I
Idling
(dB)
--
T
No No
60Hz
200,208,
230 V
3.0
2.8
kVA
Phases **
3
3
R&S,3760
Plug
Connector
R&S, 3934
Receptacle
R&S, 3754
Power Cord Style (see following page)
Environment, Operating:
16°C-380C (60°F-100°F)
Temperature
ReI Humidity. 8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
23°C (73°F)
Notes:
* The machine is separated at this point for
shipment.
** Phase load imbalance (approximate) for
380/408 V = R : S : T = 1: 1.9: 1.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3203-3
3203 Printer
3203 PRINTER MODEL 5 POWER CORD SPECIFICATIONS
Cable
NominalOD
Length
Conductors
Number
of Shields
Number
NominalOD
All 60 Hz;
Japan
50/60 Hz
4.27 m (14 ft)
(Chicago - 1.83 m)
[6 ft»
15.37 mm
(0.605 in.)
0
4
1.6mm
(0.064 in.)
50 Hz
(Except
Japan)
4.27 m
(14 ft)
11.0 mm
(0.43 in.)
0
5
1.4 mm
(0.055 in.)
3203 PRINTER MODEL 5 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Cable
Group
From
3920
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
1178
Power Control
Interface
Conn
10
:
I I
3
Conn
10
121~
To
t4---- Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
From 3203
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn
ID
1178
3920
1
2
3
1
Max Length
m
(ft)
Comments
46
61
(150)
(200)
Power control interface
Bus and tag
To 3203
Conn
ID
Comments
2
Bus and tag
3203-4
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
AWGNo.
mm 2 .
14
1.5
3205 Color Display Console
3205 COLOR DISPLAY CONSOLE
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
SPECIFICATIONS
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
r--------------------l
f
n- ~~ +-90~---:-- H'
1
560
(22)
~
.
t:
1
:
I !
3205
90° "
~
':
I
,
380
(15)
I
mm
(inches)
380
(15)
Height**
410
(16-1/4)
430
(17)
Service Clearances:
~-JJ-'4-!--:
------::-n--.EI~~o---i~:?
'i'
L
Side*
Front
1 2 M"
--I-2M"
mm
(inches)
Front***
Left
Rear
Right
760
(30)
280
(11)
100
(4)
280
(II)
Li
(30)
(16-1/4)
Weightt: 16 kg (35 lb)
Heat Output: 250 W (850 BTU/hr)
Airflow: Natural convection
Power Requirements:
0.15
kVA
Phase
Ampacity 15
to
Environment, Operating:
(1-1/4)
Side View
Note: Right and left service clearances can be reduced to the
clearances required for 3205 cooling and operating: .100 mm
(4 inches) on each side.
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-40°C (50°F-105°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
5°C_52°C (41°F-125°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* Dimension does not include a keyboard.
See plan view.
* * The 3205 is installed on a customer-supplied
desk or table. Recommended keyboard
height (measured from the floor to the
bottom of the 3205) is 660 mm (26 in.).
* * * Each 3205 unit must have a keyboard.
Keyboard feature adds 230 mm (9 in.) to
front of display and can be moved up to
530 mm (21 in.) away from lower front of
display.
t Keyboard feature adds about 4 kg (9 lb)
for display console keyboard.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3205-1
3205 Color Display Console
3205 COLOR DISPLAY CONSOLE
Signal I/O Control Cables:
Power Cord and Plug Types:
For communication with the host processor, the 3205 uses
a coaxial cable with a connector attached at both ends.
This cable, shipped with the host processor, is 7.6 meters
(25 feet) long.
For the United States and Canada, IBM supplies a power
cord with an attached plug as follows:
Nonlocking Plug-NEMA 5-15P
125 Vac Rating, Specify Code 9891
The customer must provide the corresponding power
outlet receptacle.
For World Trade countries other than Canada, IBM
supplies the power cord with attached plug that corresponds
to the power outlet receptacle that is most used in that
country. Refer to Appendixes B, C, and D in IBM 3270
Information Display System, Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA27-2787.
The machine is shipped with a 3-meter (1 a-foot) power
cord unless otherwise specified.
3205-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard
3210 CONSOLE PRINTER-KEYBOARD MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
F
Inches
(em)
f - -____t--+- 20-1/2 "
S
H
24
(61)
4*
(10*)
F
R
Rt
L
**
(**)
**
(**)
**
(**)
**
(**)
30-3/4
(78)
5-1/8"
Service Clearances:
;.---....,-t-----,-=-T
•
Keyboard
Front
~'
10-1/2" 24"
, l
Inches
(em)
Weight:
91Ib*** (42 kg***)
Heat Output: 500 BTU/hr (130 kcal/hr)
Airflow:
0 cfm (0 m 3/min)
Power Requirements: t
kVA
0.16
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60 o p-90op (16oC-32oC)
ReI Humidity
20%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
78 0 p (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
50 o p-IIOop (lOoC-430C)
ReI Humidity
80/0-80%
Max Wet Bulb
800 p (27°C)
Notes:
* Height from floor is 32 inches (81 em) when
mounted on System/370 console table.
** Provide operator access and sufficient clearance for forms carrier and forms travel.
*** Does not include stand on which machine is
placed or forms carrier.
t Powered from System/370 processor.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3210-1
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard
3210 CONSOLE PRINTER-KEYBOARD MODEL 2
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions: *
F
Inches
(cm)
S
30-3/4
(78)
31-3/4
(81)
-H
47
(119)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
Weight:
Note: For cabling information, see 3145 or 3155.
F
R
Rt
L
30
(76)
6
(15)
**
(**)
**
(**)
275 lb (130 kg)
Heat Output: 500 BTU/hr (130 kcal/hr)
Airflow:
0 cfm (0 m3 /min)
Power Requirements: ***
kVA
Phases
0.16
1
115 V
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
H or P&S, 5266
H or P&S, 5269
H or P&S, 5261 or 5262
208/230 V
R&S, FS3720
R&S, FS3913
R&S, FS3743
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-90°F (16 0 C-320C)
Rei Humidity
20%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
50°F-110°F (l00C-430C)
Temperature
8%-80%
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
* Machine can be reduced to 30-3/4" x 25-1/2" :
47" (78 cm x 65 cm x 119 cm) for moving
through 30-inch (76-cm) doors.
** Provide operator access to forms carrier on eit!
right or left side.
*** For alISO-Hz and for 200 V, 60-Hz World Trad
systems, power is supplied from System/370
processor. For all 115/208/230 V, 60-Hz syste
power is supplied from customer's branch
circuit.
3210-2
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3211 Printer
3211 PRINTER MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 fd
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(cm)
F
S
H
57-1/8
(145)
29
(74)
53-1/2
(136)
F
R
Rt
L
42
(107)
36
(91)
(0)
°
36
(91)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
Max
(Note 1)
3211-1
+
12-3/4"
I
L :I.42"
4-1/2"
(6 Places)
I
'- _
_
~
4-3 '8"
(4 PI'aces)
Service Clearance)
' It" t f
ill
I
.c
I
I
I
J
36"-~------ :-~8~ ~
_
_
Front
1,400 lb (640 kg)
I
~ ;rJ I t t
Print Device
_
Weight:
22" 24"
(Note 2)
Notes:
1. Projection of stack~r depends on height of paper
forms. Dimension shown is maximum projection.
2. Print device swings open over the lower access doors.
Heat Output:
BTU/hr
(kcal/hr)
50Hz
13,000
(3300)
60Hz
13,850
(3 500)
Airflow:
cfm
(m 3 /min)
500
(15)
500
(15)
Power Requirements: *
kVA
5.3
5.4
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-90°F (16°C-32°C)
ReI Humidity
200/0-80%
Max Wet Bulb
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
50°F-110°F (10°C-43°C)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
* Powered from 3811 that is abutted to right end
of 3211.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3211-1
3211 Printer
This page is intentionally left blank.
3211-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3213 Console Printer
3213 CONSOLE PRINTER MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
2-3/4"
r
1"
~r~==f-T
Printer
3213-1
24"
---;.,
1
I. ,.::."'30,,--1
2,,-1 ~
~~"
I
3-1/2" -
2t" I
~
(4 Places)
Inches
(cm)
F
S
H
30
(76)
24
(61)
38
(97)
R
Rt
L
*
*
(*)
(*)
Service Clearances:
F
*
Inches
(cm)
(*)
Weight:
190 lb (87 kg)
Heat Output:
Airflow:
(*)
*
600 BTU/hr (160 kcal/hr)
0 cfm (0 m 3 /min)
Power Requirements:, **
kVA
0.2
Phases
1
Frant View
Note: For cabling information, see 3158, 3158·3,
or 3168·3.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
50 o F·ll0oF (lOoC-430C)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
85°F (29°C)
Notes:
* Provide for operator access and sufficient
clearance for forms carrier and forms travel.
** Powered from 3158 or 3158·3 when
SF 7840 is installed, or from 3168·3
when SF 7850 is installed.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3213-1
3213 Console Printer
This page is intentionally left blank.
3213-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3215 Console Printer
3215 CONSOLE PRINTER-KEYBOARD MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Printer
.I.
~ 3215-1- - - : :
Keyboard
I
Front
t
24"
1
~
I
1--31"---1
Note: No external cables are rt!quired for use with 3135,
3145, or 3155.
Inches
(cm)
F
S
H
31
(79)
24
(61)
13*
(33*)
F
R
Rt
L
**
(**)
**
(**)
**
(**)
**
(**)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
Weight:
180Ib*** (82 kg***)
Heat Output: 600 BTU/hr (160 kcal/hr)
Airflow:
o cfm
(0 m3/min)
Power Requirements:t
kVA
0.2
Environment, Operating:
Temperature 50°F-110°F (lOoC-430C)
Rei Humidity 8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb 85°F (29°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature 50°F-125°F (lOoC-S2oC)
ReI Humidity 8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb 85°F (29°C)
Notes:
* Height from floor is 41 inches (104 cm) when
mounted on System/370 console table.
** Provide for operator access and sufficient clearance for forms carrier and forms travel.
*** Does not include stand on which machine is
placed or forms carrier.
t Powered from System/370 processor.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3215-1
3215 Console Printer
This page is intentionally left blank.
3215-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3262 Line Printer
3282 LINE PRINTER MODELS 1 AND 11
(Customer Setup Designated)
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
1---------".---
1-
680
(27)
(2 Places)
....
'\
+
\
I
760
..
.t
•
500 (19-3/4)
(2 Places)
....
~(30)
L
____ _
.-
I
I
l' I
JI
1,J~
j~
750
(29-1/2)
L.J
3262-1, 11
,--- +
760
(30)
r*,
See
Note 2
~---
-fl
see~+
Note 1
I
.260
(10-1/4) r -
240
(9-1/2)
+
Front
--t
760
(30)
~
- ...
965
~.
(38)
,
I
I
I
I
I
(301~
760
"' _
_
Minimum printer
clearance
Notes:
1. Signal cable connector location. *
2. Power cable location. *
3. Height with cover raised: 1 715 mm (67-1/2 in.)
* Both cables can be routed through a single 64-mm (2-1/2-in.) hole in raised floor. Recommended location for the hole is
centered between the front and back of the machine, and 100 mm (4 in.) in from the right side.
II
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3262-1
3262 Line Printer
3262 LINE 'PRINTER MODELS 1 AND 11
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Front
965
(38)
mm
(inches)
Side
750
(29-1/2)
Height
1 000
(39-1/2)
Service Clearances:
(inches)
Front
760
(30)
Weight:
245 kg (540 Ib)
mm
Heat Output:
Rear
760
(30)
Right
760
(30)
Left
760
(30)
1 100 W (3,750 BTU/hr)
Power Requirements:*
kVA
Phases
Voltages
50 Hz
1.4
1
60 Hz
1.2
1
50 Hz: 100,110,200,220,230,240
60 Hz: 100,110,120,127
Power Cord:
The machine is shipped with a 4.3-m (14-ft) power cord unless
otherwise specified. For a 1.B-m (6-ft) cord, specify code 9511.
Plug Types:
For the United States and Canada, IBM supplies power cord with
attached nonlocking type (H) plug, unless otherwise specified as:
•
•
Locking type (J) (Feature 90Bl)
Watertight type (AI) (Feature 90BO)
(required where connection is beneath raised floor)
For other World Trade countries, IBM supplies the power cord
with attached plug corresponding to the power outlet most commonly used in that country. (Refer to "Appendix D. Plugs and
Receptacles.")
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10 oC-41°C (SOoF-I0SoF)
8%-80%
27°C (BOoF)
Environment, Operating
Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Applications:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Dew Point
o
16°C-29°C (60 F-B5°F)
20%-52%
18°C (65°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
o
10 C-S2°C (SOoF-12SoF)
B%-80%
27°C (BOoF)
Notes:
*
3262-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Branch circuit requires a delayed-action fuse or circuit breaker
with a high-surge tolerance for transformer (high-magnetic)
applications.
3262 Line Printer
3262 PRINTER MODEL 5
PLAN VI EW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
I---T-----l~
r.:
I
I
Minimum
Printer
680 ~
~~~es)
I
I
I
I
Clearance'
I
I
I
I ()
760
30
----04-
+~
50
I~
(2)
I
I
240
(9-1/2)
r-.,
{
II
- ~~
750
(29-1/2)
3262-5
~-----~+--~------~-+~-----------,r---r
t
160
(6-5116)
L__
I
500
(19.3/4)
(2 Places)
I
t
760
(30)
__J~
_Fr_ont _
l-~3~~ --.. . """'-I1----~368~ ---~ --~;~ ~
....
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3262-3
3262 Line Printer
SPECIFICATIONS
3262 PRINTER MODEL 5
CABLING SCHEMATIC
Dimensions:
F
S
mm
(inches)
750
1000
(29-1/2) (39-1/2)
965
(38)
H
Cable
Group
3920
Service Clearances:
F
R
Rt
L
mm
(inches)
760
(30)
760
(30)
760
(30)
760
(30)
Weight:
1178
Conn
ID
From
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
Conn
ID
~r-1~---W1---'~
2
Power Sequence
and Contro I
To
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
3
'---1--_ _---'----'
250 kg (550 lb)
From 3262-5
Heat Output:
1 100 VI (3,750 BTU/hr)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
8.1
m
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
N/A
64.0
N/A
Power Requirements:
50 Hz
1.4
1
kVA
Phases
Voltages
50 Hz:
60 Hz:
I
No No
*
60 Hz
1.2
1
shipped with a 4.3-m (14-ft) power cord unless specify code 9986
is ordered for a 1.8-m (6-ft) cord.
See Appendix D.
For the United States, Canada, and Japan, IBM supplies power cord
with attached watertight plug (AI), Russell & Stoll 3720U-1.
Receptacle or Connector (Customer Provided):
Watertight receptacle:
R&S,3743U-1
Watertight connector:
R&S,3913U-1
Service rating for the required receptacle/connector is 20 A at
120 V nominal.
Environment, Operating:
10°C-32°C (60°F_90°F)
8%-80%
23°C (730F)
Environment, Operating
Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Applications:
16°C-29°C (60°F-85°F)
20%-52%
22°C (72°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:.
10°C-43°C (50°F_110°F)
8%-80%
23°C (73°F)
Notes:
II<
Branch circuit requires a delayed-action fuse or circuit breaker
with a high-surge tolerance for transformer (high-magnetic)
applications.
3262-4
1178
1
3920
2
Max Length
m
(ft)
Comments
3
46
(150)
1
122
(400)
Power
sequence and
control
Bus and tag
Conn
ID
Comments
2
Bus and tag
Notes:
1. Cable group 1178, power sequence and control, is
optional.
2. Maximum cumulative X-length is 122 m (400 ft)
unless modified by system or channel limitation.
Maximum cable length must be reduced by 5 m
(15 ft) for each control unit between the 3262-5
and the channel.
Plug Types:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Conn
ID
To 3262-5
Power Cord: See Appendix A, cord style A9. The machine is
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
No. of
Cables
T
100,110,200,220,230,240
100,110,120,127
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Group
No.
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Notes
1
2
3278 Display Console
3278 DISPLAY CONSOLE MODEL.2A
SPECIFICATIONS
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
Dimensions:
Front*
Side*
Height··
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
mm
(inches)
535
(21)
485
(19)
,- ----- f-~~jl-
I
5.OX 75
' - - j+ - - :
430
-IT
~
I
(2)
D/2~
'~
'-
(1l)
'H
l8l
I
I
B
I
I
I
F,,",
Service Clearances:
F***
R
Rt
L
T
mm
(inches)
760
(30)
330
(13)
280
(11)
155
(6)
Weight:
40 kg (80 lb) Display
6 kg (13 lb) Keyboard
405
(16)
Heat Output:
I
: d\' :)jl
405
(16)
25
(1)
130 W (450 BTU/hr)
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
760
I
(13)
330
I
25
IJ
535
(21)
~(30)
f.-(1I
J.~,~
O
100
(4)
~
1
__ : _.=1_ ~ _
:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
15
(1/2)
25
(10)
150 (6) Nom
760 (30) Max
Side View
Convection t
Airflow:
I
1
(16)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM
General Information Manual: Installation ManualPhysical Planning, GC22·7072.
LWAd
Operating
(bets)
~IA
.
m
Idling
(bets)
Operating
(dB)
Idling.
(dB)
25
N/A
N/A
I
T
No
No
Power Requirements:
kVA
0.2
Phase
1
Voltage
United States/Canada/Saudi Arabia
60 Hz 120
WT Americas/Far East
50Hz 100,110,200,220,230,240
60 Hz 100,110,120,127
WT Europe/Middle East/ Africa
50 Hz 220, 240
(For additional power and cabling information, see
following page.)
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
0
10 0C-40oC (50 F-1050n
8%-80%
27°C (80 0 F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-52°C (50°F-125°F)
80/0-80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
*
.*
*.*
t
Dimension does not include keyboard. See plan
view.
The 3278·2A is mounted on a customer-supplied
table (also available from IBM). Recommended
keyboard height (measured from the floor to the
bottom of the 3278·2A) is 735 mm (29 in.).
Keyboard feature adds 255 mm (10 in.) to front
of display and can be moved up to 760 mm
(30 in.) away from lower front of display.
The feet provide space between bottom of unit
and supporting surface to allow airflow for cooling.
Take care that paper, books, etc., do not impede
the airflow in this space.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3278-1
3278 Display Console
Power Cord and Plug Types:
3278 DISPLAY CONSOLE MODEL 2A
For the United States and Canada, the machine is shipped
with a 2.8-m (9-ft) power cord and a NEMA 5-15P nonlocking plug unless otherwise specified.
CABLING SCHEMATIC
For 1.8-m (6-ft) cord, specify code 9511.
For 3.7-m (l2-ft) cord, specify code 9512.
For 4.5-m (l5-ft) cord, specify code 9513.
I---~:- 4035 (Notes 1,3)
3278·2A
Locking Plug-NEMA L5-15P
125 Vac Rating, Specify Code 9890
Waterproof Plug-R&S 3720U-l
125 Vac Rating, Specify Code 8802
1 - - -........~
4036 (Notes 2, 3)
I- - - .
Customer
Provided
(Notes 4, 5,6)
Note: The waterproof plug is only available with 1.8-m
(6-ft) and 4.5-m (15-ft) cords.
The customer must provide the corresponding power
receptacle. For the waterproof power receptacle, use R&S
3743U-1 or for the power outlet connector,use R&S
3913U-l.
For World Trade countries other than Canada, IBM
supplies the power cord with attached plug that
corresponds to the power outlet receptacle that is most
used in that country. Refer to "3278" in Appendixes
B, C, and D in IBM 3270 Information Display System,
Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
Cabling: The 3278 Model2A attaches only to a 3081,3083,
3084,4331, or 4341 processor. Refer to the appropriate
cabling schematic in IBM 4300 Processor Installation
Manual-PhysicaIPlanning, G A24-366 7, or IBM System/370
Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
3278-2
Notes:
1. Signal cable.
2. Control cable.
3. Fixed length for SF 4631, 4632, and 4634 (for WT,
SF 2720, 2727, and 2728) shipped with processor.
4. Used for SF 4633 (for WT, SF 2729).
5. Cable group 4824 when ordered for attachment to a
4341 Processor will provide up to 30.5 meters (1 00 feet)
of coaxial signal cable.
6. Additional coaxial signal cable, if required, up to a
maximum total cable length of 1 500 meters (4,925 feet)
must be purchased and installed by the customer.
Follow the specifications and the instructions of the
3278 Model 2 in the IBM 3270 Information Display
System Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GA27-2787.
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3279 Color Display Console
3279 COLOR DISPLAY CONSOLE MODEL 2C
SPECI F ICATIONS
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
Dimensions:
Front
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
~
~
1720
(67-1/2)
~~~
P3~~~;---1
F
~G'j
430
r,
--/-
550
----..:.:....--1-,{21-3/4)
.----,
(17)
I-
(1~~~4)
I..
ci> I
~
N
M
I
-c:::J
250~
,
I
I
I
/
,I ,
I-
I
Side*
Height**
550
(21-3/4)
380
(15)
Service Clearances:
Front***
Left
Rear
Right
mm
(inches)
300
(12)
410
(16)
(1)
760
(30)
30
Weightt: 30 kg (60 lb)
Heat Output: 250 W (850 BTU/hr)
Airflow:
Natural convection
Acoustical Data:
, For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
(17-1/2)J
±45
0
(21-3/4)
~oj
(16)
+0]
380
....1....-+
I
,
I
I'
\
See Note
t
~
~
~---'
u
N
\±
---:0-- -5-::(30)
(2 Places)
f---
450
(17-1/2)
mm
(inches)
(te550~
(21-3/4)
(10)
Side View
Note: 100 mm (4-1/4 in.) for display console keyboard with
operator control panel; 90 mm (3·1/2 inJ for display console
keyboard without operator control panel.
m
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
N/A
N/A
37
N/A
I
T
No
No
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phase
Ampacity
0.3
1
15
Environment, Operating
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10 o C-40oC (50 o F-I05 0 F)
8%-80%
27°C (80 o F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
lO o C-52 0 C (52 o F-1250F)
8%-80%
0
27 0 C (80 F)
Notes:
*
**
***
t
Dimension does not include a keyboard. See plan view.
The 3279 is installed on a customer-supplied desk or table.
Recommended keyboard height (measured from the floor
to the bottom of the 3279) is 660 mm (26 in.).
.
Each 3279 unit must have a keyboard. Keyboard feature
adds 250 mm (10 in.) to front of display and can be moved
up to 530 mm (21 in.) away from lower front of display.
Keyboard feature adds about:
4.5 kg (10 lb) for display console keyboard without operator
control panel.
8.0 kg (17Ib) for display console keybaord with operator
control panel.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3279-1
3279 Color Display Console
3279 COLOR DISPLAY CONSOLE MODEL 2C
Power Cord and Plug Types:
For the United States and Canada, IBM supplies a power
cord with an attached plug as follows:
Locking Plug-NEMA L5-15P
125 Vac Rating, Specify Code 9890
Nonlocking Plug-NEMA 5-15P
125 Vac Rating, Specify Code 9891
Waterproof Plug-RS3720U-1,
125 Vac Rating, Specify Code 8802
Note: The waterproof plug is available only with a
1.8-meter (6-foot) or a 4.5-meter (IS-foot) cord.
The customer must provide the corresponding power
outlet receptacle.
For World Trade countries other than Canada, IBM
supplies the power cord with attached plug that corresponds
to the power ou tlet receptacle that is most used in that
country. Refer to "3279" in Appendixes B, C, and Din
IBM 3270 Information Display System, Installation ManualPhysical Planning, GA27-2787.
The machine is shipped with a 2.8-meter (9·foot) power
cord unless otherwise specified. For a1.8-meter (6-foot)
cord, specify code 9511; for a 4.5-meter (IS-foot) cord,
specify code 9513.
3279-2
Signal i/O Control Cables:
For a display console with operator control panel, no
attachment cables are required if the console keyboard
includes an operator control panel (keyboards SF 2720,
2727,2728,4631,4632, and 4634). Fixed-length
(7.6-meter [25-foot]) cables are furnished by IBM.
For a display console without operator control panel,
cable group 4824 is required if the console keyboard does
not include an operator control panel (keyboards
SF 2729 and 4634). This cable group supplies a coaxial
. signal cable of up to 30.5-meter (100-foot) length.
The customer may extend the coaxial signal cable to a
maximum length of 1 500-meters (4,925-feet) using coaxial
cable as outlined for the 3279 in the IBM 3270 Information
Display System Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GA27-2787.
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3287 Printer
3287 PRINTER MODELS 1 AND 2
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
r----------------l~
Power Cord'
Signal Cable
"" /
o
0
3287·1,2
Foot
I 0
I
I
0
Dimensions:
Front
Side
Height
673
(26-1/2)
508
(20)
254**
(10)**
Front
Rear
Right
Left
508
(20)
508
(20)
762
(30)
762
(30)
I
(20)
mm
(inches)
I
(200~
Service Clearances: ***
I
I
508
(20)
I
508
-----1--t
1------1--t
I
I
SPECIFICATIONS
-----~-~~~~-----~~
L762-i-673--L762J
(30)
(26·1/2)
(30)
mm
(inches)
Weight: 31 kg (681b)
Heat OutDut: 250 W (853 BTU/hr)
Airflow: 2 m3 /min (70 cfm)
Power Requirements: t
kVA
0.25
Phases
1
Signal Cablestt
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-41°C (50°F_105°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-52°C (50°F-125°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* .Power
cord length of 2.8 m (9 feet) is supplied as
standard. (Optional lengths available are: 1.8 m
[6 feet], 3,7 m [12 feet], and 4.5 m [15 feet].)
**·292 mili- (11-1/2 inches) with forms tractor.
*** A ~ 0 16-mm (40-inch) service clearance (measured
from the table top) is required above the 3287.
t For safety, each branch circuit must be grounded
using a dedicated wire conductor or a continuous
metal conduit. The dedicated wire conductor is
recommended.
tt For attachment to 3081,3138, or 3148, see
-3081,3083,3084,3138, or 3148 (GC22-7004)
cabling schematic pages for appropriate IBM cab'.e
group number. Maximum cable length is 610 m
(2,000 feet).
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3287-1
3287 Printer
This page is intentionally left blank.
3287-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3289 Line Printer
3289 LINE PRINTER MODEL 4
(Customer Setup Designated)
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
365 (14-1/2)
n-
I
--I1e---tl~
50 (2)
----I
......--+ ..- -
765,
765
(30)
(30)
580
(23)
I
700
(27-1/2)
+
t+
I
/
750
65
(2-1/2)
3289-4
(29-112)
r---
L __
~560
(22)
80
+
115
(4-1/2)
~
(2 Places)
(3)
__ J
I
~_::)o
r
I
~
965
(38)
1
~
660
T
k"o
~"~'n~ ~
Side View
(Not to scale)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3289-1
3289 Line Printer
The customer must provide the corresponding power
outlet receptacle.
For other World Trade countries, IBM supplies the
power cord and attached plug that is most used in that
country. Refer to the IBM 3289 Printer Model 4
Planning and Site Preparation Guide, GA27-3198.
The machine is shipped with a 2.8-meter (9-foot)
power cord unless otherwise specified. The power
cord is also available in the following lengths: 1.8
meters (6 feet), 3.7 meters (12 feet), and 4.5 meters
(IS feet).
3289 LINE PRINTER MODEL 4
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
mm
(inches)
Front
1 000
Side
750
(39~)
(29~)
Height
1 040
(41)
Rear
765
(30)
Right
765
(30)
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Front
765
(30)
Weight:
200 kg (440 lb)
Heat Output:
410 W (1,400 BTU/hr)
Airflow:
Convection only
Left
765
(30)
Power Requirements:
0.6
kVA
Phase
1
Voltage
United States/Canada/Saudi Arabia
60 Hz 120 V
WT Americas/Far East
50 Hz 100, 110,200,220,230,240 V
60 Hz 100, 110, 120, 127 V
WT Europe/Middle East/Africa
50 Hz 200, 240 V
Signal Cable:
Coaxial signal cable (maximum length 1 500 meters
[4,920 feet]) must be supplied and installed by the
customer. Follow specifications and instructions for
the 3278 Model 2 in the ~;)M 3270 Information
Display System Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA27-2787.
Environment, Operating:*
Temperature
10°C-41°C (50°F-105°F)
ReI Humidity
8% - 80%
Notes:
* For optimum paper feeding and stacking, a temperature in the range of 15 .6 0 C to 37 .80 C (60°F to 100°F)
is recommended. The recommended relative humidity range is 26% to 62%.
Power Cord and Plug Types:
For the United States and Canada, IBM supplies a
power cord with an attached plug, as follows:
Locking plug-NEMA LS-'15P
125 Vac rating, specify code 9890,
Nonlocking plug-NEMA 5-15P
125 Vac rating, specify code 9891
3289-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3310 Direct Access Storage Device
3310 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE DEVICE MODELS
A2, B1, AND B2
Maximum configuration of 3310 Models A2, B1, and B2
PLAN VIEW (Not to scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses .
...-_ _ 1 210 - - - - . t
(47-1/2) (Cover to Cover)
605
605
(23-3/4)
(23-3/4)
r 95-I-~
760 \(3-3/4)1
(300~
1-1/4)I
r=
125
815 (5)
(32)
t-
760
(30)
I
I
750::---+i
(29-1/2)
II
+0
70 x 180
(2-3/4 x 7)
3310-A2
3310-81,82
0+
+0 0+
I
I
I
---+1
I
~----l
~
(1-3/4)
o + r v +0 0+
760
(30)
-+-0
):
I
I
I
I
570
(22-1/2)
(4 Places)
I
I
LL __~o;--______ J
3310 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE DEVICE MODELS
A1 AND A2
PLAN VI EW (Not to scale)
~605
I
f
95
(23-3/4)
.i- ~
I
760 1(3-3/4)
(30)130
(1-1/4),
760---+j
(30)
I
---j
570
45
(22-1/2)
(1-3/4) ~ces)
°tl~+O
1.-\ .
125..
815\(5)
(32)
t-
760
(30)
70x180
(2-3/4 x 7)
3310-A1, A2
0+
I
I
I
+0
Front
750
(29-1/2)
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
______ J
L~
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3310-1
3310 Direct Access Storage Device
3310 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE DEVICE MODELS
A1 ANDA2
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Front
Side
Height
603
(23-3/4)
813
(32)
1000
(39-1/2)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
(inches)
762
(30)
762
(30)
762*
(30*)
0
(0)
Weight:
Model At
ModelA2
kg
(lb)
136
(300)
160
(350)
mm
(inches)
Service Clearances:
Heat Output: Model At
ModelA2
W
(BTU/hr)
170
(600)
250
(900)
Airflow:
m3/min
Model At
ModelA2
0.5
(10)
0.5
(10)
(cfm)
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phase
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Power Cord
Style
Model At
Model A2
0.3
1
R&S, 3720 U2
R&S, 3743 U2
R&S, 3913 U2
0.5
Al
Al
1
R&S, 3720 U2
R&S, 3743 U2
R&S, 3913 U2
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
100C-41 °c (SOOp-I0S 0 p)
8%-80%
27°C (80 0 p)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-52°C (SOOp-12Sop)
8%-80%
27°C (800 p)
Notes:
* Service clearance is 760 mm (30 in.) if this is an end
device.
3310 Models A 1 and A2 (Design Modell
3310-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3310 Direct Access Storage Device
3310 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE DEVICE MODELS
B1 AND B2
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
SPECIFICATIONS
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
,1---T ----1
I
h
I
760
(30)
,
I
815
(32)
r
~
123-3/41
I
I
I
I
I
570
(22-1/2)
(2 Places)
+
J+
+c
3310-B1, B2
+c
J+
Front
750.J
(29-1/2)
I
I
I
605
(23-3/4)
815
(32)
1000
(39-1/2)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
(inches)
760
(30)
760
(30)
760
(30)
0
(0)
Weight:
Model Bl
Model B2
kg
(lb)
110
(240)
136
(300)
Heat Output: Model Bl
I
I
I
Model B2
(BTU/hr)
140
(500)
230
(800)
Airflow:
Model Bl
Model B2
m 3/min
0.5
(10)
0.5
(10)
W
(cfm)
I
I
760
(30)
Height
Service Clearances:
I t 7
I
I
Side
mm
(inches)
760
1301
605
Front
Power Requirements: *
~
LL________ J
kVA
Model Bl
Model B2
0.2
0.4
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C to 41 °c (50 of to 105 of)
8%-80%
27°C (80 of)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10 °c to 52°C (50 of to 125 of)
8%-80%
27 °c (80 of)
Notes:
* Powered from Model Al
or A2_
3310 Models B1 and B2 (Design Model)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3310-3
3310 Direct Access Storage Device
3310 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE DEVICE MODELS
A1 ANDA2 CABLING SCHEMATIC
3330
I-~---I:"~
Signal
3310-A1,A2
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
From
3330
3330
2
2
3310-AI/A2
3310-AI/A2
To
m
Max Length
(ft)
DASD Adapter
3310-AI/A2,
3340-A2,3370-A1
Note: A total of 61 meters (200 feet) of cable is available to attach up to four strings of 3310/3340/3370
Direct Access Storage devices. Up to two strings may be 3340s.
The last 3310-A1/A2 must be within 30 meters (l00 feet) of the 4331 Processor. This maximum length must
be reduced by 3 meters (l0 feet) for each direct access storage device connected between the 3310-A1/A2
and the processor.
3310-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Notes
See Note
See Note
3330 Disk Storage
3330 DISK STORAGE MODELS 1,2, AND 11
SPECI F ICATIONS
Dimensions:
PLAN VI EW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 tt)
S
H
33
(84)
60
(152)
F
R
Rt
L
60
(152)
60
(152)
0
(0)
0**
(0**)
F
Inches
(cm)
40*
(102*)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
Models 1 and 11
Weight:
lb
(kg)
Model 2
1,450***
(660***)
1,100
(500)
9,450
(2400)
7,200
(1 850)
600
(17)
600
(17)
5-1/2"J
(2 Places)
33"
3-3/8"
Places}
+ _~2
·t~/r9"--6'Jr/2-,,-~I~M----~~I--~:~-----+
28"
1
(2 Places)1
I
--'----------1
I
Ii '-- :-t
J :
~I
I
~p~:~es)
I
BTU/hr
(kcal/hr)
Airflow:
11-1/2"
60"
j~
I
Frant
L
______
._-.JI
Heat Output:
cfm
(m 3/min)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-70n.
Operating
(bels)
LWAd
Idling (bels)
8.1
< LpA> m
Operating
Idling (dB)
(bels)
61
8.1
61
I
No No
Power Requirements:t
kVA
2.4
3.4
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
60°F_90°F (16°C-32°C)
20%-80%
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
50°F-110°F (100C-430C)
8%-80%
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
~.
fhe end drive dimension is 41" (104 cm) with a I-inch
(3-cm) cover added. Up to four 3330-1's or 3330-2's can
be attached to a 3830-1. Up to three 3330-1's, 3330-2's, or
3330-11 's can be attached to a 3333-1 or 3333-11.
** Service clearance is 24" (61 cm) if this is an end device.
See 3333 and 3830-1 machine specifications pages.
*** Based on IBM's method of calculating floor loading, a
disk storage facility with more than three devices attached
exceeds 75 pounds per square foot (370 kg/m2) distributed
floor loading. The installation site, therefore, should be
reviewed by a qualified consultant.
t Powered from 3333-1,3333-11, or 3830-1.
3330-2
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
T
3330-1
3330 Disk Storage
This page is intentionally left blank.
3330-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3333 Disk Storage and Control
3333 DISK STORAGE AND CONTROL MODELS 1 AND 11
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
__
!.--~_-=:2~~m ,l~
Ii
I
'
I
4-1/2" x 10"
. -_ _-111________
1
I
60"
33"
33"
Note: For cabling information, see Section 2,
"Machines with Integral or Abutted Controls."
3333-1 OR 3333-11 AND 3330-1,3330-2, OR 3330-11
DISK STORAGE FACILITY (MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION)
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in.
']----------I
I
I
I 60"24"
~
33"
t-
F
41
3330-1,2,11
= 1 ft)
----------- ----- -----
-------;
I
1
I
.1I
182"
T ""I"" T
3330-1,2,11
61"
3333-1,11
3330-1,2,11
'!
~
~
Front
60"
I
L ________________________________________ J
Note: The 24" (61 cm) end service clearance (right or lefd is required
for any configuration. The left service clearance is preferred.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3333-1
3333 Disk Storage and Control
·3333 DISK STORAGE AND CONTROL MODELS 1 AND 11
SPECIFICATIONS
Acoustical Data:
Dimensions:
Por definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3
of IBM General Information Manual:
Inches
(cm)
F
S
H.
62*
(157*)
33
(84)
60
(152)
Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
LWAd
m
I T
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
Weight:
F
R
Rt
L
60
(152)
60
(152)
0
(0)
0
(0)
1,850 Ib**
(840 kg**)
Heat Output: 12,000 BTU/hr
Airflow:
850 cfm
(3050 kcal/hr)
(25 m 3 /min)
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
8.2
8.2
62
62
Power Requirements:
kVA
4.0
Phases
3
Plug
R&S,
Connector
R&S,
Receptacle
R&S,
Power Cord Style
No No
SC7328
SC7428
SC7324
E7
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60 0 p-900p (16°C-32°C)
ReI Humidity
20%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
78 0 p (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
50 0 p-II00p (lO o C430C)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
800 p (27°C)
Notes:
* Dimension is 61" (155 cm) when a 3333 is
bolted to the right end of a 3330. Up to three
3330-1 's, 3330-2's, or 3330-11 's can be
attached, in any combination, to a 3333-1 or
3333-11.
** Based on IBM's method of calculating floor
loading, a disk storage facility consisting of
more than three devices exceeds 75 pounds per
square foot (370 kg/m 2 ) distributed floor
loading. The installation site, therefore,
should be reviewed by a qualified consultant.
3333-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3333 Disk Storage and Control
3333 DISK STORAGE AND CONTROL MODELS 1 AND 11 "
CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Std
6456
1178
Conn
Conn
10
10
-.
-
1
5
6148
1178
-
9
8150
6456
1178
-
3
-
7
---
2
-
- --
4
-
"From 3333
Feature
Code
Std
6148
8150
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn
ID
Max Length
m
(ft)
Model
1,11
1,2
Notes
6456
2
1
61
(200)
1178
1
5
61
(200)
1,11
4
1178
1
9
61
(200)
1,11
5
6456
2
3
61
(200)
1,11
1,2,3
1178
1
7
61
(200)
1,11
4
To 3333
Feature
Code
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
Std
2
1,11
1,2
8150
4
1,11
1,2,3
Notes:
1. A maximum cable length of 61 meters (200 feet) is available to attach as many
as four 3333s to a control device. ,
2. Maximum available cable length m~~t b~ reduced by 4.5 meters (15 feet) for
each unit in excess of three, connected between a 3333 and a control
device.
3. String switch feature is available for the attachment of a 3333 to a second
control device.
4. Power sequence and control; cable is optional.
5. Required for SF 6148 (remote switch).
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3333-3
3333 Disk storage and Control
This page is intentionally left blank.
3333-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3340 Direct Access Storage
3340 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL A2
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
F
4S·
(114*)
Inches
(em)
Service Clearances:
F
Inches
S
H
33-1/2
46-1/2
(118)
(85)
R
Rt
L
36
(91)
0··
(0··)
36
(91)
(em)
36
(91)
Weight:
900 lb (410 kg)
Heat Output: 6,500 BTU/hr (1 6S0 kcal/hr)
400 cfm (12m 3/min)
Airflow:
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
Note: For cabling information, see Section 2,
"Machines with Integral or Abutted Controls."
m
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
7.6
Idling
(bels)
7.6
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
S9
S9
I
T
No No
Power Requirements:
kVA
2.2
Phases
3
Plug
R&S,
Connector
R&S,
Receptacle
R&S,
Power Cord Style
FS3760
FS3934
FS37S4
D2
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
60°F-90°F (l60C-320C)
20%-SO%
7So£o' (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
50°F_110°F (lOoC-430C)
80/0-S0%
SOoF (27°C)
Notes:
• The standalone dimension is 4S" (122 cm) with a 3-inch (S-cm)
end cover added. Up to three 3340-Bls, 3340-B2s, 3344-B2s,
or 3344-B2Fs, in any combination, can be attached to a 3340-A2 .
.. Service clearance is 24" (61 cm) if 3340-Bls, 3340-B28,
3344-B2s, or 3344-B2Fs are not attached.
3340-A2
3340-B1 (One Drive)
3344-B2
3344-B2F
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3340-1
3340 Direct Access Storage
3340 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL A2 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Std
6456
1178
-..
6148
1178
-
8150
6456
1178
Conn
10
Conn
10
1
9
-
- - -
2
--
4
-
5
-....
-
-
3
7
..
From 3340
Feature
Code
Std
6148
8150
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
6456
2
Conn
ID
1
Max Length
Notes
m
(ft)
Model
61
(200)
A2
1,2
A2
4
1178
1
9
61
(200)
1178
1
5
61
(200)
A2
5
(200)
A2
1,2,3 I
(200)
A2
4
6456
2
3
61
1178
1
7
61
To 3340
Feature
Code
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
Std
2
A2
1,2
8150
4
A2
1,2,3
Notes:
1. A maximum cable length of 61 meters (200 feet) is available to attach as many
as four 3340s to a control device.
2. Maximum available cable length must be reduced by 4.5 meters (15 feet) for
each unit in excess of three connected between a 3340 and a control device.
3. String switch feature is available for the attachment of a 3340 to a second
control device.
4. Power sequence and control; cable is optional.
5. Required for SF 6148 (remote sWitch)-.
3340-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3340/3344 Direct Access Storage
3340 01 RECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS B1 AND B2
3344 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS B2 AND B2F
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
F
S
H
42*
(107 *)
33-1/2
(85)
46-1/2
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
Inches
(cm)
(118)
Service Clearances:
33-1/2"
3"
F
R
Rt
L
Inches
(em)
36
(91)
36
(91)
0**
(0"'*)
0
(0)
Weight:
3340-Bl
3340-B2,3344-B2,
and 3344-B2F
lb
(kg)
750
(350)
600
(280)
Heat Output:
8-1/2"
(2 Places) 19"
L
36"
L______~~ ______
J.i_ _ _ _
~l
3,500
(890)
5,000
(1 300)
400
(12)
400
(12)
BTU/hr
(keal/hr)
Airflow:
cf~
(m /min)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 oUEM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
m
LWAd
Operating
(bets)
Idling
(bets)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
I
T
3340-B1, B2
7.6
7.6
59
59
No
No
3344-82, B2F
7.4
7.4
57
57
No
No
Power Requirements:***
kVA
Phases
1.2
3
1.7
3
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
60°F-90°F (16°C-32°C)
20%-80%
78 0 p (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
50°F-110°F (10oC-430C)
8%-80%
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
• The end machine dimension is 45" (114 em) with a 3-ineh
(8-cm) cover added.
** Service clearance is 24" (61 cm) if this is an end machine.
*** Powered from 3340-A2.
3340-81 (One Drive)
3340-A2
3344-82
3344-82F
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3340-3
3340/3344 Direct Access Storage
This page is intentionally left blank.
3340-4
Input/Output EquIpment InstallatIon Manual-PhysIcal PlannIng
3350 Direct Access Storage
3350 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS A2 AND A2F
Dimensions:
r
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
r- ,,':;;: ---- 4S'~
2r
4'~-
1/
,-
[,/
t_
I
---or
I\
Inches
(cm)
3
'
Inches
(cm)
I t __ ,_~~~~~~
-<~
t 10""
3"
{
I
3:<'"
~
I f·~~I
I
..
~.
3"
0
~
I
-.. / (2 Places),
'~.~
____ ... ___ FLo~!. ______
-
..
45*
(114*)
33-1/2
(85)
46-1/2
(118)
F
R
Rt
L
24
(61)
24
(61)
a
24
(0)
(61)
Heat Output: 7,200 BTU/hr (1 850 kcal/hr)
.
3
400 cfm (12 m /min )
Airflow:
-t8112"
H
33.1/2"
~2Places)
1____ +
t
0
S
Weight: 1,000 lb (460 kg)
3350 A2. A2F
'yl
1f .... 6 .....
r
CE
I 1_ (?~~::~_ .-- -'
L
_ ~
+0-;-
F
Service Clearances:
I~
61/2"
SPECIFICATIONS
4112"
18112"
1
!
I(2 Places)
24"
J _ _ _ _ _ _-'-
- L-__
~3"
(4 Places)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manllal: Installation Manual-Physical Planning.
GC22-70n.
Note: For cabling information, see Section 2,
LWAd
"Machines with Integral or Abutted Controls."
Operating
(bels)
m
Idling
(bels)
7.5
7.5
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
58.0
58.0
I
T
No
No
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
2.3
3
R&S, SC7328
R&S, SC7428
R&S, SC7324
E1
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
0
60°F-90°F (16 C-320C)
20%-80%
0
78 p (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
o
50°F-110°F (10 C-430C)
8%-80%
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
* The standalone dimension is 48" (122 cm) with a 3-inch (8-cm)
end cover added. Up to three 3350-B2s or 3350-B2Fs, in any
combination, can be attached to a 3350-A2 or 3350-A2F.
A 3350-A2 or 3350-A2F with primary controller adapter
feature can attach one 3350-C2 or 3350-C2F and up to two
3350-B2s or 3350-B2Fs in any combination. The 3350-C2 or
3350-C2F must always be attached in the right end position.
3350·A2
3350-A2F
3350-B2
3350-B2F
3350-C2
3350-C2F
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3350-1
3350 Direct Access Storage
3350 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS B2 AND B2F
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in.
3"
Dimensions:
= 1 ft)
F
Inches
(em)
r~~'7dn
1..
'2Plr'1~" 61"~ i~
4"
. - ,
t--
-.-------t~
42*
(107*)
S
33-1/2
(B5)
H
46-1/2
(IIB)
R
24
(61)
Rt
0
(0)
Service Clearances:
F
Inches
(em)
24
(61)
L
0
(0)
33-1/2"
I
3350-B2, B2F
o
1B-1/2"
I
t
I
L/
(2 Places) 19"
SPECI F ICATIONS
I
II
L __ ~o.!!!. ___ J
4-1/2"
(2 Places)
Weight: BOO Ib (370 kg)
Heat Output: 5 ,BOO BTU/hr (I 500 kcal/hr)
24"
~
Airflow: 400 cfm (I2 m 3/min)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
LWAd
m
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
7.5
7.5
58.0
58.0
I
T
No
No
Power Requirements:**
kVA
1.9
Phases
3
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-90°F (16°C-32°C)
20%-BO%
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
7BoF (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
50°F-110°F (IOoC-430C)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
B%-BO%
Max Wet Bulb
BOoF (27°C)
Notes:
* The end device dimension is 45" (I 14 em) with a 3-inch (Bcover added.
** Powered from 3350-A2 or 3350-A2F.
3350-B2
3350-B2F
3350-A2
3350-A2F
3350-2
InputlOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3350 Direct Access Storage
3350 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS C2 AND C2F
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in.
= 1 ft)
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(cm)
t
F
S
H
45
(114)
33-1/2
(85)
46-1/2
(118)
F
R
Rt
24
(61)
24
(61)
0
(0)
Service Clearances:
l',
Inches
(cm)
10"
Weight:
1,050 lb (480 kg)
Heat Output:
Airflow:
L
0
"(0)
6,500 BTU/hr (1 650 kcal/hr)
400 cfm (12 m 3/min)
Note: For cabling information, see Section 2,
"Machines with Integral or Abutted Controls."
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Infonnation Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
LWAd
m
I
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
7.5
7.5
Operating
(dB)
58.0
T
Idling
(dB)
58.0
No No
Power Requirements: *.
kVA
2.1
Phases
3
Environment, Operating:
60°F-90°F (16 o C-32oC)
Temperature
ReI Humidi ty
20%-80%
78°F (26°C)
Max Wet Bulb
Environment, Nonoperating:
50°F-110°F (10oC-430C)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
3350-A2
3350-A2F
3350-C2F
*Powered from 3350-A2 or 3350-A2F.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3350-3
3350 Direct Access Storage
3350 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS A2, A2F, C2, AND C2F
CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Std
6456
1178
6148
1178
8150
6456
1178
Conn
Conn
10
10
1
-
- - -
2
- --
4
7
--
5
---
3
..
9
From 3350
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
6456
2
1178
Conn
ID
Max Length
m
(ft)
Model
Notes
1
61
(200)
A2, A2F,
C2,C2F
1,2
1
7
61
(200)
A2, A2F
4
1178
1
5
61
(200)
A2, A2F,
C2,C2F
5
6456
2
3
61
(200)
A'l, A2F,
C2 e2F
1,2,3
1178
1
9
61
(200)
A2, A2F
4
Std
6148
8150
To 3350
Feature
Code
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
Std
2
A2, A2F,
C2,C2F
1,2
8150
4
A2, A2F,
C2,C2P
1,2,3
Notes:
1. A maximum cable length of up to 61 meters (200 feet) is available to attach
2.
3.
4.
5.
as many as four 3350-A2s or 3350-A2Fs and four 3350-C2s or 3350-C2Fs to
a control device.
Each 3350-A2 or 335Q-A2F can attach one 3350-C2 or 3350-C2F.
String switch feature is available for the attachment of a 3350 to a second
control device.
Power sequence and control; cable is optional.
Required for SF 6148 (remote switch).
3350-4
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3370 Direct Access Storage
3370 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS A 1, A2, B1, AND B2 (MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION)
PLAN VIEW (Not to scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
I--- 815
I
2311
(91) (Cover to Cover)
510
510
(20)
(20)
775
(30.1/2)
(32)
I
I
-----i
I
760
(30)
1
----,
li---~-+---I
760
(30)
815
(32)
490
(19·1/4)
(2 Places)
o 0
+
25
(1 )
815
(32)
-A1, A2
0
760
(30)
I
I
I
~L
+
+
o 0
+
3370
-81,82
+0 0+
+
+0 0+
3370
-81,B2
3370
-81,82
+0 0+
)
+0
+0 0+
+0
300
(11·3/4)
____
____
____
__________ ~ront
___________
3370 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS A1 AND A2
PLAN VIEW (Not to scale)
r--
I
775
(30·1/2)
815
(32)
fT---760
(30)
~
I
I
815
I
I
I
(321
:(
760
(30)
I
I
I
760
(30)
1
(2 Places)
220
(8·3/4)
25
(1 )
o
)
+
3370
I.'"-----'!--+ -A 1 , A2
LL _____
300
(11·3/4)
__
490
(19·1/4)
(2 Places)
.-!ront _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3370-1
J
3370 Direct Access Storage
3370 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS A1 AND A2
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Front
mm
(inches)
Side
Height
775
815
(30·1/2) (32)
1000
(39-1/2)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
(inches)
760
(30)
815*
(32*)
815
(32)
760
(30)
Weight: 260 kg (580 lb)
Heat Output:**
Airflow: 5.5 m 3/min (190 cfm)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
m
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
7.8
58.0
58.0
7.8
I
T
No No
Power Requirements:
kVA**
Phases
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Power Cord Style
3
R&S,3730
R&S,3744
R&S,3914
B2
Environment, Operating: ***
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C (60°F-90°F)
8%-80%
23°C (73 0 F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
lO oC430C (50°F-110°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* Service clearance is 815 mm (32 in.) if this is an end device.
** Varies with supply voltage.
Volts
200/208
220
235/240
k VA
Watts
BTU/hr
1.0
1.2
1.3
640
680
720
2,200
2,350
2,500
*** Biocides containing organometallic oxide must not be used
in the air-conditioning systems of buildings containing these
machines.
3370·A1, A2
3370-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3370 Direct Access Storage
3370 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS B1 AND B2
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
I
I
mm
(inches)
Front
Side
Height
535*
(21 *)
815
(32)
1 000
(39-1/2)
Front
Rear
Right
760
(30)
760
(30)
815**· 0
(32**) (0)
1--535h815---l
(21)
(32)
ii--- ----I
1____
I
LI
I
760
(30)
I
760
I
(30)
r ~
815
~
):
I
3370.81,
(3~2) +
82
+
:
0
1
I
760
(30)
I
Front
0 -,-
490 (19·1/4)
(2 Places)
-'-
I
I
I
LL _______ J
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Weight:
Left
170 kg (375 Ib)
Heat Output:***
Airflow:
3.6 m3/min (130 cfm)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM·
General Information Manual: Installation ManualPhysical Planning, GC22-7072.
LWAd
m
Operating
(bets)
Idling
(bets)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
7.8
7.8
58.0
58.0
I
T
No No
Power Requirements:t
kVA***
Phases 3
Environment,Operating:tt
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C (60°F-90°F)
80/0-80%
23°C (73°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
10°C-43°C (50°F-110°F)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* The effective width of Model B1 or B2 when attached
to a Model Al or A2 or to another Model Bl or B2 is
510 mm (20 in.).
** Service clearance is 815 mm (32 in.) if this is an end
device.
*** Varies with supply voltage.
t
tt
Volts
kVA
Watts
200/208
0.7
420
220
0.9
460
235/240
1.0
500
Powered from a 3370 Model Al or A2.
BTU/hr
1,450
1,650
1,700
Biocides containing organometallic oxide must not
be used in the air-conditioning systems of buildings containing these machines.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3370-3
3370 Direct Access Storage
3370 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS A1 AND A2 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Cable
Conn
Conn
Code
Group
ID
ID
Std
6456
1178
8150
6456
1178
.-
1
--
5
-...
3
...
--
2
-..
---
4
-...
-
7
From 3370
Feature
Code
Std
8150
Max Length
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
m
(ft)
Model
Notes
6456
2
1
61
(200)
AI, A2
1
Conn
ID
1178
1
5
61
(200)
AI,A2
3
6456
2
3
61
(200)
Al,A2
1,2
1178
1
7
61
(200)
AI,A2
3
To 3370
Feature
Code
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
Std
2
AI,A2
1
8150
4
AI, A2
1,2
Notes:
1. A maximum cable length of 61 meters (200 feet) is available to attach as many
as four 3370-Als or A2s to a control device or to an intervening disk storage unit.
2. String switch feature (SF 8150) is available for the attachment of a 3370-AI or
A2 to a second control device.
3. Power sequence and control; cable is o·ptional.
3370-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3375 Direct Access Storage
3375 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS A1, B1, AND D1 (MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION)
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
English measurements arc shuwn in parentheses.
815
1 ( 3 2 ) -.....- -
fl-
760
(30)
I
1: {,';,!~" ~
l¥
220 (8·3/4)
J
1 (2 Places)
{;~:.~::,
760 1
(30)
(8 Places)
---'+I-
L'
'-'-'~I _ _
Note: End unit may be 3375·81 or 3375·01.
~3~i5~at~ _ _
Front _ _ _ _ _ _
I 300
I(211·3/4)
Places)
3375 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL A1
PLAN VIEW (Not to scale)
li5
815---l
--+01t-(30.112)·--"-+---(32)
I
---I
760
I
I
(30)::-11
(2 Places)
II
220
) 1
3/ 4)
_ _--+_ _
(8-1-.
~_ _ _
+O~
I
300
(11·3/4)
--:;ra
(19·1/4)
,--~e5)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3375-1
3375 Direct Access Storage
3375 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL A1
SPEC I F ICATIONS
Dimensions:
Front
mm
(inches)
Side
Height
775
815
(30-1/2) (32)
1000
(39-1/2)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
(inches)
760
(30)
760
(30)
815 *
(32*)
815
(32)
Weight:
260 kg (580 lb)
Heat Output:**
5.5 m 3 /min (190 cfm)
Airflow:
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-70n.
LWAd
m
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
7.7
7.7
58.0
53.0
I
T
No
No
Power Requirements:
kVA*'"
Phases
Plug
Receptacles
Connectors
Power Cord Style
3
R&S,3730
R&S,3744
R&S,3914
B2
Environment,Operating:***
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C_32°C (60°F-90°F)
8%-80%
0
23°C (73 F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10 oC-4309C (50°F-110°F)
8%-80%
27°C (BOoF)
Notes:
* Service clearance is 815
mm (32 in.) if this is an end device,
** Varies with supply voltage.
Volts
kVA
Watts
BTU/hr
200/208
1.0
640
2,200
1.2
680
2,350
220
235/240
1.3
720
2,500
*** Organometallic oxide biocides and/or amines should not
be used in the air-conditioning or steam-humidification
systems of buildings containing these machines.
3375-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3375 Direct Access Storage
3375 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL B1
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm
=0.5 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
815~
Front
530*
(21 *)
mm
(inches)
Service Clearances:
I
mm
(inches)
760---1'
(30)
Dimensions:
I
---,
(32)
SPECIFICATIONS
Front
760
(30)
Side
815
(32)
Height
1 000
(39-1/2)
Rear
760
(30)
Right
815**
(32**)
Left
0
(0)
"
):
I
I
I
I
Weight: 170 kg (380 lb)
Heat Output:***
Airflow: 3.6 m3 /min (130 cfm)
I
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM
General Information Manual: Installation ManualPhysical Planning, GC22-7072.
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
7.7
m
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
58.0
53.0
7.7
I
T
No No
Power Requirements:t
kVA***
Phases 3
Environment,Operating:tt
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C (60°F-90°F)
8%-80%
23°C (73°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
100 C-430C (50°F-110°F)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* The effective width of Model B1 when attached to a
Model Al or another Model Bl is 510 mm (20 in.).
** Service clearance is 815 mm (32 in.) if this is an end
device.
*** Varies with supply voltage.
Volts
200/208
220
235/240
Powered from
k VA
Watts
0.7
420
0.9
460
1.0
500
a 3370 Model Al or A2.
BTU/hr
1,450
1,650
I}OO
Organometallic oxide biocides and/or amines should not
be used in the air-conditioning or steam-humidification
systems of buildings containing these machines.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3375-3
3375 Direct Access Storage
3375 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL 01
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
=0.5 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
mm
(inches)
r6~1~2)
Front
Side
Height
775
(30-1/2)
815
(32)
1 000
(39-1/2)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
760
(30)
815
(32)
o
""Tl--- i ---
Service Clearances:
r360~
mm
(inches)
760
(30)
Weight:
250 kg (550 lb)
,--...
,I
o
+
220
(8·3/4)
815
o
+
)1
3375·01
(32)
+
+
o
300
(11.3/4)
760
(30)
..I.!_ _ _
0
I
I
230
(9)
--r
*
490 (19·1/4)
I
(2 Places)
'-
(0)
Heat Output: *
I
I
I
I
5.5 m 3/min (190 cfm)
Airflow:
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
I
L__ -.!'r~ ___ J
LWAd
m
Operating
(bets)
Idling
(bets)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
7.7
7.7
58.0
53.0
I
T
No No
Power Requirements:**
kVA*
Phases
3
Environment,Operating:***
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-320C (60°F-90°F)
8%-80%
23°C (73°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-43°C (50°F-110°F)
8%..80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* Varies with supply voltage.
Volts
200/208
220
235/240
kVA
0.9
1.1
1.2
Watts
590
630
670
BTU/hr
2,000
2,150
2,300
** Powered from a 3375 Model AI.
*** Organometallic oxide biocides and/or amines should not
be used in the air-conditioning or steam-humiditication
systems of buildings containing these machines.
3375-D1
(complete photo not available)
3375-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3375 Direct Access Storage
3375 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS A1 AND D1 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Code
Cable
Group
Std
6456
Feature
6456
1178
Conn
10
10
--
1178
8150
Conn
1
- - -
2
---
- - -
4
-
5
-
3
-
7
From 3375
Feature
Code
Std
8150
Max Length
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
m
(ft)
Model
Notes
6456
2
1
61
(200)
Al,Ol
1,3
COlln
ID
1178
1
5
61
(200)
Al,Ol
4
6456
2
3
61
(200)
Al,Ol
1,2,3
1178
1
7
61
(200)
Al,Ol
4
To 3375
Feature
Code
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
Std
2
Al,Ol
1,3
8150
4
AI, D1
1,2,3
Notes:
1. A maximum cable length of 61 meters (200 feet) is available to attach as many
as four 3375-Als and/or 3375-01s to a control device.
2. String switch feature (SF 8150) is available for the attachment of a 3375-Al
or 3375-Dl to a second control device.
3. A 3375-Al and 3375-01 in the same string cannot attach to the same control
device.
4. Power sequence and control; cable is optional.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3375-5
3375 Direct Access Storage
This page is intentionally left blank.
3375-6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS
A04 AND AA4
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS
A04, AA4, AN D B04
(Maximum Configuration)
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
English measurements are
shown in parentheses.
5 045
t
~---------:(198-1/2)----------~
!
J
---~~~II~~-:r:--~::~---- ---~:~~--- __~~~_II~~__ --~~~---,
1 075
r
! ~,-,.- ,-I
~
!
~
I
I
I
I
I II
+
2 440
(96)
l
1 015
I
~
_ l
++
1 015
~, .... - :-1
I
I
~
~
I
I II
1 075
~,.-- [-1
I
I
~
I
'-- /
++
'--
~, .... - [-1
I
I
~
I
I II
T
815
~~
I
I II - t
++
+
3380-A04,
~380-80: ~380-80: ~380-804+
I!
~
865
:+-
~
AA4
815
(32) \
! !~815~i
W
(32)!
I
'--
I
l___________________________ ~~~~~ ________ ~:::~_ ____1___
I
815
(32)
Note: Nonraised floor cables may exit at any point.
Note: Nonraised floor cables may exit at any point.
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS
AD4 AND AE4
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS
AD4, AE4, BD4, AND BE4
(Maximum Configuration)
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
English measurements are
shown in parentheses.
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
f
i--~~~II~~-r~-~::~----~--~:~~--+-':~II~~-- ---~;~---,
5 045
1C-------,(198-1/2)----------~
1 075
r
II
II
~
....
_-/j7ji
II
+
2 440
(96)
+
~ _- 7j
.... /I i
II
II
++
3380-804,
BE4
I I!
~
T
1 015
1 015 ~ 1 075
865
~/- 7f ~ ... --7.T
. /I i
.
I I
II
++
II
II
II
++
3380-804, 3380-804,
8E4
8E4
II
---t
815
(32)
+
3380-A04,
AE4 ~
2 440-.----1-_ __
(96)
815
(32) \
~~ ~~ ~ ---u ~(~~)~I
+
L________________________________________________
____t___ I
Front
Note: Nonraised floor cables may exit at any point.
815
(32)
+f----t1__+_
815
(32)
I
815
(32)
815
(32)
460
(18)
(2X)
Note: Nonraised floor cables may exit at any point.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3380-1
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS
A04, AA4, AD4, AND AE4
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Front
Side
Height
1 015*
(40*)
815
(32)
1 790
(70·1/2)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
(inches)
815
(32)
815
865
o
(32)
(:34)
(0)
Weight:
545 kg (1,200 lb)
mm
(inches)
Service Clearances:
Heat Output and Power Requirements:**
I\.Jax
kVA
Voltage
200/208
2.50
2.90
220/380
a.10
230/400
3.30
240/415
Phases
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Power Cord Style
Max
Max
kW
(kBTUjhr)
1.78
1.87
(6.10)
(6.40)
(6.35)
(6.45)
1.85
1.88
3
Russellstoll. 7328
Russellstoll. 7324
Russellstoll. 7428
El
8.5 m 8 /min (300 cfm)
Airflow:
Acoustical Data:
For definitions. see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planninf{.
GC22·7072.
m
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
7.9
7.9
58.0
58.0
Environment,Operating:***
3380-AD4, AE4
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C (60°F·90°F)
20%-80%
26°C (78°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Notes:
*
Add 57 mm (2-1/4 in.) to the front dimension for
each end cover that is attached to this machine.
** Values vary with input voltage, installed features, and
m:mufacturing variations.
*** Organometallic oxide biocides and/or amines·should not
be used in the air-conditioning or steam-humidification
systems of buildings containing these machines.
3380-2
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
lOO C·43°C (50°F-110°F)
8%·80%
27°C (80°F)
Environment, Storage: (Maximum 1 year)
Temperature
1°C-60°C (34°F-140°F)
ReI Humidity
5%-80%
Wet Bulb Range 1°C_29°C (34°F-85°F)
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
I
T
No
No
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL 804
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS
BD4 AND BE4
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
English measurements are
shown in parentheses.
3380-804
L
n
,.,+
495 ~--~
(19-1/2)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
815
(32)
I 2 440
---f.~
(96)
(2f l~rQ"i:::' ~
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3380-3
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS 804, 8D4, AND BE4
SPECIFICATIONS
Environment, Operating:***
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Dimensions:
Front
Side
Height
1015*
(40*)
815
(32)
1790
(70·1/2)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
(inches)
815
(32)
815
(32)
0
(0)
0
(0)
Weight:
455 kg (1,000 lb)
mm
(inches)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Service Clearances:
Heat Output and Power Requirements:**
Voltage
Max
kW
Max
(kBTU/hr)
200/208
220/380
230/400
240/415
1.90
2.30
2.60
2.80
1.30
1.44
1.42
1.50
(4.45)
(4.95)
(4.90)
(5.30)
3
6.2 m3/min (220 cfm)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22·7072.
LWAd
m
Operating
(bets)
Idling
(bets)
Operating
(dB)
7.9
7.9
58.0
3380-4
Environment, Storage: (Maximum 1 year)
Temperature
I°C·60°C (34°F·1400F)
ReI Humidity
5%·80%
Wet Bulb Range 1°C·29°C (34°F·85°F)
* Add 57 mm (2·1/4 in.) to the front dimension for
each end cover that is attached to this machine.
** Values vary with input voltage, installed features, and
manufacturing variations.
*** Organometallic oxide biocides and/or amines should not
be used in the air·conditioning or steam-humidification
systems of buildings containing these machines.
The Model Bxx units are powered from the Model Axx.
Airflow:
lOOC·43°C (50o F·nOOF)
8%·80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
Max
kVA
Phases
16°C·32°C (60°F·90°F)
20%·80%
26°C (78°F)
Idling
(dB)
58.0
I
T
No
No
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS
AJ4, AK4, BJ4, AND BK4
(Maximum Configuration)
PLAN VI EW (Not to Scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
8 240
(324-1/2)
X
1 075
""'"
1 015
/'""",
/'""",
+
+
1 015
/'""",
1 015
/'""",
1 015
/'""",
1 015
/'""",
+
1 075
/'""",
/'
815
(32)
~
+
3380-BJ4,
BK4
2 440
(96)
1 015
+
815
(32)
+
+
+
+
~
/ '-/ '- '- '-/___________________________________________________
'- '- '-/ '- (~1i)t______
____1____________________________________________________
~~~~~
Notes:
1. Nonraised floor cables may exit at any point.
Table A
Floor Load Rating
2. Leveling pads are not shipped with this machine. If they are
required, the installing service representative will supply the
leveling pads, part 4519857, four for each frame. Leveling
pads are not recommended for earthquake-prone areas.
3. The following are the weights of the 3380 Models AJ4, AK4,
BJ4, and BK4:
Models
AJ4, AK4 (60 Hz)
AJ4, AK4 (50 Hz)
AJ4, AK4 (Japan)
BJ4, BK4 (60 Hz)
BJ4, BK4 (50 Hz)
BJ4, BK4 (Japan)
Weight
(lb)
kg
585 (290)
620 (1 370)
545 (1 200)
470 (1040)
475 (1 050)
455 (1 000)
kg/m
.
440
415
390
365
340
2
Required End Clearance
lib/ft2)
Dimension X + y
60Hz
(90)
(85)
(80)
(75)
(70)
mm (0 in.!
mm (0 in.!
255 mm (10 in.)
635 mm (25 in.!
1 525 mm (60 in.)
o
o
Dimension X + y
50Hz
o mm (0 in.!
205
405
840
1 525
mm
mm
mm
mm
(10
(16
(33
(60
in.)
in.)
in.)
in'!'
Dimension X + y
Japan
o
mm (0 in.!
o mm (0 in.!
100 mm ( 5 in.)
305 mm (12 in.)
1 220 mm (48 in.!
In addition to the end clearance, the service clearance at the front and rear of the
machine must be Increased to 865 mm (34 in.!.
The Models AJ4 and AK4 can be installed at either end of the
string. If planning for a four-path DASD string, the two Axx units
must be next to each other. A maximum of three B units can be
installed on both ends of the two Axx units of a four-path string.
For maximum floor utilization and ease of conversion to four-path
strings, the Axx units of two-path strings should be installed next to
each other. For a four-path string, the end covers are removed and
the emergency power-off (EPO) cables are interconnected between
the two Axx units.
The following service clearance req uirements are based on the
weight of these machines.
A service clearance of 815 mm (32 in.) is required in the front and
the rear of the machine.
Machines installed on floors rated at 415 kg/m2 (85 Ib/ft2) or
stronger do not req uire end clearance, based on IBM's method
of calculating floor load.
For addressing purposes, the recommended physical placement of
the two Axx units in the four-path string is for the Axx unit with
path Al/A2 to be positioned to the left of the Axx unit with path
A3/ A4. This will result in the low addresses physically located on
the left of the string, as seen facing the string from the front.
If the floor load rating is less than 415 kg/m 2 (85 Ib/ft 2 ), use
Table A to find the total end clearance required to distribute
the load.
When one end of a string is against a wall and forms a dead-end
aisle, the maximum length of the string is 7.6 m (25 ft) and access
of 915 mm (36 in.) for emergency exit must be provided at the
open end.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3380-5
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 Direct Access Storage Models
AJ4 and AK4
Specifications
Dimensions:
PLAl'l' VIE\V (Not to Scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7089.
~(i4~~2)~
I (;~ -~ (414~~J2)-l
~----------
Front
1 015*
(40*)
nun
(inches)
Senice Clearances:
Front
815
(32)
nun
(inches)
---------------,----y---r-
Height
1 790
(70-1/2)
Side
815
(32)
Rear
815
(32)
. Right
Left
See Note on page
3380.5
See Note on page 3380.5.
Weight:
I
-'-
I
I
/1
495
I
I
(19-1/2)
(2X)
I
I
I
~+
815
i
I
3380-AJ4, AK4
I
1 - - ~+......-~,....;a...J""""""
Heat Output and Power Requirements:**
(32)
Model AJ4,
AK460-Hz
Voltage
MaxkVA
MaxkW
200
208
220
240
1.89
1.95
2.02
2.11
1.70
1.77
1.84
1.89
Model AJ4,
AK450-Hz
Voltage
MaxkVA
MaxkW
200
220/380
230/400
240/415
1.77
2.06
2.09
2.05
Max
(kBTU/hr)
815
(32)
I 2 440
---I+- (96)
I
815
(32)
(5.80)
(6.04)
(6.28)
(6.45)
,"fax
(kBTUjhr)
x 190
x 7-1/2)
(5.84)
(6.49)
(6.31)
(6.28)
Phases
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Power Cord Style
3
Airflow:
8.5 m 3 /min (300 cfm)
3380-AJ4,
AK4
3380-6
1.71
1.90
1.85
1.84
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Russellstoll, 7328
Russellstoll, 7324
Russellstoll, 7428
E1
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 Direct Access Storage Models
AJ4 and AK4
Specifications (Continued)
Acoustical Data:
For defmitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
m
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
7.9
7.9
Operating
(dB)
58.0
Idling
(dB)
I
T
58.0
No
No
Environment, Operating:"'''''''
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C (60°F-90°F)t
20%-80%
26°C (78°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-43°C (50°F-110°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Environment, Storage: (Maximum 1 year)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Wet Bulb
Range
1°C-60°C (34°F-140°F)
5%-80%
1°C-29°C (34°F -85°F)
Notes:
*
Add 57 mm (2-1/4 in.) to the front dimension for each end cover that is attached to
this machine .
**
. Values vary with input voltage, installed features, and manufacturing variations.
***
Organometallic oxide biocides and/or amines
should not be used in the air-conditioning or
steam-humidification systems of buildings
containing these machines.
t
It is recommended that inlet air to 3380
Models J and K be at a minimum of 65°F,
as measured at the inlet louvers.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3380-7
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 Direct Access Storage Models
BJ4 and BK4
Specifications
Dimensions:
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7089.
rJ.
-1550
(21-1/2)
(2X)
T
1 015
(40)
1
I,
I
~
~
I
I
I
/
Front
1 015+
(40+)
Height
1 790
(70-1/2)
Side
815
(32)
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
r----------------.,
I
I
I
I
mm
(inches)
Front·
815
(32)
Right
Left
See Note on page
3380.5.
Rear
815
(32)
815
(32)
I
~,_
I-..-+u-~u+
- ,
Weight: See Note on page 3380.5.
Heat Output and Power Requirements:**
338Q-BJ4,BK4
Model
BJ4, BK4
60-Hz
Voltage
Max
kVA
Max
kW
Max
(kBTU/hr)
200
208
220
240
1.48
1.54
1.65
1.73
1.35
1.42
1.50
1.57
(4.61)
(4.85)
(5.12)
(5.36)
Model
BJ4, BK4
50-Hz
Voltage
Max
kVA
Max
kW
Max
(kBTU/hr)
200
220/380
230/400
240/415
1.32
1.77
1.77
1.87
1.30
1.59
1.59
1.72
(4.44)
(5.43)
(5.43)
(5.87)
The Model Bxx units are powered from the
Model Axx.
3380-8
Phases
3
Airflow:
6.2 m 3 /rnin (220 cfm)
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 Direct Access Storage Models
BJ4 and BK4
Specifications (Continued)
Acoustical Data:
Por defmitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
m
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
7.9
7.9
Operating
(dB)
58.0
Idling
(dB)
I
T
58.0
No
No
Environment, Operating:'" **
Temperature
Rel Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C (60°F-90°F)t
20%-80%
26°C (78°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-43°C (50°F-110°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Environment, Storage: (Maximum 1 year)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Wet Bulb
Range
1°C-60°C (34°F-140°F)
5%-80%
1°C-29°C (34°F -85°F)
Notes:
*
Add 57 mm (2-1/4 in.) to the front dimension for each end cover that is attached to
this machine.
**
Values vary with input voltage, installed features, and manufacturing variations.
***
Organometallic oxide biocides and/or amines
should not be used in the air-conditioning or
steam-humidification systems of buildings
containing these machines.
t
It is recommended that inlet air to 3380
Models J and K be at a minimum of 65°P,
as measured at the inlet louvers.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3380-9
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODELS
A04, AA4, AD4, AE4, AJ4, AND AK4 CABLING
SCHEMATIC
Cable
Group
Model
A04, AA4,
AD4,AE4,
AJ4, and AK4
3901
1178
AA4, AD4,
AE4, AJ4,
and AK4
3901
1178
Conn
Conn
ID
ID
-
---
1
5
I-
-
-
-
-
2
3
f-
-
-
-
-
4
-
7
From 3380
Max Length
Feature
Code
Std
Std
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn
ID
m
(ft)
3901
1
1
61
1178
1
5
3901
1
3
1178
1
7
Model
Notes
(200)
A04,AA4,AD4,AE4,AJ4,AK4
1,2,4
61
(200)
A04,AA4,AD4,AE4,AJ4,AK4
5
61
(200)
AA4,AD4,AE4,AJ4,AK4
1,2,3,4,6,7
61
(200)
AA4,AD4,AE4,AJ4,AK4
5
To 3380
Feature
Code
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
Std
2
A04,AA4,AD4,AE4,AJ4,AK4
1,2,4
Std
4
AA4,AD4,AE4,AJ4,AK4
1,2,3
Notes:
1. A maximum cable length of 61 meters (200 feet) is available to attach as many as two 3380-Axxs to
a storage control unit.
2. One or two Model A04s may be attached to one storage control unit. A Model A04 may not share the
same storage control unit with a Model AA4, AD4, AE4, AJ4, or AK4.
3. Two Model AA4s, AD4s, AE4s, AJ4s, or AK4s may share storage control units in any combination. If
these machines share a storage control unit, both of them must share the same second storage control
unit.
4. A maximum of three Model B04s may be attached to a Model A04 or AA4. A maximum of three Model
BD4s or BE4s may be attached to a Model AD4 or AE4 in any combination.
A maximum of three Model BJ4s or BK4s may be attached to a Modd AJ4 or AK4 in any combination.
No other configurations of a DASD string are allowed.
5. The power seq uence control cable is connected to the 3380 for remote power-on functions. The
cable is required for Models A04 and AA4. It is optional for Models AD4, AE4, AJ4, and AK4.
6. Cable shield continuity on the 3901 cables must be maintained. Submit an RPQ for applications where
3901 cables must be connected together to extend their length, or where a device other than another
3380 is inserted in the path.
7. The four-path configuration cables for Models AJ 4 and AK4 are ordered for each Axx unit as if they
were independent units.
3380-10
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL CJ2
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
English measurements are
shown in parentheses.
~
~
1895
765~(74_1~2)130.
(30)
(2X)
r--x=---- -~--~-1
i
'
I
1
I
I
I
-
iI
I
I
815
(32)
(2X)
I
+
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
/
I
IL__ _
815
(32)
+
+
1 495
1(19-1/2)
1
550
(21-1/2)
44-1/2).
I
I
+I
I
;/
Front
------------
I
-i
1
---
815
2 440
(96)
!~32)
i
305
(12)
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL CJ2
(Maximum Configuration)
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
5 045
(198-1/2)
---~~~---- --~~-~~~--l-~~:~---T-~~~~~---l-=----:
I
~~~.ru.~~----~~~----~~~----~~+~
I
1
I
'-- ./
'--.-/ '--
I______________________________ !!~~ ___________________-------______ 1
815
(32)
2440
~~
-+(i~) I
~
Notes:
1.
2.
As many as three 3380 Model 8J4s or 8K4s may
be attached to the right side of a 3380 Model CJ2.
Leveling pads are not shipped with this machine. If
they are required, the installing service representative
will supply the leveling pads, part 4519857, four for each frame.
Leveling pads are not recommended for earthquake prone areas.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3380-11
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL CJ2
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
mm
(inches)
Front
Side
Height
1015*
(40*)
815
(32)
1790
(70·1/2)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
815
(32)
815
(32)
0
7.65
(0)
(30)
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Weight:
60Hz
50Hz
514 kg (1 141 lb)
541 kg (1 204 lb)
Heat Output and Power Requirements:**
Model CJ2
60-Hz Voltage
Max
kVA
Max
kW
Max
(kBTU/hr)
208
220
240
1.78
1.54
1.61
1.70
1.48
1.57
(5.80)
(5.05)
(5.36)
Model CJ2
50-Hz Voltage
Max
kVA
Max
kW
Max
(kBTU/hr)
200
220/380
240/415
1.76
1.82
1.90
1.71
1.78
1.84
(5.84)
(6.07)
(6.28)
Phases
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Power Cord Sty Ie
3
Russellstoll, 7328
Russellstoll, 7324
Russellstoll, 7428
E1
Airflow:
33S0 .cJ2
3380-12
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
8.5 m3/min (300 cfm)
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE MODEL CJ2
SPECIFICATIONS (Continued)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
m
Idlin~
(bels
Operating
(dS)
Idling
(dS)
I
T
7.9
57.0
57.0
No
No
7.9
Environment, Operating:···
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C (GOOF-90°F)
20%·80%
26°C (78°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-43°C (50°F· 110°F)
8%·80%
27°C (80°F)
Environment, Storage: (Maximum 1 year)
lOC·GOoC (34°F· 140°F)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
5%-80%
Wet Bulb Range 1°C-29°C (34°F-85°F)
Notes:
*
**
***
Add 57 mm (2-1/4 in.) to the front dimension for
each end cover that is attached to this machine.
Values vary with input voltage, installed features, and
manufacturing variations.
Organometallic oxide biocides and/or amines shoUlC1 not
be used in the air-conditioning or steam-humidification
systems of buildings containing these machines.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3380-13
3380 Direct Access Storage Device
3380 Direct Access Storage Model CJ2 Cabling Schematic
Model
CJ2
0185
1178
CJ2
0185
1178
Conn
ID
Conn
10
Cable
Group
..
...-
...
-
101 r- 9
-
-
-
102
103 r- 11
-
-
-
104
-
Fran 3380-CJ2
Max Length
Feature Group
Code
No.
Std
Std
No. of
Cables
Conn
ID
m
(ft)
Model
Notes
0185
2
101
122
(400)
CJ2
1,2,3
1178
1
9
122
(400)
CJ2
4
0185
2
103
122
(400)
CJ2
1178
1
11
122
(400)
CJ2
1 ,2,3
4
To 3380-CJ2
Feature
Code
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
Std
102
CJ2
1
Std
104
CJ2
1
Notes:
1. Standard channel interface. The total cable length of 122 meters (400 feet) is available to attach as many
as eight storage control units.
2. The maximum cable length must be reduced 4.5 meters (15 feet) for each storage control unit attached
between the 3380 Model eJ2 and the channel.
3. One set of cables is required for each channel attachment.
4. Power sequence and control cable.
5. If DASD units are attached to a 3044 Model D02, no other type of control unit may be attached to that
same D02 unit. The 3380 Model eJ2 cannot be attached to 308x channels by means of a 3044.
6. When a 3380 Model eJ2 is attached to a 3044 Model D02 in data streaming, the total distance to the
channel must not exceed 245 meters (800 feet). Distance inclndes both copper bus and tag cables, and
fiber optic cable.
3380-14
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3390 Direct Access Storage
3390 Direct Access Storage
Models A14, A24, A34, A18, A28, A38
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
Specifications: Dimensions:
urements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template. GX22-7129.
230
(9)
Single Frame:
Front
Side
Height
mm
(Inches)
980
(38%)
815
. (32)
1 790
(70%)
Service Clearances for 70-1b Floors:·
Front
445
(17-1/2)
mm
(Inches)
,
2 445
815
(32)
975(38-)
Rear
Right
Left
815 1 535
(32)
(60)
975(38-)
1535
(60)
815
(96)
(32)
Heat Output and Power Requlrements:lfOOII,
Models A14, A24,
A34 Voltage
lOOIOII
Max
kVA
Max
kW
Max
(kBTUlhour)
2001208
220/380
230/400
240/415
1.6
1.8
1.9
2.1
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
(4.4)
(4.8)
(5.0)
(5.5)
Models A18, A28,
A38 Voltage
Max
kVA
Max
kW
Max
(kBTUlholD')
200/208
220/380
230/400
240/415
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.1
2.1
(6.8)
(6.8)
(7.2)
(7.2)
815
(32)
~
1-_1 (60)
535_-i~_ (38-1/2)
980
._
:
1 535
(60)
:1
4 050 -------~
(158-1/2)
Phases '**'***
Plug (A-unit only)
Receptacle
Connector
Power Cord Style
3
Russellstoll.7328
Russellstoll. 7324
Russellstoll.7428-JPA63
Russellstoll.7428-JPA64
Russellstoll.7428-JPA65
E1
Notes:
.
-
Review Information for floor loading considerations.
Models A14. A24. A34. A18. A28. and A38 with
optional Isolation transformer only.
Values vary with Input voltage. Installed features. and manufacturing variations.
For 50-Hz machines only. the distribution transformer should be derated 20% when 3390s and
3990s are the only machines It supplies. An
optional feature or RPQ for an Isolation transformer Is available for countries with
phase/neutral current restrictions.
This product Is not phase sensitive.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and cabling Schematics
3390-1
3390 Direct Access Storage
Models B14, B24, B34, B18, B28, B38, B1C, B2C, and B3C
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
Specifications
urements are shown in parentheses.
Heat Output and Power Requlrements:lIOII
Use IBM Physical Planning Template, GX22-7129.
445
(17-1/2)-
-
,,.-
..
•
3390
(96)
J5
(32)
8-Unlt
!+
,
~
+
~
..
15
(32)
+
1+
2 445
815
"'-
(32)
~
tront
, 535
(60)
Models B14, 824,
B34 Voltage
900· ...
35-1I)
2
3 970
14---------(155-1/2)
1 535
60
Max
kVA
Max
kW
Max
(kBTU/hr)
200/208
220/380
230/400
240/415
1.6
1.8
1.9
2.1
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
(4.4)
(4.8)
(5.0)
(5.5)
Models B18, 828,
B38 Voltage
Max
kVA
Max
kW
Max
(kBTU/hr)
200/208
220/380
230/400
240/415
2.2
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.0
2.0
2.1
2.1
(6.8)
(6.8)
(7.2)
(7.2)
Models B1 C, B2C,
B3C Voltage
Max
kVA
Max
kW
Max
(kBTUlhr)
2001208
220/380
230/400
240/415
3.2
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.0
3.0
3.03.1
(10.1)
(10.3)
(10.4)
(10.6)
Notes:
*
-
3390-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
When the 8-unlt Is attached to the A-unit (head
of string), the A-unit end cover Is moved to the
exposed end of the 8-unlt.
Values vary with Input voltage, Installed features. and manufacturing variations.
3390 Direct Access Storage
Models A14, A24, A34, A18,A28, A38, B14, B24, 834, B18, B28, B38, B1C, B2C,
and B3C
814, 824, 834,
818, 828, 838,
81C, 82C, or 83C
Environment, Operating:
Specifications Acoustical Data:: For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM
General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb
Environment, Nonoperating:
m
LwAd
1SOC-32°C (60°F-90°F)
20%-80%
23°C (73°F)
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
7.9
7.9
57.0
57.0
I
T
No No
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb
10°C-43°C (50°F-110°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Environment, Storage: (Maximum 1 year)
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb
1°C-60°C (34°F-140°F)
5%-80%
29°C (84°F)
Chapter 1. Machine Speclncatlons and cabling Schematics
3390-3
3390 Direct Access Storage
Air Flow:
Floor and Heat Loading Considerations:
Model
(efm)
A14,A24,A34
A18,A28,A38
914, 924, B34
918, 928, B38
91C,92C,B3C
28.3
28.3
28.3
28.3
42.5
(1 000)
(1 000)
Machines installed in rooms with floor load
ratings in excess of 490 kg/m2 (100 Ib/ft2) require
no end clearance.
(1 000)
(1 000)
(1 500)
Welght:*
If the floor load rating is less than 490 kg/m 2 (100
Ib/ft2) the following table must be used to distribute the weight.
Model
kg
(Ibs)
A14,A24,A34
A18, A28, A38
914,924,934
918, 928, B38
91C, 92C, B3C
425
515
(1 140)
Consult a structural engineer if there is any
question about the correct placement of these
machines for floor load distribution.
(860)
(1 060)
Floor Loading
(940)
389
480
605
(1 340)
Note:
*
If an Isolation transformer Is used, add 125 kg
(275 Ib) to the weight of the Model A14, A18,
A24, A28, A34, or A38.
Heat Loading
·End Clearanee (X and V
Dimensions)·
Floor Load
Rating
kg/mZ
(I bitt'
mm
(In.)
W/mz
(Witt'
490
(100)
0
(0)
1725
(1S0)
440
(90)
310
(12)
1540
(145)
390
(80)
820
(32)
1325
(125)
340
(70)
1530
(SO)
1110
(105)
Note: "'See the figure below for location of X and V
dimensions.
2 780
(109-1/2)
r-x
900
940
v-1
940
(37j~ +(35-1/2)-- ~(37)
-...
",-
+
T
-.. -..
,,-
",-
t
I+~
T
...
r
3390-4
3390
A-Unit
3390
8-Unlt
----
-+-1+
......
-
----
'Front
815
(32)
3390
B-Unlt
...
-+
- -+
T
T
2 440
(96)
J5
(32)
...
---
-"'"-
......
815
(32)
+
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3390 Direct Access Storage
Models A14, A24, A34, A18, A28, A38 Cabling Schematic
Conn
Conn
10
10
Cable
Group
..
3901
...""
3901
101
~
Signal
{
103
..
3901
....
3901
..
"""
1178
11
1178
13
105
~
Power
Control
{ ...
107
~
f---------r--------f---------f----------
102
+--
104
..
106
+----
108
~
...
~
From 3390:
Device
Adapter
Max. Length
Group No.
No. of
Cables
ConnlD
m
(tt)
Model
Notes
3901
1
101
61
(200)
A14. A24.
A34. A18.
A28. A38
1.2
1178
1
11
61
(200)
A14. A24.
A34. A18.
A28.A38
3
3901
1
103
61
(200)
A14. A24.
A34. A18.
A28. A38
1. 2
1178
1
13
61
(200)
A14. A24.
A34. A18.
A28.A38
3
Device
Adapter 2
3901
1
105
61
(200)
A14. A24.
A34. A18.
A28. A38
1.2
Device
Adapter 3
3901
107
61
(200)
A14. A24.
A34. A18.
A28.A38
1.2
Device
Adapter 0
Device
Adapter 1
No cable
1
No cable
To 3390:
Device Adapter
ConnlD
Model
Notes
Device
Adapter 0
102
A14. A24. A34.
A18. A28.A38
1.2
Device
Adapter 1
104
A14. A24. A34.
A18. A28. A38
1.2
Device
Adapter 2
106
A14. A24. A34.
A18, A28.A38
1.2
Device
Adapter 3
108
A14. A24. A34.
A18. A28.A38
1.2
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3390-5
3390 Direct Access Storage
Notes:
1. A maximum cable length of 61 meters (200
feet) is available to attach as many as two
3390 strings (Model A14, A24, A34, A18, A28,
or A38) or one 3380 string (Model A04, AE4,
AJ4, or AK4) and one 3390 string to an IBM
3990 Storage Control.
(Maximum of 122.5
meters or 40B feet)
2. Cable shield continuity on the 3901 cables
must be maintained. Submit an RPQ for
applications where 3901 cables must be connected together to extend their length, or
where a device other than a 3380 or another
3390 is to be inserted in the path.
(Maximum of
245 meters
or BBB feet)
Copper bus
and tag
cables
3. Power sequence and control cable.
4. If a 3390 is attached to a 3044-002 through a
3990 Storage Control, no other type of'
control unit may be attached to that same
002 unit. The OASO units cannot be
attached to 308X channels through a 3044.
5. When a 3390 is attached to a 3044-002 unit
through a 3990 Storage Control in data
streaming mode, the total distance to the
channel must not be more than 245 meters
(800 feet). ~istance includes both copper
bus and tag cables and fiber optic cables.
See diagram below.
3390-6
(Maximum of 122.5
meters or 400 feet)
For example, if the copper bus and tag
cables between the 3990 and 3044 are 250
feet, and the copper bus and tag cables
between the 3044 and channel subsystem
are 300 feet, then the fiber optic cables
between the two 3044s can be up to 250 feet
(for a total distance of 800 feet).
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3410 Magnetic Tape Unit
3410 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT MODELS 1 TO 3
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
F
r "1
Inches
(cm)
31
(79)
H
S
27
(69)
39
(99)
R
6
(15)
Rt
0*
(0*)
31
r
. -
-
Service Clearances:
3"
F
(4 Places)
6"
Inches
(em)
t
Weight: 180 lb (82 kg)
:---_--Lt
- - , __
I
3"
27"
!-1+_ _....1._+-!1~(2
Places)
I
6·1/2"
L __
L
0*
(0*)
Heat Output: 850 BTU/hr (220 kcal/hr)
I
(2 Places) I
I
36
(91)
Airflow: 60 cflll (2 m 3 /mlll)
36"
FC"0~ j ___---:..
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General in/ormation Manual: installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22·7072.
...L!
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
7.9
m
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
7.3
58.0
Idling
(dB)
53.0
I
T
No No
Typical Tape Unit Layouts
Power Requirements:**
kVA
0.3
3410
3410
~
3411
3410
3410
3410
3410
3410
~
Environment, Operating:
60 o F·90oF (I60C.32oC)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
20%·80%
Max Wet Bulb
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
50 0 F·l 10°F (1 OOC-430C)
Temperature
Rei Humidity
8%·80'7,
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
* The 3410 can be attached to either side of the
3411, with a maximum of three devices on a
side.
3411
** Powered from 3411.
3410
3410
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3410-1
3410 Magnetic Tape Unit
This page is intentionally left blank.
3410-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
3411 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL MODELS 1 TO 3
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
Inches
(cm)
F
S
H
31
(79)
27
(69)
39
(99)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
6"
3411-1 to 3
"
3
2-1/2"x8"
t
27"
+
L+1Il=-t6-1/2"
(2 Places)
I
1
36"
I
IL ______
Front:
J _ _ _ _~
Weight:
F
R
Rt
L
36
(91)
6
0*
(0*)
0*
(0*)
(15)
325 lb (150 kg)
Heat Output: 3,500 BTU/hr (890 kcal/hr)
Airflow: 200 cfm (6 m 3/min)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, sce "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
m
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
7.3
58.0
53.0
7.9
60 Hz All
and 50 Hz
Power Requirements: Modell
kVA
Phases
Plug
Connector
Rcceptacle
Power Cord Style
I
T
No
No
50Hz
Models 2 and 3
1.2
1.2
1
R&S, FS3750
R&S, FS3933
R&S, FS3753
3
02
A2
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
0
0
0
0
60 F-90 F (16 C_32 C)
20%-80%
0
0
78 )-' (26 C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
0
0
0
0
50 1-'-110 1-' (10 C-43 C)
8%-80%
0
0
80 1: (27 C)
Notes:
*Thl~
3410 can be attached to either side of the 3411, with a
maximum of three devices on a side. The 3411 Model 1 can have
up to three 3410s attached (total capability of four tape units).
The 3411 Models 2 and 3 can have a maximum of five 3410s
attached (total capability of six tape units). All devices arc
physically attached at the front corner, allowing up to 90°
swing between devices.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling SchematiCS
3411-1
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
3411 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL MODELS 1 TO 3 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Number
Cable
Group
Conn
10
Std
3920 :
1178
I
Conn
10
I I~
1
3
2
I
Channel
From 3411
Max Length
Feature
Code
Std
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
1178
Conn
ID
m
3
1
2
3920
1
r.ttJ
Model
Notes
45
(} 50)
All
2, 3
61
(200)
All
1,2
To 3411
feature
Code
Std
Conn
ID
2
Model
Notes
All
1
Notes:
1. As many as 61 meters (200 feet), unkss modified by the general control-to-channel
cabling schematic, available to attach up to eight conlrolunits.
2. As many as eight tape control units (any combination of 3803s and 3411 s) may be
attached to the 3800 Printing Subsystem with the Tape-to-Printing Subsystem feature
installed. However, only one tape control unit can be al~tive at a time. The 3800
provides power sequence and control for one 3411 or 3803 (cable group 1178). Any
additional tape control units must receive their powcr sequl'nce and control from
another"source.
3. Power sequence and control. This machinc must havt.~ the power sequence and
l'ontrol installed for proper operation.
3411-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit
3420 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT MODELS 3 TO 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
F
Inches
(em)
H
S
30
(76)
29-1/2
(75)
67
(170)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(em)
+
4·3/4"
F
R
Rt
L
36
(91)
36
(91)
0
(0)
0
(0)
800 lb (370 kg)
Weight:
(2 Places)
+
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, sec "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
LWAd
m
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
I
T
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
3420·3
7.8
7.5
57.0
54.0
No No
3420·8
8.0
7.4
58.0
53.0
No No
Note: For cabling information, see 3803.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-90°F (16°C-32°C)
ReI Humidity
20%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
50°F-110°F (IOoC-430C)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
80°F (27°C)
Max Wet Bulb
Details (By Model)
Heat Output
BTU/hr (keal/hr)
Airflow
elm
(m 3 /min)
kVA*
Operating
Ready
360
(11)
1.6
1.4
4,000
(1 050)
360
(11)
1.7
1.5
4,400
(1150)
3,900
(990)
360
(11)
1.6
1.4
6
5,600
(1450)
4,000
(1 050)
360
(11)
1.9
1.5
7
5,600
(1450)
4,800
(1 '250)
360
2.0
1.7
(11)
8.400
(2 150)
5,800
(1 500)
360
(11 )
2.9
2.1
Operating
Ready
3
4,400
(1150)
3,900
(990)
4
4,500
(1150)
5
Model
8
Notes:
* Powered from 3803.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3420-1
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit
3420 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT MODELS 3 TO 8 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Std
Cable
Group
143
Conn
10
Conn
10
II
II
:
3
144 or
145
From 3420
Feature
Code
Std
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn
ID
Max Length
m
(ft)
Model
Notes
143
1
1
36.5
(120)
All
-
144
1
3
36.5
(120)
All
1
145
1
3
36.5
(120)
All
1
Note:
1. Power cable. Use group 144 for 60 Hz and group 145 for 50 Hz.
3420-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3422 Magnetic Tape SubSystem
3422 MAGNETIC TAPE SUBSYSTEM
MINIMUM CONFIGURATION
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
Typical Tape Unit Layouts
1 x 8 Configuration
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
1-----1-1
I
I
I
~I---'
1020
610
I
(40)
(24)
I
1-1
I
~~+
I
715
1+--(28) -
I
3422·AOI
I
+
I
I
.-/'"
560
I
(32)
+~
JJI
1020
(40)
3422-BOI
3422-AOI
3422-BOI
3422-BOI
3422-BOI
3422-BOI
3422·AOI
3422-BOI
3422-BOI
3422·BOI
3422-BOI
I
I
I
810
(2 Places)
3422-BOI
I
11-1
I
3422-BOI
II
I
2 x 16 Configuration
3422·BOI
3422·BOI
3422-BOI
JI'
II
I
Communication Cable
I
~o~ _ _ _ _ _ -.1
1-(22)
3422·BOI
3422-BOI
3422·BOI
3422·AOI
3422-BOI
3422-BOI
3422·BOI
3422·BOI
MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
'----------------------'1
I
I
I
L715
I
I
I
I
I
II
(28)
715
- - (28) -
11020
(40)
..
!
1
--nI
I
810
-tt
(32)
\1020
(40)
IL _____________________
11
~
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3422-1
3422 Magnetic Tape SubSystem
3422 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL MODEL A01
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm
= 0.5
m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
-T-'---,
F(~ ~:!:r
I
I
610
(24)
--n
I
I
~
I
340
(131/2)
25
1020
(40)
I
L~i1
~~:i2i .3422A01] ~~
65
I
~
(22)
I
I
~I~
~o~
f.-560_
__
180
SPECI F ICATIONS
Dimensions:
mm
(inches)
Side
Height
560
(22)
810
(32)
1500
(60)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
1020
(40)
1020
(40)
715
(28)
715
(28)
Service Clearances: *
810
111 III
(inches)
r
1(~g)0 I
I
Front
Weight:
295 kg (650 Ib)
Heat Output:
1 950 W (6650 BTU/hr)
Airflow:
18.5
I
~~ _ _ .__ ~
Note: Rear cover is removable.
111 3 /min
(650 cfm)
Power Requirements:**
kVA
Phases
Plug
Receptable
Connector
Power Cord Style
2.3
3
R&S, 7328
R&S, 7324
R&S, 7428
£4
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C_32°C (60°F_90°F)
20%-80%
26°C (78°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Tcmperature
Rcl Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-43°C (50° F-J 10°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
'" These service clearances arc needed to meet the
342-kilogram-per-sq uare-meter (70-pound-per-sq uarcfoot) distributed floor loading as cakulakd by IBM.
The installation site should be reviewed by a ~;tructural
engineer if the installation will reduce the service
ckarance below I 020 mm (40 im:hes). Right and left
service c1ear;mcl'S apply only at the end of the
subsystem string.
** For Canadian installLltions, brm
Idling
(dB)
48.0
I
T
No No
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Power Cord Style
1.2
1
Russellstoll, FS3720, L6-20P**
Russellstoll, FS3743, L6-20R**
Russellstoll, FS3913
A2
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C
(60°F-90°F)
20%-80%
26°C (78°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-43°C
(50 0p-II00p)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
*The Model B1 can be attached to either side of the
Model AI, with a maximum of three devices on a
side. All devices are physically attached at the
front corner, allowing up to 90 0 swing between devices.
**For 9370 installations only.
3430-2
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3430 Magnetic Tape SubSystem
3430 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL MODEL A1 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Std
Std
Cable
Group
Conn
Conn
ID
ID
ll-
0185 :
1178
2
I
I~
From 3430
Feature
Code
Std
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
0185
2
1
1178
1
3
Conn
ID
Max Length
m
(ft)
122 (400)
122 (400)
Model
Notes
Al
1
2
Al
To 3430
Feature
Code
Std
Conn
ID
2
Model
Notes
Al
1
Notes:
1. Maximum cable length must be reduced by 4.5 meters (15 feet) for each
device connected between a 3430 and the attached channel.
2. Power sequence and control; cable is optional.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3430-3
3430 Magnetic Tape SubSystem
3430 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT MODEL 81
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Front
831
(33)
Side
750
(30)
Height
1000
(39)
mm
(inches)
Front
914
(36)
Rear
914
(36)
Right
0*
(0*)
Weight:
155 kg (340Ib)
Heat Output:
360 W (1,250 BTUjhr)
Airflow:
2 m 3 /min (60 cfm)
mm
(inches)
Service Clearances:
Power Requirements:
Left
0*
(0*)
**
kVA
0.4
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C
(60°F-900P)
20%-80%
26°C (78°p)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-43°C
(50°F-1100p)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
*The Model B1 can be attached to either side of the
Model AI, with a maximum of three devices on a side.
**Powered from Model AI.
3430-4
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3480 Magnetic Tape SubSystem
3480 MAGNETIC TAPE SUBSYSTEM
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
i------------nI
I
I
I
----~~~~
++
++
++
(3~~
I
I
+
750
(29-3/4)
I
2580
(101-3/4)
3480-B 11, B22 3480-B 11, B22 3480-B 11, B22 3480-B 11, B22
I
++
++
I
+
I
915
(36)
I
I
~-
-r--
Front
510
(20)
510
(20)
I
_U-----1-
510 ~......~_610
(20)
(24)
3920
(154-1/2)
Notes:
1. Model B 11 and B22 tape units are shipped without side covers
and are bolted together during installation.
2. The internal cables that connect the Model B11 and B22 tape
units are not long enough to permit corner installations.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3480-1
3480 Magnetic Tape SubSystem
Control Unit Models A11 and A22
PLAN VIE\V (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
Specifications
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
Use IB\l Physical Planning Template GX22-7089.
mm
(inches)
Front
Side
Ileight
660
(26)
750
(29-3;4)
1 000
(39-1;2)
Sen'ice Clearances:
Front
r-?;~
80
(3)
-:I
~-I915
I
(36)
I
I
40
2580
(101-3/4)
mm
(inches)
915
(36)
Rear
Right
Left
915
(36)
0
(0)
610
(24)
'Veight:
195 kg (430 lb)
Ileat Output:
1 k\V (3,400 BTU/hr)
Airflow:
12 MJ/min (400 cfm)
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Plug type
I
iii
II
915
(36)
. . . . L . . - - A -_ _
90
(3-3/41
L-
____
I
I
_Fr~_J
Note: The 3480 Control Units with the dual-control-unit-<:ommunications coupler feature are interconnected with fixed-length cables.
These fixed-length cables have an entry/exit point at eitherm
(newer-level devices) or
iii
1
3
R&S. 3760
Receptac1~ Type
R&S. 3754
Connector I lousing
R&S. 3934
Power Cord Style
D4
~()te: See Note 9 on page 3480.6.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
15°C-32°C (60°F-90°F)
20~o-80~·o
25.6°C (78°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max \Vet Bulb
lO O C-43°C(50°F-11OOF)
8%-80%
26.7°C (80°F)
m
(early-level devices!. Early-level
devices may use either the side cable entry/exit floor cutout
or the rear cable entry/exit floor cutout
B
(6" x 12").
a-
Newer-level devices must use the rear cable entry/exit floor
cutout
Cable length measurements must be made between
these cable entry/exit locations on the two control units.
See the table on page 3480.5 for the serial number range of the
newer-level devices_
(Front View)
3480-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3480 Magnetic Tape SubSystem
Specifications
3480 Tape Unit Models 811 and 822
Plan View C\letric Scale: lOmm-O.25 m)
Dimensions:
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IB:'vl Physical Planning Template GX22-7089.
mm
(inches)
Front
Side
Height
S10
(20)
7S0
(29-3,4)
1 000*
(39-1/2)*
Service Clearances:
Front
~~
l
----,
"--1
I
I
----...-t
I
915
(36)
40
510
(20)
(1·3/4)
; - - - - r - -.....
(29·3/4)
t!=
(~~
2~0
(105-3141
1--.
~P'~~~
1015
I
I
3480.811, 822
I
(401
-L._--IL....-_ _ _
i
~
L __
91S
(36)
610***
(24)** *
0
(0)
Ileat Output:
800 \V (2,700 BTU;hr)
Airflow:
12 M J jmin (400 cfm)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM
General Information Manual: Installation
!rlanual-Physical Planning. GC22-7072.
m
Li'Ad
Operating
(bels)
7.3
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
7.4
Power Requirements:
I
Left
ISS kg (340 lb)
I
510
(20)
Right
Weight:
I
750
91S**
(36)**
mm
(inches)
Rear
55.0
Idling
(dB)
I
T
56.0
No
No
t
kVA
Phases
0.9
3
Em'ironment, Operating:
Front
__
~
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
IS.6°C-32.0°C
(60°F -90°F)
200. 0 -80%
2S.6°C (78°F)
Em'ironment, l\' onoperating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max \Vet Bulb
10°C-43°C (SO°F -110°F)
8%-80%
26.
(80° F)
rc
~otes:
3480·811 • 822 with
Feature 2511 Installed
*The operator's control panel extends an additional
80 mm (3-1/4 inches) above the top cover.
**Feature 2SII requires an additional 100 mm (4
inches) of service clearance at the front of the
3480-Bll and -822.
* * *The right service clearance applies to only the
rightmost tape unit attached to a control unit.
t Power is received from the 3480 Control Unit.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3480-3
3480 Magnetic Tape SubSystem
3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Cabling Schematic
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Conn
Conn
ID
10
Note 4
3211
-
Dual Control
2
-
Channel A
4
-
Channel B
6
-
Channel C
8
-
Channel 0
-{ 0185
Std
1178
9
0185
3355
-{
(1511*)
1178
0185
3355
-{
(1512*)
1178
0185
3355
-{
(1513*)
1178
3
11
5
13
7
15
From 3480
To 3480
Feature
Code
Group No. of Conn Max length
( ft)
m
No.
Cables 10
3211
None
2
Std
0185
2
1
1178
1
0185
3355
(1511*)
3355
(1512*)
3355
(1513*)
Feature
Code
Conn
All, A22 4
3211
None All, A22
4
122 (409)
All, A22 1,2
Std
2
All, A22
2
9
122 (400)
All, A22 2,3
3355
4
All, A22
2
2
3
122 (409)
All, A22 1,2
3355
6
All, A22
2
1178
1
11
122 (400)
All, A22 2,3
3355
8
All, A22
2
0185
2
5
122 (400)
All, A22 1,2
1178
1
13
122 (400)
All, A22 2,3
0185
2
7
122 (400)
All, A22 1,2
1178
1
15
122 (400)
All, A22 2,3
None
6 (20)
Model
Notes
ID
Model
Notes
*See Note 3
Notes:
1. To detennine the applicable blue or grey channel cable for a specific device, use the following criteria:
For all control units that meet OEMI data-transfer interface specifications of 4.5 l\1B per second, use
either blue or grey in matched color pairs of the same length (within the length restrictions controlled by
channel speed).
CaHe group 0185 (IBM-manufactured blue cable) has a maximum length of 122 m (400 ft) for attachment to a System/370 data-streaming channel.
The following 3480 devices meet OENU interface applications:
\1 ·
IBM 3480 Control Unit l'vlodels A22 shipped before 28 November 1988 that are upgraded with 3306
and 3354 or 3355
• IBM 3480 Control Unit lVlodels A22 shipped after 28 November 1988 that specify 9001
The following 3480 devices do not meet OEM I interface specifications:
• IB:Yl 3480 Control Unit lVlodels All
• IBM 3480 Control Unit lVlodels A22 shipped before 28 November 1988
o IBM 3480 Control Unit I'vlodels A22 shipped before 28 November 1988 that are not upgraded with
3306 and 3354 or 3355
Physical placement of all 3480 sybsystems that meet OEMI specifications is arbitrary if:
3480-4
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3480 Magnetic Tape SubSystem
• The channel operates at a data-transfer rate of less than 4.5 MB per second.
• The channel has PROTOCL = S4 option of the IOCP CNTLUNIT statement at 4.5 MB per
second.
Physical placement of all 3480 sybsystems that meet OE:vtI specifications and other channel-attaching
devices must be in the following order:
• All devices that meet the data-transfer rate of 4.5 ylB per second with PROTOCL = S4 if the datatransfer rate does not exceed 4.5 MB per second in DC interlock or data-streaming mode
• All remaining units
Customers who use IBlVt-manufactured grey cable (or a mix of grey and blue within the restrictions
noted above) for attaching IBM 3480 subsystems that meet OEMI specifications to a
4.5-MB-per-second channel at channel-to-terminator distances greater than 90 m (300 ft) must submit a
no-charge RPQ 8B0115.
A description of the configuration must be included. Such cases will be considered for approval on an
individual basis. Standard rules related to cable-length deductions for additional control-unit attachments should be applied to the 90 m (300 ft) base. The maximum lengths must be reduced by 4.5 m (15
ft) for each control unit connected between a channel and the 3480 subsystem.
The rate of data transfer varies for non-data-streaming channels depending on the cable length.
The maximum instantaneous data rate of 1.5 MB per second can be realized on a non-data-streaming
channel up to a total cable length of 25 m (80 ft). The subsystem will function with lengths beyond 25
m (80 ft), but the data rate decreases as the cable length is increased. The maximum cable length of 122
m (400 ft) will limit the channel's instantaneous data rate to approximately 650 KB per second.
2. One channel attachment is standard on the 3480 Control Unit. Three additional channel attachments
may be added by ordering one feature 3355 for each additional channel. To upgrade presently installed
channels to 4.5-MB-per-second capability, order one feature 3355 for each channel. Ord~r one cable
group 0185 and 1178 for each channel attachment. The maximum length applies to each channel
attachment. Three additional channel attachments (second, third, and fourth, that is, features 1511,
1512, and 1513, respectively) were available until 27 September 1988.
3. Sequence and control cable (one for each using channel) is optional.
4. The dual-control-unit-communications-coupler feature (two fixed-length cables) is available on a
purchase-only basis. Only one feature is needed to couple two l\lodel AIls or two lVlodel A22s
together. The feature should be ordered as feature 3211 when the subsystem and the the feature are
shipped together from the plant. For separate shipment of the feature, also order feature 3211. lVlodel
All Control Units require dual communication feature 3201 in addition to feature 3211 before dualcontrol-unit communications can be established.
5. All cables required to connect the 3480 Tape Units to the 3480 Control Unit are supplied by IBlV! and
are shipped with the tape unit.
6. When the 3480 Model A22/B22 subsystem is attached to the IBM 3044 Fiber-Optic Channel Extender
Link Model C02 or D02, the 3044 allows the following fiber-optic cable lengths between the host
processor and the 3480 device:
Fiber-Optic Cable Length
l\lodel A22/B22
3.0 megabytes per second Up to 400 m (1310 ft)
4.5 megabytes per second Up to 244 m (800 ft)
4.5 megabytes per second Up to 3 km (9845 ft) with feature code 6053 (lBNI 3044 Enhanced Tape
Attachment)
For further information, see IBM Fiber-Optic Channel Extender Link iV/odels C02 and D02 Product
Description.
For pre-requisite conditions, check RETAIN, device 3480, ECA 052, or record number H021550.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3480-5
3480 Magnetic Tape SubSystem
7. The maximum cable length via 2604 lOP attachment to a 9406 processor is 61 m (200 ft).
8. \Vhen a raised platform is required for the installation of the 3480 sybsystem, the platform must be constructed to simulate a computer-room floor.
9. Phase balancing is reconunended for any installation operating more than three full strings of 3480s. To
accomplish phase balancing, start at the second string of 3480s and rotate the ac power cord connections
in the acbox. lV10ve the power cord connection from phase 1 to phase 2, phase 2 to phase 3, and phase
3 to phase 1. In the third string, move the power cord connection from phase 1 to phase 3, phase 2 to
phase 1, and phase 3 to phase 2.
For each three full string of 3480s after the fITst three strings, repeat the above procedure until all strings
are included. After the rotations are completed, label the control units to identify the rotation in each
control unit, for example,
Label for system 1: SYS. 1 No rotation Label for system 2: SYS. 2 CW rotation phase 1 to phase 2,
etc. Label for system 3: SYS. 3 CW rotation phase 1 to phase 3, etc.
No phasing reset is necessary if the system is relocated within the same room or to another site. As
systems are relocated, even numbers of systems 1, systems 2, and systems 3 ensure the best load balance.
The following example shows the results of the rotation:
Phase 1
Total
Phase 2
System (amperes) (amperes) (amperes)
Phase 3
Total
Total
(amperes) (amperes) (amperes)
1
5.5
5.5
7.6
7.6
6.1
6.1
2
6.1
11. 6
5.5
13.1
7.6
13.7
3
7.6
19.2
6.1
19.2
5.5
19.2
3480-6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Models A01, A10, 802, 804, 820, and 840
Plan View (Not to Scale): English measurements are shown in parentheses.
I"
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-712B.
~
r------lTI
-..
-'- I \~~O I
,,-
11-I
..:c.
"t"t-r
t-r
1-
3490-A01 3490-802, 3490-802.
804
804
I
II
I
~+I±-=
+
-+ +
/1 m
!.wAd
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
I
T
7.7
7.6
59.0
58.0
No
No
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
16°C to 32°C
(60°F to gO°F)
20% to 80%
2S.6°C (78°F)
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
10°C to 43°C
(SO°F to 110°F)
8% to 80%
27°C (80°F)
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Acoustical Data (for one A20 and four 840 units)
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
the IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
< LpA>m
!.wAd
Hz
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
I
T
50
7.3
7.3
55.0
55.0
Yes
No
60
7.4
7.4
56.0
56.0
Yes
No
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-5
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Tape Unit Models 802, 804, 820, and 840
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
Specifications:
urements are shown in parentheses.
725
(28-1/2)
-..
1 020
(40)
t
2 695
(106)
865
Dimensions (with covers):
Side
Front
610
(24)
-
mm
(inches)
4-
;;
T
3490-802,
804
mm
(inches)
+
815
(32)
1020
(40)
Left
o
610
(24)
(0)
"'Multiple strings of 3490 units can be butted
together. However, a service clearance of 610 mm
(24 in.) must be allowed at the right rear of the last
Model 802, 804, 820, or 840 in a string.
815
(32)
--"
1770
(70)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right'"
of
t-
870
(34-114)
725
(28-1/2)
Note: The display panel extends 190 mm (7-1/2
in.) above the top cover when the panel is fully
lowered. The cartridge loader is flush with the
front cover of Model 802, 804, 820, or 840.
40
(1-3/4)
(34)
Height
rr:.~Dl
See page 3490-3 for more weight distribution and
service clearance requirements.
Model B02
or B20
Model B04
or B40
324 kg
(715Ib)
338 kg
(745 Ib)
422 kg
(930Ib)
449 kg
(990Ib)
kW
(k8TU/hr)
Heat Output:
0.7
(2.2)
1.4
(4.5)
m3 /min
(cfm)
Airflow:
10.2
(360)
10.2
(360)
Weight:
60 Hz
50 Hz
•
•
Power Requirements (power supplied by Model
A01, A02, A10, or A20):
kVA
Phases
Front view of Model 804 or 840 (right) and
Model 802 or 820 (left)
3490-6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
1.4
3
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Acoustical Data: See Acoustical Data for Model
A02 or A20.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
1S0C to 32°C
(SOOF to 90°F)
20% to 80%
2S.SoC (78°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C to 43°C
(SO°F to 110°F)
8% to 80%
27°C (80°F)
Chapter 1. Machine Speclncatlons and Cabling Schematics
3490.. 7
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Cabling Schematic for 3490 Model A01 or A10 Parallel Channel
Feature
Code
3355
3355
Cable Conn
Group 10
-[
-[
8185
1
1178
9
8185
3
1178
11
8185
5
1178
13
8185
7
Conn
ID
2 +- Channel A
C
o
n
t
r
o
4 +- Channel B
1
3355
3355
-[
-[
6 +- Channel C
U
n
;
t
8 +- Channel 0
1178
15
~
From 3498 Model A81 or A18
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn 10
Max Length
m (ft)
Model
3355
8185
2
1
122 (488)
A81 or A18
1,3,4,7,9
1178
1
9
122 (488)
A81 or A18
5
8185
2
3
122 (488)
A81 or A18
1,3,4,7,9
1178
1
11
122 (488)
A81 or A18
5
8185
2
5
122 (488)
A81 or A18
1,3,4,7,9
1178
1
13
122 (488)
A81 or A18
5
8185
2
7
122 (488)
A81 or A18
1,3,4,7,9
1178
1
15
122 (488)
A81 or A18
5
3355
3355
3355
To 3498 Model A81 or A18
Feature Code
Conn ID
Model
Notes
3355
2
A81 or A18
3,4
3355
4
A81 or Ale
3,4
3355
6
A81 or A18
3,4
3355
8
A81 or A18
3,4
3490-8
Input/Output EquIpment InstallatIon Manual-PhysIcal PlannIng
Notes
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Cabling Schematic for 3490 Model A02 or A20 Parallel Channel
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Conn
ID
Conn
ID
0185 +- 1
C
3356--~
1178 +- 9
0
!H85 +- 3
n
t
r
1178 +- 11
0
3357*
3356 --...-1 -{
2
4
Channel A
4
4
Channel B
6
4
Channel C
8
4
Channel D
18
4
Channel A
20
4
Channel B
22
4
Channel C
24
4
Channel D
1
0185 +- 5
_
3356
-{
__
3356
-{
U
0185 +- 7
n
i
t
1178 +- 15
e
1178 +- 13
9185 +- 17
C
1178 +- 25
0
0185 +- 19
n
t
r
1178 +- 27
0
1
B185 +- 21
U
9185 +- 23
n
i
t
1178 +- 31
1
1178 +- 29
*Feature code 3357 adds 1 parallel adapter to the second control unit
function with the Hodel AlB to Hodel A2B upgrade.
From 349B Hodel AB2 or A2B
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
3356
9185
4
1 and 17 122 (490)
A82 or A29
1,2,3,4,7,9
1178
1
9 or 25
122 (480)
A02 or A29
5
B185
4
3 and 19 122 (490)
AB2 or A29
1,2,3,4,7,9
1178
1
11 or 27 122 (499)
AB2 or A2B
5
B185
4
5 and 21 122 (499)
AB2 or A2B
1,2,3,4,7,9
1178
1
13 or 29 122 (490)
AB2 or A29
5
9185
4
7 and 23 122 (4Be)
AB2 or A2e
1,2,3,4,7,9
1178
1
15 or 31 122 (490)
AB2 or A2B
5
3356
3356
3356
Conn ID
Max Length
m (ft)
Hodel
Notes
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and cabling Schematics
3490-9
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
To 3499 Model A92 or A28
Conn 10
Model
3356
2 and 18
A82 or A28
3,4
3356
4 and 28
A82 or A28
3,4
3356
6 and 22
A82 or A29
3,4
3356
8 and 24
A82 or A28
3,4
Feature Code
Notes
Notes:
1. For parallel channel adapters, Model A01, A02, A10, or A20 attaches to the following processors:
308x, 309x, ES/3090, ES/9000, 4341, 4361 (no data chaining), 4381, and 937x.
The 3490 ESCON adapters may be used only on Models A01, A02, A10, or A20 with ESCON-capable
IBM processors.
2. Model A02 or A20 is configured as a dual control unit and needs no additional cabling'. Control
units 0 and 1 reside in the same A02 or A20 frame.
3. For Model A01 or A 10, specify code 3311 to add one ESCON adapter and specify code 3355 for each
parallel channel attachment. For Model A02 or A20, specify code 3312 to add two ESCON adapters
and specify code 3356 for each pair of parallel channel attachments. Specify code 3356 cannot be
used to order cables for Model A01 or A10.
Up to two ESCON adapters or four parallel channel attachments for each control unit function may
be ordered for a total of four ESCON adapters or eight parallel channels for each Model A02 or
A20. All Model A02 or A20 parallel channel attachments must be ordered in pairs. If parallel channels and ESCON adapters are mixed, the parallel feature must be inserted in the first slot.
4. The rate of data transfer varies on non-data-streaming channels depending on the cable length.
The maximum cable length must be reduced by 4.5 m (15 tt) for each unit connected between
Model A01, A02, A10, or A20 and the channel. The maximum instantaneous data rate of 1.5 Mb per
second can be realized on a non-data-streaming channel up to a total cable length of 15 m (50 tt).
The subsystem functions with cable lengths beyond 15 m (50 tt), but the data rate decreases as the
cable length is increased. The maximum cable length of 122 m (400 tt) limits the channel's instantaneous data rate to approximately 710 Kb per second.
5. Power sequence and control cable (order one of cable group 1178 for each using channel) is
optional.
6. All cables required to connect Model B02 or B04 to Model A01 or A02, and Model B20 or B40 to
Model A10 or A20 are supplied by IBM and shipped with the tape unit.
7. Either gray or IBM-manufactured blue channel cables in matched pairs of the same length may be
used for Model A01, A02, A10, or A20.
If customers use gray cables with a cable length longer than 90 m (300 ft) to attach Model A01, A02,
A10, or A20 to a 4.5 Mb-per-second channel, they must submit an RPQ for evaluation of their installation plan. A description of the configuration must be included.
8. Models B02 and B04 may only be attached to Model A01 or A02. Models B20 and B40 may only be
attached to Model A10 or A20.
3490-10
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
9. When Model A01, A02, A10, or A20 is attached to the IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link
Model C02 or 002, the 3044 allows the following fiber optic cable lengths between the host
processor and the 3490 device:
Model A01, A02, A 10, or A20
3.0 Mb per second
4.5 Mb per second
4.5 Mb per second
Fiber Optic Cable Length
Up to 400 m (1310 tt)
Up to 244 m (800 ft)
Up to 3 km (9845 ft) with feature code 605
Tape Attachment feature)
3 (3044 Enhanced
For more information, see IBM Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link Models C02 and D02 Product
Description, GA22-7129.
10. If a raised platform is required for the installation of the 3490 Model A01, A02, B02, or B04 subsystem or the 3490 Model A10, A20, B20, or B40 subsystem, the platform must be constructed to
simulate a computer-room floor.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-11
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Cabling Schematic for 3490 Model A01 ESCON Adapters
Feature
Code
Cable Conn
Group ID
3311
3797 +- 51
I
3315
3317
C
0
n
t
3311
3315
3317
I
r
0
1
3797 +- 55
U
n
i
t
From 3498 Model A81
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn IO
Max Length
m (ft)
Model
3311
3315
3317
3797
1
51
122 (488)*
Ae1
1,3
3311
3315
3317
3797
1
55
122 (488)*
A81
1,3
Notes
Add 610 mm (24 in.) to each channel length of fiber optic cable to
provide the needed length to reach ESCON ports inside all 3490 models.
3490-12
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Cabling Schematic for 3490 Model A10 ESCON Adapters
Feature
Code
Cable Conn
Group ID
3311
3315
3317
3797 +- 51
3311
3315
3317
3311
3315
3317
3311
3315
3317
J
J
J
J
C
0
n
t
3797 +- 53
r
0
1
3797 +- 55
U
n
;
t
3797 +- 57
From 3498 Model A18
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn ID
Max Length
m (ft)
Model
3311
3315
3317
3797
1
51
122 (488)*
A18
1.3
3797
1
53
122 (488)*
A18
1.3
3797
1
55
122 (488)*
A18
1.3
3797
1
57
122 (488)*
A18
1.3
Notes
Add 610 mm (24 in.) to each channel length of fiber optic cable to
provide the needed length to reach ESCON ports inside all 3490 models.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-13
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Cabling Schematic for 3490 Model A02 ESCON Adapters
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
3312
3314
3316
3797
Conn
10
.-
51
C
0
n
t
r
0
- 3797
.-
1
53
U
n
i
t
0
3312
3314
3316
3797
.-
67
C
0
n
t
r
0
3797
.-
1
71
U
n
i
t
1
From 3499 Hodel A92
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn 10
Hax Length
m (ft)
Model
Notes
3312
3314
3316
3797
1
51
122 (400)*
A02
1,2,3
3797
1
67
122 (400)*
A92
1,2,3
3312
3314
3316
3797
1
55
122 (400)*
A02
1,2,3
3797
1
71
122 (400)*
A02
1,2,3
Add 610 mm (24 in.) to each channel length of fiber optic cable to
provide the needed length to reach ESCON ports inside all 3490 models.
3490-14
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Cabling Schematic for 3490 Model A20 ESCON Adapters
Feature
Code
cable
Group
Conn
10
3797
4-
51
C
0
3797
4-
53
n
t
r
0
331U
3314
3316
1
U
- - - 3797
4-
55
3797
...
57
...
67
n
i
t
8
331rr - 3314
3316
C
0
...
69
n
t
r
0
1
U
-
3797
4-
71
3797
4-
73
n
i
t
1
*Feature code 3313 adds 1 ESCON adapter to the second control unit
function ~th the Hodel A18 to Hodel A28 upgrade.
From 3498 Model A28
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cabl es
Conn 10
Max Length
(ft)
Hodel
Notes
3312
3314
3316
3797
1
51.67
122 (488)*
A28
1.2.3
3797
1
53.69
122 (488)*
A28
1.2.3
3797
1
55.71
122 (488)*
A28
1.2.3
3797
1
57.73
122 (488)*
A28
1.2.3
•
Add 610 mm (24 In.) to each channel length of fiber optic cable to
provide the needed length to reach ESCON ports Inside all 3490 models.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-15
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
ESCON Adapters for 3490 Model A01, A02, A10, or A20: The 3490 ESCON adapters may be
used only on 3490 Tape Unit Models A01, A02, A10, or A20 with ESCON-capable IBM processors.
Model
Model
Model
Model
A01
A02
A10
A20
2
4
4
8
ESCON
ESCON
ESCON
ESCON
adapters
adapters
adapters
adapters
(Feature)
(2 per control unit function) (Feature)
(Feature)
(2 per control unit function) (Feature)
The addition of an ESCON adapter allows the location of any 3490 model up to 9 km, through data
routers, from the central processing facility. The distance per link is limited as follows:
50.0/125 micron cable
62.5/125 micron cable
2 km (6600 ft.)
3 km (9845 ft.)
The total distance capability with two data routers is limited as follows:
50.0/125 micron cable
62.5/125 micron cable
6 km (13 200 ft.)
9 km (19 800 ft.)
Each 3490 ESCON adapter feature installed on Model A02 or A20 provides two ESCON adapters, one
adapter on each control unit function. One jumper cable per port is included with each installed
ESCON feature, but it must be ordered separately. A description of addition and removal options per
adapter, 3490 model, and pertinent feature follows:
Description
IBM 3490
Add 1 ESCON adapter.
Model A01 or A10
,3311
Add 2 ESCON adapters.
Model A02 or A20
3312
Add 1 ESCON adapter to the second control unit function
in upgrades from A01 to A02 or A10 to A20.
Model A01, A02,
A10, or A20
3313
Add 1 ESCON adapter and return 1 parallel channel adapter.
Model A01 or A10
3315
Add 1 ESCON adapter and return 2 parallel channel adapters.
Model A01 or A10
3317
Add 2 ESCON adapters and return 2 parallel channel adapters.
Model A02 or A20
3314
Add 2 ESCON adapters and return 4 parallel channel adapters.
Model A02 or A20
3316
Feature
Note: Parallel adapters removed by feature code 3314,3315,3316, or 3317 are the property of IBM and must be
returned to IBM.
3490-16
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
The following combinations of ESCON adapters and parallel channels are allowed for the sUbsystem:
Model A01
Model A02
ESCON
Adapters
Parallel
Channels
ESCON
Adapters
Parallel
Channels
0
1
2
1,2,3, or 4
0, 1, or 2
0
0
2
4
2,4,6, or 8
0,2, or 4
0
Model A10
Model A20
ESCON
Adapters
Parallel
Channels
ESCON
Adapters
Parallel
Channels
0
1
2
3
4
1,2,3, or 4
1, 2, or 3
2
1
0
0
2
4
6
8
2,4,6, or 8
2,4, or 6
2 or 4
2
0
Up to four parallel channel attachments are permitted on Model A01 or A10, and up to eight parallel
channel attachments on Model A02 or A20.
For Model A01 or A10, one ESCON Adapter feature 3311 provides one ESCON adapter for the single
control unit function. For Model A02 or A20, one ESCON Adapter feature 3312 provides one ESCON
adapter for each control unit function for a total of two ESCON adapters.
One ESCON Adapter feature or one Parallel Channel Attach feature is required for each control unit
function, that is, one channel connection per Model A01 or A10 and two channel connections per Model
A02 or A20.
IBM 3490
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
A01
A01
A01
A02
A02
A02
A20
A20
or A 10
or A10
or A10
or A20
or A20
orA20
Feature Installed
Feature Removed
Feature Quantity Removed
3311
3315
3317
3312
3314
3316
3313
N/A
N/A
3355
3355
N/A
3356
3356
N/A
3357
o
1
2
o
1
2
o
o
Notes:
1. Feature code 3313 or 3357 is used only for upgrades from Model A10 to A20.
2. All parts of feature codes 3314, 3315, 3316, and 3317 that are removed are the property of IBM and
must be returned to IBM.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-17
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Fiber optic jumper cables are required to attach a 3490 with ESCON adapters to dynamic data routers.
Duplex to duplex 62.5/125 micron fiber optic jumper cables (part number 14F3797) are available from
IBM in standard lengths up to 122 m (400 ft). Custom lengths are available above 122 m (400 ft) to a
maximum length of 500 m (1640 ft). The jumper cables are stocked in the following 11 fixed lengths:
4 m (12
7 m (20
13 m (40
22 m (70
31 m (100
46 m (150
ft)
ft)
ft)
ft)
ft)
ft)
61
77
92
107
122
m (200
m (250
m (300
m (350
m (400
ft)
ft)
ft)
ft)
ft)
One jumper per port is included with each installed ESCON adapter feature, but it must be ordered
separately.
3490-18
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Magnetic Tape Subsystem Enhanced
Capability Models C10, C11, and C22
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
The 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Enhanced
Capability Models C10, C11, and C22 (also
known as the 3490E) can be installed in an IBM
9309-2 Rack. The 3490E Models C10, C11, and
C22 require 14 EIA Units of space.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX24-4046
(English Scale) or GX24-4047 (Metric Scale).
urements are shown in parentheses.
Plan View of Control Unit and Drive
Units in 9309 Rack.
t
~
Definitions of the 3490E models are:
635
(25)
C10
Control Unit and one drive.
C11
Control Unit and one drive with an
automatic cartridge loader.
C22
Control Unit and two drives with two
automatic cartridge loaders.
f
127
(5)
The control unit is contained in a mounting
sleeve; the drive or drives with their associated
power supplies are contained in another sleeve.
The drive sleeve must be installed directly below
the control unit sleeve.
One 3490E Model C10, C11, or C22 can be
installed in a 9406 System Unit Expansion, 9406
Bus Extension Unit, or 9309-2 Rack. For more
information, see IBM 9309 Rack Enclosure
General Information and Site Preparation Guide,
GA24-4103. For AS/400 physical planning information see IBM Application System/400 Physical
Planning Guide, GA21-9S71.
820
(36-1/4)
l
!
I
•
~
26
915 (1-1/8)
~(36)
915
"'---(38)
aao
152
(6)
(26)
.L
+
+--L
:
I
650
1·(25-1/2)
----r-__._-,r-
I
750
(29-1/2)
~
1.-482-.1
1- (19)
-I
1520
(60)
Illustration of Control Unit in Sleeve
Illustration of Drive Units in Sleeve
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-19
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Specifications
3490E Control Unit Ci0, Cii, C22 Dimensions:
SIde 1
Height
Front
mm (in.)
480 (19)
845
130 ( 5-1/4)
(33-1/4)
3. The front service clearances given are only
for the 3490E. Other equipment installed in
the rack is not included.
4. Models C11 and C22 data includes the
weight of the automatic cartridge loader or
loaders.
3490E Drive Unit Ci0, Cii, C22 Dimensions:'
Front
Side z
Height
mm (in.)
479 (19)
800
485 (19)
(31-1/2)
5. The data shown includes a C22 installed in a
9309-2 Rack. Other equipment that may be
installed in the same rack is not included.
9309-2 Dimensions:
Front
mm (in.)
650
(25-3/4)
6. The right and left service clearances are
required for minimum floor loading per IBM
standards. If X and Y must be reduced
below that, a structural engineer must be
consulted.
9309 Service Clearances:
Front3
Left
Side
mm (in.)
1524
o (0)
(60)
Side
920
(36-1/4)
Height
1580
(62-114)
Right
Side
o (0)
Rear
Power Requirements:
760 (30)
340 kg/mZ (70 Ib/ftZ) Floor Load Rating, 9309-2 with
Ci0, Cii, or C22: 1
Front
Left
Right
Rear
All
765 (30)
o
o
1525
Models
(60)
240 kg/m2(SO Ib/ft2) Floor Load Rating, 9309-2
Ci0, Cii, or C22:1
Front
Leftl
Right1525
C10
130
130
(60)
(5-114)
(~1/4)
C11
1525
130
130
(60)
(5-1/4)
(5-1/4)
C22
1525
255
255
(60)
(10)
(10)
with
Rear
765 (30)
765 (30)
765 (30)
Model
Ci0
0.57
kVA
Phases
Voltages
Frequency
Model
Cii
0.57
Heat
Output:
kW
kCal/hr
(kBTU/hr)
Airflow:
m 3/min
9309-2
Ci0
Cii"
140
85
90
(310)
(185)
(200)
Model
Model
Ci0
Cii
0.52
0.52
446 (1.77)
446 (1.77)
C22"
120
(260)
Model C22
0.85
731 (2.90)
Note: See IBM 9309 Rack Enclosure Generallnformation and Site Preparation Guide, GA24-4103, for
plug type, receptacle type, connector and power cord
style.
Acoustical Data (Preliminary):
Operatlng
(bels)
m
Idling
(bels)
Operatlng
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
I
5.8
5.8
42
42
No No
~11
6.1
5.8
44
42
rtes No
~22
6.4
6.3
47
46
!yes No
Environment:
9.6 (340)
9.6 (340)
9.6 (340)
1. The side dimension includes the control unit
operator panel and rear tailgate.
2. The side dimension includes the message
display. The automatic cartridge loader,
when installed, adds 180 mm (7-1/4 in.) to
the side dimension.
T
~10
Operating:
Notes:
3490-20
0.90
200 to 240 V ac-RMS with no adjustment required
50/60 Hz with no adjustment required
LwAd
Weight:
kg (Ibs)
Model C22
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Max Wet
Bulb
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
16°C to
32°C
(60°F to
90°F)
20% to
800/0
2S.6°C
(78°F)
Nonoperating:
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Max Wet
Bulb
10°C to
43°C
(SO°F to
110°F)
8% to
80%
27°C
(80°F)
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Note: The environments described above apply
to the components of the 3490E subsystem. For
specifications on the environmental limits of the
Cartridge System Tape media, see the IBM Magnetic Tape and Cartridge Requirements,
GA32-0048.
Chapter .1. Machine Speclncatlons and cabling Schematics
3490-21
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
AS/400 Cabling Schematic for 3490E Models C10, C11, and C22
Feature
Code
cable Conn
Group 10
2 +- Channel A
Reserved
5
3
{ a185
5837
10
1
{ 0185
5837
Conn
4 +- Channel B
Reserved
7
To 3490E Models C10, C11, and C22
Feature Code
Conn. 10
Model
Notes
5037
2
5037
4
All
All
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
From 3490E Models C10, C11, and C22
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn. 10
9928
-
2
1/3
1.7 ( 5.6)
9929
-
2
1/3
6.6 (21.6)
9930
-
2
1/3
24 (78.7)
5037
0185
2
1/3
122 (400)
Max Length
m (ft)
Model
All
All
All
All
Notes
1,2,3,5,6
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
1,2,3,4,5,6
1,2,3,4,5
Cabling Notes
Notes:
1. Models C10, C11, and C22 are configured as single integrated control unit and and tape drives and
. need no additional cabling.
2. Parallel channel adapters are available on Models C10, C11, and C22 allowing attachment to a
9406.
The following configurations are allowed for the 3490E C10, C11, and C22:
• One parallel channel adapter on tailgate channel A
• Two parallel channel adapters on tailgate channel A and B.
3. 3490E Models C10, C11, and C22 do not support Remote Power Sequence and Control.
4. For optional channel cables up to 61 m (200 tt), do not specify the To Conn 10.
5. Models C10, C11, and C22 cannot use ESCON channels when attached only to 9406 processors.
6. Cables 9928, 9929, 9930 are D-shell to D-shell cables to connect the tape control unit to the
processor.
7. For more information on AS/400 attachment, see Physical Planning and Reference, GA41-9S71.
3490-22
Input/Output Equipment Insta"atlon Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
MVS/VM Cabling Schematic for 3490 C10, C11, C22
Feature
Code
Cable Conn
Group ID
51:)37
0185
51:)37
1:)185
3
3797
53
Conn
ID
~+- Channel
3797:[]
3319
3319
A
4 .- Channel B
To 3490E C10, C11, C22
Feature Code
Conn.' 10
Model
Notes
5037
2
All
1,2,3
5037
4
All
1,2,3
From 3490E C10, C11, C22
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn. 10
3319
3797
2
51
122 (400)'"
All
1,2,3,4,5
Max Length •
m (ft)
Model
Notes
3319
3797
2
53
122 (400)'"
All
1,2,3,4,5
5037
0185
2
1
122 (400)
All
1,2,3
5037
·0185
2
3
122 (400)
All
1,2,3
Note: ... Add 2286 mm (90 in.) to each channel length of fiber optic cable to reach the ESCON ports on all
models.
Cabling Notes
Notes:
1. Internal channel cable configurations can be specified. See the IBM sales manual.
2. 3490E Models C10, C11, C22 do not support Remote Power Sequence and Control.
3. Parallel channel adapters on the Models C10, C11, and C22 allow attachment to the following
processors: 3090, ES/3090, 4381, 937x, and 9406.
4. The following configurations are allowed for 3490E Models C10, C11, and C22:
Parallel Channels:
• One parallel channel adapter in position A
• Two parallel channel adapters in positions A and B
ESCON Ports:
• One ESCON adapter in position A
• Two ESCON adapters in positions A and B
• One parallel channel adapter and one ESCON adapter in positions A and B
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-23
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
4. Each ESCON adapter feature installed on Models C10, C11, and C22 provides one ESCON adapter.
One jumper cable per port is included with each installed ESCON feature, but it must be ordered
separately. A description of addition and remove options per adapter and pertinent features
follows:
Description
3490E Model
Feature
Installed
Feature
Removed
Quantity
Removed
1 ESCON adapter
C10, C11, or C22
C10, C11, or C22
3319
5037
N/A
N/A
o
o
1 parallel channel adapter
The ESCON and parallel channel adapters can be ordered and installed only in the following combinations:
ESCON Adapter
Parallel Channel
1
1
o
o
1
2
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
o
2
o
1
IBM 3490E
C10,
C10,
C10,
C10,
C10,
C11,
C11,
C11,
C11,
C11,
or
or
or
or
or
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
5. 3490E Models C10, C11, and C22 support ESCON data rates to a maximum of 9.0 Mb per second
and cables lengths as listed below. A 3490E model C10, C11, or C22 with ESCON Adapter features
can be located up to 23 km from the host processor by interconnecting one or two ESCON· Directors.
Fiber Optic jumper cables are required for attaching 3490E Models C10, C11, and C22 with ESCON
Adapters to ESCON Directors. Duplex-to-duplex 62.5/125 micron fiber optic jumper cables (PN 14F3797)
are available from IBM in standard lengths up to 122 meters (400 feet). Custom lengths are available
above 122 meters (400 feet) to a maximum length of 500 meters (1,640 feet). The jumper cables are
stocked in the following fixed lengths.
4m(13tt)
31 m (102 tt)
92 m (302 tt)
7 m (23 tt)
46 m (151 tt)
107 m (352 tt)
13 m (43 tt)
61 m (200 tt)
122 m (400 tt)
22 m (73 tt)
77 m (253 tt)
When the subsystem is attached to the IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link Model C02 or 002,
the 3044 allows fiber optic cable lengths between the host processor and 3490E device of:
Model C10, C11, or C22
Fiber Optic Cable Length (ESCON)
3.0 Mb per second
4.5 Mb per second
4.5 Mb per second
Up to 400 m (1312 ft)
Up to 244 m (801 ft)
Up to 3 km (9821 ft) with feature code 6053
For more fiber optics installation information, see Fiber Optic Channel Link Planning and Installation,
GA23-0367. For more product information, see IBM Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link Models C02 and
D02 Product Description.
3490-24
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Magnetic Tape Subsystem Model D31 or D41
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
Specifications:
urements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
Side
Front
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-712B.
275
(10-3/4)
LeftJl[
o
(0)
*If Model 031 or 041 Is at either end of a string, It
requires service clearances of610 mm (24 In.) at either
the left front or the right front and 610 mm (24 In.)
between the wall and the end unit.
115
(4-1/2)
(4X)
Weight:
377 kg (830 Ib)
(with one cartridge loader)
Heat Output:
1.0 kW (3.3 kBTU/hr)
Airflow:
13.0 m3/mln (450 cfm)
Power Requirements:
1.0
kVA
1
Phases
L6-30P
Plug Type
L6-30R
Receptacle Type
3 wire, no shield
Power Cord Style
Wire size, 1.5 mm 2
Bulk wire 00, 8.9 mm
610
(40)
1580
(62-1/4)
950
(37-1/4)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right
1 020
815
0
(40)
(32)
(0)
mm
(In.)
325
(12-3/4)
1 020
745
(29-1/2)
mm
(In.)
745
(29-1/2)
Height
(24)--t4-~
I
For additional power plugs, see page 3490-27.
1 355 I
--'
(53-1/2) -lfooI41---F-ro-n-t--~·i
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" In Chapter 3 of the IBM
General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
LwAd
Operating
Idling
(bels)
(bels)
< LpA>m
Operating
(dB)
I
Idling
(dB)
T
031
7.4
7.3
57.0
56.0
No No
041
6.6
6.5
SO.O
48.0
Yes No
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
1SOC to 32°C
(60°F to 90°F)
Relative Humidity
20% to 80%
Max Wet Bulb
25.SOC (78°F)
environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C to 43°C
(50°F to 110°F)
8% to 80%
2JOC (80°F)
Note: The automatic cartridge loader, when Installed, Is
flush with the front cover.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-25
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Magnetic Tape Subsystem Model D32 or D42
Plan View (Not to Scale)
Specifications:
English measurements are shown in parentheses.: Use IBM Physical Planning Template
GX22-712B.
Dimensions:
Front
Side
745
(29-1/2)
mm
(In.)
745
(29-1/2)
mm
(In.)
325
(12-3/4)
(4X)
(~2)
1- -25
(~7-1/4)
110
(4-1/2)
3490-032
~ r-(4_X)_~+ _ _+....
\~~01 9~:~ I: ~I__
(77-1/2)
- ' - - _ - L -_ __
610
(24)
(0)
404 kg (890 Ib)
(with two cartridge loaders)
Heat Output:
1.1 kW (3.8 kBTU/hr)
Alrftow:
13.0 m3/mln (450 cfm)
!
(109-3/4) ~~~==--=t._.L
950
o
815
(32)
Weight:
~---j
1 'r
2 785
1 020
(40)
LeftJIC
*If Model 032 or 042 Is at either end of a string, It
requires service clearances of 610 mm (24 In.) at either
the left front or the right front and 610 mm (24 In.)
between the wall and the end unit.
115
(4-1/2)
I
1 580
(62-1/4)
950
(37-1/4)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
RlghtJIC
275
(10-3/4)
fats
Height
Fronl
Power Requirements:
kVA
1.1
Phases
1
Plug Type
L6-30P
Receptacle Type
L6-30R
3 wire, no shield
Power Cord Style
Wire size, 1.5 mm 2
Bulk wire 00, 8.9 mm
(8~~4)
,.
1.--,
610
(24)
~
For additional power plugs, see page 3490-27.
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" In Chapter 3 of the IBM
General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
m
LwAd
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
I
Idling
(dB)
032
7.4
7.3
57.0
56.0
No No
042
6.6
6.5
50.0
48.0
Yes No
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
1ErC to 32°C
(60°F to 90°F)
20% to 80%
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
25.ErC (78°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
10°C to 43°C
(50°F to 110°F)
8% to 80%
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
27°C (80°F)
Note: The automatic cartridge loaders, when Installed,
are flush with the front cover.
3490-26
T
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Power Cords, Plugs, and Receptacles for IBM USA, IBM Canada, IBM World Trade
Latin America, and IBM World Trade Asia/Pacific: IBM supplies each 3490 Model 031, 032,
041, or 042 with a power cord and attached plug. The customer must supply a corresponding receptacle for each unit.
Service Rating
Plug
Type
Maximum
Voltage A
Phases Wires Connector Receptacle Notes
3750
258
30
1
3
3933
L6-38P
258
38
1
3
56PA330
258
30
1
3
WIP138
250
38
1
3
Diagram
number in
Appendix A
3753
1,2,5,6
48
-
L6-30R
5,6
29
-
56S0330
3,5
WIB138
4,5
-
For IBM Europe/Middle East/Africa
Service
Rating
Maximum
Voltage
A
-
258
16
1
3
-
-
258
16
1
3
-
258
10/16
1
3
220/388 16/32
1
3
-
220/380 16/32
1
3
-
-
-
Phases Wires Connector Receptacle Notes
Diagram
number in
Appendix A
-
5,7
18
5,7
22
-
5,7
25
-
5,8
46
-
5,9
46
Notes:
1. Raised-floor installations require a Russellstoll watertight plug and connector/receptacle (specify
code 90BO).
2. A Russellstoll in line connector used with flexible metal conduit or liquid-tight flexible metal conduit
requires a Russellstoll FSA adapter.
3. Only for New Zealand.
4. Only for Australia.
5. See power plug illustrations in Appendix A.
6. The 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem is shipped with a standard 4.3-m (14-ft) power cord and L6-30P
plug (specify code 90B1). Optionally, the following specify codes canmay be ordered:
• Specify code 9986 is a 1.B-m (6-ft) power cord and specify code 9081 is an L6-30P plug.
• Specify code 9986 is a 1.B-m (6-ft) power cord and specify code 9080 is a Russellstoll 3750 plug.
• Specify code 9080 is a standard 4.3-m (14-ft) power cord with a Russellstoll 3750 plug.
7. Plug is rated for 3 kVA single phase.
B. Plug is rated for 5 kVA single phase.
9. Plug is rated for 4.4 kVA and 5 kVA three phase. This plug uses only phases 1 and 2 of the
incoming three phases. The use of only two phases by the PCC might cause a power imbalance.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-27
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Power Cords, Plugs, and Receptacles for IBM World Trade Europe/Middle East/Africa
Countries: For E/ME/A countries, IBM supplies the power cord for each unit with an attached plug
that corresponds to the power-outlet receptacle most used in that country. To find the plugs and
receptacles needed for each country, match the country Plug 10 letter with the letter of the plug
diagram in Appendix A.
Country
Diagram
Nwnber
Country
Algeria
Andorra
Angola
AREAS/South (Africa)
Austria
Bahrain
Belgium
Benin Republic
Bulgaria
Burkina Faso (Upper Volta)
Burundi
Cameroon
Central Africa Republic
Chad
Channel Islands
Congo
Cyprus
Czechoslovakia
Denmark
Egypt
Ethiopia
Finland
France
Germany
Ghana
Greece
Guinea
Hungary
Iceland
Iran
Iraq
Ireland
Israel
Italy
Ivory Coast
Jordan
Kenya
Kuwait
Lebanon
Libya
Liechtenstein
Luxembourg
Malagasy Republic
18
18
18
23
18
23
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
23
18
23
18
19
18
25
18
18
18
23
18
18
18
18
18
23
23
32
25
18
18. 23
23
23
18
25
24
18
18
Malawi
Mal i
Malta
Mauritania
Mauritius
Monaco
Morocco
Mozambique
Netherlands
New Caledonia
Niger
Nigeria
Norway
Oman
Pakistan
Poland
Portugal
Qatar
ROECE
Romania
Saudi Arabia
Senegal
Sierra Leone
Somalia
South Africa
South Asia Region (SAR)
Spain
Sudan
Sweden
Switzerland
Tanzania
Togo
Tunisia
Turkey
Uganda
United Arab Emirates (UAE)
United Kingdom*
USSR
Yemen
Yugoslavia
Zaire
Zambia
Zimbabwe
Diagram
Nwnber
23
18
23
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
23
18
23
22
18
18
23
46
18
18
18
23
23
22
18
18
18
18
24
23
18
18
18
23
23
Hard-wired
18
23
18
18
23
18
*The power cord for the 3 kVA single phase PCC in the United Kingdom does not have a plug.
3490-28
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Cabling Schematic for 3490 Model 031, 032, 041, or 042:
Feature
Code
Standard
5038
Cable
Group
Conn
Conn
ID
ID
-[ 0185
2 . - Channel A
1178
5
-[ 0185
3
1178
7
4 . - Channel B
To 3498
From 349B
Feature Group No. of Conn Hax Length
Code
No. Cables 10
m (ft) Hodel
Feature Conn
Model
Code
ID
Notes
Notes
Standard 0185
2
1 122 (400)
031, 032
041, 042
1,2,3.5
Standard 2
031, 032 2,3
041, 042
9402
1178
1
5 122 (400)
031, 032
041, 042
6
5038
031, 032 2,3
041, 042
5038
0185
2
3 122 (400)
031, 032
041, 042
1,2.3.5
Standard 2
94E16
2,3,7
5038
94E16
2,3,7
1178
1
7 122 (400)
031, 032
041, 042
6
Standard 0185
2
1
61 (200)
94E16
1,2,3,5,7
0185
2
3
61 (200)
94E16
1,2,3,5,7
5038
4
4
50-Hz Power Cord Style: The following table gives the power cord specifications needed to terminate the power cord in accordance with local practice. if necessary.
Conductors
Nominal 00*
Cable Nominal 00
Phase
nm
(in. )
Number of
Shields
Quantity
nm 2
(in. )
1
8.9
(8.350)
0
3
1.5
(0.060)
* This diameter refers to solid, bare wire.
Auto Restart: .The ac box in the rack area of 3490 Model 031. 032. 041. or 042 frame has autorestart capabilities. This automatically powers on the system racks after an unexpected loss of power.
Note: If the system is powered on and it loses power as a result of one of the following. the system
will restart when power is restored if the outage was 10 seconds or more.
• A line voltage drop. such as a utility outage
• Disconnection of the rack power cord before a normal power-off sequence
• Setting of CB1 to the Off position before a normal power-off sequence
To override this auto-restart capability after an unexpected loss of power. set the Enable/Off switch on
the Main System Power panel to the Off position or set the key to the Local position if feature 9402 is
installed.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-29
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Notes:
1. For parallel channel adapters, the 3490 Model 031, 032, 041, or 042 subsystem attaches to the
following processors: 308x, 3090, ES/3090, 4341, 4361 (no data chaining), 4381, 937x, and 9406.
The 3490 ESCON adapters may be used only on 3490 Models 031, 032, 041, or 042 with
ESCON-capable IBM processors.
2. Model 031 or 041 is configured as a single integrated control unit and single tape drive and needs
no additional cabling. Model 032 or 042 is configured as a single integrated control unit and two
tape drives and needs no additional cabling.
3. One parallel channel attachment is standard. Another parallel channel can be added for a total of
two channels by adding the Parallel Channel Attach feature 5038.
To install an ESCON adapter, order feature code 3309 or feature code 3310. Feature code 3309
adds one ESCON adapter. Feature code 3310 removes one parallel channel adapter and adds one
ESCON adapter.
For AS/400 installations only, the standard channel cable length is 6 m (20 ft). Another channel
may be specified for another 6 m (20 tt) pair of channel cables. Both channels can be specified by
feature code 9985.
4. The rate of data transfer varies on non-data-streaming channels depending on the cable length.
The maximum cable length must be reduced by 4.5 m (15 ft) for each unit connected between
Model 031, 032, 041, or 042 and the channel.
The maximum instantaneous data rate of 1.5 Mb per second can be realized on a non-datastreaming channel up to a total cable length of 15 m (50 tt). The subsystem functions with cable
lengths beyond 15 m (50 ft), but the data rate decreases as the cable length is increased. The
maximum cable length of 122 m (400 tt) limits the channel's instantaneous data rate to approximately 710 Kb per second.
5. When the 3490 Model 031, 032, 041, or 042 subsystem is attached to the IBM 3044 Fiber Optic
Channel Extender Link Model C02 or 002, the 3044 allows the following fiber optic cable lengths
between the host processor and the 3490 device:
Model 031,032,041, or 042
3.0 Mb per second
4.5 Mb per second
4.5 Mb per second
Fiber Optic Cable Length
Up to 400 m (1310 tt)
Up to 244 m (800 ft)
Up to 3 km (9845 ft) with feature code 6053 (IBM 3044
Enhanced Tape Attachment)
For more information, see IBM Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link Models C02 and D02 Product
Description.
6. Feature 9402, Shared Power Controller, permits attachment to System/370 Channel Power and
Control. Only one feature 9402 is required for each shared 3490.
Power sequence and control is optional.
When attaching power sequence and control to a System/370 processor, order feature code 9402,
Shared Power Controller. Only one feature code 9402 is needed per Model 031, 032, 041, or 042.
Order one cable group 1178 for each connecting channel (maximum of two per system).
Feature code 9402 allows a maximum distance of 60 m (197 tt) between a System/370 processor
and Model 031, 032, 041, or 042.
Power sequence and control is not available when attaching to a 9370 or 9406 processor.
7. The maximum cable length for use with a 9406 processor is 61 m (200 tt). 00 not specify To CONN
ID when ordering X length cables for use with a 9406 processor.
3490-30
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Cabling Schematic for 3490 Model 031, 032, 041, or 042 ESCON Adapters
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Conn
ID
3389]- 3797 +-- 51
3318
3389]- 3797 +-- 53
3318
From 3498
Feature Group No. of Conn Max Length
Code
No. Cables IO
m (ft) Model
3389
3318
3797
1
-
Notes
51 122 (488)* 031, 032 1,2,3
041, 042
53
Add 610 mm (24 in.) to each channel length of fiber optic cable to
provide the needed length to reach ESCON ports inside all 3490 models.
Chapter 1. MachIne SpecIficatIons and Cabling SchematIcs
3490-31
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
ESCON Adapters for 3490 Model D31, D32, D41, or D42: The 3490 ESCON adapters can be
used only on 3490 Model 031, 032, 041, or 042 with ESCON-capable IBM processors.
Model 031 or 032
Model 041 or 042
1 ESCON adapter
1 or 2 ESCON adapters
The addition of an ESCON adapter allows the location of any 3490 model up to 9 km, through ESCON
directors or converters, from the central processing facility. The distance per link is limited as follows:
50.0/125 micron cable
62.5/125 micron cable
2 km
3 km
The total distance with two data routers is limited as follows:
50.0/125 micron cable
62.5/125 micron cable
6 km
9 km
Each 3490 ESCON adapter feature installed on Model 031, 032, 041, or 042 provides one ESCON
adapter. One jumper cable per port is inctuded with each installed ESCON feature, but it must be
ordered separately.
A description of addition and removal options per adapter, 3490 model, and pertinent feature follows:
Description
IBM 3490
Add 1 ESCON adapter.
Model 031, 032,
041, or 042
Model 031, 032,
041, or 042
Add 1 ESCON adapter and remove 1 parallel channel adapter.
Feature
3309
3310
Note: All parts removed are the property of IBM and must be returned to IBM.
The ESCON adapter and the parallel channel adapters must be ordered and installed in the following
combinations only:
ESCON Adapter
1
o
o
2
Parallel
Channel
1
1
2
o
IBM 3490
Mod~ 031, 03~ 041,or042
Model 031, 032, 041, or 042
Model 031, 032, 041, or 042
Model 041 or 042
Note: One parallel channel adapter is standard on Model 031,032, 041, or 042.
IBM 3490
Mod~ 031, 032, 041,or042
Model 031, 032, 041, or 042
Feature
Installed
Feature
Removed
Quantity
Removed
3309
3310
N/A
o
5038
1
Note: All parts that are removed by feature code 3310 are the property of IBM and must be returned
to IBM.
3490-32
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Fiber-optic jumper cables are required to attach a 3490 with ESCON adapters to dynamic data routers.
Duplex to duplex 62.5/125 micron fiber optic jumper cables (part number 14F3797) are available from
IBM in standard lengths up to 122 m (400 ft). Custom lengths are available above 122 m (400 ft) to a
maximum length of 500 m (1640 ft). The jumper cables are stocked in the following 11 fixed lengths:
4 m (12
7 m (20
13 m (40
22 m (70
31 m (100
46 m (150
tt)
tt)
tt)
tt)
tt)
tt)
61
m (200 tt)
77 m (250 tt)
92 m (300 tt)
107 m (350 tt)
122 m (400 tt)
One jumper per port is included with each installed ESCON adapter feature, but it must be ordered
separately.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3490-33
3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
This page is intentionally left blank.
3490-34
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3504 Card Reader
3504 CARD READER MODELS A1 AND A2
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
~
-
--
--....
- - - - - - -
-:,
...--1 :
21"
30"
I
36"
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(cm)
F
S
60
(152)
29-1/2
(75)
H
44
(112)
(5 Places)1
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
F
R
Rt
L
36
(91 )
36
(91)
18
(46)
0
(0)
Weight:
lb
(kg)
Note: For cabling information, see 3125-0
or 3125-2.
50Hz
60Hz
600
(280)
600
(280)
Heat Output:
4,600
BTU/hr
(kcal/hr) (I 200)
Airflow:
cfm
(m 3/min)
250
(8)
Power Requirements: *
kVA
1.9
4,200
(I 100)
250
(8)
1.6
Notes:
* Powered from 3125-0 or 3125-2 when SF 4680
is installed.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3504-1
3504 Card Reader
This page is intentionally left blank.
3504-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3505 Card Reader
3505 CARD READER MODELS B1 AND 82
- - --------l,
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
~
---2"
~T
21"
30"
(5 Places)
:
I
36"
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(cm)
F
S
H
60
(152)
29-1/2
(75 )
44
(112)
F
R
Rt
L
36
(91 )
36
(91 )
18
(46)
0
(0)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
3-1;'2"
(6 Places)
50Hz
900
(410)
60Hz
900
(410)
Heat Output:
BTU/hr
(kcal/hr)
5,200
(1 350)
(l 200)
Airflow:
cfm
(m 3 /min)
250
250
(8)
(8)
Weight:
lb
(kg)
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
4,600
2.2
3
R&S, fS3760
R&S, FS3934
R&S, FS3754
01
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
1.9
3
3505-1
3505 Card Reader
3505 CARD READER AND 3525 CARD PUNCH CABLING SCHEMATIC
800
801
802
803
804
-
.. Selector Channel
. . Multiplexer Channel
r
_
-
Channel-to-Channel Adapter
-
.. Control Unit
-
_ Sequence and Control (EPO)
3505
Group
No.
800
801
802
803
804
805
--
805
3525
No. of
Cables
2
2
2
2
I
4
Max
From
3505
3505
3505
3505
3505
3525
To
Selector Channel
Multiplexer Channel
Channel-to-Channel Adapter
Control Unit
Channel
3505
l.ength (ft)
150
20
Notes:
1. Total cable length of 200 feet (unless modified by general control-to-channel cabling schematic) available to attach
up to eight control units.
2. Power sequence and control cable. This machine must have the power sequence and control cable installed for proper operation.
3. To channel-to-channel adapter (SF 1850).
3505-2
InpUUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Notes
1
1,3
1
2
3525 Card Punch
3525 CAR D PUNCH MODE LS P1 TO P3
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 tt)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
:
t
I
t
I
-
n n _
-
--~-ll
n
27"
(2 Places)
22"
I
(2 PIaces) I
7" (2 Places) I
I
4-1/4"
r
I
I
-t:
I.-
~'~:
'0
~
3525-PI
3" Caver
I
CI,moo"
I
36"
pO
Inches
(cm)
S
H
50
(I 27)
29-1/2
(75)
45
(114)
F
R
Rt
L
36
(91 )
36
(91)
24
(61)
12
(30)
Service Clearances:
+
3-1/4"
(6 PlaCeS)!
'-4-1/2"x5"
d?SI+
I
I
I
F
4"
(4 Places)
I 29-1/2"
I
lJ
I
36"
-J~2~l-_F:~, ---,±_;:,,~'
Note: For cabling information, see 3505 and 3125.
Inches
(cm)
Weight:
Ib
(kg)
50Hz
850
(390)
60Hz
850
(390)
Heat Output:
BTU/hr
(kcal/hr)
4,800
(1 250)
4,400
(I 150)
Airflow:
cfm
(m 3 /min)
200
(6)
200
(6)
Power Requirements: *
1.8
kVA
1.6
Notes:
* Powered from 3505, or from 3125-0 or
3125-2 when SF 4685 is installed.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3525-1
3525 Card Punch
This page is intentionally left blank.
3525-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3540 Diskette Input/Output Unit
3540 DISKETTE INPUT/OUTPUT UNIT
MODELS B1 AND B2
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in.
= 1 ft)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(em)
F
S
H
45
(114)
24
(61)
37
(94)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(em)
"Machines with Integral or Abutted Controls,"
L
R
30
(76)
36
o
12
(91 )
(0)
(30)
Model Bl
380
(180)
Model B2
440
(200)
Heat Output:
BTU/hr
(kcal/hr)
1,600
(410)
2,150
(550)
Airflow:
cfm
(m 3 /min)
150
150
(5)
(5)
Weight:
Note: For cabling information. see Section 2.
Rt
F
lb
(kg)
Pow~r
Requirements:
0.8
kVA
0.6
1
1
Phases
Plug
R&S, FS3720
Connector
R&S, FS3913
Receptacle
R&S, FS3743
Al
Power Cord Style
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3540-1
3540 Diskette Input/Output Unit
This page is intentionally left blank.
3540-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3704 Communications Controller
3704 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
1-----:,
rl8"i""il8"l
I
I
I
I
---.i:i
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(cm)
F
S
H
36
(91 )
24
(61)
57*
(145*)
F
R
Rt
L
36
(91 )
36
(91)
18
(46)
18
(46)
36'
,_1._
I
I
: 2-1/4"
I
L
Service Clearances:
I
r -
14"
L
24 "
3" x 33"
M
3704
III
II I
/
II
I I
./
.L -
I
L
L
I
II--.....J
II
-.J _
,-
1
. I (4 Places)
(4 Places) I
L _::n~_J
:
1"
I
T
Inches
(cm)
Weight:
390lb (180 kg)
Heat Output: 5,600 BTU/hr (I 450 kcal/hr)
Airflow:
500 cfm (15 m 3 /min)
Power Requirements:
kVA
2.2
Phases
1
Plug
R&S, FS3720
Connector
R&S, FS3913
Receptacle
R&S, FS3743
Power Cord Style A2
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
60°F-100°F (16°C-380C)
8%-80%
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
-Max Wet Bulb
SOoF- 110°F (IO o C-430C)
8%-80%
85°F (29°C)
Notes:
*Height from base of machine to countertop is
42" (107 cm).
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3704-1
3704 Communications Controller
3704 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
CABLING SCHEMATIC
480
482
47 3
~
474
~
475
477
478
~
485 (476 or 495) ~
486. 1499
~
487
488! 1385
489
~
490
~
491
~
492
493
~
494
496
498
499
-
_ Multiplexer Channel
••
_ Control Unit
-
_ Sequence and Control (EPO)
484
..•
3704
--
~
••
~
Cables for IBM and Non-IBM Devices
Group
~
Termination
473
492
}
474
490
}
--------------------~~
919J
2 Pair #8 Ring Lugs
--------------------~~
475
477
478
485
486
1499
-------Q]
476
495
Attaches to
Group 485
n--..
ril
LJ../ 8" Fixed Length '-U
--------------------~~
487
488
1385
--------------------~~
489
491
493
2 25-Pin EIA RS-232C or CCITT Connectors (Me Ie)
(~e;~:;: ;~A
RS-232C Connector (Ma Ie)
2 25-Pin EIA RS-232C Connectors (Fema Ie)
--------------------~~
12-Pin Burndy Connector for
Wide-Band Modem
--------------------~~
2 WE-283B Plugs;
Customer Provides 404B Surface Mount,
493A Flush Mount. 549A Surface Mount Jacks,
or Equivalent Receptacle
~
9191919)
494
1 25-Pin EIA RS-232C or CCiTT Connector (Ma Ie)
#8 Ring Lugs (8 for each leg)
1
496
498
499
3704-2
-----O=EJ
1 34-Pin CCiTT V.35 Connector (Male)
______________....I?_1J..j"?..I.1..1?....1...9,j,,,,/J
4 Pair #8 Ring lugs
--------------------------~~
1 WE-283B Plug;
Customer Provides 404B Surface Mount.
493A Flush Mount. 549A Surface Mount Jacks,
or Equivalent Receptacle
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3704 Communications Controller
3704 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Group
No.
Line
Set
Type
No. of
Cables
To
Max
Length
(ft)
Notes
From
3704
3704
3704
3704
3704
Multiplexer Channel
Control Unit
Channel
Modem
Common-Carrier CBS Data Coupler
150
45
45
1
1
2
12,14
14
45
45
45
45
195
7,14
7,11,14
7,11
14
14,16
480
482
484
496
498
1K
LIB 9
2
2
1
1
1
475 or
477 or
478
492
487
lA
lA
lA
1B
lC
2
2
2
1
2
3704
3704
3704
3704
3704
Two Modems
Two Modems
Two Modems
One Low-Speed Duplex Modem
Two Directly Attached Terminals
4714
476
477
478
485
495
10
1A/1D
1A/ID
10
10
1
2
2
2
1
3704
3704
3704
3704
3704
Modem End of 485
Two Modems
Two Modems
Two Modems
Modem End of 485
8"
45
45
45
8"
3,14
9,11 ,14
9,11,14
3,9,10,14
3,14
4715
486
1499
488
1385
489
473
IE
IE
IF
IF
2
2
2
2
1
1
3704
3704
3704
3704
3704
3704
Two Autocall Devices
Two World Trade Autocall Devices
Two Directly Attached Terminals
Two Directly Attached Terminals
Wide-Band Modem
Modem
45
45
95
95
45
45
14
12,14,17
14, 16
14, 15, 16
14
14
1
1
1
1
3704
3704
3704
3704
3704
Common-Carrier Terminal Strip
Common-Carrier Terminal Strip
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
45
45
45
45
45
13,14
4,14
14
14
14
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
45
45
45
45
45
14
14
5,14
5,14
14
2944
4709
4711
4712
4713
4716
4717
4718
4719
or
or
or
or
IG
IH
11
4731
4732
4741
474
490
491
491
491
2A
2A
3A
3B
4A
4742
4743
4751
4752
4754
491
491
493
493
499
4B
4C
1L
1M
IX
1
3704
3704
3704
3704
3704
4755
4761
4771
4781
4782
499
494
498
499
498
lY
IP
1Q
8A
8B
1
2
1
1
1
3704
3704
3704
3704
3704
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier CBS Data Coupler
Common-Carrier CBS Data Coupler
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier CBS Data Coupler
45
45
45
45
45
14
6,14
14
14
14
4784
4785
4786
499
499
498
lOA
8C
8D
1
1
1
3704
3704
3704
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier CBS Data Coupler
45
45
45
14
14
14
4721
Notes:
1. Total cable length of 200 feet (unless modified by general control-to-channel cabling schematic) available to attach up to eight
control units.
2. Sequence and control (EPa).
3. One required for each SF 4717, except in Germany. See Note 11. In U.S. and Canada, SF 4714 may require either cable group
476 or 495 depending on the following:
a. One or two of group 476 required in addition to group 485 for switched network modems that use either "Ring-Indicate" or
"Coupler-Cut-Through" on pin 23. (Pin 18 is not used.)
.
b. One or two of group 495 required in addition to group 485 for modems using a contact closure interface between pins 19 and 20.
Group 495 provides compatibility between 3704 25-pin EIA RS-232C voltage interface and the modem contact closure interface.
Cable includes a jumper between pins 19 and 20 and removes the "Data Terminal Ready" voltage from pin 20.
4. One required for each SF 4721, except in Germany. See Note 13.
5. One required when two SF 4751s or 4752s are attached. Use cable group 499 when only one SF 4751 or 4752 is attached.
6. One required when two SF 4761s are attached. Use cable group 498 when one SF 4761 is attached.
7. One required for each SF 4711, except in Germany. See Note 11.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling SchematiCS
3704-3
3704 Communications Controller
3704 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
CABLING SCHEMATIC
Notes: (Continued)
8. External cable is not supplied for SF 4719 (Line Set Type 11). The cable-connecting hardware is supplied for this feature. See
IBM 3704 and 3705 Communications Controllers, OEMI, GA27-3053, for pin designations. Any customer-supplied protective
conduit must not extend above the lower machine frame (2-1/2").
9. For SF 4714, at transmission rates above 7,200 bps, the cable length is limited to 25 feet maximum in U.S. and Canada. At rates
above 4,800 bps, the length is limited to 25 feet maximum in World Trade countries.
10. For SF 4714 (Line Set Type 10, cable group 485). If a longer cable length is desired at the higher speeds, contact the IBM
Marketing Representative.
11. One required for each SF 4711 or 4714 in Germany depending on the following:
a. For IBM modems, use group 477. (Provides a shielded cable'for compliance with radio-frequency-interference regulations.)
b. For PTT mandatory modems, use group 478. (Pins 14 and 18 are not used.)
12. For World Trade countries only.
13. One required for each SF 4721 in Germany. (Provides a shielded cable for compliance with radio-frequency-interference
regula tions.)
14. See "Cables for IBM and Non-IBM Devices" for cable specifications.
15. If attaching an IBM SNA terminal,group 1385 must be used (whether used in SNA mode or not); otherwise, order group 488.
16, The total length (including any directly attached terminal cable) must not exceed 100 feet for SF 4716 or 200 feet for SF 4713.
17. SF 4715 requires one group 1499 when attaching French cauducee automatic calling devices.
3704-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705-1 OR 3705-11 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
3705-1 OR -II BASIC MODULE
3705-1 OR ·11 EXPANSION MODULE
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 tt)
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 tt)
1--4~----~;;""
I
42"
t
8"
(4 Places)
30';
(4
Pla~~s)2"
12"
~PlaCeS)
\
----;;.:---,'
8"
(8
7-1/2" x
7-1/2"
(Note 3)
"29"
P~aces)
10"
)
36"
16-1/2"
----:I
+--..---..J-I~-I-""":;"---!I(See
19"
INate 1)1
~L ___
l
.l/
\
14"J Storage and
RPL Units
Notes'
0
1. For full 180 swing remove adjacent machine cover.
2. Storage unit in the first expansion module of 3705-11,
Models J, K, and L only.
Notes:
1. For ful1180 0 swing, remove adjacent machine cover.
2. Signal cable entry.
3. Power cable entry.
3705·1 OR·II MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in.
= 1 tt)
~----------------,
i I
42"
tJ(;P~:"l
:1
'I'
11: .
il;
!I'
11'
<)1
'I'
iii
II:
[g]
-to
31-1/\
iJl
44"-.j
29"
OJ-
I\
1
_(I;
1l
5~1';·'
3:--
44"
)
OJOJ-)
t4\----~-rv1--~~-~-n-:-n-+----)---.I29-3/4" i
t
36"
~Module
-to
I
ot
-to 3705-1';t
power)
\
Cable
Entry
i
I
I
I~
,.
•.iii·
,. ..'.'." ......
,'.'.".' . '.'."""""':
.11.\
r
I'
3705
:
Expansion
Module
I
I
I
~--~~-;-I~~----~
I I
I
27-1/4": :
! 1""
L...
M
~~:~t:~a~;sm:~~~;~ I
LLl_",."
!
________________
Chapter 1. Machine Speciflcatlons'and Cabling Schematics
3705-1
-4
3705~1
or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705-1 OR 3705-11 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions *
in. (mm)
Sen'ice Clearances
in. (mm)
Model
Front
Side
Height
Aor E
32
(810)
36
(9lO)
(1 520)
B, F,
or J
32
(810)
(1 710)
(1 520)
C,G,
or K
32
(8lO)
98Yz
(2 500)
(1 520)
D,H,
32
(810)
1291,4
(3 300)
(1 520)
or L
671,4
60
60
60
60
Front
44
(1 120)
44
(1 120)
44
(1 120)
44
(1 120)
Rear
42
(1 070)
42
(1 070)
42
(1 070)
42
(1 070)
Right
44
(1 120)
44
(1 120)
44
(1 120)
44
(1 120)
Left
44
(l 120)
44
(1 120)
44
(l 120)
44
(1 120)
Weight
lb (kg)
1,OlO
(460)
1,920
(880)
2,830
(1 300)
3,740
(l 700)
*Shipping dimensions are 32" x 36" x 60" (810 mm x 910 mm x 1520 mm). Removal
of the covers reduces the width to 29W' (750 mm). The front panel can be
removed to make the unit 29W' x 30" x 60" (750 mm x 760 mm x 1 520 mm).
Airflow (3705-1 or 3705-11):
cfm
880
(m 3 /min) (25)
Heat Output
BTU/hr (kcal/hr)
Model
60Hz
50Hz
A or E
6,400
(1 650)
(1 850)
B or F
12,800
(3 250)
14,340
(3 650)
CorG
19,200
(4850)
21,510
(5450)
D or H
25,600
(6500)
28,680
(7 250)
J
11,300
(2850)
12,900
(3 250)
K
16,900
(4 300)
19,400
(4900)
L
22,500
(5 700)
25,800
(6500)
3705-2
7,170
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Environment, Operating (3705-1 or 3705-11):
Temperature 50°F-100°F (l00C-380C)*
ReI Humidity 8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb 78°F (26°C)
*The upper temperature limit must be derated
1°F (0.6°C) for each 250 feet (76 meters) of
elevation above 3,000 feet (914 meters).
Environment, Nonoperating (3705-1 or 3705-11):
Temperature 50°F-100°F (l00C-400C)
ReI Humidity 8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb 80°F (26.7 0 C)
Note:
The 3705 with remote program loader (RPL) is
attached to the host processor through another
3705 by a type 3002 private line data channel
with type C2 conditioning, a CCITT recommended
MI02 data channel, or equivalent privately supplied
channel.
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705-1 OR 3705-11 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
SPECIFICATIONS (Continued)
60Hz
Specification
Model
Volts
All
200*
208
Phase
All
3
3
kVA
A or E
B or F
CorG
D or H
2.5
5.0
7.5
10.0
5.3
7.9
10.6
2.5
5.0
7.5
10.0
5.3
7.9
10.6
J
K
L
Branch Circuit
(Amperes)
Max Cant Load
(Amperes)
A or E
B, F,
orJ
C,G,
or K
D,H,
or L
A or E
Bar F
J
Cor G
K
Dar H
L
Power Cord
Style**
Plug Type
Power Cord
Length (ft)
Length (m)
A or E
B, F,
or J
C,D, H,
K, or L
A, D, E,
F, or J
C,D,G,
H, K, or L
All
All
50 Hz
***
230
200
220
235
380
3
3
3
3
3
3
2.5
5.0
7.5
10.0
5.3
7.9
10.6
2.8
5.6
8.4
11.2
5.9
8.9
11.9
2.8
5.6
8.4
11.2
5.9
8.9
11.9
2.8
5.6
8.4
11.2
5.9
8.9
11.9
2.8
5.6
8.4
11.2
5.9
8.9
11.9
2.8
5.6
8.4
11.2
5.9
8.9
11.9
-
408
-
30
30
-
-
-
30
30
-
-
-
-
-
-
60
60
-
-
-
-
-
-
60
60
-
-
-
-
-
6.9
13.9
14.7
20.S
21.9
27.8
29.4
6.3
12.6
13.3
IS.8
19.5
25.1
26.6
8.1
16.2
17.0
24.2
25.7
32.3
34.4
7.3
14.7
15.5
22.0
23.4
29.4
31.2
6.9
13.8
14.5
20.6
21.9
27.5
29.2
4.3
8.5
9.0
12.8
13.5
17.0
18.1
4.0
7.9
8.3
11.9
12.6
15.8
16.8
7.2
14.4
15.3
21.7
22.S
28.9
30.6
Fl
-
-
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
F2
-
-
E1
El
El
D2
D2
F2
-
-
E2
E2
E2
El
E1
-
D
D
-
-
-
-
-
-
E
E
-
-
.-
-
-
14
4.27
14
4.27
14
4.27
14
4.27
14
4.27
14
4.27
14
4.27
14
4.27
*World Trade
**When field converting to Model A, D, E, F, or J from Model C, D, G, H, K, or L, a new power cord will not
be shipped. E:-.:isting cord assembly should be used.
***For the 3705-11, 50 Hz only, the phase may be unbalanced to a ratio of 1.3 to 1.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3705-3
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705-1 OR 3705-11 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER AND
3705 EXPANSION MODULE CABLING SCHEMATIC
Remote Console
Multiplexer Channel
Selector Channel
-
479
_ 481
481 ..
_ 482
482 ..
479
_ 480
-
Control Unit
4
Sequence and
Control (EPO)
I
Remote Console
Multiplexer Channel
Selector Channel
Control Unit
I
3705
Expansion
Module
3705·1, II
l§473
...
..
.
,
...
.
..
~
_
.....
-"
474,490
477
478
485 (476 or 495)
486,1499
487
488,1385
489
491
492
493
494/1398
496 (1393)
498/1397
499
1391
1392
1394
1395
1396
1497
Cable Ordering
All 60-Hz machines for WT Europe/Middle East/Africa
(E/ME/A) are shipped from Raleigh, North Carolina, U.S.A.
Cables for these machines must be ordered by an exception
order telex according 'to the exception order process.
3705-4
-
480-""
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3705
Expansion
Module
. For
Additional
Channel
Adapter
I
3705
Expansion
Module
\
I
Cabl ing is the some to the 3705·1 and
3705·11 Expansion Modules
(See Note 6 on page 3705.6)
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705-1 OR 3705-11 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER AND
3705 EXPANSION MODULE CABLING SCHEMATIC
UIl£'
Feature
Code
Group
1543
479
480
481
482
484
496
498
477 or
478 or
485
492
487
473 or
lK
LIB 7
IA
2
lA
2
lA
2
IB
1
lC
2
10
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1,11
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
477
478
485
487
or
or
or
or
10
ID
ID
ID
488 or
2944
4707
4711
4712
4713
4714
4715
4716
4717
4718
4719
4720
4721
4722
4723
4725
4726
4727
4728
4731
4732
4741
4742
4743
4751
4752
4754
4755
4761
4781
No.
No. of
Type Cables
Set
To
R~mot~
Console
Multiplexer Channel
Selector Channel
Control Unit
150
45.7
Ch~lnncl
150
45
45
45
45
45
45
195
45
45.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
59.4
13.7
45
45
45
195
13.7
13.7
13.7
59.4
5,7,10
5,7,10
2,5,10,11
19
95
28.9
12,13
95
28.9
12,13
45
45
45
95
95
45
45
13.7
13.7
13.7
28.9
28.9
13.7
13.7
7,14
12,20
12,13,20
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
145
145
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
44.2
44.2
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
or
or
or
or
3705
3705
3705
3705
E:xpansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
ModuJc
Module
Module
Module
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
Expansion
Expansion
E:xpansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
2
2
3705-1, II or
3705-1,11 or
3705-1, II or
3705-1, l10r
3705
3705
3705
3705
Fxpansion
Expansion
l':xpansion
E:xpansion
Module
Module
Module
Module
ID
2
3705-1,11 or 3705 I':xpansion Module
1385 or
ID
2
3705-1,11 or 3705 Expansion Module
492
486 or
1499
488 or
1385
489
473
ID
IE
IE
11-'
IF
1(;
IH
1J
IS
2A
2A
IGA
ITA
IT
IU
IW
lZ
3A
3B
4A
4B
4C
5A
5B
11A
liB
6A
8A
One High-Speed Modem
Data Coupler
Two IBM Modems
Two Non-IBM Modems
Two Modems
One Low-Speed Duplex Modem
Two Directly Attached Terminals
One Medium-Speed Duplex ModemBSC, SDLC
Two IBM Mod ems
Two Non-IBM Modems
Two Modems-SIS, BSC, SDLC
Two Directly Attached Terminals-·
SIS
Two Directly Attached TerminalsBSC
Two Directly Attached TerminalsSDLC/BSC
One Low-Speed Duplex Modem-SIS
Two Autocall Units
Two WT Autocall Units
Two Directly Attached Terminals
Two Directly Attached Terminals
Wide-Band Modem
One Medium-Speed Duplex Modem
One Hil!h-Speed Modem
Common-Carrier Terminal Strip
Common-Carrier Terminal Strip
Wide-Band Modem
Wide-Band Duplex Modem
One Wide-Band Duplex Modem
One High-Speed Duplex Modem
One Directly Attached Device
One Directly Attached Device
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Data Coupler
Common-Carrier Telephone .lack
Non~
496
490 or
474
489
489
489
1497
1394
1395
491
491
491
491
491
499
499
499
499
498
493
1
2
2
2
From
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
I
0
3705-1,11
3705-1, 11
3705-1, II
3705-1,11
3705-1, 11
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 E:\pansion Module
3705-1,11 or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1,11 or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-11 or 3705 Expansion Modu1c
3705-11 or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1,11 or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
Max
Length
Meters Notes
(It)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
4
1
1
1
15
7,21
18
7,10,20
7,10,20
8,10,20
20
12,20
20
3
8
8,9
7,9
16
16
22
22
6
6
6
6
18
3705-5
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705·1 OR 3705·11 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER AND
3705 EXPANSION MODULE CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Group
No.
Line
No. of
Set
Type Cables
4782
494 or
1398
499
493
494
498 or
1397
13910r
1392
1391
8B
8B
lOA
12A
12B
9A
9A
IN
IN
lR
4784
4785
4786
4791
5655
5656
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
Max
Length
From
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-11 or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-1, II or 3705 Expansion Module
3705·11 or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-11 or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-11 or 3705 Expansion Module
3705-11 or 3705 Expansion Module
To
Data Coupler, OEM
Data Coupler, IBM
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Common-Carrier Telephone Jack
Data Coupler
Data Coupler. OEM
Data Coupler, IBM
One Duplex DCE
Two Half-Duplex DCEs
One Duplex DCE
(jt)
Meters Notes
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
18
18
18
17
Notes:
1. Total cable length of 60.96 meters (200 feet) (unless modified by general control-to-channel schematic) is available to attach up to
eight control units.
2. SF 4714 requires cable group 485 and may require eithcr group 476 or 495 as specificd below:
a. One or two of group 476 is required fur switched netwurk modems that lise either "Ring-Indicate" or "Cuupler-Cut-Through" on
pin 23. (Pins 18 and 23 arc not used.)
b. One or two of group 495 is required for modems using a contact closure interface between pins 19 and 20. Group 495 provides
compatibility between the 3705 25-pin EIA RS-232C voltage interface and the modem contact closure interface. Cable includes
a jumper between pins 19 and 20 and removes the "Data Terminal Ready" voltage from pin 20.
3. Cable-cunnecting hardware is supplied for SF 4719; external cable is not supplied. Sec IBM 3704 and 3705 Communications Controllers.
Ori/{inal Hquipment Manufacturer's Information, GA27-3053, for pin designations. Any customer-supplied protective conduit must lIot
extend above the lower machine frame more than 66 mm (2.6 inches).
4. In addition to the two sets of channel cables chosen, one cable group 479 is required if the type 3 channel adapters interface enable/
disable switch is to be placed on the remote console (3058 ur 3068).
5. The maximum cable length is 7.62 meters (25 feet) when the rate exceeds 7,200 bps in U.S. and Canada or 4,800 bps in World Trude countri
6. SF 4751,4752,4754, and 4755 do not apply to the 3705 Expansion Module.
7. For World Trade countries only.
8. For U.S. and Canada.
9. In World Trade countries except Germany, SF 4721 requires one cable group 490. In Germany, SF 4721 requires one cable group
474 (provides a shielded cable).
10. In World Trade countries except Germany, SF 4711 and SF 4714 require une cable group 485. In Germany, SF 4711 and SI,' 4714 require
either one group 477 when using IBM modems (provides a shielded cable) or one group 478 when using PTT mandatory modems
(pins 14 and 18 are not used). United States and World Trade-for SF 4714 at transmission rates above 7200 bps U.S. or 4800 bps
WT the cable maximum length is 7.62 meters (25 feet).
11. Jo'or SF 4714 (Line Set Type I D, cable group 485). If a longer cable length is desired at the higher speeds, contact the IBM
Marketing Representative.
12. The total cable length (including any directly-attached terminal cable) must not exceed 30.48 meters (100 feet) for SF 4716
and SF 4714 nor ~0.96 me~ers (200 feet) for SF 4713.
13. Order cable group 1385 for attaching a BSe or SNA terminal. Cable group 488 is shown for reference only.
14. SF 4715 requires one group 1499 when attaching French Caducee automatic calling units; otherwise, order group 486.
15. Power sequence and control; cable is optional.
16. Operates only with a Type 3HS Communication Scanner.
17. SF 5655 using cable group 1392 also requires one cable group 1396. Each 3705 or 3705 expansion module (3706) requires only one
1396 cable group.
18. FCC registered protective coupler (CBS type) or equivalent.
19. For SF 4714 (Line Set Type I D, cable group 487), the total cable length must not exceed 30.48 meters ( 100 feet) for SIS
operation at 2400 bps or 60.96 meters (200 feet) for SIS operation at line speeds up to and induding 1200 bps.
20. This line set will not be available for a 3705 after December I, 1980. Its functions can now be performed by a I D line set if
appropriate cables arc installed. Sec SF 4714. Consult your IBM Marketing Representative for details on cable requirements.
21. If SF 2944 is for attachment to a hench 48K bps modem, one cable group 1393 is also required.
22. Total cable length, including the attached device cable, must not exceed 60.96 meters (200 feet).
3705-6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705-80 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
PLAN VI EW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft.)
tr
:·r-·;----~·~" ----;.;·:---·1
I
I 42"
I
8"
(4 Places)
30"
(2 Places)
(4
Plac~s)2"
12"
.,
8"
7-1/2" x
7-1/2"
(Note 3)
29"
(8 Places)
5"
I
I
II
I
Notes:
0
1. For full 180 swing, remove adjacent machine COver.
2. Signal cable entry.
3. Power cable entry.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3705-7
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705-80 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions *
in. (mm)
Heat Output
BTU /hr (kcal/hr)
Service Clearances
in. (mm)
Weight
Ib (kg)
Model
Front
Side
Height
Front
Rear
All
32
(810)
36
(910)
60
(] 520)
.44
(1 120)
42
44
44
1,010
(1 020) (1 120) (1 120) (460)
Right
Left
Model
60Hz
50Hz
All
6,400
(1 650)
7,]70
(I 850)
*Shipping dimensions are 32" x 36" x 60" (810 mm x 910 mm x 1 520 mm). Removal
of the covers reduces the width to 29%" (750 mm). The front panel can be
removed to make the unit 29%" x 30" x 60" (750 mm x 760 mm x 1 520 mm).
Model
Specification
50 Hz*,**
60Hz
All
Volts
200*
208
230
200
220
235
380
408
All
Phase
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
All
kVA
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
All
Branch Circuit
(Amperes)
-
-
-
-
-
-
All
Max Cont Load
(Amperes)
7.2
8.1
7.3
6.9
4.3
4.0
All
Power Cord
Style
All
Plug Type
All
All
Power Cord
Length (ft)
Length (m)
30
6.9
6.3
-
-
F1
-
14
4.27
30
0
0
14
4.27
14
4.27
02
02
02
02
02
-
-
-
-
-
14
4.27
14
4.27
14
4.27
14
4.27
14
4.27
*World Trade
**For the 3705-80, 50 Hz only, the phase may be unbalanced to a ratio of 1.3 to 1.
3
Airflow: 880 cfm (25 m /min)
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
50°F-100°F (100C-380C)*
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
78°F (26°C)
Note:
The 3705 with the remote program loader (RPL) is
attached to the host processor through another
3705 by a type 3002 private line data channel
with type C2 conditioning, a CCITT recommended MI 02 data channel, or equivalent
privately supplied channel.
*The upper temperature limit must be derated
1°F (0.6 0 C) for each 250 feet (76 meters) of
elevation above 3,000 feet (914 meters).
Environment, Nonoperating:
50°F-110°F (IO oC-400C)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (26.7 0 C)
3705-8
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705·80 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
CABLING SCHEMATIC
Multiplexer Channel
Selector Channel
Cant rol Unit
Sequen ce and
Contra I (EPO)
I
...
-
.-
-
480
481
482
484
3705-80
I
---::
:.
::
486
489
-.
496 (1393)
1391
-.
,. 1394
=-:..
-
1399
1400/0690
1404/0691 (476 or 495)
1497
1499
Cable Ordering
All 60·Hz machines for WT Europe/Middle East/Africa
(E/ME/A) are shipped from Raleigh, North Carolina, U.S.A.
Cables for these machines must be ordered by an exception
order telex according to the exception order process.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3705-9
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705-80 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Group
No.
Line
No. of
Set
Type Cables From
480
481
482
484
1399
2
2
2
1
1
3705-80
3705-80
3705-80
3705-80
3705-80
5657
1400 or
0690
1404 or
0691
1391
1391
LS8
LS8
3705-80
3705-80
5658
1391
LS9
3705-80
6712
496
1497
489
486 or
1499
1394
LS2
LS2
LS3
LS4
LS4
LS5
6713
6714
6715
3705-80
3705-80
1
1
1
2
2
3705-80
3705-80
3705-80
3705-80
3705-80
3705-80
To
Multiplexer Channel
Selector Channel
Control Unit
Channel
One Directly Attached
SIS Terminal
One Directly Attached
Synchronous Terminal
One Modem
One DCE
One Duplex or Half-Duplex IKE,
Medium Speed
One Duplex or Half-Duplex DCE,
Hi!!h Speed
One High-Speed Modem
One High-Speed Duplex Modem
Wide-Band Modem
Two WT Autocall Units
Two WT Autocall Units
One Directly Attached Terminal
Max
Length
(ft)
Meters Notes
150
195
45.7
59.4
1
1
3
8,9
95
29.0
8,10,14
45
13.7
2,8, 12, 15
45
45
13.7
13.7
4,8,13
4
45
13.7
45
45
45
45
45
145
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
13.7
44.2
5
5
6
7
7
11
Notes:
I. Total cable length of 60.96 meters (200 feet) (unless modified by general control-to-channel cabling schematic) is
available to attach up to eight control units.
2. Cable group 1404 or 0691 may require either group 476 o~ 495 as specified below:
a. Group 476 is required for switched network modems that usc either "Ring-Indicate" or "Coupler-Cut-Through"
on pin 23. (Pins 18 and 23 arc not used.)
b. Group 495 is required for modems using a contact closure interface between pins 19 and 20. Group 495 provides compatibility between the 3705 25-pin EI A RS-232C voltage interface and the modem contact closure
interface. Cable includes a jumper between pins 19 and 20 and removes the "Data Terminal Ready" voltage
from pin 20.
3. Power sequence and control; cable is optional.
4. The LS8line set requires two cable groups 1391.
5. SF 6712 requires two cable groups 496 for attaching two half-duplex modems, or one cable group 1497 for attaching one duplex modem. Attachment of two half-duplex French 48K bps modem requires two cable groups 496 and
two cable !,!roups 1393. Attachment of one half-duplex French 48K bps modem requires one cable group 496 and
one cable group 1393.
6. SF 6713 using a duplex modem requires one cable group 489. SF 6713 using two half-duplex modems requires
two cable groups 489.
7. SF 6714 can handle a maximum of four autocall units. SF 6714 using four French Caducee autocall units requires
two cable groups 1499. Otherwise, order two cable groups 486.
8. The number of communication lines/devices that can be attached to basic line attachment hardware in individual
models of the 3705-80 and the maximum number of cable groups required for each model arc:
3705-80, M81-4 devices/lines-order 4 (maximum) of cable groups 1399, 1400/0690, or 1404/0691 *
3705-80, M82-1 0 devices/lines-order 10 (maximum) of cable groups 1399, 1400/0690, or 1404/0691 *
3705-80, M83-16 devices/lines-order 16 (maximum) of cable groups 1399, 1400/0690, or 1404/0691 *
3705-80, M84-10 devices/lines-order 4 (maximum) of cable groups 1399, 1400/0690, or 1404/0691 *
(for attaching 4 devices/lines) and order 6 (maximum) of cablc group 1391
(for attaching 6 lines)
*A combination of cable groups 1399, 1400/0690, and 1404/0691 can be ordered; however, the number of cable
groups ordered must not exceed the maximum number of groups shown.
9. The total cable length (including any directly attached terminal cable) must not exceed 30.48 meters (100 feet)
for SIS operation at 2400 bps or 60.96 meters (200 feet) for SIS operation at line speeds up to and including
1200 bps.
10. The total cable length (including any directly-attached terminal cable) must not exceed 30.48 _meters (l00 feet).
11. The LS5 line set can handle two devices. SF 6715 requires one cable group 1394 to attach to each device. Total
cablc length, including the attached device cable, must not exceed 60.96 meters (200 feet).
12. For operation at 19.2K bps, cable length must not exceed 6.85 meters (22.5 feet).
3705-10
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
3705-80 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
CABLING SCHEMATIC
Notes (Continued):
13. Three LS8 line sets arc provided as bask hardware segments of the 3705-80 Model 84.
14. Order cable group 1400 for a fixed-length cable 13.5 meters (45 feet) long, if possible. Order cable group 0690 for
a shorter cable of any length if cable group 1400 is not suitable. For a longer cable (maximum length of 35 meters
1115 feet I), order a cable, part 1733746, on an MES order.
15. Order ca ble pou p 1404 for a fixed-length cable 13.5 meters (45 feet) long if possible. Order cable group 0691 for
a shorter cable of any length if cable group 1404 is not suitable. For a longer cable (maximum of 35 meters [115
feet I), order a I.·able, part 1736733, on an MES order.
When the DCE is an IBM 3863, 3864, or 3865 Modem, the maximum length is 100 meters (328 feet) if the
suffix level of the modem (two alphabetic characters on the data tag) is FG or later for the U.S. and Americas/Far
East, or KF or later for Europt!/Middle East/Africa. For modems with an earlier suffix, the modt!m must have
en!?-ineering change (Fe) 344120 installed if data multiplexer feature 3260 is 110t installed, or EC 323406 if data
multiplexer feature 3260 is installed to usc the longer cable length.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3705-11
3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller
Cables for IBM and Non-IBM Devices
Group
No.
473
492
'f
Termination
-----q]
?I?)
474
490
Attaches to Group 485
476
495
or 1404
I"1l
~
~ inches (203
mm)'--U
1 25·Pin EIA RS-232C/CCITT Connector (Male)
2 Pair
:=
8 Ring Lugs
1 25·Pin EIA RS·232C Connector (Male)
(See Note 2)
Fixed Length
477
478
485
486
~-----q]
j-----q]
487
488
1385
1499
-----q]
-_._--q]
2 25·Pin EIA RS·232C/CCITT Connectors (Female)
-----.o1q]
12·Pin Burndy Connector
for Wide·Band Modem (Male)
------<~
2 WE·283B Plugs; Customer Provides
404B Surface Mount, 493A Flush
Mount, 549A Surface Mount Jacks, or Equivalent Receptacles
}
489
491
493
2 25·Pin EIA RS·232C/CCITT Connectors (Male)
=8 Ring Lugs (8 for each leg)
494 }
496
1497
} ------1td]
498
11?11!11
499
1391 }
------------------~~
1 34-Pin Winchester/CCITT V.35 Connector (Male) or Equivalent
:=
8 Ring Lugs (8)
1 WE·283B Plug; Customer Provides
404B Surface Mount, 493A Flush
Mount, 549A Surface Mount Jacks, or Equivalent Receptacles
----~q]
15·Pin CCITT X.21
-----q]
1392 }
1393
Connector (Male)
15·Pin CCITT X.21 Connector (Male)
----~q]
Attached to Group 496
g
n...,
[}-l
34·Pin CCITT V.35 Connector (Male)
8 inches (203 mm)
Fixed Length
1394 }
1395
----~c{]
1397
----~c[]
1·34·Pin Winchester or V.35 Connector
(Female) or Equivalent
15-Pin AMP Connector
----~CO
1398 }
2
15-Pin AMP Connectors
-----q]
0690
1399
1400
-----c(]
25·Pin EIA RS-232C/CCITT Connector (Female)
0691
1.404
------------------.,c{]
25·Pin EIA RS-232C/CCITT Connector (Male)
3705-12
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3720 Communication Controller
3720 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
English mcasurements are shown in parenthescs.
1(3~~1~21-t(2~~1~2If(3~~1~211
~T-=rk---::;
---1
t
Id90~,~,
If
I
1
~+
t
+
650
(25·1/21
t-
1200
l
3720·1
+
l
I
285 x 285
I
1
(11.1/4X11.1/4 1
1
\\
\\
I
I
-I
I
__ ~,~:,:~___ J
(47 ·1/41
L
+
I
1----850
3720 Model 1
Notes:
1. The 3721 expansion unit is placed on top of the 3720
base unit. and therefore should be installed after the
base unit is installed. The top cover of a 3720 Model
1 or Model 2 is removed when a 3721 expansion unit is
installed and the top cover is placed on top of the 3721.
When planning multiple base unit/expansion unit
configurations, consider that unit weights and heat
outputs are additive.
2. A ventilation system is contained within the 3720
Model 1. The 3721 expansion u nit does not contain a
ventilation system. When an expansion unit is installed
on top of a base unit, the ventilation system of the base
unit provides ventilation for the expansion unit.
Direction of airflow is from top to bottom. To
maintain airflow, the casters must not be removed from
the 3720 Model 1.
3720 Model 1 with 3721 Expansion Unit
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3720-1
3720 Communication Controller
3720 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER MODEL 1
SPECI F ICATIONS*
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, refer to "Acoustics" in Chapter 3
of IBM General In/onnation Manual Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
Dimensions:
Front
mm
(inches)
Side
Height
650
650
1 000
(25-1/2) (25-1/2) (39-1/2)
LWAd
Service Clearances:
Front
mm
(inches)
Operating
(bels)
Rear
Right
1 200
1 000 850**
(47-1/4) (39-1/2) (33-1 /2)**
Left
850**
(33-1/2)**
Weight: 155 kg (340 lb)
Airflow:
(efm)
50 Hz
60 Hz
8.7
(300)
9.5
(330)
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Voltages (Nominal)
Frequency
Plugtt
Connectortt
Reccptaclett
Power Cord Style
Power Cord Lellgthttt
Idling
(bels)
I
T
No
No
No
No
Idling
Operating
(dB)
(dB)
7.1
54
54
6.2
44
44
*120 V,60Hz
**220 V, 50 Hz
Notes:
Heat Output: SIS W (1,755 BTU/hI") .
m 3 /min
* 7.1
** 6.2
m
0.8***~ 1.2t
I
100-127, 200-240
47-63 Hz
Al
4.3 m (14 ft)
*For additional planning information on the 3720
Communkation Controller Modell, cable ordering
information. and information on the 3721 expansion
unit, refer to the IBM 3720 and 3721 Communication
Controller Planning and Site Preparation Guide,
GA33-0061.
**No service clearance is required at the two sides of the
3720 Modell, so that units can be positioned side by sid
except for the first and last unit in a row. They should
be clear of walls and adjacent machines by 850 111m
(33-1/2 inches).
***The given kVA values are the maximum possible.
Whatever is the machine configuration or the machine
voltage. the primary current will never exceed 12
amperes.
tWith 3721 expansion unit installed.
ttFor plug. connector, and receptacle requirements.
refer to the IBM 3720 and 3721 Communication
Controller Planning and Site Preparation Guide,
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-38°C (60°F-100°F)
8%-80%
23°C (73°F)
GA33-0061.
ttt In Chicago. Illinois, USA, specify code 9986 for a
1.8-111 (6-ft) cord.
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
3720-2
10°C-43°C (50°F-110°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3725 Communication Controller
3725 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
English measurements arc shown in parentheses.
250
(9-3/4)
(Note 2)
l L
r
120 (x2)
(4-3/4)
I
1 040
(41)
865
~(34)1
_
--
J _
I
--I,--rt
I
1
;,-----1:
3726
at
~
IL _ _ _ _ _I_
I
1
135 (x2)
(5·1/4)
750
(29-1/2)
r-4
1
L
105 (x2)
(4-1/4)
(32)
275 (Note 1)
(10-3/4)
I
Front
t
t
1
750
(29-1/2)
+
J[- -, L~:)
--
(6)
Notes:
1. If required, the width can be reduced to 750 mm (29-1/2 inches).
2. The service clearance can be reduced to 0 when a 3726 is
installed or when another machine is abutted to the left side of
the 3725 Model 1, if the covers can be opened as shown on the
plan view.
3. p. raised floor is not mandatory if the 3725 Model 1 has no chan·
nel connection. However, the cables should be protected with
ramps or trenches.
4. Caster and cable hole locating dimensions are measured from
edge of frame, not cover.
5. Ground plates are delivered with the 3725 Model 1. These
plates are installed by the service representative during machine
installation. Cutaways in the plates correspond to the existing
cable hole shown in the plan view.
Cable Entry/Exit
Number
1
Dimensions
(Millimeters)
Dimensions
(Inches)
320 x 250
12-1/2 x 9-3/4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
l~ ___ JI
-...........
-- --
3726
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3725/26-1
3725 Communication Controller
3725 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER MODEL 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Environment. Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Dimensions:
mm
(inches)
Front
Side
Height
1040
(40)
815
(32)
1525
(60)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
750
(29-1/2)
750
(29-1/2)
865
(34)
250
(9-3/4)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Weight: 400 kg (880 lb)
Heat Output:
50Hz
60Hz
1900
(6,500)
1900
(6,500)
Airflow:
rna/min
(cfm)
50Hz
12.5
(430)
60Hz
12.5
(430)
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Voltages*
50Hz
2.1
1
200,220,
230, 240
50 (±0.5)
60Hz
1.9
1
200,208,
220, 240
60 (±0.5)
Russellstoll, 3720
Russellstoll, 3913
Russellstoll, 3743
Al
4.3 m (14 ft)
W
(BTU/hr)
Frequency
Plug**
Connector**
Receptacle**
Power Cord Style
Power Cord Length**
16°C-38°C (60°F-100°F)
8%-80%
23°C (73°F)
10°C_43°C (50°F-HO°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* United States and Canada:
60 Hz: 208 V or 240 V
World Trade Americas Group and World Trade
Asia/Pacific Group:
50 Hz: 200 V, 220 V, 230 V. or 240 V
60 Hz: 200 V, 208 V, 220 V. or 240 V
World Trade Europe/Middle East/Africa Corporation:
50 Hz: 220 V, 230 V, or 240 V
60 Hz: 220 V
** In Chicago, Illinois, USA, specify code 9986 for a
1.8·m (6-ft) cor.d.
Note: Although the maximum current consumption does not exceed 15 A, the power receptacle at the customer premises should be
able to handle inrush current up to 20 A (to support quick on and off switching of the 3725 Model 1/3726).
3725/26-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3726 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER EXPANSION
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm
= 0.5 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
250
(9-3/4)
1
1 210
[ ( 4 7 , 3 / 4 ) * = 210
~
(8-1/4)
(Note 2)
75
(3)
t
135 (x4)
(5-1/4)
--
I
750
(29-1/2)
~
815 120 (x4)1
(32) (4-3/4)
3725-1
HI
I
ft
750
(29-1/2)
L
135 (x4)
(5-114)
Front _
75
(3)
210
(8·1/4)
Notes:
1. If required, the width can be reduced to 750 mm (29-1/2 inches!,
2. The service clearance can be reduced to 0 when another machine
is abutted to the left side of the 3726, if the covers can be
opened as shown on the plan view.
3. Caster and cable hole locating dimensions are measured from
edge of frame, not cover.
4. Ground plates are delivered with the 3726. These plates are
installed by the service representative during machine installation.
Cutaways in the plates correspond to the existing cable holes
shown in the plan view.
Cable. ~~try IExit
Number
2
3
Dimensions
(Millimeters)
' Dimensions
((nches)
250 x 250
360 x 250
9-3/4 x 9-3/4
14-1/4 x 9-3/4
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3725/26-3
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3726 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER EXPANSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Dimensions:
Front
Side
Height
1210
(47-3/4)
815
(32)
1525
(60)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
(inches)
750
(29-1/2)
750
(29-1/2)
o
250
(9-3/4)
Weight:
600 kg (1 320 lb)
mm
(inches)
Environment. Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Service Clearances:
Heat Output:
(0)
50Hz
60Hz
2500
(8,550)
2400
(8,200)
Airflow:
m3/m in
(cfm)
50Hz
12.5
(430)
60Hz
12.5
(430)
Power Requirements:
50Hz
60Hz
W
(BTU/hr)
kVA
Phases
Voltages*
Frequency
Plug**
Connector**
Receptacle**
Power Cord Style
Power Cord Length **
2.5
1
200,220,
230, 240
50 (±0.5)
16°C-38°C (60°F-lOOOF)
8%-80%
23°C (73°F)
10°C-43°C (50°F-110°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* United States and Canada:
60 Hz: 208 V or 240 V
World Trade Americas Group and World Trade
Asia/Pacific Group:
50 Hz: 200 V, 220 V, 230 V, or 240 V
60 Hz: 200 V, 208 V, 220 V, or 240 V
World Trade Europe/Middle East/Africa Corporation:
50 Hz: 220 V, 230 V, or 240 V
60 Hz: 220 V
** In Chicago, Illinois, USA, specify code 9986 for a
1.8-m (6-ft) cord.
2.4
1
200,208,
220, 240
60 (±0.5)
Russellstoll, 3720
Russellstoll, 3913
Russellstoll, 3743
Al
4.3 m (14 ft)
Note: Although the maximum current consumption does not exceed 15 A, the power receptacle at the customer premises should be
able to handle inrush current up to 20 A (to support quick on and off switching of the 3725 Model 1/3726).
3725/26-4
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
OPERATOR CONSOLES FOR 3725 MODEL 1/3726
3725 MODEL 1/3726 MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION
PLAN VI EW (Metric Scale: 10 mm
= 0.5 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
(9~7~)
;1
IN-O~~
I
2 250
----~_865l
ISS-: _ _
750
__
129{21
I
~~
I
~
I
__
17
I
/
I
n
I
1:~ I
I
I
I
I
tI -/1
1
"
,,\ \
I
750
(29-1/2)
-J__ ",
,_Y
LL _____ ~o~
I
_ _ _ ._J
The operator console for the 3725 Modell is the IBM 3727
Operator Console. which consists of three elements: a keyboard, a logic, and a display.
One primary console is required within 5 m (I6 ft) of
the 3725 Modell (cable entry/exit hole) with no intervening walls, doors, or obstructions.
An alternate operator console (optional) may be connected to the 3725 Modell by a 150-m (492-ft) cable.
This cable must be ordered. (See the cabling schematic on
page 3725/3726.6.)
The customer must supply tables for the consoles. The
recommended table height is 735 111m (29 in.)
CHANNEL CABLES: SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
If the 3725/3726 is to be installed in the same channel
string as a device using the command retry and/or bus
extension features, Syste111/370 type channel interface
cables must be ordered.
Notes:
1. The right side of the 3726 is bolted to the left side Of the 3725
Model 1. The frames must be separated for moving.
2. The service clearance can be reduced to 0 when another machine
is abutted to the left side of the 3726, if the covers can be
opened as shown on the plan view.
When the 3725 Modell and 3726 are bolted together,
the front dimension is 2 250 mm (88-1/2 in.)
For weight, heat output, airflow, and power requirements, add the 3725 Modell specifications to the 3726
specifica tions.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3725/26-5
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3725 MODEL 1/3726 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER AND EXPANSION CABLING SCHEMATIC
Signal
Power Control
First Channel (SF 1561) {
Signal
Second Channel (SF 1561) {
Power Control
Signal
Power Control
First TPS (SF 8320) {
Second TPS (SF 8320) {
Signal
Power Control
Alternate Console (SF 1480, E/ME/A)
-------
~
"'"
3920
I--
"
1178
I--
3920
I--
.-
1178
I--
"'"
3920
I--
.-
1178
I--
"'" ,0099/0689
~
"'"
I--
.-
I
.-
SF 4931
Communication
Cables
SF 4941/4942
,0082/0682
.-
"'"
--
0085/0683
"'"
.-
0086/0684
.-
0087/0685
.-
0089/0687
~
{
~
SF 4911
SF 4931
Third Channel (SF 1561 )
Fourth Channel (SF 1561)
Fifth Channel (SF 1561) or
,Signal
.{ Power Control
Signal
{ Power Control
{
Fourth TPS (SF 8320)
Sixth Channel (SF 1561) or
Third TPS (SF 8320)
{
I--
SF 4911
3725/26-6
1178
3920
9
27
--11
29
13
1178
I--
.-
3920
I--
---
1178
I--
0081
I-
0083
.-
0085/0683
-.-
-
3726
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
.-
0155
"'"
.-
1400/0690
.-
1404/0691
1 --
33
0087/0685
0089/0687
...
15 - - - -
0088/0686
0091/0688
..-(
.-
----
31
,0086/0684
.-
--
- - - - I12- .-
0082/0682
.-
SF4911 { ~
SF 4911
SF 4942
0155
1400/0690
I-
--
SF 4931
0096
3920
I---1--
SF 4941/49421
0092
- - - - I 10
--
.-
-
3725-1
I--
Signal
Channel
Signal
35
1178
"'"
Communication
Cables
- - - - -~
3920
~
--
~-
"'"
~
SF 4931
7
----
~
1404/0691
Signal
SF 4921
5
23
4
~
.-
Power Control
SF4911
21
~
.-
.-
Power Control
----
--
0093
0094
1....--
3
2
~
0091/0688
0095
~
SF 4911
----
19
0088/0686
"'"
."
oOIIIIIf
Conn
ID
0083
.-
---
SF 4911
SF 4942
0081
----
1---1---
SF 4921
3920
1178
.-
SF 4911
Conn
ID
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
'--14
I-I--
16
~
--
Channel
Signal
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
CABLE ROUTING TO 3725 MODEL 1/3726 COMMUNICATION
CONTROLLER AND EXPANSION
Channel Cables
Feature
Code
Conn
/D
Frame
(Note 4)
1561
2
01
Cable
Hole
1
Comments
Notes
First channel
1561
4
01
1
Second channel
1561
10
02
3
Third channel
3
1561
12
02
3
Fourth channel
3
1561
14
02
3
Fifth channel
1,3
2,3
1561
16
02
3
Sixth channel
8320
6
01
1
First two-processor switch
8320
8
01
1
Second two-processor switch
8320
16
02
3
Third two-processor switch
2,3
8320
14
02
3
Fourth two-processor switch
1,3
Notes:
1. Fifth channel (SF 1561) and fourth two-processor switch (SF 8320) are mutually
exclusive.
2. Sixth channel (SF 1561) and third two-processor switch (SF 8320) are mutually
exclusive.
3. 3726 only.
4. Frame 01 is the 3725 Modell base frame; frame 02 is the 3726 expansion frame.
Communication Cables
Feature
Code
Feature
Quantity
3602
4771/2
0
0
01
1
Line address 0-63
3602
4771/2
0
1
01
1
Line address 64-95
3602
4771/2
0
2
02
2
Line address 96-127
3602
4771/2
0
3
02
2
Line address 128-159
3602
4771/2
0
4
02
2
Line address 160-191
3602
4771/2
3602
4771/2
1
5
02
3
Line address 192-223
1
6
02
3
Line address 224-255
Frame
Cable
Hole
Comments
Note: No connector ID is required for communication cables. Contuct
your IBM reprcsentutive.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3725/26-7
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3725 MODEL 1/3726 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER AND EXPANSION CABLE ORDERING
Cable
Country
Ordering Instructions
Power cable and primary
operator console si!!nal
cable
All countries
Do not order these cables. They are supplied with a fixed length:
Power cable:
Chicago, lllinois. U.S.A. (SC 9986): 1.8
Other locations: 4.3 m (14 ft)
In
(6 ft)
Primary operator console signal cable:
All locations: 7.5 m (25 ft)
Channel and communication cables, and
alterna te operator
console signal cable
North America,
Latin America,
Taiwan
1. Order channel cables by cable group number, up to the maximum length,
as shown under "3725 Model 1/3726 Custom-Length Cables."
2. Whenever possible, order communcation cables and alternate operator
console signal cable at standard lengths by group number, as shown under
"3725 Model 1/3726 Standard Communication Cables for North
America, Latin America, and Taiwan."
3. If the standard lengths shown arc not suitable, order custom-length
cablcs as shown under "3725 Model 1/3726 Custom-Length Cables."
Far East, except
Taiwan
Order all cablcs by cablc group number as shown under "3725 Model 1/
3726 Custom-Length Cablcs."
WT Europe/Middlc East/
Africa (E/Mi':jA)
(SC 2999)
60-HI'. Machines:
All 60-Hz machines arc shipped from Raleigh, North Carolina, U.S.A. Cables
for these machines must be ordered by an exception order telex according to
the exception order process.
50-Hz Machines, Standard Cables:
If the standard cables supplied automatically with the machines meet the
customer's requirements, do not order cables (sec "Standard Cables" that
follows).
50-Hz Machines, Nonstandard Cables:
If the types and/or Icn!!ths of the standard cables do not meet tre customer's
requirements:
1. Order the cables through an eXl'eption telex order.
2. Usc the cable part numbers.
3. Specify the cablc length up to the maximum length (sec "3725 Modell /
3726 Custom-Length Cablcs. ")
Standard Cables
In WI Europe/Middle East/ Africa (E/ME/ A), the following cables are automatically supplied, at
the standard lengths, according to the ordered features:
Name
Country
Cable No. afCable
Croup Groups
Standard Length
(jl)
m
1480
Alternate
operator console
E/ME/A
0099
1
13.5
(45)
1561
Channel adapter
E/ME/A
3920
1178
1
I
7.5
18.0
(25)
(60)
Feature
Code
4911
LICI
E/ME/ A except UK
and B~lgium
UK
Belgium
1404
4
13.5
(45 )
0092
0096
4
4
13.5
13.5
(45 )
(45)
4921
L1C2
E/ME/A
0086
1
13.5
(45)
4931
L1e3
E/ME/ A except !-'ranee
France
0087
0095
1
1
13.5
13.5
(45 )
(45)
4941
L1C4A
E/ME/A
0089
4
13.5
(45 )
13.5
13.5
(45)
(45)
4942
L1C4B
E/ME/ A except France
France Transfix
4991
TICI
E/ME/A
8320
TPS
E/ME/A
3725/26·8
,
0089
015S
3920
1178
1
1
1
9.0
(30)
1
1
12.0
18.0
(40)
(60)
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3725 MODEL 1/3726 STANDARD COMMUNICATION
CABLES FOR NORTH AMERICA, LATIN AMERICA,
AND TAIWAN
Order the standard length cable groups shown below if possible. For shorter cables or for an alternate operator console cable up to 20·meters (64-feet) long, order the cable
groups shown under "3725 Modell /3726 Custom-Length
Cables." For longer cables, order cables by part number
on an MES order as shown under "3725 Model 1/3726
Custom-Length Cables."
Feature
Code
4911
(L1Cl)
Group
No.
No.
of
Cables
Length
m
(It)
Comments
0099
1
13.5
(45)
Alternate operator console
0082
1
13.5
(45)
V.25/RS·366 autocall unit
1,3
0085
1
13.5
(45)
V .24/RS·232C direct attachment, asynchronous
1,3
1400
1
13.5
(45)
V .24/RS·232C direct attachment, synchronous
1,3
1404
1
13.5
(45)
V.24/RS·232C DCE
1,3
Wide-band DCE
2,3
Notes
4921
(L1C2)
0086
1
13.5
(45)
4931
(L1C3)
0087
1
13.5
(45)
V.35 DCE
2,3
0088
1
30
(100)
V.35 direct attachment
2,3
4941
(L1C4A)
0089
1
13.5
(45)
X.21 DCE
1,3
0091
1
30
(100)
X.21 direct attachment
1,3
4942
( L1C4B)
0089
1
13.5
(45)
X.2IDCE
2,3
0091
1
30
(100)
X.21 direct attachment
2.3
4991
(TICI)
1666
1
21.5
(70)
IBM Token-Ring Network attachment
2,3,4
Notcs:
1. Four cable groups must be ordered for each Lie.
2. One cable group must be ordered for each L1C or TIC.
3. Introduction to the IBM 372511fodel I Communication Controller, GA33-00IO, lists terminals that may be
connected to various LlC types.
4. When the 3725 is to be installed in an IBM Token-Ring Network where IBM Cabling System Type 3 Specified Media
(telephone twisted pair) is used, a Data Grade Media to Type 3 Filter is required bt!lween the IBM 3725 TIC cable
and the telephone twisted pair wiring. Refer to IBM Token-Ring Network Twisted Pair Media Guide, GA27 -3714.
Consult the IBM Tuken-Ring Network Installation Planning Representative for further informatiun.
Chapter 1. MachineSpecifications and Cabling Schematics
3725/26-9
w
.....
N
Co\)
.....
U1
N
U.S. and A/FE
Regular
Order
MES Order or E/ME/A
Telex Order
.....
Max Length
Max Length
en
I
Q
:l
"0
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
N
UI
s:
0
Conn
ID
m
(ft)
m
(ft)
Part
Frame
Cable
Hole
I
Comments
Notes
c
m
r-
~
Co\)
.....
Cl
.,
::z::
1
35
20
(64)
150
(492)
2667243
01
1
Alternate operator console
oc
1561
3920
2
1
62
(200)
62
(200)
5353920
01
1
First channel
1178
1
19
45
(150)
45
(150)
5351178
01
1
Power sequence and control, first channel
(optional)
-f
s:
m
..c
E
"0
1561
3
CD
a
3920
2
3
62
(200)
62
(200)
5353920
01
1
Second channel
1178
1
21
45
(150)
45
(150)
5351178
01
1
10
~
~
1561
o
3920
2
9
62
(200)
62
(200)
5353920
02
3
Third channel
1178
1
27
45
(150)
45
(150)
5351178
02
3
Power sequence and control, third channel
(optional)
:l
so;
l\)
1561
:l
C
l\)
3920
2
11
62
(200)
62
(200)
5353920
02
3
Fourth channel
1178
1
29
45
(150)
45
(150)
5351178
02
3
Power sequence and control, fourth channel
(optional)
T
-u
::T
'<
U)
1561
n
n
c
en
0
:2
~
iii'
:l
~.
1561
:l
(Q
4911
(L1Cl)
-f
n
2
13
62
(200)
62
(200)
5353920
02
3
Fifth channel
8
1
31
45
(150)
45
(150)
5351178
02
3
Power sequence and control, fifth channel
(optional)
8
3920
2
15
62
(200)
62
(200)
5353920
02
3
Sixth channel
9
1178
1
33
45
(150)
45
(150)
5351178
02
3
Power sequence and control, sixth channel
(optional)
9
0081
1
l3.5
(45)
35
(115)
2667349,
6089076*
01,02
1,2, 3
V.24 DCE, Japan NTT
4, 7
0083
1
35
(115)
1733914,
6406254*
01,02
1,2, 3
V.2S auto-call unit, French Caducee
4
0092
2
35
(115)
1736733,
1743584,
6089075 *
01,02
1,2,3
V.24 DeE, UK
4, 7
35
(115)
2667696,
6089078*
01,02
1,2,3
V.25 NTT auto-call unit, Japan
4
~
'5
cr'
(!)
0093
1
0:::
13.5
(45)
0
z
0094
2
35
(115)
1733747,
6089077*,
674570
01,02
1,2, 3
V.25 auto-call unit, UK
4
0096
2
35
(115)
1736733,
1489985,
6089075 *
01,02
1,2, 3
V.24 DeE, Belgium
4, 7
'r
*L1Cl cables are 13.5 m (45 ft) or less only.
~
0
0
~
.,
2-
II)
m
><
»
m
en
en
o·
D)
~
~
3920
"t:l
ri"
D)
'tJ
to
r-
1178
-u
N
en
:l
U)
c
~
Power sequence and control, second channel
(optional)
0689
S
0
3
3
r-m
1480
.g
en
0
-o·
-
C
c:::
W
.....
N
W
u.s.
Feature
Code
4911
(LICl)
(continued)
o
::T
III
"0
n
;:!.
:::J
CD
en
"0
CD
~
III
:::J
a.
Max Length
(tt)
11l
(ft)
Part
Frame
13.5
(45)
35
(115 )
1733747.
6089077*
01. 02
1,2,3
2()67351
01.02
1733746
0690
1
13.5
(45)
Note 1
0691
1
10.6
(35)
35
cr'
0::
V.25/RS-366 auto-call unit (except hench
Caducee. UK, Japan)
4
1.2.3
V.24/RS-232C direct attachment. asynchronous
4
01.02
1, 2,3
V.24/RS-232C direct attachmcnt, synchronulls
4
1736733,
6089075*
01.02
1,2.3
V.24/RS-232C DCE (except Japan NTT, UK,
Belgi UIll)
4,7
(115 )
Col)
U1
N
en
I
-I
::J:
10.6
(35)
35
(115)
1733820,
1749352
01.02
1,2,3
V.35 DCE. i-"rench PIT
5,11
»
OJ
10.6
(35)
35
(115)
1733820
01,02
1, 2. 3
V.35 DCE (except bendl PTT modem)
5.11
(492)
1733822
01.02
1,2,3
V.35 direct attachment
5.12
1733825
01.02
1. 2, 3
X.21 OCT
4
4941
(LIC4A)
0687
1
13.5
(45)
Note 2
0688
1
4942
(LIC413)
0155
1
0687
1
13.5
(45)
Note 2
0688
1
30
(l00)
Note 3
4991
(TIC1)
1667
1
21.5
(70)
76
8320
3920
2
5
62
(200)
1178
1
23
45
3920
2
7
1178
1
25
~
~
-
- -
2
G)
5
150
8320
S
r-m
Widc-band modem
n
!
I
"
(100)
Note 3
2667352
01,02
1, 2, 3
X.21 direct attachment
4
Notc 2
2667777
01,02
1. 2, 3
X.21 DCE. hench Transfix
5
1733825
01,02
1,2,3
X.21 DCE (except Frcnch Transfix)
5
2667352
01.02
1. 2, 3
X.21 dircct attachmcnt
5
(250)
61X3229** 01.02
1. 2,3
IBM TOken-Ring Network attachment
5. 13
62
(200)
5353920
01
1
Hrst two-processor switch
(50)
45
(150)
5351178
01
1
Power sequence and control. first TPS (optional)
62
(200)
62
(200)
5353920
01
1
Second two-processor switch
45
(150)
45
(150)
5351178
01
1
Power sequence and control. second TPS
(optional)
:i'
c
I
(200)
5353920
02
2
Third two-processor switch
9
1178
1
33
45
(150)
45
(150)
5351178
02
2
Power sequence and control, third TPS (optional)
9
3920
2
13
62
(200)
62
(200)
5353920
02
2
t:ourth two-processor switch
8
1178
1
31
45
(150)
45
(150)
5351178
02
2
Power sequence and control, fourth TPS
(optional)
8
-
L-
___
-~.
--
--
-
-o·
::J
n
.,
0
I
62
-
3
3
I
(200)
-
en
ir
D,)
62
--
Col)
.....
N
n
0
I
15
-
CD
c
2
-
=
::J
3920
--
::l
r+
,
30
r
m
en
n
0
3
.....
N
0
1. 2,3
(45)
8320
-I
01.02
::T
CD
~
n
c
en
1733817
13.5
2:
o·
N
(j)
(45)
1
(J)
W
13.5
0686
n
Notes
(35)
1
8320
~
Comments
10.6
0685
en
(115 )
(5
Z
m
r
--.J
35
l)
0
C
m
(45)
~
(J1
S
Ozble
Hole
13.5
2
o
:::J
Max Length
N
1
0095
III
(Q
MES Order or E/ME/A
Telex Order
0683
4931
(LIC3)
o·
:::J
J~
"0
n
()"
1
0682
1
~
(J)
Conn
ID
0684
~
III
No.
No. of
Cables
4921
(LIC2)
~
~
Group
--.J
alld A/FE
Reglliar
Order
I
::J
~
.,
II)
m
)(
"'C
D,)
::J
(j)
*LlCI cables are 13.5 m (45 ft) or less only.
**Not for E/ME/ A. t:or longer or shorter than standard cables for E/ME/ A.
contact your referenced distributors of thl' IBM Cabling Systcm. The
length of each TIC cable must meet IBM Cabling System specifications.
o·
::J
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3725 MODEL 1/3726 CUSTOM-LENGTH CABLES (Continued)
Notes:
I. A maximum distance of 35 m (] 15ft) meets the CeITT specifications. However. if the terminal is a 3725. it operates correctly up to
150 m (492 ft).
2. Maximum length:
Up to 56.000 bps
150111 (492ft)
Up to 128,000 bps
60 m (197 ft)
Above 128,000 bps
30 m (98ft)
3. The maximum distance to meet the CCITT specifications is:
Up to 56.000 bps
Above 56.000 bps
150m (492ft)
60 m (197 ft)
However. if the terminal is a 3725. it operates correctly:
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
II.
12.
600 m (1.969 ft)
Up to 19.200 bps
300 m (984 ft)
Up to 64,000 bps
150111 (492 ft)
Up to 128.000 bps
60 m (200 ft)
Up to 256,000 bps
Four cable groups can be ordered for each LIe.
One cable group can be ordered for each LIe or TIC.
Introduction to the IBM 3725 Modell Communication Controller, C;A33-0 I 00. lists the terminals that may be connected to various LIC
types.
When the DCE is an IBM 3863.3864. or 3865 Modem. the maximum length is 100 m (328ft) if one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
a. The suffix level (two alphabetic characters on the date tag) is FG or later for U.S. and AWE. or KF or later for E/ME/A.
b. If the suffix level is earlier with data multiplexer feature 3260 not installed. the modem must have EC 344120 installed.
c. If the suffix level is earlier with data multiplexer feature 3260 installed. the modem must have EC 323406 installed.
Fifth channel (SF 1561) and fourth two-processor switch (SF 8320) arc mutually exclusive.
Sixth channel (SF 1561) and third two-processor switch (SF 8320) arc mutually exclusive.
Feature 1480 is required in E/ME/A only.
For speeds ~ 64,000 bps, the maximum cable length is 13.5 m (45 ft).
For speeds ~ 64.000 bps, the maximum cable length is 35 m (115 ft).
13. When the 3725 is to be installed in an IBM Token-Ring Network where IBM Cabling System Type 3 SpeciJied Media (tl'iephone
twisted pair) is used. a Data Grade Media to Type 3 Filter is required bdween the IBM 3725 TIC cable and the telephone (\visted
pair wiring. Refer to IBM Token-Ring Network Twisted Pair Media Guide. GA27-3714. Consult the IBM Token-Ring Network
Installatior:!lanning Representative for further information.
3725 MODEL 1/3726 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER AND EXPANSION
TRANSMISSION CABLE TERMINATION
Connector
Cable
Group
Interface
Male/Female
0081
V.24 DeE (Japan)
Male
25
0082
V.25/RS-366 auto call unit (except French
Caducee, Japan, and UK)
V.25 autocall unit (French Caducee)
V.24/RS-232C direct attachment (asynchronous)
Wide-band DeE
V.35 DCE (except French PTT modems)
V.35 direct attachment
X.21 DCE
X.21 direct attachment
V.24 DCE (UK) (Note 1)
V.25/NTf auto call unit (Japan)
Male
25
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
25
25
12
34
34
15
15
25
25
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
25
34
25
15
25
25
0083
0085
0086
0087
0088
0089
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
0155
1400
1404
'----
No. of
V.25 autocall unit (UK) (Note 2)
V.35 DCE (French PTf modems) (Note 3)
V.24 DCE (Belgium) (Note 4)
French Transfix
V.24/RS-232C direct attachment (synchronous)
V.24/RS-232C DCE (except Japan, Belgium,
and UK)
Pins
Type
NTf with test/operate
switch
ISO 2110
ISO 2110
ISO 2110
MD 12 MPX
ISO/DIS 2593
ISO/DIS 2593
ISO 4903
ISO 4903
ISO 2110
NTf with test/operate
switch
ISO 2110
ISO/DIS 2593
ISO 2110
ISO 4903
ISO 2110
ISO 2110
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
group
group
group
group
3725/26-12
0092
0094
0095
0096
includes cablc
includes cable
indudes cablc
includes cable
0092A
0094A
0095A
0096A
and
and
and
and
cable adapter
cable adapter
cable ad."pter
cable adapter
0092B_
0094B_
0095B_
0096B_
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3725 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER MODEL 2
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
250
(9·3/4)
(Note 2)
l L
r
j
1 040
(41)
865
~(34)1
_
--1_
--
I
--I~-rf
I
1
I
~
I
I
14
120 (x2)
(4·3/4)
105 (x2)
(4·1/4)
L
135 (x2)
(5·1/4)
at
~
275
(10·3/4)
Jl- -, TI-~ :)
-.
(32)
(Note 1)
t
1
t
750
(29·1/2)
1
Front
750
(29·1/2)
+
J
(6)
Notes:
1. If required, the width can be reduced to 750 mm (29·1/2 inches).
2. The service clearance can be reduced to 0 when another machine
is abutted to the left side of the 3725 Model 2, if the covers can be
opened as shown on the plan view.
3. A raised floor is not mandatory if the 3725 Model 2 has no channel
connection. However, the cables should be protected with
ramps or trenches.
4. Caster and cable hole locating dimensions are measured from
edge of frame, not cover.
5. Ground plates are delivered with the 3725 Model 2. These
plates are installed by the service representative during machine
installation. Cutaways in the plates correspond to the existing
cable hole shown in the plan view.
Cable Entry/Exit
Number
1
Dimensions
(Millimeters)
Dimensions
(Inches)
320 x 250
12·1/2 x 9·3/4
I
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3725/26-13
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3725 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER MODEL 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Dimensions:
mm
(inches)
Front
Side
Height
1040
(41)
815
(32)
1 525
(60)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
750
(29-1/2)
750
(29-1/2)
865
(34)
250
(9-3/4)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Weight: 400 kg (880 lb)
Heat Output:
W
(BTU/hr)
Airflow:
m 3/min
(cfm)
16°C-38°C (60°F-100°F)
8%-80%
23°C (73°F)
50Hz
60Hz
1 900
(6,500)
1900
(6,500)
50Hz
60Hz
12.5
(430)
12.5
(430)
50Hz
60Hz
2.1
1
200,220,
230,240
50 (±0.5)
1.9
1
200,208,
220,240
60 (± 0.5)
R&S,3720
R&S,3913
R&S,3743
10°C-43°C (50°F-110°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* United States/Canada:
60 Hz: 208 V or 240 V
WT Americas/Far East:
50 Hz: 200 V, 220 V, 230 V, or 240 V
60 Hz: 200 V, 208 V, 220 V, or 240 V
WT Europe/Middle East/Africa:
50 Hz: 220 V, 230 V, or 240 V
60 Hz: 220 V
** In Chicago, Illinois, U.S.A., specify code 9986 for a 1.8-m (6-1't
cord.
OPERATOR CONSOLES FOR THE 3725 MODEL 2
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Voltages*
Frequency
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
Power Cord Length**
Al
4.3 m (14 ft)
Note: Although the maximum current consumption does not
exceed 15 A, the power receptacle at the customer premises should
be able to handle inrush current up to 20 A (to support quick on
and off switching of the 3725 Model 2).
The operator console for the 3725 Model 2 is the IBM
3727 Operator Console, which consists of three elements:
a keyboard, a logic, and a display.
One primary console is required within 5 m (16 ft) of
the 3725 Model 2 (cable entry/exit hole) with no intervening walls, doors, or obstructions.
An alternate operator console (optional) may be connected to the 3725 Model 2 by a 150-m (492-ft) cable.
This cable must be ordered. (See the cabling shcematic
on page 3725/3726.15.)
The customer must supply tables for the consoles.
The recommended table height is 735 mm (29 in.).
CHANNEL CABLES: SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
If the 3725 Model 2 is to be installed in the same channel
string as a device using the command retry and/or bus
extension features, System/370 type channel interface
cables must be ordered.
3725/26-14
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3725 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER MODEL 2 CABLING SCHEMATIC
First Channel (SF 1561)
Second Channel (SF 1561)
Third Channel (SF 1561)
Fourth Channel (SF 1561)
I
I
I
I
Signal
Power Control
Signal
Power Control
Signal
Power Control
Signal
Power Control
Alternate Console (SF 1480,
:~:~:: {
--
Conn
10
3920
1178
otL
-
otIIL
otIIL
19
3920
r--
1178
~
-.....
--
-----
1
'--
3920
~
Conn
10
- - - - --
2
3 ~--
---
~
4
~
23
5 I-- - -
--
6
1178
~
3920
r--
I-
--
1178
I---
~
---
0099/0689
~
~
21
7------
25
---
Channel
} Signal
Channel
} Signal
I-
I'--
0081
8
-
-35
~
~
----..,.
0082/0682
0083
0085/0683
~
SF 4921
SF 4931
0086/0684
-......
I ------
3725-2
0087/0685
0088/0686
-.....
Communication
Cables
SF 4941/4942 (
""'-
SF4911{
-----
---.....
SF 4931
SF 4911
SF 4942
SF 4911 {
----
0089/0687
0091/0688
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
0155
-......
-..,
1400/0690
---
1404/0691
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3725/26-15
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3725 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER MODEL 2 CABLE ORDERING
Cable
Country
Ordering Instructions
Power cablc and primary
operator console signal
cable
All countries
Do not order these cables. They arc supplied with a fixed length:
Powcr cable:
Chicago, Illinois, U.S.A. (SC 9986): 1.8 m (6 ft)
Other locations: 4.3 m (14 ft)
Primary operator console signal cable:
Alllocations: 7.5 m (25 ft)
Channel and communication cablcs, and
alternatc operator
console signal cable
North America,
Latin America,
Taiwan
1. Order channel cables by cable group number, up to the maximum length,
as shown under "3725 Model 2 Custom-Length Cables."
2. Whenever possible, order communcation cables and altcrnate operator
console cable at standard lengths by group number, as shown under
"3725 Model 2 Standard Communication Cables for North America,
Latin America, and Taiwan."
3. If the standard lengths shown arc not s!-litable, order custom-length·
cables as shown under "3725 Model 2 Custom-Length Cables."
Far East, except Taiwan
Order all cables by cablc group number as shown under "3725 Model 2
Custom-Length Cables."
WT Europe/Middle East/
Africa (E/ME/A)
(SC 2999)
60-Hz Machines:
All 60-Hz machines are shipped from Raleigh, North Carolina, U.S.A. Cables
for these machines must be ordered by an exception order tclcx according to
the exception order process.
50-Hz Machines, Standard Cables:
If thc standard cables supplied automatically with the machines meet the
customer's requirements, do not order cables (sec "Standard Cables" that
follows).
50-Hz Machines, Nonstandard Cables:
If the types and/or lengths of the standard cables do not meet the customer's
requirements:
1. Order the cables through an exception telex order.
2. Use the cable part numbers.
3. Specify the cable length up to the maximum length (see "3725 Model 2
Custom-Length CabIcs").
Standard Cables
In WT Europe/Middle East/Africa (E/ME/A), the following cables are automatically supplied, at
the standard lengths, according to the ordered features:
Standard Length
(It)
m
Name
Country
Cable No. 01 Cable
Group Groups
1480
Alternate
operator console
E/ME/A
0099
1
13.5
(45)
1561
Channel adapter
E/ME/A
3920
1178
1
1
7.5
18.0
(25)
(60)
4911
LIC1
E/ME/ A except UK
and Belgium
UK
Belgium
1404
4
13.5
(45)
0092
0096
4
4
13.5
13.5
(45)
(45)
Feature
Code
4921
LIC2
E/ME/A
0086
1
13.5
(45)
4931
LIC3
E/ME/A except France
France
0087
0095
1
1
13.5
13.5
(45)
(45)
4941
LIC4A
E/ME/A
0089
4
13.5
(45)
0089
0155
1
1
13.5
13.5
(45 )
(45)
1
9.0
(30)
4942
LIC4B
E/ME/ A except France
France Transfix
4991
TIC1
E/ME/A
3725/26-16
-
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3725 MODEL 2 STANDARD COMMUNICATION
CABLES FOR NORTH AMERICA, LATIN AMERICA,
AND TAIWAN
Order the standard length cable groups shown below if possible. For shorter cables or for an alternate operator console signal cable up to 20 meters (64 feet) long, order the
cable groups shown under "3725 Model 2 Custom-Length
Cables." For longer cables, order cables by part number
on an MES order as shown under "3725 Model 2 CustomLength Cables."
Feature
Code
4911
(L1Cl)
Group
No.
No.
of
Cables
Length
m
(ft)
Comments
Notes
0099
1
13.5
(45)
Alternate operator console
0082
1
13.5
(45)
V .25 /RS-366 auto call unit
0085
1
13.5
(45)
V.24/RS-232C direct attachment, asynchronous
1,3
1400
1
13.5
(45)
V.24/RS-232C direct attachment, synchronous
1,3
1,3
1404
1
13.5
(45)
V.24/RS-232C DCE
1,3
4921
(L1C2)
0086
1
13.5
(45)
Wide-band DCE
2,3
4931
(L1C3)
0087
1
13.5
(45)
V.35 DCE
2,3
0088
1
30
(100)
V.35 direct attachment
2,3
0089
1
13.5
(45)
X.21 DCE
1,3
0091
1
30
(100)
X.21 direct attachment
1,3
4942
(L1C4B)
0089
1
13.5
(45)
X.21 DCE
2,3
0091
1
30
(100)
X.21 direct attachment
2,3
4991
(TIC1)
1666
1
23
(75)
IBM Token-Ring Network attachment
2,3,4
4941
(L1C4A)
Notes:
1. Four cable groups must be ordered for each LIC.
2. One cable group must be ordered for each LIC or TIC.
3. Introduction to the IBM 3725 Modell Communication Controller, GA33-001O, lIsts terminals that may be
connected to various L1C types.
4. When the 3725 is to be installed in an IBM Token-Ring Network where IBM Cabling System Type 3 Specified Media
(telephone twisted pair) is used, a Data Grade Media to Type 3 Filter is required between the IBM 3725 TIC cable
and the telephone twisted pair wiring. Refer to IBM Token-Ring Network Twisted Pair Media Guide, GA27 -3714.
Consult the IBM Token-Ring Network Installation Planning Representative for further information.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3725/26-17
w
.....
N
w
......
u.s.
-
and A/FE
Regular
Order
MESOrderor E/ME/A
Telex Order
""""
co
Max Length
Max Length
U1
N
en
I
:l
"0
C
r:::!
oc
.g
Feature
Code
3
No. of
Cables
1480
0689
1
1561
3920
2
1178
S
m
..c
~.
"0
Group
No.
1561
CD
~
1
Conn
ID
m
(ft)
(64)
35
20
1
62
(200)
45
(150)
19
3920
2
3
62
(200)
1178
1
23
45
(150)
m
150
(ft)
(492)
N
U1
s:
0
c
Part
2667243
Frame
01
Cable
Hole
1
m
rComments
Alternate operator console
Notes
N
8
1561
~
3920
2
1178
o·
1
5
21
62
(200)
45
(150)
(200)
5353920
01
1
First channel
45
(150)
5351178
01
1
Power sequence and control, first channel
(optional)
~
rm
62
(200)
5353920
01
1
Second channel
45
(150)
5351178
01
1
Power sequence and control, second channel
(optional)
(200)
45
(150)
5353920
5351178
01
01
1
1
:l
~
III
:l
C
1561
III
T
-0
0
:2
G)
-I
::z::
(")
:t>
aJ
r-
o·
~
-0
iii"
4911
(LICl)
Power sequence and control, third channel
(optional)
(200)
62
(200)
5353920
01
1
Fourth channel
1178
1
25
45
(150)
45
(150)
5351178
01
1
PO\ver sequence and control, fourth channel
(optional)
0081
1
~
13.5
(45)
35
(115)
2667349,
6089076*
01,02
1,2, 3
V.24 DCE, Japan NTT
4, 7
0083
1
35
(115)
1733914,
6406254*
01,02
1,2,3
V.25 auto-call unit, French Caducee
4
0092
2
35
(115)
1736733,
1743584,
6089075 *
01,02
1,2, 3
V.24 DCE, United Kingdom
4, 7
0093
1
35
(115)
2667696,
6089078*
01,02
1,2,3
V.25 NIT auto-call unit, Japan
4
0094
2
35
(115)
1733747,
6089077*,
674570
01,02
1,2, 3
V.25 auto-call unit, UK
4
35
(115)
1736733,
1489985,
6089075 *
01,02
1,2, 3
V.24 DCE, Belgium
4, 7
35
(115)
1733747,
6089077*
01,02
1,2,3
V .25 /RS-366 auto-call unit (except French
Caducee, UK, Japan)
4
(115 )
2667351
01,02
1,2, 3
V.24iRS-232C direct attachment, asynchronous
4
1733746
01,02
1,2,3
V.24/RS-232C direct attachment, synchronous
4
1736733,
6089075 *
01,02
1,2, 3
V.24/RS-232C DCE (except Japan NTT, UK,
Belgium)
4, 7
(45)
"0
~
.;
CT'
v
0:::
-0
z
0096
2
0682
1
0683
1
13.5
(45 )
35
0690
1
13.5
(45)
Note 1
0691
1
10.6
(35)
35
13.5
"
*LlCl cables are 3.5 m (45
ft)
or less only.
(45)
(lIS)
o·
:::I
n
.,.....
0
:::I
5!.
.,tD
m
)C
"C
Q)
en
o·
:::I
62
13.5
,r
:::I
7
::!.
:l
m
(I)
2
:l
to
Third channel
3920
::T
'<
(/)
Q)
.....
62
62
3
3
C
:::I
(I)
(/)
g
en
n0
(")
C
-I
:l
w
.....
N
I
I
W
u.s. and A/FE
o
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
4921
(L1C2)
0684
1
4931
(L1C3 )
0095
2
0685
1
~
n
::!.
::J
(II
CJ)
"U
CD
n
::;;
o·
~
o·
::J
(J)
Ql
::J
a.
Max Length
s:
o
C
m
(It)
m
(ft)
Part
Frame
Cable
Hole
10.6
(35)
13.5
(45)
1733817
01,02
1. 2, 3
~
,
~
m
j""
Comments
Notes
Wide-band modem
5
35
5,9
(115)
1733820,
1749352
01,02
1,2,3
V.35 DeE, I'-rench PTT
1733820
01,02
1,2,3
V.35 DCE (except French PTT modem)
5,9
10.6
(35)
35
(115 )
1733822
01,02
1,2,3
V.35 direct attachment
5,10
C
en
1733825
01,02
1,2,3
X.21 DCE
4
0686
1
"0
13.5
150
1
·5
13.5
(45)
150
(492)
0688
1
v
0:::
30
(100)
Note 3
2667352
01,02
1,2,3
X.21 direct attachment
4
4942
(L1C4B)
0155
1
Z
Note 2
2667777
01,02
1,2,3
X.21 DCE, hench Transfix
5
0687
1
Note 2
1733825
01,02
1,2,3
X.21 DCE (except French Transfix)
5
0688
1
I
(45)
30
(100)
Note 3
2667352
01,02
1,2,3
X.21 direct attachment
5
23
(75)
76 1(250)
61X3229*
01,02
1. 2, 3
IBM Token-Ring Network attachment
5.13
1667
1
e
cr'
o
~
j""
m
Z
C)
0687
4991
(TIC 1 )
N
("')
-f
4941
(L1C4A)
~
Ql
Max Length
U1
(492)
Ql
.....
MES Order or E/ME/A
Telex Order
(45)
"U
~
Conn
ID
-..J
Regular
Order
N
-f
::I:
("')
l>
OJ
j""
0
13.5
m
en
- - -
*Not for E/ME/ A. For longer or shorter than standard cables for E/ME/ A. contact your referenced distributors of the IBM Cabling System. The
length of each TIC cable must meet IBM Cabling System specitications.
w
.....
N
en
o
o
3
3
~
::l
,i"
o·
(J)
-
w
.....
N
"tJ
oQl
Q:
::J
10
en
n
~
(II
3
~
-
U1
N
en
I
~
CD
D)
0'
::l
oo
.,
::l
o
iii"
.,
m
)C
D)
::l
en
o
::l
3726 Communication Controller Expansion
3725 MODE L 2 CUSTOM-LENGTH CABLES
Notes:
1. A maximum distance of 35 m (115 ft) meets the CCITT specifications. However, if the terminal is a 3725, it operates correctly up to .
150 m (492 ft).
2. Maximum length:
150 m (492 ft)
Up to 56,000 bps
60 m (197 ft)
Up to 128,000 bps
30 m (98 ft)
Above 128,000 bps
3. The maximum distance to meet the CCITT specifications is:
Up to 56,000 bps
Above 56,000 bps
150 m (492 ft)
60 m (197 ft)
However, if the terminal is a 3725, it operates correctly:
600 m (1,969 fl)
Up to 19,200 bps
300 m (9841'1)
Up to 64,000 bps
150 m (492 ft)
Up to 128,000 bps
60 m (200 ft)
Up to 256,000 bps
4. Four cable groups can be ordered for each LIe.
5. One cable group can be ordered for each LIe.
6. Introduction to the IBM 3725 Model 2 Communication Controller, GA33-0021, lists the terminals that may be connected to various LIe
types.
7. When the 1)(,[ is an IBM 3863, 3864, or 3865 Modem, the maximum length is 100 m (328 ft) if one of the followin!! conditions is fulfilled:
a. The suffi:x level (two alphabetic characters on the date ta!!) is FG or later for U.S. and A/FE, or KF or later for E/ME/A.
b. If the suffix level is earlier with data multiplexer feature 3260 not installed, the modem must have EC 344120 installed.
c. If the suffix level is earlier with data multiplexer feature 3260 installed, the modem must have EC 323406 installed.
8. Feature 1480 is required in E/ME/ A only.
9. For speeds.2! 64,000 bps, the maximum cable length is 13.5 m (45 ft).
10. For speeds.2! 64,000 bps, the maximum cable length is 35 m (115 ft).
11. When the 3725 is to be installed in an IBM Token-Ring Network where IBM Cabling System Type 3 Specil'ied Media (telephone
twisted pair) is used, a Data Grade Media to Type 3 Filter is required between the IBM 3725 TIC cable and the telephone twisted
pair wiring. Refer to IBM Token-Ring Network Twisted Pair Media Guide. GA27-3714. Consult the IBM Token-Ring Network
Installation Planning Representative for further information.
3725 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER MODEL 2 TRANSMISSION
CABLE TERMINATION
Connector
Cable
Group
Interface
Male/Female
0081
V.24 DeE (Japan)
Male
25
0082
V.25/RS-366 auto call unit (except French
Caducee, Japan, and UK)
V.25 auto call unit (French Caducee)
V.24/RS-232C direct attachment (asynchronous)
Wide-band DeE
V.35 DCE (except French PTT modems)
V.35 direct attachment
X.21 DCE
X.21 direct attachment
V.24 DCE (UK) (Note 1)
V.25/NTT autocall unit (Japan)
Male
25
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
25
25
12
34
34
15
15
25
25
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
25
34
25
15
25
25
0083
0085
0086
0087
0088
0089
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
0155
1400
1404
V.25 autocall unit (UK) (Note 2)
V.35 DCE (French PTT modems) (Note 3)
V.24 DCE (Belgium) (Note 4)
French Transfix
V.24/RS-232C direct attachment (synchronous)
V.24/RS-232C DCE (except Japan, Belgium,
and UK)
No. of
Pins
Type
NIT with test/operate
switch
ISO 2110
ISO 2110
ISO 2110
MD 12 MPX
ISO/DIS 2593
ISO/DIS 2593
ISO 4903
ISO 4903
ISO 2110
NTT with test/operate
switch
ISO 2110
ISO/DIS 2593
ISO 2110
ISO 4903
ISO 2110
ISO 2110
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cable group
Cable group
Cable group
Cable group
3725/26-20
0092
0094
0095
0096
includes
includes
includes
includes
cable
cable
cable
cable
0092A
0094A
0095A
0096A
and
and
and
and
cable adapter
cable adapter
cable adapter
cable adapter
0092B.
0094B.
0095B.
0096B.
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3727 Operator Console
3727 OPERATOR CONSOLE
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
The IBM 3727 Operator Console is used for the IBM
3725 Model 1/3726 Communication Controller and Expansion or 3725 Communication Controller Model 2. The
3727 consists of three elements: a logic, a display, and a
keyboard.
One primary console is required within 5 m (I6 ft)
of the 3725 Modell or 3725 Model 2 (cable entry/exit
hole) with no intervening walls, doors, or obstructions.
An alternate operator console (optional) may be connected to the 3725 by a 150-m (492-ft) cable. This cable
must be ordered. (See the cabling schematic on page
3727.3).
The IBM 7427 Console Switching Unit allows one
primary console or one alternate console to be shared
among several controllers.
The customer must supply tables for the console. The
recommended table height is 735 mm (29 in.).
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
r
90
I
-'--I
- - - ~ 11~~/~-,-.1
100 (4)
I~
Display
I(11~
Keyboard
rl J
~
L
I
110~14)
Logic
225
(8-3/4)
14)
-L.
(14)
1 000
I
- ~(39-1/4)-----J
Maximum
Side View
Cable Entry/Exit: 100 x 60 mm (4 x 2-1/4 in.!
Note: When the 3725 Model 1 Or 2 is installed without a raised
floor (no channel connection), a cable entry/exit hole is not
necessary for the console.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3727-1
3727 Operator Console
3727 OPERATOR CONSOLE
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Power Cord and Plug Types:
Front
Side
Height
380
(IS)
350
(13-1/4)
285
(11-1/4)
490
(19-1/4)
225*
(8-3/4*)
90
(3-1/2)
Display:
m111
(inches)
Keyboard:
m111
(inches)
*In WT Europe/Middle East/Africa, a palm rest and an
antiglare filter are automatically supplied. With the
palm rest attached, the keyboard side is 285 111m
(II in.).
Logic:
mm
(inches)
490
(19-1/4)
355
(14)
100
(4)
For the United States and Canada, the machine is shipped
with a 1.8-m (6-ft) power cord and a NEMA 5-15P
non locking plug.
For World Trade countries other than Canada, the
machine is shipped with a 3-m (1 O-ft) power cord with
attached plug that corresponds to the power outlet
receptacle that is most used in that country.
The customer must provide the corresponding power
receptacle.
Notes:
1. The signal ground of the console is permanently connected to its frame ground.
2. To avoid noise, it is recommended that the 3727 and the
3725 use the same equipment ground path.
3. If the 3725 and the 3727 are simultaneously accessible
(for example, in the same room), they must lise the same
equipment ground path.
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
Top
760
(30)
100
(4)
280
280
(I I)
(II)
100
(4)
Weight:
Display
Keyboard
Logic
kg
(Ib)
7
5.5
5
(15)
(12)
(11 )
Heat Output: 50 Hz or 60 Hz: 50 W (171 BTU/IH)
Airflow: Natural convection
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Voltages
Power Cord Style
0.12 (50 Hz or 60 Hz)
1
50 Hz/60 Hz:
100-127/200-240
Three-wire, grounded
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
100C-41 DC (50°F-105°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80 0 F)
Environment, Nonopera ting:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
3727-2
1°C-60°C (33°F-140°F)
5%-80%
29°C (85°F)
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3727 Operator Console
3727 OPERATOR CONSOLE CABLING SCHEMATIC
3727
n-___---o~O-9-'9/'='"O-6-89;..- Signal Cable (From 3725)
~ ..
Power
Signal Cables
Primary Operator Console: This cable is supplied with
the 3725. Its length is fixed: 7.5 111 (25 ft).
Alternate Operator Console: This cable must be ordered
as indicated in the 3725 Modell /3726 or 3725 Model 2
machine specifications and cabling schematic, as appropriate.
Standard length (E/ME/ A)
Maximum length
Cablc group number
14 m (45 f1)
150 m (492 ft)
0099/0689
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3727-3
3727 Operator Console
This page is intentionally left blank.
3727-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
3745 Communication Controller Models 130, 150, and 170
Plan View (Not to Scale): English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7125.
r 1
750
(29-1/2)
595
(23-1/2)
450
(17-3/4)
45
r
f(18)
I
100
4
I --60
)
...................
...................
Joo
I
...--7
(2-1/2)
(39-1/2)
(2X)
,
160
(6-1/2)
(See Note 2)
,
+
e>
·~~--"""(47-.3/4""!"')----"""~~""~
1210
5050
- - - - . . . - Y
(198-3/4)
Notes 6 and 7
•
•
•
•
o
---J746-L15
"",
3746-L14
"",
3746-L13
3745
3746-A1''''''
3746
For X and Y dimensions, refer to "Service Clearances and Floor Loading (with 3746-900)" on
page 3745-26.
3745-24
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
I
~
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Notes:
1. This caster is more than 54mm (2-1/4 in.) from frame edge.
2. Caster and cable entry and exit area locating dimensions are measured from edge of frame, not
covers. The casters must not be less than 75mm (3 in.) from a hole under a frame.
• The base frame and the 3746-900 have four swiveling castors.
• Each of the expansion frames has:
Two swiveling castors on the front side
Two fixed castors on the rear side
Leveling pads are delivered with each unit.
3. Ground plates are delivered with the 3745. These plates are installed by the service representative
during machine installation. Cutaways in the ground plates correspond to the existing cable entry
and exit areas shown in the plan views.
4. The 3745 is shipped with end covers. When 3746 Expansion Units are installed, the 3745 end
covers are relocated to the ends of the expansion units by the IBM representative.
5. A raised floor is required unless all the following conditions are met:
• No expansion unit is connected to the base frame.
• The base frame is not channel attached; that is, no channel attachments in the configuration,
• No more than 32 attachments (low-speed lines, high-speed lines, and token rings) are connected to the base frame.
When no raised floor is installed, the cables should be protected with ramps or trenches.
6. Dimension includes gaps between 3745 units that are 10mm (1/2 in.) each.
7. Dimension includes two side covers that are 35mm (1-1/2 in.) each.
8. Dimension includes front and rear covers that are 30mm (1-1/4 in.) each.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3745-25
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Service Clearances and Floor Loading (without 3746-900)
mm
Front
750
Rear
750
Left
850
Rlaht
850
(In.)
(29-1/2)
(29-1/2)
(33-1/2)
(33-112)
Based on IBM's method of calculating floor loading, a base unit and any configuration not Including a
3746-900 installed with the service clearances shown does not exceed 345 kg/m 2 (70 Ib/ft2). The 850
mm (33-1/2 in.) side clearance is not a service requirement; it ensures that the weight distribution of
the 3745 meets IBM standards.
Service Clearances and Floor Loading (with 3746-900)
mm
(In.)
Front
750
(see note 1)
Rear
750
(see note 1)
Left IXl
(see note 2)
Rlaht IV\
(see note 2)
(29-1/2)
(see note 1)
(29-1/2)
(see note 1)
(see note 2)
(see note 2)
Notes:
1. For configurations with a 3746-900, it is recommended to add 5cm (2 in.) to the Front and Rear
dimensions, to facilitate door opening (door width 750mm).
2. The 3746-900 is somewhat heavier than the other frames of a 3745 which means that the side
service clearances depend on the strength of raised floor. The customer facilities management
personnel should be consulted to determine the floor load rating that is installed. The table below
shows the required side service clearances for different types of raised floor:
Configuration
TotaJ End Clearance (X
Floor load Rating
+ V)
KgJM z
Lb/F z
mm.
In.
See
Note
Minimum with 3748-900
(1 AC Input)
345
365
390
70
74
79
1900
1400
950
74.8
55.1
37.4
1
1
1
Minimum with 3746-900
(2 AC Inputs or
1 AC + 1 DC Input)
345
365
390
70
74
79
2300
1750
1250
90.5
68.9
49.2
1
1
1
Medium with 3748-900
(1 AC Input)
345
365
390
70
74
79
2500
1700
1700
98.4
66.9
3
2
2
345
365
376
390
70
74
76
79
2750
2100
1700
1700
108.3
82.7
66.9
66.9
3
3
2
2
Maximum with 3748-900
(1 AC Input)
345
365
390
70
74
79
2700
1700
1700
106.3
66.9
66.9
3
2
2
Maximum with 3748-900
(2 AC Inputs or
1 AC + 1 DC Input)
345
365
390
70
74
79
3000
1700
1700
118.1
66.9
66.9
3
2
2
Medium with 3748-900
(2 AC Inputs or
1 AC + 1 DC Input)
Notes:
1. Either X or Y clearance must be a minimum of 850 mm (33-1/2 In.).
2. Both X and Y clearances must be a minimum of 850 mm (33-112 In.) .
. 3. Not recommended (does not conform to IBM standards).
3745-26
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
6~.9
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Specifications
Dimensions In mm (In.):
Airflow:: A ventilation system is installed
inside each 3745/3746 frame.
Model
3745-210,
310,410,
610, 21A,
31A,41A,
61A
3746-900
Front·
Side
Height
Cooling
Syste.
Fralle
1 210
(47-3/4)
750
(29-1/2)
1 775
(70)
750
750
(29-1/2)
(29-1/2)
3746-A11,
A12, L13,
L14, L15
3745-218,
418,
21A,
41A,
1 775
(70)
600
(24)
750
(29-1/2)
1 775
(70)
Ai rfl ow
318 Forced Ai r 18 ml /mi n (635 ern)
618
31A
61A
3746-988
18 ml /mi n (635 efm)
3746-All
24 ml/mi n (858 efm)
3746-A12
12 ml/mi n (425 efm)
3746-L13
5 ml/mi n (188 efll)
3746-L14
5 ml/min (188 efm)
3746-L15
5 ml /mi n (188 efm)
Legend: * These dimensions do not include side
covers.
Acoustical Data:: For definitions, see AcousWeight:
tics in IBM General Information Manual: Instal/ation Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
Frame
Weight less than:
3745-210,310,410,
610, 21A, 31A,
41A,61A
680 kg (1 496 Ib)
3746-900 (1 AC)
390 kg (858 Ib)
3746-900 (2 AC)
446 kg (982 Ib)
3745
3745 alone
operating
at 288 V
3746-A11
320 kg (704 Ib)
68 Hz
3746-A12, L13, L14,
L15
240 kg (528 Ib)
Heat Output:
Frame
Operating
(bel s)
(kBTU/hr)
3745-210, 310,410,
610
21A, 31A, 41A, 61A
2.6
1.45
(8.9)
(5)
3746-900
1.34
(4.65)
3746-A11
1.2
(4.1 )
3746-A12
0.5
(1.7)
3746-L13
0.6
(2.1 )
3746-L14
0.6
(2.1 )
3746-L15
0.6
(2.1 )
OperIdling ating
(bels) (dB)
Idling
(dB)
I
T
7.5
7.5
*
*
No
No
7.8
7.8
*
*
No
No
3745
3745 alone
operati ng
at 388 V
7.5
7.5
*
*
No
No
58 Hz
7.8
7.8
*
*
No
No
3746-988
operating
at 288V
68 Hz
7.5
7.5
*
*
No
No
3746-988
operating
at 228V
58 Hz
7.5
7.5
*
*
No
No
Maximum Heat Output
kW
~pa~
LwAd
3745 and
3746-L13 and
3746-All
3745 and
3746-L13 and
3746-All
* Not Available
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3745-27
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Specifications (Continued)
Power Requirements: The base frame
power system has an external power cord. It
distributes power to the attached 3746 Expansion
Units Models A11, A12, L13, L14, and L15. The
3746·900 has its own power supply and external
power cord.
3746 Model 900: The 3746 Model 900 has a
basic AC power inlet and optionally, either a
second AC power inlet or DC power inlet.
AC Power (each Inlet):
3745 and 3746 Models A11, A12, L13, L14, and
L15
Phase
Voltages Distribution
Freq (NOlli na 1) Syste.
USA
and
Canada
69 Hz 298/249
E/ME/A*, 69 Hz 298/229
AG-,
and
A/PG*** 59 Hz 299/415
except
Japan
69 Hz 389/415
59 Hz 389/415
Japan
69 Hz 299/249
59 Hz 299/249
Wiring
(Note 1)
Maximum
Machine
Load
(Amperes)
(Notes 1
Power
Factor and 2)
31.6
Three phases Four-wire 9.65
phase to phase
leading
31.6
Three phases Four-wire 9.65
phase to phase
1eading
(delta)
33
Four-wire
Three phases
phase to
neutra 1 (wye)
Five-Nire 9.65
17.3
1eadi ng
Five-w1re
33
Three phases Four-wire 9.65
1eading
phase to phase
Four-wire
Legend:
* IBM world Trade Europe/Middle East/Africa Corp. countries.
- IBM world Trade Americas Group countries.
*** IBM world Trade Asia/Pacific Group countries.
Notes:
~ur-wi re confi gura ti ons i ncl ude three phase wi res and one
ground.
five-Ni re confi gurati ons i ncl ude three phase wi res, one ground,
and one neutral that are mandatory in the wye syste ••
2. Maximum load per phase under minimulII nominal voltage.
3. A phase load imbalance of 1.2 is included.
3745-28
Voltages
Freq (Nomi na 1)
USA
and
Canada
Haximull
Power Current
Factor (Allperes)
One
Three-wire 9.75
8
E/ME/A* 59 Hz 299/229/249
One
and AG*'"
69 Hz 299/229/249
Three-wire 9.75
8
Three-wi re 9.75
8
APG"'-
69 Hz 299/249
Wiring
Phases (Note 1)
59 Hz 299/229/249
One
69 Hz 299/229/249
Legend:
'" IBM world Trade Europe/Middle East/Africa Corp. countries.
"'* IBM world Trade Americas Group countries.
*- IBM world Trade Asia/Pacific Group countries.
Notes:
1. Incl udes two phase wi res and one ground wi re.
DC Power:
Input Voltage Range:
Max Continuous Current:
Max Inrush Current:
Wiring:
InpuUQutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
-41.3V to -68.8V
26A
488A / 5ms.
2 wires plus one ground
wire. Positive and
ground lines connected
to DC common and
machine frame.
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Specifications (Continued)
The 50- or 60-Hz power input requirements are:
Frame
Maximum kVA
3745-210, 310, 410,
610, 21A, 31A, 41A,
61A
3746-900
3746-A11
3746-A12
3746-L13
3746-L14
3746-L.15
4.0
The ground leakage current does not exceed 500
mA rms in any configuration.
The ground leakage current for the 3746-900
does not exceed 3.5 mA rms.
1.S
1.S
O.S
0.9
0.9
0.9
Power Cord Characteristics
3745 and 3746 Models A11, A12, L13, L14, and
L15
The minimum branch circuit rating should be
calculated by an electrical contractor according
to country regulations. For example, in the USA
and in Canada, the minimum branch circuit
rating is:
• For the 3745 base frame: 15 A per phase
• For a maximum configuration (without a
3746-900): 40 A per phase.
• For the 3746-900: 15 A
Environmental Specifications
Voltages
Cable
Outside Dlameter
(In.)
mm
Number
of Canduetors
AWO
Number
AWO
200-240
delta configuration
25.9
(1.2)
3 and
ground
8 (8.4)
380-440
wye conflguratlon
21.7
(0.85)
4 and
ground
10 (5.3)
(mm~
The power wiring configuration can be changed
on-site from wye to delta and from delta to wye.
Contact your IBM representative.
Operating Environment
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Ground Leakage Current:
100C-3S0C (60°F-110°F)
S%-SO%
27°C (SO°F)
3746 Model 900
Cable
Outside Diameter
r:nm (In.)
Number
of
Conduetors
AWG
200-240
single
phase (AC)
US/JAPAN
other
2 and
ground
14 (2)
-41.3-60.0 (DC)
All
22.5
Countries
2 and
ground
8 (8)
Voltages
Lightning Protection: The power input of the
3745 is protected against lightning.
Contact an electrical contractor to determine if
lightning protection is needed for your power
distribution system.
The Line Interface Coupler (L1C) and operator
console cables are not protected against lightning and must be placed in the same building as
the 3745/3746 units.
Electromagnetic Interference:: The 3745
is compatible with the following classes of interference:
9.5 (0.4)
8.5(0.37)
(0.88)
Number
AWG
(mm2)
Power Cord length: A 4.3-m (14-ft) power cord
is shipped with each 3745 and 3746-900. In
Chicago, Illinois, USA, specify code 9986 for a
1.8-m (6-ft) cord. Two such power cords are
shipped with the 3746-900 when an optional
power inlet (AC or DC) is present.
• CISPR Publication 22, class A
• FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, class A (USA)
• VCCI-1, class 1 (Japan)
Chapter 1. Machine SpeCifications and Cabling Schematics
3745-29
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Power Cord Plug and Receptacle: The AC power cord is supplied with a country-dependent plug. The
DC power cord for the 3746-900 is supplied with a terminal to fit M6 or 0.250 - 20 UNC.
The customer must provide a receptacle, as shown in the following table. The branch circuit rating
should match the receptacle rating.
Although the maximum current does not exceed 33 A, to support quick On/Off switching of the 3745,
the receptacle atthe customer location should be able to handle inrush current up to:
• 230 amperes in the 208 volt to 240 volt range
• 150 amperes in the 380 volt to 415 volt range
USA, Canada,
Mexico
Plug Type
Plug
Ordering
Code
Receptacle
3745
Moisture Russel stoll
Resistant 7328-78
none
Russel stoll
7428 (inline) or
7324 (box type)
3746-988
Moisture Russelstoll
Resistant 3729-DPU2
none
Russel stoll
39l3U-2 (inline) or
3743U-2 (box type)
Plug Type
Ordering
Code
Receptacle
AC input
Japan
Plug
3745
Moisture Hirose
Resistant Electric
Cll8S-889l
none
Hirose Electric
Cll8s-e892
3746-988
locking
NEMA l6-l5P
9892
NEMA l6-l5R
Non-locking NEMA 6-l5P
9893
NEMA 6-15R
AC input
Other
Countries
Plug Type
3745
no plug shipped
3746-988
country standard plug.
(refer to Country Power
Plugs table)
AC input
Note: The approved plug for the specific location and installation should be installed by an electrical
contractor. The green/yellow grounding wire of the power cable must be attached to the ground leg of
the power plug.
3745-30
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
3746-900 Power Plug Identification
II
~
~
250V
15A
1m
250V
15A
250V
16 A
m
250V
16 A
m
250V
18 A
m
250V
18A
0
"
250V
16 A
m
[}3 @
f
IE
IE
~
=t
~
\
W W
250V
15 A
G
c:(3
5581
1
5581
1
5581
1
Fi~ed-Length
CG
..
or
No.
3797
(See note 2)
ESCON
(except
EHEA)
Cable
•
Custom-Length Cable
(ft)
...
4
7
13
22
31
46
61
77
92
187
122
~
(12)
(28)
(48)
(78)
(188)
(158)
(288)
(258)
(388)
(358)
(488)
5581
EPO
(EHEA)
1
or
No.
<1>
14F3797
(See note 6)
5351178
1178
(see note 5)
EPO
(except
EHEA)
ESCON
(EHEA)
CG
74F5416
(See note 3)
74F5412
74F5413
74F5414
74F5415
74F9718
74F5417
74F9419
74F9428
74F9421
74F5418
1178
(See note 4)
31 (188)
4
7
13
22
46
61
77
92
187
122
(12)
(28)
(48)
(78)
(158)
(288)
(258)
(388)
(358)
(488)
18
(68)
Maxil11U11
Length
(ft)
II
74F5436
(See note 6)
5351178
588 (1648)
122
(488)
588 (1648)
122
(488)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3745-37
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Notes:
1. The emergency power-off (EPO) cable is also called the power control cable.
2. To order, specify cable group 3797 and one of these lengths, as determined by the IBM Installation
Planning Representative.
3. The 31m (100 ft.) jumper cable is automatically shipped. If it is determined by the IBM Installation
Planning Representative that another length is required, order one of the other fixed-length cables
by part number and length.
4. Automatically shipped with feature 5501.
5. To order, specify cable group 1178, and a length not exceeding the maximum stated.
6. Custom-length duplex-to-duplex jumper cables up to 500m (1640ft), jumper cables with a duplex
connector at one end (3745) and another type of connector at the other end (distribution panel), and
fiber optic adapters and couplers used in distribution panels can be purchased as described in the
"ESCON Cabling Information" section of this publication (GC22-7064).
3745-38
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Channel Cabling Schematic 3745 Models 210, 310, 410, 610, 21A, 31A, 41A, 61A, and
3746 Models A11 and 900
Feature Code (1)
1562, 1581 or
1562, 1581 or
1562, 1581 or
Cable
Group (2)
1562, 1581 or
1562,
1562,
1562,
1562,
1562,
1562,
1562,
1562,
1581
1581
1581
1581
1581
1581
1581
1581
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
1562, 1581 or
1562, 1581 or
3746
All
1562, 1581 or
1562, 1581 or
Connector
10
1D
{1561 or 1571- 0185
,
1
- - --
2
1561 or 1571- 8185
,
3
- - --
4
If
{1561 or 1571- 8185
.
1561 or 1571- 8185
5
- - --
6
If
7
- - --
8
If
{1561 or 1571- 8185
9 -
- --
113
If
11
- - --
12
If
If
1561 or 1571- 8185
3745
218/318
418/619
21A/31A
41A/61A
Connector
{1561 or 1571- 8185
,
13
- - --
14
1561 or 1571- 8185
,
15
- - --
16
1561,
1561,
1561,
1561,
1561,
1561,
1561,
1561,
1571(3)
1571(3)
1571(3)
1571(3)
1571(3)
1571(3)
1571(3)
1571(3)
-
1178
1178
1178
1178
1178
1178
1178
117B
{1561 or 1571
8185
17
- - -- 18
1561 or 1571
81B5
19
- - --
213
4
{1561 or 1571
81B5
21
- - --
22
If
1561 or 1571
0185
23
--
-- 24
If
{1561 or 1571
8185
25
- - --
26
4
1561 or 1571
9185
27
- - --
28
4
{1561 or 1571
13185
29
- - --
313
4
1561 or 1571
0185
31
- - --
32
,
,
,
f-
Channel Signal
-
Channel Signal
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
ESCON Channel Coupler
3746
ge9
5591
3797
55131
3797
5591
3797
5591
3797
5591
117B
1A
5591
1178
3A
55131
1178
SA
55131
1178
7A
~
Channel Signal
If
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3745-39
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Notes:
1. Each channel adapter with two-processor switch (CA feature code 1562 or BCCA feature code 1581)
takes the place of two channel adapters (feature code 1561) or of two buffer chaining channel.
adapters (feature code 1571)
2. Cable group for signal cables is 0185 or 3797. Cable group is 1178 for power control cables.
3. Each of the 12 possible power control cables (1178) can be associated to any of the 20 possible
channel attachments. Therefore, a host with a channel attachment to the 3746 Model A11 or 900
can power control the 3745 and 3746 expansion units via one power control cable.
4. For a 3745 with 3746-900, one of the 8 possible power control cable connection IDs of the 3745 must
be reserved for internal power control.
3745-40
Input/output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Console Attachment (3745 Models 210, 310, 410, 610): Feature attachment methods and
cable characteristics are shown. Cable lengths are given with no intervening walls, doors, or
obstructions.
3745-210, 310, 410 and 610
3745 Operator Conlole and RSF Attachmentl
Local Conlole Attachment:
* Basic (mandatory)
One of the following:
Local: 3151,3161,3163
3727, PS/2
~1
* Compatible with other attachments
* Used by customer and Service Representative
* Console type: IBH 3151,3161,3163,PS/2,3727
(See Note 1)
* Attachment type: direct attached
* Cable delivery:
-1 is delivered with the 3745
7427
See
-B must be ordered
-C must be ordered
-X is delivered with the 7427
B ---1 Loca 1: 3151,3161, 3163 1
i"-
I - Note
2
C ---1 Loca 1: PS/21
X
* Not compatible with the remote console
Local: 3727 1
One or none of the fallowing:
Alternate Console Attachment:
* Optional
-1
i"-
2
* Used by the customer
* Console type: IBH 3151,3161,3163, PS/2, 3727
Alternate: 3151,3161,3163
3727, PS/2
(See Note 1)
* Attachment type: direct attached
* Cable delivery:
-2 must be ordered
-
2
-B must be ordered
-C must be ordered
7427
B ---1Alternate: 3151,3161,31631
See
Note
C ---1Alternate
PS/21
2
-X is delivered with the 7427
X ---1Alternate 37271
~---------------or----------------~
The fallowing or none:
Remote Console Attachment:
* Optional
* Incompatible with the alternate console
* Used by the customer
* Console type: IBH 3151,3161,3163,PS/2,PC
-
3
---------11
Modem
~
Link attachment is by modem and public
switched network (two-wire line).
(See Note 1)
* Attachment type: link attached
* Cable delivery:
- Must be ordered
The fallowing:
RSF Attachment: (See Nate 3)
* Basic or optional (depending on country)
* Compatible with other attachments
* Used by Service representative
* Console type: remote support application
tenninal
* Attachment type: link attached
* Cable delivery:
- With the 3745 in all countries
-
A
IModem
~
Link attachment is by modem and public
switched network (two-wire line).
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and cabling Schematics
3745-41
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Notes:
1. 3151, 3161, and 3163 consoles are not available in Brazil
2. A local console, as well as an alternate console, can be common to several IBM communication
controllers to which they are connected by an IBM 7427 Switching Unit.
3. In the USA and certain selected countries, a modem (see note 1 on next page) is provided for connection to the IBM Remote Support Facility (RSF). The customer must provide access to the public
switched telephone network via an ANALOG telephone line (preferably dedicated).
3745-42
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Operator Console and RSF Attachment Cables (3745 Models 210, 310, 410, 610): The
numbers on the left of the following table are references to the cable codes shown under "Console
Attachment" on page 3745-41.
Feature
According to Your Requirements, Order:
Area
Custom-Length Cable
Fixed-Length Cable
Console and RSF
Attachments
~
Local
Console
Number
of
Cables CG
~
3151,3161
3163
3727
PS/2
1
Long Cable
Short Cable
or
Part Length
No. III (ft) CG
or
MaximWi
Part
Part Length
No. m (ft) No.
...~
...
...~
...~
(See note 4)
~
... ~
Maximum USA
Length
AG
(ft) A/PG E/ME/A
III
"'i~
7 (23)
...j~
...~
Y
Y
3745 to
7427
3151,3161
Alternate 3163
Console 3727, PS/2
2
1
5826
34F1262 35 (115) 34F1262 122 (488)
6153
83F4484 13.5
(See Note 3)
3745 to
7427
3 Remote Console
1
3151,3161,3163 or
PS/2,PC
(See Note 2)
A RSF
(See Note 1)
(See Note 2)
B Local or
C
83F4485 122 (488)
(45)
(See Note 3)
1
(See Note 1)
13.5
(45)
7427 to
Alternate 3151,3161
3163
1
5828
65X8985 1
Loca 1 or 7427 to
Alternate PS/2
1
8148
26F8317 2 (6.5)
(3)
Notes:
1. The RSF cable is delivered with the 3745, Part No. 76F8604 (US only) or Part No. 65X8920 (World
Trade on Iy).
Modem for the RSF:
a. IBM modem for all countries when this modem is PIT-homologated:
• Shipped with the 3745
• Installed by IBM.
The customer must provide access to the public switched network (analog) by means of an
RJ11 type connector.
b. In other countries:
• Provided and installed by the customer
• Compatible with CCIIT V.22 bis
• Operating in half-duplex mode, with BSC protocol at 1200 bps.
2. See Power Supply and Telecommunication Connections for IBM Modems, GA33-0054.
3. A fixed-length cable is not available for these attachments.
4. This cable is delivered with the 3745, Part No. 76F8607 (US only) or Part No. 26F1792 (World Trade
only).
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3745-43
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Service Processor Attachment Cables (3745 Models 21 A, 31 A, 41 A, 61 A, and
3746-900):
3745
9m
3746-gee
3745
3745
9m
9m
9m
3745
9m
(See Note 1)
****************************************************************************
*
*
*
I
I
Service
I
Processor
*
*
Service Processor
(See Note 4)
*
2.4m
*
*
*
*
*.
*
*
*
*
I
Hodem
(See Note 5)
*
*
*
I - -*--.
*
PS/2
(See Note 2) . (See Note 3)
*
*
*
*
*
*
I
*
*
*
*
2.4m
*
*
*
Access Unit
(SPAU)
*
*
*
*
I
I
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4.6m
*
*
*
****************************************************************************
Notes:
The following part numbers are supplied for replacement purposes (notes 1 to 4):
1. Token-Ring cable shipped automatically with each 3745 and 3746-900. Part No. 76F9440 (US), Part
No. 76F9441 (other countries).
2. Connection(s) to user Token-Ring (16Mbps) and/or an IBM PS/2 used as an alternate/remote
console.
3. LAN Attached Console (via a Token-Ring).
4. All cables within area denoted by ,*, shipped automatically with the Service Processor.
• Part No. 6339098 - SPAU to Service Processor cable
• Part No. 1502067 - Service Processor to Modem cable
• Modem telephone cable, see following table.
3745-44
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Country
Cable PIN Description
US/Canada/Japan/Chile/
Argentina,Philippines
53F6B95
Austria
74F4485
Denmark
74F4488
Norway
74F4498
France
74F4493
Italy
74F4498
Netherlands
74F4588
Sweden/Iceland
74F4582
UK/Hong Kong/China/
Thailand/Sri Lanka
74F4584
Belgium/Egypt/Greece
74F4587
Spain
93F1528
Israel
93F1532
Portugal/Saudi Arabia
74F8378
Switched network
te 1eco1lDlluni cati on cabl e w1th
country desi gnated pl ug
Swi tched network
telecommunication cable with
spade lugs
5. For US and Canada the modem is integrated in the service processor
Modem for RSF and Remote Console Access In a Switched Network: A modem is
required for connection to the IBM Remote Support Facility. The customer must provide access to a
dedicated analog line of the public switched telephone network (PSTN), so that the Service Processor
can automatically dial into the IBM Remote Support Facility.
Modem for the RSF:
1. IBM modem for all countries when this modem is PTT-homologated:
• Shipped with the Service Processor
• Installed by IBM.
The customer must provide access to the public switched network (analog).
2. In other countries:
• Either provided with the service processor or provided and installed by the customer (country
dependent)
• Compatible with CCITT V.32
• The modem must support the V.25 bis protocol
• Operating in full-duplex mode, with SOLC protocol at 9600 bps.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3745-45
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
(3745)
Token-Ring Attachment and High-Speed Line Attachment Cables
Feature
According to Your Requirements, Order:
Token-Ring
Attachment
and High-Speed
Line
Custom-Length Cable
Feat MaxilTllm Fixed-Length
Code Number Cable
Short Cable
Long Cable
of
Maximum USA
(See Cables
Maximum
Note per
Length
Part Length
Part Length
AG
6) . Feature CG m (ft) CG
m (ft) A/PG E/ME/A Frame
or
No. m (ft) No.
"'b~
~~
Area
"'a~
41111d~
"'e~
"'j~
... ~
61X3229 21.3 (78) 61X3229 44.2(145)
Y
N
61X3229 21.3 (78) 61X3229 44.2(145)
N
Y
Y
...~
"'g~
"'h~
"'i~
Token-ring
4768
attachment (USA, or
AG, and A/PG)
4778
2
Token-ring
attachment
(E/ME/A)
4768
or
4778
2
V.35 DCE
(See Notes 1
and 2)
4748
1
5831 18
(33) 5838
58X9344 18
(33) 58X9344 35 (115)
(See
Note 5)
X.21 DCE
(See Notes 1
and 2)
4748
1
5833 18 (33) 5832
58X9345 18
(33)
V.35 direct
attachment
(See Note 1)
4749
1
5837 19 (33) 5836
58X9347 18
(33) 58X9347 188 (328)
X.21 direct
attachment
(See Note 1)
4748
58X9348 18
(33)
X.21 Transfix
(See Notes 2
and 4)
4748
1
5835 18 (33) 5834
58X9346 18
(33)
N
X.21 EIA-547
DCE
4748
1
5844 18 (33) 5842
11F4837 18
(33) 11F4837 35 (115)
Y
X.21 EIA-547
direct
attachment
4748
1
5845 18 (33) 5843
11F4838 18
(33) llF4838 H)8 (328)
3745-46
1666 21.3 (78) 1667
(See Note 7)
1666 9 (38) 1667
(See Note 7)
(See Note 3)
1
5839 18 (33) 5838
(See Note 3)
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
N
"'l~
BF
3745 Communication Controller and 3746 Expansion Unit
Token-Ring Attachment Cables (3746-900)
Feature
Token-Ring
Attachment
"'a~
Area
According to Your Requirements. Order:
Custom-Length Cable
Feat Maxirrum Fixed-Length
Long Cable
Code Number Cable
Short Cable
of
Cables
Maximum
Maximum USA
AG
Length
Part Length
Part Length
per
Feature CG m (ft) CG
or
No. m (ft) No.
m (ft) A/PG E/ME/A Frame
"'b~
"'a~
"'d~
~
m
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
I
T
7.9
64.0
60.0
No
No
8.6
Environment, Operating:
Burster-TrimmerStacker Feature
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
60 0 p-85 0 p (16 0 C-29 0 C)
200/0-80%
73 0 p (23 0 C)
Environment:
"Human health considerations dic:tate that appropriate ventilation be supplied to the printer area. The Am~rican Society of
Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) recommends a minimum of 0.42-0.57 cmm (15 - 20 cfm) per
person of outdoor air make-up during human occupancy (ASHRAE 62-1989). Adherence to IBM pre-printed forms
recommendations along with the provision of appropriate ventilation should preclude the development of adverse human
health effects due to outgassing/emissions from preprinted forms."
Toner, paper, and ink (present on preprinted forms) is momentarily heated to approximately 350°F (177°C) during the
printing process. As a result, chemical compounds may be released. NormaJly concentrations of these materials do not
reach objectionable levels in a typical data processing installation. However, the usc of supplemental filtration, exhaust,
and/or dilution with building or outside air is recommended to ensure positive control of the installation environment.
Experience has shown that chemical compounds containing amines, such as cyclohexylamine, morpholine, and
cliethylaminoethanol, may cause degraded printer performance when they are introduced into the printer area. Under
extreme conditions, total print loss may occur for short periods of time.
3800-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3800 Printing Subsystem
3800 PRINTING SUBSYSTEM MODELS 1-3, 6, AND 8 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Cable
Group
Feature
Code
Std
{3920
1178
8170 or
8180
{3920
6148 or
6158
1178
1178
Conn
Conn
10
10
----
1 1---
2
--
Channel A
4
--
Channel B
5
3 1----7
--
9
6
8
---
-
SF 78 10
Signal
Power Sequence
and Control
From 3800
Feature
Code
Std
Conn
ID
Max Length
(ft)
m
2
1
61
(200)
All
I
I
5
61
(200)
All
3
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
3920
1178
Model
Notes
6148
I 178
I
9
61
(200)
1,2
4
6158
1178
1
9
122
(400)
3,8
4
3920
2
3
61
(200)
1,2
1,2
1178
1
7
61
(:!OO)
1.2
3
3920
2
3
122
(400)
3,8
1,2
1178
1
7
122
(400)
3,8
3
8170
8180
To 3800
Feature
Code
Std
7810
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
All
I
6
I
5
8
1
3,5
2
8170
4
1,2
1,2
8180
4
3,8
1,2
Notes:
1. Maximum channel cable length will vary by model.
a. A maximum cable length of 61 meters (200 feet) is available to attach a Modell or 2 to a channel. The 6l-meter (200-foot)
cable length must be reduced by 4.5 meters (15 feet) for each control unit connected between the Modell or 2 and the channel.
b. A maximum cable length of 122 meters (400 feet) is available to attach a Model 3,6, or 8 to a channel. The l22-meter
(400-1'oot) cable length must be reduced by 4.5 meters (15 feet) for each control unit connected between the Model 3, 6, or 8
and the channel.
2. Special features may be ordered for connecting more than one channel. For channel switching, one set of cable groups is req uired
for each channel. Maximum cable length applies to each channel.
3. Power sequence and control cable, cable group 1178. is optional for each connected channel.
4. Required for
6148 and
6158 (remote switch).
5. As many as eight tape control units (any combination of 3803s and 3411s) may be attached only to the IBM 3800 Printing
Subsystem Modell. with the Tape-to-Printing Subsystem feature installed. Only one unit can be active at a time. The 3800 provides
power sequence and control for one 3411 or 3803. Any additional tape control units must receive power sequence and control from
another source.
sr
sr
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3800-3
3800 Printing Subsystem
This page is intentionally left blank.
3800-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3803 Tape Control
3803 TAPE CONTROL MODELS 1 TO 3
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECI FICATIONS
r
Dimensions:
30
"
~I'"
30"1
ill
12LI
I-T---~I
Inches
(em)
29"
36"
4-3/4"
(2 Plo, .. )
----+
5-3/4"
(2 Places)
r3., '0:+ ~"
Jh
Inches
(em)
Weight:
F
36
(91 )
4"
(4 Places)
L __ ~ro~ _ _ _ J-----L.
H
60
(152)
R
36
(91 )
Rt
0*
(0*)
L
30*
(76*)
600 Ib (280 kg)
Heat Output:
36"
S
28
(71 )
Service Clearances:
1
~
+
,
4-3/4" x 16"
F
30
(76)
BTU/In
(kcal/hr)
Models 1 & 3
3,800
(960)
Model 2
5,700
(1 450)
Airflow:
cfm
(m 3 /min)
360
(11)
360
(11 )
Power Requirements: **
kYA
Phases
1.2
3
1.8
3
Standard**
Plug
R&S,
Connector
R&S,
Receptacle
R&S,
Power Cord Style
With SF 9001 ***
SC7328
R&S, JPSI 034H
SC7428
R&S, JCS1034H
SC7324
R&S, JRSR1034H
E3 - 50 Hz
EI0 - 60 Hz
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
60°1-'-90 0 F (16°C-320C)
20%-80%
78°)-" (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
50°F-110°F (100C-43°C)
8%-80(%;
80°)-" (27°C)
Notes:
*The 30-inch (76-cm) side clearance is recommended
on the left side when compatible with machine layout.
** A 50-Hz 3803 provides power for up to eight 3420s
(any model).
A 60-Hz 3803 provides power for up to eight 3420s
Models 3 through 7.
When the 60-Hz tape subsystem includes 3420-8's,
one 3803 may power a maximum of six 3420-8's.
See your IBM representative for valid combinations
of drives. Maximum continuous operating current
will not exceed 46 A per phase.
***With SF 9001 installed, the 3803-2 may power a
maximum of eight 3420s (any model). Maximum
continuous operating current will not exceed 56 A
per phase.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3803-1
3803 Tape Control
3803 TAPE CONTROL MODELS 1 TO 3 CABLING SCHEMATIC OF TAPE SWITCHING 3803 MODELS 1 AND 2
As many as eight 3420 Magnetic Tape Units can be attached to the 3803s #1.
2 Control Units
SF 1792
and 9071
3 Control Units
SF 1793
and 9071
SF 9071
3803
#1
3803
#1
3803
,
11
#2
38
L
6456
2 x8
SF 9071
SF 9071
13
11
I
I
3803
3803
#2
#3
,
38
6456
38
t
6456
3x8
4 Control Units
SF 1794
and 9071
SF 9071
3803
#1
3803
3803
#2
#3
#4
38
I
I
3803
,
15 13 11
6456
SF 9071
SF 9071
38
38
t
6456
~
6456
4x8
As many as eight 3420 Magnetic Tape Units can be attached to the 3803-1 and
as many as eight 3420 Magnetic Tape Units can be attached to the 3803-2.
2 Control Units
SF 1792
and 9071
3 Control Units
SF 1792
and 9071
3803
3803
#1
11
#2
11
38
SF 1793
and 9071
SF 1793
and 9071
38
SF 9073
3803
#3
3803
#1
3803
13 11 38
11 38 13
l•
#2
6456
6456
It I
6456
2 x 16
3 x 16
4 Control Units
SF 1794
and 9071
SF 1794
and 9071
3803
#1
15
3803
3803
6456
#2
#3
I
6456
6456
SF 9073
6456
11~38
38
13
11
15
I
13
6456
L
40
6456 ,
SF 9073
3803
#4
.
38
40
38
J
•
4 x 16
3803-2
6458
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
40
38
j
•
3803 Tape Control
3803 TAPE CONTROL MODELS 1 TO 3 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Conn
ID
Std *
3920
11~
Conn
10
21
8100 *
6148
1178
5
3920
3
{1 9
1178
7
1178
9
---
4~}
Channel A
4~}
Channel B
36
20
34
18
32
16
30
14
28
12
26
10
24
8
22
6
SF 1792, 1793,
or 1794
6456
SF 1793 or 1794
6456
~----I
SF 1794
6456
~----I15
Signal Eighth 3420
Power
Signal Seventh 3420
Power
Signal Sixth 3420
Power
Signal Fifth 3420
Power
Signal Fourth 3420
Power
Signal Third 3420
Power
Signal Second 3420
Power
Signal First 3420
Power
Signal SF 9073
Signal SF 9071
or 9073
11
13
*Model dependent; see Note 9.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3803-3
3803 Tape Control
3803 TAPE CONTROL MODELS 1 TO 3 CABLING SCHEMATIC
From 3803
Feature
Code
SId
Group
No.
No. 01
Cables
3920
2
Conn
Max Length
ID
m
(It)
61
(200)
1
Model
Notes
2
1,2,9
3920
2
17
61
(200)
1
1,2,9
3920
2
21
61
(200)
3
1,2,9
1178
1
S
46
(150)
AU
3
1792,
1793, or
1794
6456
2
11
26
(85)
1.2
4
1793 or
1794
6456
2
13
26
(85)
1, :2
4
1794
6456
2
15
26
(85)
1,2
4
6148
1178
1
9
46
(150)
1,2
5
3920
2
3
61
(200)
1.2
1,9
3920
2
19
61
(200)
1
1,9
1178
1
7
46
(150)
1,2
8100
To 3803
Feature
Code
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
2
2
8,9
Std
Std
42
1
8,9
6
Std
22
Std
Std
10
Std
26
Std
12
Std
28
Std
14
Std
30
Std
16
Std
32
Std
18
Std
34
Std
20
Std
36
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
9071 or
9073
38
1,2
4
9073
40
1,2
4
8100
4
1,2
8,9
8100
44
1
8,9
6
Std
8
Std
24
3803-4
7
6
7
6
7
6
7
6
7
6
7
6
7
6
7
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3
3803 Tape Control
3803 TAPE CONTROL MODELS 1 TO 3 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Notes:
1. Up to 61 meters (200 feet) is available to attach up to eight control
units (unless modified by general control to channel cabling schematic).
Cable length between a 3803 with a 3420 Model 6 or Model 8 attached
(at 6,250 bpi) and the channel is shown in the following table:
To
Max Length
with 3420 Model 8
Attached
(ft)
m
Max Length
with 3420 Model 6
Attached
(ft)
m
2860
2880
22
36
(72)
(119)
61
61
(200)
(200)
Block Multiplexer
or 3800
Selector Channel
22*. 31
22*,36
(72*, 103)
(72*, 119)
61
61
(200)
(200)
*On System/370 Model 135/138,4331 Processor Model Group
2,4361 Processors, and 4381 Processors.
For each control unit connected between the 3803 and the channel,
the cable length shown must be reduced by 4.5 meters (15 feet) if a
3420 Model 6 is attached, or 20 feet if the 3420 Model 8 is attached.
SF 8100 may be ordered to connect a 3803 Model 1 or 2 to a second
channel. Maximum length limitations apply to each channel attachment.
2. Maximum cable length available to connect the 3803 Model 3 to a 3115
or 3125 is 8.5 meters (28 feet).
3. Power sequence and control cable. This machine must have the power
sequence and control cable installed for proper operation. External
shield of this cable provides an electrical ground reference between
the 3803 and the data processing system. This ground reference must be
maintained to ensure proper operation of the magnetic tape subsystem.
Maximum length is 10.7 meters (35 feet) when attached to a 3115 or a
3125.
4. Signal cabling provides for switching of up to sixteen 3420 Magnetic
Tape Units among up to four 3803 Models 1 and 2. (See page 3803.4.)
Signal cable length from a 3420 to a 3803 (cable group 143) and signal
cable length from the 3803 to the most remote 3803 (one cable group
6456) in the tape switching subsystem must not exeeed 36.5 meters
(120 feet).
Up to eight 3420 Magnetic Tape Units may be attached to each of the
first and second 3803 units.
5. Required for remote switching feature (SF 6148). This cable must
6.
7.
8.
9.
be purchased by the customer. Consult your IBM representative for
price and ordering procedure.
Power connectors for up to eight tape units. When the nuniber of
3420 Magnetic Tape Units to be attached exceeds the specificatiom
shown on page 3803.1, power for each extra machine may be provided
by another 3803 or SF 9001 may he installed.
Signal cable connections for up to eight tape units.
Channel signal attachment from another control device.
Specify 3803 Conn IDs 1. 2, :3, and/or 4 for cable orders for 3803
Models 1 and 2.
Specifiy Conn ID 21 for cable orders for 3803 Model :3.
Some 3803 Modell units 8hipped before 1980 may not have EC 733814
installed; substitute Conn ID:
17 for 1
42 for 2
19 for 3
44 for 4
for cable orders for these units.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3803-5
3803 Tape Control
This page is intentionally left blank.
3803-6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3811 Printer Control Unit
3811 PRINTER CONTROL UNIT MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
.r--- -------~l
Y-["
l
Inches
(em)
36"
10"
(Included
in
3211 Service
Clearance)
~
~1-1/8"
I
I
28"
~
(4 Places)
\
3811-1
+
m .... -r----r
+
I
I
I
29"
Inches
(cm)
I
1 ::¥I
I
28"1
1
"--
/.-29"
29
(74)
29
(74)
46
(117)
F
R
Rt
L
42
(107)
36
(91 )
30
(76)
0*
(0*)
Weight:
Ib
(kg)
42"
L_~:t~~_JJ
I
H
Service Clearances:
~ ---I..'"
15"
10-1/2"
4-l/2"Ji
(4 Places)
S
I
+ 3" x 7" +
5"
F
1
Heat Output:
BTU/hr
(kcal/hr)
30,,----1
Airflow:
cfm
(m 3 /min)
50Hz
820
(380)
60Hz
750
(350)
7,000
(1 800)
5,600
(1 450)
180
(6)
Power Requirements:
kVA
2.7
Phases
3
R&S,
Plug
Connector
R&S,
R&S,
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
180
(6)
1.9
3
FS3760
FS3934
FS3754
D1
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
600F-90(~F (16°C-32°C)
ReI Humidity
20%·80%
Max Wet Bulb
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
50 o F·l10oF (lOoC-430C)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
8%·80%
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
* The 3811 abuts and attaches to the right side
ofa3211.
3811
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3811-1
3811 Printer Control Unit
3811 PRINTER CONTROL UNIT MODEL 1 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Cable
Group
3920
Conn
10
Conn
10
From
1
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
2
1178
To
f--I--
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
3
Power Sequence
and Control
From 3811
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
lin
I
3920
2
Conn
Max Length
/D
m
(ft)
3
I
46
61
(200)
(150)
Comments (see Note)
--
Power sequence and control
Busand tag
To 3811
COli 11
ID
COII/II/(,lIls
2
Bus and tag
Note: Cable group 1178, power sequence and control, is optional.
3811-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3814 Switching Management System
3814 SWITCHING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM MODELS
A1-A4, 81-B4, AND C1-C4
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm
= 0.5 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
See Note
fl ~~ ~
--1"--,------f360
(14-1/4)
L-~_____ ~~-=~~==~
1000
(39-1/2)
I
3814 Model A or Model 8
I
/
I
~
350
(14)
(4 Places)
I
Front
I
82
(3-1/4)
(4 Places)
~_ _ _--'f,~n~I~~R~m~~~p _ _ _ _ _ _ _- L
Model A or Model B
See Note
45
(2)
(8 Places)
2815
·~t::==~-::::::::::t1ffi::t=r""'::=::t15ii~======:;-A
7~.p
(111)
I
1000
3814 Model C
600
(23-3/4)
(8 Places)
I
~:I
"1"
82
(3-1/4)
(8 Places)
I
Front
...-------2 470--------I~
(97-1/2)
Model A or Model B with Model C
Note:
Cable entry/exit holes #4 and #8 are only for remote two-channel
switch cables.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3814-1
3814 Switching Management System
3814 SWITCHING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM MODELS
A1-A4, 81-84, AND C1-C4
SPECI FICATIONS
Power Requirements:
Model A or Model B
Dimensions:
Front
mm
(inches)
Side
815
1235*
(48-3/4*) (32)
kVA
1.5
Voltages
100,208.
(50/60 Hz)
220,240
Phases
1
Plug
R&S. FS3720
Conncctor
R&S. FS3913
Receptacle
R&S. FS3743
Power Cord Style A2
See *** under Notes.
Height
I 200**
(47-1/4**)
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Front
Rear
Right
Left
1 000
(39-1/2)
1 000
(39-1/2)
0
(0)
0
(0)
Weight:
kg
(lb)
Model A Model B
Model C
380
(840)
340
(750)
350
(780)
Heat Output:
Model A or Model B
Airflow:
Model A or Model B
with Model C
] 420 W
2360 W
(4,820 BTU/hr)
(8,030 BTU/In)
] 8 m 3 /min (640 cfm)
2.6
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
IOoC-32oC (50°F-90°F)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
23°C (73°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
IOoC-430C (50 o F-I IOoF)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* Front dimension is 1470111111 (97 -1/4 in.) when expansion unit (Model C) is added to Model A or Model B.
** Operator panel height
145111111 (6 in.) is not included.
*** When in a service mode. a duplex receptacle is required
within 1.0 meter (3-1/2 feet) or the 3814 to provide
powcr for a 3604-6 keyboard display.
or
3604-6 Keyboard Display
3814 Model A (with IBM 3604 Keyboard
Display Model 6) and Model C
3814-2
Model A or Model B
with Model C
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3814 Switching Management System
3814 SWITCHING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM MODELS
A1-A4, B1-B4, AND C1-C4 CABLING SCHEMATIC
0185
,.
~
To channel (multiplexer, selector/block multiplexer, control unit, or
channel-to-channel adapter).
System interface cable from switched control units; supplied by control unit.
1178
Power control cable. Connector IDs are 35,37,39, and 41.
,.
Control unit remote two-channel switch cable (SF 6010) required for the first
eight pairs of switches. SF 6011, 6012, and 6013, respectively, required for
each of the additional eight pairs of switches. Cables supplied by control units.
(0
1178
3814 interframe power control cable (mandatory between Models A's with alternate
controller attachment SF 1430 installed). Connector IDs are 43,45, and 47.
From switched control units. Power control cables supplied by control units,
SF 1811 supplies initial four ports. Order SF 1812, 1813,and 1814, respectively,
for each additional group. A group can have as many as four ports. (Maximum
16 power sequence ports.)
0
0
0186
i
,.....
Channel expansion external (SF 1531 or 1532).
,.
Interframe loop attachment cable. Each 3814 can drive 305 m (1,000 tt) of loop
cable. When power is off, loop is automatically bypassed.
...
To alternate controller attachment feature; SF 1430 on alternate 3814. Only
for Model A, One cable for each system, Connector 10 is 33.
~
1178
#'
...
h
#'
-..
h
,w
"
3178/3191/3278/3287/4224 attachment, SF 1420 (see Note 11), Only
for Model A.
System attachment, SF 1440 (see Note 13). Only for Model A .
,'"
3814 Model A, Model B,
or Model C
No,
Frame
Exit
COHn
/D
0185
010X
00000
3814
122
(41)0)
0186
010S
00021
3814
122
(400)
1178
0104
Group
No. oj
CaO/es
Max Len"t"
From
{jil
CU
00033
3814
46
1178
0104
00035
3814
46
(ISO)
1178
0104
00037
3814
46
(150)
1I50)
1178
0104
00039
3814
46
(150)
1178
0104
00041
3814
46
(150)
To
FrQmt?
Om"
Exit
/D
3814
0101
00022
3814
OIOX
00000
3814
0104
00034
1178
0104
00043
3814
46
(150)
3814
0104
0104
00045
3814
46
(ISO)
3814
0104
00046
1178
0104
00047
3814
46
(150)
3814
0104
00048
3814
0104
00000
3814
1500
(4,925)
3274
2000
(6.575)
('ommenu
I. 8. 9.14.15
Bus/ta~
to host channel
7.8.9,14,15
Blls/ta~
fot SF 1531/SF 1532
Bus/tag: from switched control units
12
Alternate controller feature cable (Sf' 1430)
Host power sequence and control cables
1178
CU
,vOft'S
00044
3814 interframe power sequence and control cables
Control unit power sequence and control cables
11,13
Console/printer cable
3814
11.13
System attachment cable (SF 1440)
3604·6
3814
4,5,6.10
3604·6 cable
3814
3814
4,10
Interframe loop attachment cable
CU
3814
00000
Remote two-channel switch cable
°317813191/327813287/4224
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3814-3
3814 Switching Management System
3814 SWITCHING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM MODELS A1-A4, B1-B4, AND C1-C4 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Notes:
1. System interfact' cable. One group number required for each channel attachment. Each Model AI, A2, B 1, B2, Cl, and C2 requires
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
four cable group numbers for channel attachments. Each Model A3, A4, B3, B4, C3, and C4 requires eight cable group numbers for
channel attachments.
Power control cable. One cable group required per system attachment; maximum of four cable groups is basic. For additional four
cable groups, order SF 6350, system power sequence-additional.
Interframc power control cablt'. Order one cable for each remote unit (mandatory between Model As with SF 1430, alternate
controller attachment).
Customer-supplied cable. Each 3814 can drive 305 meters (1,000 ft) of loop cable. When power is off, loop is automatically bypassed.
For further information on customer-supplied loop cables, see Appendix B of this manual.
Physical planning information for 3604-6 and installation of the loop cable is in IBM 3600 Finance Commllnication System Installation Manual-Ph),sical Planning, GA27 -27 66.
Cabling to the first 3604-6 from controller is limited to 10 meters (33 ft) for servicing without SF 1420.
Order one group number for SF 1531 and one group number for SF 1532.
Maximum channel to control unit cable length is determined by individual control unit requirements. See individual control units.
On 3814s without internal channel expansion feature. interrace cables in groups of four bus and tag pairs must be ordered to connect
each 4 x 4 switch matrix. Each matrix enters and exits the cable hole directly below the matrix. Keep the length of these cables to
a minimum as they will reduce the maximum allowable cable length.
When selecting the length of the loop cables connected to the 3814 Models AI-A4, an additional 2 meters (6 feet) must be added to
the length of either cable. This extra length is rolled up under the 3814 and used only for servicing..
Customer-supplied cable. One for each 3178,3191,3278,3287, or 4224, to a maximum of 1 SOO m (4,925 f1), must be purchased and
installed by the customer, with a maximum of two 3178s, 3191 S, or 3278s and three 3287s or 42245 \\lith SF 1420. Follow the specifications and the instructions in IBM 3270 Information Display Station Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787. See Note 5 on
page 3814.8.
Alternate controller connection cable. Order one for each 3814 system with the alternate controller attachment feature (SF 1430)
installed.
Customer-supplied cable. One for each 3274, to a maximum of 2000 m (6,575 ft), must be purchased and installed by the customer,
with a maximum of two 3274s with SF 1440. Follow the specifications and the instructions in IBM 3270 Information Display System
Installation Manual-Physical Planning. GA27-2787.
Devices that operate at a speed of4.5 megabytes per second and are switched by a 3814 require cable group 0185 and cable group 0186 if
SI: 1531 or SF 1532 is installed.
After 1 September 1987, all 3814s will be shipped \\lith cable groups 0185 and 0186.
3814 Switching Management System Cabling Considerations
When a 3814 logical matrix is configured using physical
matrices that are interconnected by external cables, these
interconnecting cables must be included in the control unitto-channel cable length.
Dedicated Path
For each dedicated path, review the following:
1. The number of allowable control units per channel.
a_ Find the equivalent control unit positions for the
3814 (see Table 1)_
Dedicated Control Units
Switch Sizes
4 x4
4x8
4 x 12
4 x 16
8 x4
8x8
8 x 12
8 x 16
12 x 4
12 x 8
16 x 4
16 x 8
3814 Equh'alent
Control Unit Positions
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
Table 1
3814-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
b. Add the equivalent control unit positions for n
other dedicated control units.
c. The sum must not exceed eight per dedicated pad
2. The maximum channel cable length restriction is contre
unit dependent and in all situations is the cumulati,
cable length from the channel to the control unit il
eluding all cabling associated with the 3814_
3. Priority considerations as outlined in Chapter 5 (
IBM 3814 Switching Management System Produc
Description, GA22-7075.
3814 Switching Management System
Switchable Interface
For each switchable interface, review the following:
1. Class 1 control units (nondata streaming):
a. Equivalent control unit positions from the channel
through the switch; eight are allowed per switchable
interface, including the dedicated control units
between the 3814 and the channel.
b. Maximum cable length:
Two methods to determine cable length restrictions
are:
1) Use Table 2 to assign the 3814 zero-control-unit
positions and to reduce the normal control unit
cable length. This method allows eight class 1
control units to be attached.
2) Use Table 3 to assign the 3814 as representing
intervening control units. If this method is used,
the number of class 1 control units is restricted.
The maximum channel cable length restriction is
control-unit dependent and in all situations is the
cumulative cable length from the channel to the
control unit including all cabling associated with the
3814. If the Table 3 method is used, the cable
length must be reduced for those control units that
require reduction for intervening control units.
For Class 1 Control Units on a Switclzable Interface
3814 Matrix Size
4xN
8xN
Ch:
Ch:
12 x N Ch:
Ch:
Ch:
16 x N Ch:
Ch:
Ch:
Ch:
1-4
5-8
1-4
5-8
9-12
14
5-8
9-12
13-16
N = 9 to 12
Subtract:
N =13 to 16
Subtract:
N == 1 to 4
Subtract:
N== 5 to 8
Subtract:
Meters (Feet)
Meters (Feet)
Meters (Feet)
Meters (Feet)
13.8 (45)
13.8 (45)
16.5 (54)
13.8 (45)
16.5 (54)
19.2 (63)
13.8 (45)
16.5 (54)
19.2 (63)
22.3 (73)
15.3 (50)
15.3 (50)
18.0 (59)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
16.5 (54)
16.5 (54)
19.2 (63)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
12.1
12.1
15.3
12.1
15.3
18.0
12.1
15.3
18.0
20.8
(40)
(40)
(50)
(40)
(50)
(59)
(40)
(50)
(59)
(68)
N/ A = Not Applicable (for Tables 2 and 3)
Note: For use of Table 2, see Example of Table 2 Use.
Table 2
For Class 1 Control Units on a Switchable Interface.
the 3814 Can Be Considered Representing This MallY
Interpening Control Units
3814 Matrix Size
4xN
8xN
Ch:
Ch:
12 x N Ch:
Ch:
Ch:
16 x N Ch:
Ch:
Ch:
Ch:
14
5-8
14
5-8
9-12
14
5-8
9-12
13-16
N = 1 to 4
3
3
3
3
4
4
3
4
4
5
N = 5 to 8
3
3
4
3
4
5
3
4
5
5
N = 9 to 12
4
4
4
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N == 13 to 16
4
4
5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Note: An altcrna tc approach to using Table 2 is to trea t the 3814 as rcprcscn ting in tcrvening
control uni ts. If this approach is used, Class 1 control units that arc affected by intervenin o
control units should use the values as stated in Table 3.
b
Table 3. Alternate Method for Evaluating 3814 Cabling Restrictions
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3814-5
3814 Switching Management System
2. Class 2 or Class 3 control units (nondata streaming):
a. Equivalent control unit positions from the 3814;
eight are allowed excluding dedicated control units.
b. Maximum cable length is determined by individual
control unit restrictions as measured from the channel through the 3814.
b. Maximum cable length is determined by individual
control unit restrictions as measured from the channel through the 3814.
4. A maximum of eight control units is allowed per switchable interface.
5. Dedicated control units after the 3814 do not count for
switchable interface.
3. Data streaming control units:
a. Equivalent control unit positions from the channel
through the switch; eight are allowed per switchable
interface, including the dedicated control units between the 3814 and the channel. The 3814 is assigned
zero control unit positions.
Switchable
Interfaces
Subtract:
Meters (Feet) Meters (Feet)
12.1 (40)
+ 10 (33)
} 13.8 (45)
+ 10 (33)
}
9 Meters {
(30 Feet)
} 15.3 (50) + 9 (30) + 10 (33)
38148
4 x8
} 16.5 (54) + 9 (30) + 10 (33)
Example of Table 2 Use
Maximum Control Units
Allowed per Path
3814
Maximum Cable Length
Allowed per Path from Channel
1 - - - - - (6) Class 1 - - - - - - - - - Class 1: Using Table 2
~---- (8) Class 2 or Class 3 - - - - - -
(6) Class 1
Class 2 or Class 3: 61 Meters (200 Feet) Unless
Modified by Individual Control Units
} - - - - { Class 1: Using Table 2
(2) Class 2 or Class 3
Class 2 or Class 3: 61 Meters (200 Feet)
Data Streaming
Data Streaming
1----- Six Control Units, - - - - - - - Maximum Cable Length Is 122 Meters (400 Feet)
Total of Eight on
Channel
3814-6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Unless Modified by Individual Data Streaming
Control Units
3814 Switching Management System
3814 SWITCHING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
COMPONENT DIAGRAM EXAMPLE
See Note 4
2nd
3604-6
4 Channel
Interfaces
4 Channel
Interfaces
Host Controller (Model A)
4x4
Controller
Switch
(Note 2)
~
~ 4 Control Unit
4 x 4 Switch (Note 2)
Interfaces
Model Bar C (Notes 1,31
Loop
~
~
4x4
::==
4 x 4 Switch (Note 2)
4 Control Unit
Interfaces
4 Channel
Interfaces
4 Channel
Interfaces
4 Channel
Interfaces
4 Control Unit
Interfaces
4 x 4 Switch (Note 2)
~----Model
B (Note3)------~
4 x 4 Switch (Note 2)
4 Channel
Interfaces
4 Channel
Interfaces
Maximum loop length per segment is
305 m (1,000 ftl. Maximum loop
length of 10m (33 tt) to first 3604-6
from controller
4 x 4 Switch (Note 2)
.....r - - 4 Control Unit
. . - - Interfaces
Model Bar C (Notes 1,3)
~
........- - - - - - 1 0 m (33
ftl-----.+
4 x 4 Switch (Note 2)
4 Control Unit
~ Interfaces
See Note 5
1 st
3604-6
4 Channel
Interfaces
Customer-supplied cable.
Preassembled 2-conductor cable,
IBM part 1563155 or equivalent.
3. Valid combinations:
Notes:
1. Each 3814 Switching Management System can have a maximum
of two Model Cs.
2. The controller can control a maximum of eight 4 x 4 switches
in four frames.
Standalone-Model A or Model B
In combination-Model A and Model C
Model B and Model C
4. The second 3604-6 may be cabled into any position on the loop
after the first 3604-6.
5. For best serviceability, one 3604-6 should be installed within
10m (33 ftl of the Model A controller and on the same
building floor.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3814-7
3814 Switching Management System
3814 SWITCHING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
COMPONENT DIAGRAM EXAMPLE, WITH
ALTERNATE CONTROLLER ATTACHMENT FEATURE,
DISPLAY/PRINTER ATTACHMENT FEATURE, AND
SYSTEM ATTACHMENT FEATURE
Local PrintP.r
0
4 Channel
Interfaces
Local Console
~
IViQdel A (Note 4)
4 Channel
Interfaces
4 Control Unit
Interfaces
System Attachment
Feature
Display/Printer
Attachment Feature
Controller
1178
4 Control Unit
Interfaces
4 Control Unit
Interfaces
Loop
4 Control Unit
Interfaces
Alternate Controller
Attachment Feature
4 Channel
Interfaces
4 Channel
Interfaces
4 Channel
Interfaces
Local Printer
4 Control Unit
Interfaces
4 Control Unit
Interfaces
Local Consoie
G
G
Model A (Note 4)
4 Channel
Interfaces
4 Channel
Interfaces
System Attachment
Feature
Display/Printer
Attachment Feature
Controller
4 Control Unit
Interfaces
Loop
4 Control Unit
Interfaces
Alternate Controller
Attachment Feature
4 Channel
Interfaces
Customer-supplied cable.
Preassembled coaxial cable,
I BM part 2577672 or equivalent.
Customer-supplied cable.
Preassembled 2-conductor cable,
IBM part 1563155 or equivalent.
Notes:
1. Each 3814 Switching Management System can have a maximum
of two Model Cs.
2. The controller can control a maximum of eight 4 x 4 switches
in four frames.
3. Valid combinations: Standalone-Model A or Model B
In combination-Model A and Model C
Model B and Model C
3814-8
4. For best serviceability, a 3178-C2, 3191·A10,
3191·B10, 3278·2, or 3604-6 should be installed
within 30 m (100 ft) of the Model A controller
and on the same building floor.
5. Local printers: As many as two 3287·1,
·2/4224·201,202, 2C2, 2EL.
6. LOGal consoles: One to three 3178·C2/
3278·2/3191·Al0, B10.
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3820 Page Printer
3820 PAGE PRINTER
SPECIFICATIONS
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
Front
mm
(inches)
Side
I 520 670
(60) (26-1/2)
Height
1 190
(47)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right
Left
915
(36)
760
(30)
760
(30)
760
(30)
mm
(inches)
Weight: 259 kg (570 lb)
Heat Output:
Operating:
Nonoperating:
1 340 W (4,600 BTU/hr)
477 W (1,650 BTU/hr)
Power Requirements:
Voltages
kVA
Ampadty
Phases
Plug
50Hz
60Hz
100,200,
220,230,
240
1.8
10 A
120,200
Receptacle
1.8
20 A
1
NEMA L5-20P
(120 V ac only)
NEMA L5-20R
(120 V ac only)
Power Cord Style (see following page)
Note: All 50-Hz machines are shipped with transforniers
set to 220 Vac. All 60-Hz machines are shipped with transformers set to 220 V ac except for machines installed in
the US and Canada that are set to 120 V ac only.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C (60°F-90°F)
8%-80%
23°C (73°F)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3820-1
3820 Page Printer
3820 PAGE PRINTER POWER CORD SPECIFICATIONS
Conductors
Cable
Nominal 00
Length
3.35 m (11 ft)
1.83 m
(6 ft)
All 60 Hz
Chicago,
Illinois,
U.S.A.
Number
of Shields
Nominal 00
Number
AWG No.
15.8 mm
(0.62 inJ
0
3
1.63 mm
(0.064 inJ
12
50 Hz
(Except
Japan and
Australia)
3.35 m
(11 ft)
8.9mm
(0.35 inJ
0
3
1.Smm
(0.059 inJ
14
50/60 Hz
Japan
4.13 m
(13-1/2 ft)
8.36 mm
(0.33 inJ
0
3
-
18
50/60 Hz
4.43 m
(14-112 ft)
8.36 mm
(0.33 inJ
1
3
-
18
Australia
3820 PAGE PRINTER CHANNEL FEATURE CABLING SCHEMATIC (Note 1)
Cable
Group
3920
Conn
10
From
Conn
ID
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
2
1178
To
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
3
Power Sequence and
Control
From 3820
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn
ID
3920
2
1178
1
1
3
Max Length
m
(If)
61
46
(200)
(150)
Comments
Bus and tag
Power sequence and control
Notes
2
3
To 3820
Conn
ID
Comments
2
Bus and tag
Notes:
1. Channel interface (feature 3055) cablcs are not required for EIA (.·ommunkation intcrf'lI;e (feature 3050).
2. Maximum c\lmu)ativeX·length is 61 meters (200 ft), unless modified by system or channel limitation. Maximum cable length must
be reduced by 5 meters (15 feet) for each control unit conneded between the 3820 and the channel.
3. Cable group 1178, power seq uenl'e and control cable, is optional.
3820-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3825 Page Printer
3825 PAGE PRINTER
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7120.
1 670
the frame.
(30)
//
/'//
\
130
(5-1/4)
----~~·=::::=:=:=:=::::=:=:=::::=.rl
..............\ \
,,,,"
I
I
"'-~\...... r--~--------r--r-~~Ir__r_,
_________________ J
(2X)
--t----:>'.L..
...- ...\.l...oL...
;"",,;
+
+
3825
750
(29-1/2)
iI
+.
I
I
I
tI t
2 650
(104-1/2)
120 !
(4-3/4)1I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 140
(45)
.____1______---------- ____
(4X)
*
135
(5-1/2)
190
(7-1/2)
(2X)
1 480
760
(58-1/2) --~4-- (30) ---)~
1 4 - - - 760 ---J~
(30)
560
(22)
3 190
(125-3/4)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3825-1
3825 Page Printer
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements:
58/68 Hz
Dimensions:
kVA
Side
750
(29-1/2)
Front
1 670
(65-3/4)
mm
(inches)
3.3
3
I Phases
Height
1 430
(56)
Voltages at 15 Amperes, 3 Phases:
50-Hz Delta:
200
220
230
50-Hz Wye:
346
380
400
415
Height (Cover Raised):
1 680
(66)
mm
(inches)
Service Clearances:
Right
760
(30)
Rear
760
(30)
mm
(inches)
Front
1 140
(45)
Weight:
635 kg (l 400 Ib)
Warning: The 3825 Page Printer should not be attached to any 380 to
415 volt, 50-Hz IT power-distribution system (impedance grounded
[earthed] neutral system). Connection to an IT
power-distribution system may:
Left
760
(30)
• Violate applicable national or international codes
• Damage machine components
Additionally, the 3825 should not be attached to a nonearthed
neutral system; this connection could also damage machine component~.
Heat Output:
kW
(kBTU/hr)
Airflow:
m 3 /min
(cfm)
3.2
( 11.0)
60-Hz Delta:
200
208
220
240
0.05
(100)
60-Hz Wye:
380
Power Cord Style and Length: See "3825 Page
Printer Power Cord Specifications" on page 3R25.3.
Acoustical Data:
Power Plug/Receptacle (USA and Canada):
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual--Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
Russellstoll. FS3730-MP*
Rllssellstoil. FS3744-FR**
Russellstoll. FS3914-FP**
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Power Plug/Receptacle (All Other Locations);
m
LWAd
Customer supplies both the plug and receptacle or
connector.
Operating
(bels)
Idlin~
(bels
Operating
(dB)
7.8
7.0
61
Idling
I
T
Environment, Operating:
(dB)
53
Temperature
Rei Humidity
No
No
lS.6°C-29.4°C (60°F-85°F)
15%-65%
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Wet Bulb
0
1O~C-43°C (50 P-IIO°F)
20%-80%
27°C (80 0 P)
Notes:
*
**
3825-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Provided by IBM.
Provided by customer.
3825 Page Printer
Environment:
"Human health considerations dictate that appropriate ventilation be supplied to the printer area.
The American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and 'Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
recommends a minimum of 0.42-0.57 cmm (15 - 20 cfm) per person of outdoor air make-up during
human occupancy (ASHRAE 62-1989). Adherence to IBM pre-printed forms recommendations along
with the provision of appropriate ventilation should preclude the development of adverse human
health effects due to outgassing/emissions from preprinted forms."
3825 PAGE PRINTER POWER CORD SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Source
Cable
Length
Cable
Nominal 00
Number of Number of Nominal
00 ••
Wires
Shields
Three-phase
wye
4.3 m
(14 ft)
19 mm
(0.750 in.)
0
5
2.1 mm
(0~081 in.)
12
(4.4)
Three-phase
delta
4.3 m
(14 ft).
17 mm
(0.670 in.)
0
4
2.1 mm
(0.081 in.)
12
(4.4)
AWG No.
(mm 2 )
*In Chicago, Illinois, USA, specify code 9986 for a 1.8-m (6-foot) cord.
**This diameter refers to solid, bare wire.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3825-3
3825 Page Printer
3825 PAGE PRINTER CABLING SCHEMATIC
Cable
Group
Feature
Code
Std
4020
Conn
ID
Conn
10
0185 Signal Cables
1
1178 Power Sequence
and Control
5
0185 Signal Cables
3
1178 Power Sequence
and Control
7
1178 Remote Enable/
Disable
9
f-------------
2
..
------------
4
..
Channel A
Signal Cable
Channel B
Signal Cable
From 3825
Feature Group
Code
No.
Std
4020
I No. of
I, Cables
0185
2
I
1
Conn
10
Max Length
m (ft)
1
122 (400)
i Bus
5--t
122 (400)
! Power
Comments
I
I
and tag
Notes
1, 2
4
1178
1
0185!
1178!
1, 2, 3
2
I 122 (400) I Bus and tag
1 '--='--1'--122(400)-1-p-o-w-e-r-s-e-q-u-e-n-ce-a-n-d-c-o-nt--r-o-I--+1--4---1
V3
I
'--__ '-! 178_Li __~_~
__L2..~_~
I
sequence and control
I
'
(400)
Remote enable/disable
I
4
I
To 3825
Conn
ID
Comments
I iI
..Nates
2
Bus and tag
1, 2
4
Bus and tag
1, 2, 3
Notes:
L Use either group AlO. 0185 or 3920; 0185 is the newest style of cable and is preferred. If 3920 style cables
are already available. they can be used with the 3825.
2. The maximum cumulative length is 122 meters (400 feet). unless modified by system or channel limitation. The maximum cable length must b~ reduced by 5 meters (l5 feet) for each control unit connected
between the 3825 and the channel.
3. Second channel feature: channel switching requires one set of cable groups ror each channel and the
maximum cable length applies to each channel.
4. Optional.
3825-4
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3827 Page Printer
3827 PAGE PRINTER MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-711S.
:----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.-------
I
!
1
,
110
(4-1/2)
485
(19)
+
+
+
1----1
++
3827-1
380
(15)
+
II
II
II
1
1
1
II
II _______/ 1111
I
II
I
1
250
(10)
L_____ J
1
1
I
!
I
(36)
535
(21) 685
1 (27)
(160)
I
2 740
(108)
+
1
1
1
~ \.
I
1
/1
"'1 --+1-----"
'b--
(88)
4 060
470
(18-1/2)
1
1
1
L_________ J J
14------------
+
790
(31)
I
1____
I
J
280
1 040
(41)
8~)
(36)
-------------------~
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3827-1
3827 Page Printer
3827 PAGE PRINTER MODEL 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements:
Dimensions:
mm
(inches)
Front
2240
(88)
Side
790
(31)
Height
1 270
(50)
60 Hz
SO Hz
5
3
kVA
Phases
5
3
Voltages at 30 Amperes (3 Phases, 5-Wire WYE
with Neutral)
Height (Cover Raised):
mm
(inches)
1 850
(73)
50 Hz
60 Hz
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Front
1 040
(41)
Rear
910
(36)
Right
910
(36)
Left
910
(36)
Minimum
Maximum
200
220
200
208
190
193
187
187
220
238
220
229
Voltages at 15 Amperes (3 Phases and Neutral)
50 Hz
Weight:
Printer
Stacker
Total
Nominal
Nominal
346
380
400
415
615 kg (1 360 lb)
215 kg ( 4701b)
830 kg (1 830 lb)
Minimum
Maximum
328
342
380
418
440
439
360
373
Power Cord Length:
Heat Output:
meters
(feet)
Operating:
4.2 kW (14.5 kBTU /hr)
Nonoperating: 1.2 kW (4.1 kBTU/hr)
Standard Chicago, Illinois, USA
4.3
1.8
Specify Code
(14)
(6)
9986
Power Cord Style:
Acoustical Data:
See "3827 Page Printer Power Cord Specifications"
on page 3827.3.
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
< LpA>m
LWAd
Hz
Operating
(bels)
Power Plug/Receptacle (USA and Canada):
Idlin~
(bels
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
I
T
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Russellstoll, DS3516-MP*
Russellstoll, DS3516-FR**
Russellstoll, DS3516-FP**
Power Plug/Receptacle (All Other Locations): Cus60 Hz
8.6
7.3
68.0
57.0
No
No
50 Hz
8.6
7.3
69.0
57.0
Yes
Yes
tomer supplies both the plug and receptacle or connector.
Notes:
*
**
3827-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Provided by IBM.
Provided by customer.
3827 Page Printer
SPECIFICATIONS (Continued)
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Elevation
15.6°C-29.4°C (60°F-85°F)
200/0-80%
22.8°C (73°F)
0 to 2 134 m (0 to 7 000 ft)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
4°C-38°C (40°F-100°F)
10%-86%
Environment:
"Human health considerations dictate that appropriate ventilation be supplied to the printer area.
The American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
recommends a minimum of 0.42-0.57 cmm (15 - 20 cfm) per person of outdoor air make-up during
human occupancy (ASHRAE 62-1989). Adherence to IBM pre-printed forms recommendations along
with the provision of appropriate ventilation should preclude the development of adverse human
health effects due to outgassing/emissions from preprinted forms."
Notes:
*Provided by IBM.
**Provided by customer.
3827 PAGE PRINTER POWER CORD SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal
OD**
AWG
No.
5
2.60 mm
(0.102 inches)
10
0
5
2.60 mm
(0.102 inches)
10
0
4
2.60 mm
(0.102 inches)
10
Nominal
OD**
AWG
No.
5
2.10 mm
(0.081 inches)
12
4
2.10 mm
(0.081 inches)
12
Cable
Length*
Cable
NominalOD
All 60 Hz except
Chicago, Illinois,
USA; Japan
4.3 m
(14 feet)
21.6 mm
(0.850 inches)
0
60 Hz Chicago,
Illinois, USA
1.83 m
(6 feet)
21.6 mm
(0.850 inches)
60 Hz Japan
4.3 m
(14 feet)
17.5 mm
(0.689 inches)
Cable
Length*
Cable
NominalOD
All 50 Hz except
Japan and
optional in
Belgium
4.3 m
(14 feet)
17.0 mm
(0.669 inches)
0
50 Hz Japan and
optional in
Belgium
4.3 m
(14 feet)
15.5 mm
(0.610 inches)
0
60 Hz
50Hz
Number of Number of
Shields
Wires
Number of Number of
Shields
Wires
*Cable length is from where the cable exits the machine shown on the Plan View as the symbol Ef) .
**This diameter refers to solid, bare wire.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3827-3
3827 Page Printer
3827 PAGE PRINTER CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Std
Conn
10
Conn
10
Cable
Group
0185 Signal Cables
1
1178 Power Sequence - - - - - - I
5
2
•
Channel A
Signal Cable
4
•
Channel B
Signal Cable
and Control
4020
0185 Signal Cables
1178 Power Sequence - - - - - - I
3
7
and Control
1178 Remote
Disable Enable/ - - - - - - IL..-_9_.....I.._ _ _- - - ' ' - -_ _.....
From 3827
Feature Group
Code
No.
Std
4020
No. of
Cables
Conn
10
Max Lenrh
m (ft
2
1
1178
1
5
0185
2
3
1178
1
1178
1
0185
Comments
Notes
122 (400)
Bus and tag
1. 2
122 (400)
Power sequence and control
122 (400)
Bus and tag
3
1. 2
7
122 (400)
Power sequence and control
3
9
122 (400)
Remote enable/disable
3
To 3827
Conn
10
2
4
Comments
Notes
Bus and ta"g
1- 2
Bus and tag
1, 2
Notes:
1. Use either group no. 0185 or 3920; 0185 is the newest style of cable and is preferred" If 3920 style cables
are already available, they can be used with the 3827.
2. The maximum cumulative length is 122 meters (400 feet), unless modified by system or channellimitation. The maximum cable length must be reduced by 5 meters (15 feet) for each control unit connected
between the 3827 and the channel.
3. Optional.
3827-4
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer
Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3828 Advanced Function MICR
Printer
For installation planning, use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7118.
r--------------------------------------------I
1
110
(4-1/2)
1
1
765
(30)
ff l
50
1
1
(2)
380
(15)
+
910
(36)
j
+
790
3828
(31)
+
2 740
(108)
+
~
250 50
(10) (2)
Front
I:
I:
I
II
355 I-L I I
(14)
L. ____
J
230
(9).
370
(14-1/2)
:
I
I
I
535
(21)
l_______ J 1.
~
:
:
l~l
685
(27)
I
I
L___ J
g]--1-7
L______
420
(16-1/2)
A'"
180
(7)
470
18 -1/2)
205
(B)
280
(11)
(2X)
1 040
(41)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--L-.---L-_
1_ _ _ _ _ _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
~
_
910~
910
2 (88)
240 - - - - - - -......---(36)
(36)----~-----
~-------------
4 060
(160)
~
-----------~
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3828-1
3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer
Printer Specifications
Dimensions:
Printer
mm
(inches)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Length
2240
(88)
Height
1 270
(50)
Width
790
(31)
4°C- 38°C (400P -86°P)
100/0 - 860/0
27°C (80.6°P)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Height (Cover Raised):
Environment, Operating:
mm
TemRerature
ReI Humidity
Wet Bulb
Elevation
1 850
(73)
(inches)
Weight:
Printer
Stacker
Total
I5.6°C-29.4°C (60°F-85°P)
20 % - 650/0
21.1°C (70°F)
0-2 134 m (0-7 000 ft)
Heat Output:
615 kg (I 3601b)
215 kg ( 4701b)
830 kg (1 8301b)
Operating
Idling
5 130 W (17 500 BTU/hr)
1 300W ( 4 450 BTU /hr)
Service Clearanres:
Air Flow:
mm
(inches)
Front
1 040
(41)
Rear
910
(36)
Right
910
(36)
Left
910
(36)
Storage Environment:
A 3828 printer that contains developer mix can be
stored in the following environments:
Condition
Hot
Temperature
38°C (1 OOOP)
%RH
5-15 %
Cold
Moist
Note:
-29°C (-200P)
36°C (97°P)
860/0
Duration
8 hours
Note 2
8 hours
48 hours
1. All condensation must be evaporated before
power is applied.
2. The transition from hot to cold should not be
made more than three times for each ftIling of
developer mix.
2.83 m 3 /min. (100 cfm)
Human health considerations dictate that appropriate ventilation be supplied to the printer area.
The American Society of Heating Refrigeration,
and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) recommends a minimum of 0.42-0.57 cmm (15-20 cfm)
per person of outdoor air makeup during human
occupancy (ASHRAE 62-1989). Adherence to
IBM preprinted forms recommendations along with
the provision of appropriate ventilation should preclude the development of adverse human health
effects due to outgassing/emissions from preprinted
forms.
Acoustical Data:
For defmitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual- Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
LWAd
3828-2
m
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
8.8
7.5
70
57
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
I
T
No No
3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer
Power Requirements:
60Hz
2.25
5.00
3
kVA (idle)
kVA (operating)
Phase
60 Hz three-phase voltages:
Nominal
208
Minimum
187
Maximum
229
The 3828 requires a 5 wire WYE with neutral.
Printer Power Cord Specifications
Power Cord Length:
Standard
meters
(feet)
4.3
(14)
Chicago, Illinois U.S.A.
Specify code 9986
1.8
(6)
Power Cord Style: Cord 00 is 21.6 mm (.85 in.) 5
wire, no shield. Leads are 10 AWG stranded wire.
Power Plug/Receptacle: U.S.A. and Canada
Plug
Receptacle •
Connector •
R&S DS3516-MP (Provided by IBM)
R&S DS3516-FR (Provided by Customer)
R&S DS3516-FP (Provided by Customer)
• Receptacle or connector requires 3 phases,
neutral, and ground connection to the facilities
power system.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3828-3
3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer
3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer Cabling Schematic
Cable
Group
Connector
Connector
10
10
0185 Signal Cables
1178 Power Sequence
and Control
1
Feature
Code
Std
4020
~-----
2
~ Channel A
Signal Cable
------
4
~ Channel B
Signal Cable
5
0185 Signal Cables
"
1178 Power Sequence "
and Control
3
7
1178 Remote Enable/
Disable
9
From 3828
Feature
Code
Group No.
No. of
Cables
Connector
ID
Maximum
Length
meters (feet)
Comments
Notes
Std
0185
1178
2
1
1
5
122
122
(400)
(400)
Bus and tag
Power sequence and control
1,2, 7
3
4020
0185
1178
1178
2
1
1
3
7
9
122
122
122
(400)
(400)
(400)
Bus and tag
Power sequence and control
Remote Enable/Disable
1,2,6,7
3
4
To 3828
Connector ID.
Notes
2
1,2,7
4
1,2,6,7
Notes:
1. 3828 attachment is supported by parallel block multiplexer channels. The 3828 attaches to ESj9370,
4331,4361,4381, 308X, 3090 and ESj9000 processors. The 3828 attaches to ES/3090 Models l80J and
above (except Model 250,) ES/3090-9000T models, and ES/9000 processors with ESCON channels
through the 9034 ESCON Converter Modell.
2. Attachment can be made through a two-channel switch or directly to the channel. Attachment through a
3044 fiber optic channel extender is supported on the 4361, 4381, 308X, 309X processors. Attachment to
the 3044 will be to the remote end (DOl unit). Maximum distance from the 3828 printer to the channel
through a 3044 is two kilometers (6 562 feet). The 3828 does not support attachment to the IBM 9370
processors via the IBM 3044 fiber optic channel extender.
3. Remote power sequence and control is optional and can be ordered for each connected channel by cable
group 1178.
4. Remote enable/disable is optional and can be attached with cable group 1178.
5. The IBM 3828 printer supports a maximum channel cable length of 122 meters (400 feet) if it is the only
control unit on the channel interface. For each additional control unit, up to a maximum of eight
control units, this distance is reduced by 4.6 meters (15 feet).
6. The SF 4020 two-channel switch allows connection to a second channel interface.
7. Cable group 0185 is preferred; however, cable group 3920 (old style channel cable) can be used.
3828-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3830 Storage Control
3830 STORAGE CONTROL MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in.
r---~--I -.........
I
I
2-3/4" I
(41::1
=1 ft)
---:'-ll
,.....--rrr
.--cE+J I
r
I
II
I I
I
6 "
I
I
I
2"
I
0+
5-1/2"
3 "
(4 Places)
f
f
1
30"
(4 Places)
-I
I
L\
-1
Front
I:
Ploc..)
11"
I
60"
I
j
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _J _
3830·1 AND 3330·1 OR 3330·2 DISK STORAGE FACILITY
(MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION)
,-----------------------------------ll
PLAN VIEW (Engiish Scale: 1/4 in.
=1 ft)
I
I
I
~"" ~F
'1"1""
3330-1,2
3330-1.2
"I"
40"
3330-1,2
"'"
~I·
40"
-I-
3330-1,2
61"
3830-1
l
~
..........
I
I
I
'36"~
I
I
l"
(3830)
!
I
I
I
I
I
1
L_______________
~'''t
60"
1
________________
33"
(333
r
60"
JJ
Note: Left service clearance required for any configuration of storage control
and disk storage modules. The facility contains one storage control and from
one to four disk storage modules. See 3330 and 3830 specifications.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3830-1
3830 Storage Control
3830 STORAGE CONTROL MODEL 1
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(em)
F
S
H
61
(155)
32
(81)
60
(152)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(em)
Weight:
F
R
Rt
L
60
(152)
60
(152)
36
(91)
0*
(0*)
1,600 lb (730 kg)
Heat Output: 10,500 BTU/Iu (2 650 kcal/hr)
Airflow:
1,160cfm (33 m 3 /min)
Power Requirements:
kVA
3.2
Phases
3
Plug
R&S, SC7328
Connector
R&S, SC7428
Receptacle
R&S, SC7324
Power Cord Style
E7
Environment. Operating:
Temperature
60°F-90°F ( 1h O C-32°C)
ReI Htl/nidity
20',;;-8W'{
Max Wet Bulb
7f,°F (26°(")
Environment, Nonoperating:
T Cll1pCralUfc
Rei i IUlllidity
M~lX \Vct BuH)
50 l )F-II (PF II QOC-4JoC)
W,;i,-80j;
80 0 r (27°(")
Notes:
* The 3830-1 abuts and attaches to the right
end of a 3330-1 or a 3330-2.
3830-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3830 Storage Control
3830 STORAGE CONTROL MODELS 2 AND 3
PLAN VI EW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(cm)
,/
/
F
S
62
(157)
32
(81)
H
60
(152)
I
2-3/4"
(4 Places)
/
Service Clearances:
II
~~I!~____~__L -__~
F
0+
5-1/2"
(4 Places)
I
I
I
R
Inches
(cm)
36
(91)
Weight:
1,600 lb (730 kg)
44
( 112)
Rt
L
36
(91)
0
(0)
30"
11"
(4 Places)
Heat Output: 10,500 BTU/hr (2650 kcal/hr)
Airflow:
1,160 cfm (33 m 3/min)
Power Requirements:
kVA
3.3
Phases
3
Plug
R&S,
Connector
R&S,
Receptacle
R&S,
Power Cord Style
FS3730
FS3914
FS3744
B2
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-90°F (16 oC-32oC)
ReI Humidity
20%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
50°F-110°F (10oC-430C)
Temperature
Rei Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (27°C)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3830-3
3830 Storage Control
3830 STORAGE CONTROL MODELS 1,2, AND 3 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
13920
Conn ID
Conn
ID
2
Channel A
3
11
4
Channel 8
5
13
7
15
6
Channel C
1178
3920
1178
8
Channel D
6148 or
RPQ S50169
1178
17
6149 or
RPQ S50170
1178
19
Std
8170
8171
or
6456
1178
9
{3920
1178
{3920
10
12
14
16
18
20
DASD
Signal
}
DASD
Power
Control
MSS
Signal
To 3830
From 3830
Feature
Code
Std
8170
.
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn
ID
3920
6456
2
1178
3920
In
(ft)
Model
Notes
1
72
(250)
1,2
1,2
2
1
(300)
3
5
1
2
9
3
91
85
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
3
8171
75
85
(280)
(250)
(280)
1,2
Std
3
1,2
Std
Std
Std
1178
1
3920
2
11
5
85
(280)
1178
1
13
85
(280)
3920
1178
2
1
7
85
(280)
15
(280)
6148
1178
1
17
85
46
6149
1178
1
19
46
RPQ
1178
1
17
46
(150)
(150)
1178
1
19
46
(150)
8171
Feature
Code
Max Length
(150)
3
1,2
3
2,3
2, 3
4
'I
L
4
1
4
4
S50169
RPQ
S50170
3830-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Std
8170
Std
Std
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
All
All
All
All
1,2
1,2
1,2
2,3
6,9,10
2,3
2,3
8
8
16
2,3
8
18
20
2,3
3
8
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
1,2
7, 10
3830 Storage Control
3830 STORAGE CONTROL MODELS 1, 2, AND 3 CABLING
SCHEMATIC
Notes:
1. Maximum length is increased to 85 meters (280 feet) when SF 9318 for Model 2
or SF 9320 for Model 3 is installed.
2. Maximum length must be reduced by 4.5 meters (15 feet) for each control device
connected between a 3830 and the attaching channel.
3. Power sequence and control; cable is optional.
4. Remote switch is required for SF 6148, SF 6149, RPQ S50169 or RPQ S51070.
5. Maximum cumulative cable length of 91 meters (300 feet) is available to attach
as many as seven devices to the standard port of the 3851 or eight devices to an
optional port of the 3851. The most remote 3830-3, controlling the 3330, 3333,
and/or 3350 containing control information for the mass storage system, must
be within 45 meters (150 feet). See "General Cabling Schematics" under
"3850 Mass Storage System."
6. Signal from OASO.
7. Signal from MSS.
8. Power control.
9. The attachment options for the 3830 Model 2 are:
a. As many as four 3333s, 3340-A2s, and/or 3350-A2s, -A2Fs, -C2s, or -C2Fs in
any combination.
b. As many as four 3333s (any model) and/or 3350-A2s, or 3350-A2Fs in any
combination. Each 3350-A2 or 3350-A2F can attach one 3350-C2 or
3350-C2F for a maximum of four 3350-A2s or 3350-A2Fs and four
3350-C2s or 3350-C2Fs.
c. As many as two 3340-A2s can attach 3344. Attachment of one or more
3340-A2s with 3344s is mutually exclusive with attachment of either
3333s or 3350s.
10. The attachment options for the 3830 Model 3 are:
a. As many as four strings of 3333s and/or 3350s in any combination.
b. As many as four data recording controllers (ORCs) on the mass storage
system.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3830-5
3830 Storage Control
This page is intentionally left blank.
3830-6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
;:nS;;J:l t-'age t-'rmter
3835 Page Printer Models 1 and 2
Plan View (Not to Scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7119.
2 035
(80)
io4-_ _ _ _
14---~-
775
(30-1/2)
690
(27-1/2)
(2X)
------
------
------
--
------ ------y---r---r-
--I
1
-I-......:..:...~~---r;--I--r----;=t1--,M-J --r--+0
(9)
1
alo
2( 64)0
104
(33-1/4)
~"-r--~L--~~""":+O::-.J----T--~'_--r_-tl
t
l-- --l g'l--Il_____ /_I
1
I
I-
____
225
\ 325
(13)
1
1 000
(39-1/2)
390
(15-1/2)
I
f
450
(IS)
- _____ ...J
~B~~gl r~~----
ioC----
900
(35-1/2)
t
3 040
(119-3/4)
(3~-~/2)
I
-------t---L
I
400
(15-3/4)
230
(9) -
495~
1 300
...
(53-1/4)'
~
(19-1/2)
1 200
(49-1/4)
I
J~,
1 150
(45-l/2)J
3 650
(143-3/4)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3835-1
3835 Page Printer
3835 Page Printer Models 1 and 2
Specifications
Power Requirements:
50Hz
kVA
6
3
Phases
Dim.ensions:
Front
2035
(80)
mm
(in.)
Height
1 410
(55- 3/4 )
Side
840
(33- Y4)
Height (Cover Raised):
mm
(in.)
Service Clearances:
Front
mm
800
(in.)
(31-Yz)
Voltages at 30 Amperes 3 Phases
Nominal
Minimal
50 Hz
200
180
230
207
2085
(82)
Rear
1 000
(39-Yz)
Right
840
(33- 1/4)
60Hz
6
3
Voltages at 30 Amperes 3 Phases
60 Hz
200
180
208
187
220
198
240
216
Left
900
(35- Yz)
Weight:
Printer
700 kg (1 540 Ib)
150 kg (330 lb)
Controller
Total
850 kg (1 870lb)
The 3835 is shipped on a pallet. A forklift may
be required to place the printer on the floor so it
can be rolled into position.
Maximum
220
252
220
229
242
264
Voltages at 20 Amperes 3 Phases and Neutral
50 Hz
380
342
418
400
360
440
415
374
456
This product is phase sensitive. See the installation instructions for proper phasing.
Power Cord Length:
Heat Output:
Operating
Nonoperating:
6.0 kW (20.5 kBTU Ihr)
5.5 kW (18.0 kBTU/hr)
Standard
meters
4.3
(feet)
(14)
Acoustical Data:
For defInitions, see ICAcoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual- Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
7.6
Power Cord Style:
See 1C3835 Page Printer Power Cord
Specifications" on page 3835.3.
m
LWAd
Operating
(bets)
Idling
(bets)
7.2
Operating
(dB)
59.0
Idling
(dB)
55.0
Chicago, Illinois,
USA
1.8
Specify
Code
(6)
9986
I
T
Power Plug and Receptacle (USA and Canada):
No
No
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Russellstoll, 3760
Russellstoll, 3754
Russellstoll, 3934
Power Plug and Receptacle (All Other
Locations):
Customer supplies both the plug and the receptacle or the connector.
3835-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3835 Page Printer
SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED)
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Elevation
IS.6°C-29.4°C (60 0P-8S0F)
20%-80%
22.8°C (73°F)
0 to 2 134 m (0 to 7 000 ft)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
4°C-38°C (40°F-I000P)
10%-86%
Environment:
"Human health considerations dictate that appropriate ventilation be supplied to the printer area.
The American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
recommends a minimum of 0.42-0.57 cmm (1.5 - 20 cfm) per person of outdoor air make-up during
human occupancy (ASHRAE 62-1989). Adherence to IBM pre-printed forms recommendations along
with the provision of appropriate ventilation should preclude the development of adverse human
health effects due to outgassing/emissions from preprinted forms."
Notes:
*Provided by IBM.
**Provided by customer.
3835 PAGE PRINTER POWER CORD SPECIFICATIONS
Cable
NominalOD
All 60 Hz except
Chicago, Illinois,
USA; Japan
4.3 m
(14 feet)
21.6 mm
(0.850 inches)
0
60 Hz Chicago,
Il1inois, USA
1.83 m
(6 feet)
21.6 mm
(0.850 inches)
0
60 Hz Japan
4.3 m
(14 feet)
17.5 mm
(0.689 inches)
0
Cable
Length*
Cable
NominalOD
All 50 Hz except
Japan and
optional in
Belgium
4.3 m
(14 feet)
17.0 mm
(0.669 inches)
0
5
2.lO mm
(0.081 inches)
12
(4.4)
50 Hz Japan and
optional in
Belgium
4.3 m
(14 feet)
15.5 mm
(0.610 inches)
0
4
2.10 mm
(0.081 inches)
(4.4)
50 Hz
Number of Number of
Shields
Wires
AW~
No. Cmm2)
Cable
Length*
60 Hz
5
5
4
Number of Number of
Shields
Wires
Nominal
OD**
2.60 mm
(0.lO2 inches)
(6.8)
2.60 mm
(O.lO2 inches)
(6.8)
2.60 mm
(0.102 inches)
(6.8)
Nominal
OD**
10
10
10
A%
No. (mm2)
12
*Cable length is from where the cable exits the machine shown on the Plan View as the symbol Ef).
**This diameter refers to solid, bare wire.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and, Cabling Schematics
3835-3
3835 Page Printer
3835 PAGE PRINTER CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Std
Cable
Group
Conn
10
Conn
ID
0185 Signal Cables
2
..
4
..
5
1178 Power Sequence
Channel A
Signal Cable
and Control
4020
0185 Signal Cables
3
1178 Power Sequence
7
Channel B
Signal Cable
and Control
9
1178 Remote Enable/
Disable
From 3835
Feature Group
Code
No.
Std
4020
No. of
Cables
Max Length
m (ft)
Conn
10
Comments
0185
2
1
122 (400)
Bus and tag
1178
1
5
122 (400)
Power sequence and control
Notes
1, 2
3
1, 2
0185
2
3
122 (400)
Bus and tag
1178
1
7
122 (400)
Power sequence and control
3
1178
1
9
122 (400)
Remote enable/disable
3
J
To 3835
Conn
ID
Comments
Notes
2
Bus and tag
1, 2
4
Bus and tag
1, 2
Notes:
1. Use either group no. 0185 or 3920; 0185 is the newest style of cable and is preferred. If 3920 style cables
are already available. they can be used with the 3835.
2. The maximum cumulative length is 122 meters (400 feet), unless modified by system or channellimitation. The maximum cable length must be reduced by 5 meters (15 feet) for each control unit connected
between the 3835 and the channel.
3. Optional.
3835-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3848 Cryptographic Unit
3848 CRYPTOGRAPHIC UNIT
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
SPECIFICATIONS
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
r~3~-r~23~
r
_
+'----1--I
915
(36)
I
I
~
775
(30-1f2)
H
(t+-i-~~~ ~""::'::"'....:.J.I
815
I
(2 Places)
r;;150
I (5·3/4)
~3~~1
--1
180x280
(7) (11)
\
I
I
I
I
I
I
32
)
I
I
915
(36)
I
I
_ _----!\
655
(25·3/4)
~l ____ ~~ront
____
Front
640
(25)
Side
820
(32)
Height
1 020
(40)
Rear
920
(36)
Right
920
(36)
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Front
920
(36)
Weight:
I
Heat Output: 800 W (2,750 BTU/hr)
J
Left
920·
(36)
181 kg (400 lb)
i
I
-±--
(2 Places)
mm
(inches)
Airflow: 6.5 m 3 /min (220 cfm)
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
0.8
1
R&S, FS3720
R&S, FS3913
R&S, FS3743
A6
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C (60°F-90°F) ,
20%-80%
23°C (73°F)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3848-1
3848 Cryptographic Unit
3848 CRYPTOGRAPHIC UNIT CABLING SCHEMATIC
3840
3841
3842
3843
J
-...
-......
-...
-
Selector/Block Multiplexer Channel
Control Unit
Power Sequence and Control
Power Sequence and Control
3848
Group No.
3840
3841
3842
3843
No. of Cables
2
2
1
1
From
To
3848
3848
3848
3848
Sel/Blk Mpx Chan
Control Unit
Channel
Channel
Max Length
meters
(it)
Notes
2
2
45
122
(48)
(400)
Notes:
l. Power sequence and control; cable is optional. Select 3842 or 3843.
2. For delailed informal ion, refer I () IBM 3848 Cryptographic Unit Product Description and Operating Procedures.
GA22-7073.
3848-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3850 Mass Storage System
3850 MASS STORAGE SYSTEM
Individual cable paths interconnect various machines and
functions of the IBM 3850 Mass Storage System. The following information includes the general cabling schematics
and cable length limitations of the system.
1. Connection to system channels. (See Section 2, "General
Cabling Information.")
a. The 3850 Mass Storage Facility frame 01 contains a
control unit function. The A-series 3851 (frame 01)
requires one position on a channel. The B-series 3851
(frame 01) requires two positions on a channel. (See
"3851 Mass Storage Facility Cabling Schematic.")
The 3851 can be attached to a maximum of four
channels. The maximum cumulative cable length for
each channel is 61 meters (200 feet).
b. The 3830 Storage Control Model 3 requires a position
on a block multiplexer channel. The 3830-3 can be
attached to a maximum of three channels. Maximum
cable length varies. (See "3830 Storage Control
Models 1, 2 and 3 Cabling Schematic.")
c. System/370 Model 158 or 168 may have integrated
storage controls (SF 4650) with staging adapter
(SF 7220) installed on the 3158,3158-3,3168, or
3168-3. Each ISC path can be attached to a maximum of two block multiplexer channels. The maximum cumulative cable length for each channel varies.
(See System/370 Models 158 and 168 cabling information for specifications.)
2. Connection of a 3333, 3350-A2/3350-A2F, and
3350-C2/3350-C2F to integrated storage controls or
3830-3. (See individual unit cabling schematics.)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3850-1
3850 M ass Storage System
General Cabling Schematics
The following schematics show the cable paths required
within the mass storage system.
A. Data Recording Controller* (DRC) and 3333 or 3350 to 3830 Model 3, or Staging
Adapter (SF 7220) of a 3158, 3158-3, 3168, or 3168-3
3851
Frame 02, 03,
04,or05
(with ORC)
3830-3, or Path 1
t--_ _ _ _ _ _ _
6_4_56_*_ _ _ _~ or 2 of 3158,
1178
6456**
3333 or 3350
3158-3,3168, or
3168-3
~--6456**
'----6456*
3851
Frame 02, 03,
04,or05
(with ORC)
1178
-
" - - - - 6456 *
Maximum of four ORCs
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
-
" ' - - - 6456 * *
Maximum of four 33335, 3350-A2s, or
3350-A2Fs in any combination. Each
3350-A2 or 3350-A2F can also attach one
3350-C2 or 3350-C2F
* Each frame (02,03,04, and 05) may contain one data recording controller (ORC). The number of
frames and ORCs included in the 3851 Mass Storage Facility varies depending on model. Each ORC
can be attached to two staging adapters and/or 3830 Model 3. A maximum of four ORCs can be attached to each staging adapter or 3830 Model 3. The ORCs can be part of the same, or different,
3851 s in the same 3850 Mass Storage System.
**Special features may be ordered to connect a 3333, 3350-A2, 3350-A2F, 3350-C2, or 3350-C2F to
two ISCs and/or 3830-3.
3850-2
3333 or 3350
3850 Mass Storage System
General Cabling Schematics (Continued)
B. 3830 Model 3 or Staging Adapter (SF 7220) of a 3158,3158-3, 3168, or 3168-3 to the
Mass Storage Control Port of a 3851 Mass Storage Facility
3830-3 or Path 1
or 2 of 3158,
3158-3,3168, or
3168-3
..
..
6456*
3851
Port
(Opt)
e
Port
(Std)
..
6456*
-
3830-3 or Path 1
or 2 of 3158,
3158-3,3168, or
3168-3
J
3852**
3851-A **
6456*
3830-3 or Path 1
or 2 of 3158,
3158-3,3168, or
3168-3
6456*
6456*
-
Port
(Opt)
,'Maximum 8
@
6456*
Port
(Std)
Maximum 7 ~
..
6456*
6456*
..
3830-3 or Path 1
or2of3158,
3158-3,3168, or
3168-3
*Maximum cumulative cable length for each path is 91 meters (300 feet). The most remote 3158, 3158-3,
3168, or 3830-3 controlling theDASD devices, which contain control information for the mass storage
system, must be within 45 meters (150 feet) from the primary and secondary 3851.
* *This section of the diagram shows the connection of two A-series 3851 s in the same mass storage
system. Cable group 3852 connects the secondary (#2) A-series 3851 to the primary (#1) A-series
3851. Maximum cable length is 91 meters (300 feet!. If SF 4901 (for the optional port) is installed
on the primary A-series 3851 (#1), it should also be installed on the secondary 3851 (#2). The
3851 (#2) should be separately connected to both the standard port and the optional port. Standard
port and optional port cable paths should not be cross-connected.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3850-3
3850 Mass Storage System
This page is intentionally left blank.
3850-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
PLAN VIEW (MINIMUM CONFIGURATION)* English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft
l
"
1:------C:-----~~--~rIT---.;l~·-·o"-~~~r2:::~---.---l
I+------- 59-'/2"
t+11
i
I
36"
,
~
:
Li
,
l~
n
::r
-" /
r-·
II \
23
"I
I
II
I
I
~~
t.
17"
+
U1
-a
05) is model dependent as shown in the following table. Note
S
l>
that frames 0 1.02. and 06 (and cable entry holes shown in the
(I)
(I)
plan views ror them) arc used with all models.
(I)
-t
o
Cable Entry for
I
II
Models
,,,.-AI "
01,02
All, BII
01,02,03,06
01,02
i
A21, B21
01,02,03,04.06
01.02
I
A31, B31
01,02.03,04.05.06
01.02
A02, B02
01.02.03.06
01.02.03
I
l>
G)
m
01,02,06
I
JJ
Frame
Frames Included
AOI, BOI
A8"~I~
-n
l>
(")
r
-t
-<
A12. BI2
01,02,03.04,06
01,02,03
A22, B22
01,02.03.04,05,06
01,02,03
A03, B03
01,02,03,04,06
01,02,03,04
AI3, B13
01,02,03,04.05,06
01,02,03,04
A04, B04
01, 02,P3, 04,~ 06
01,02,03.04,05
I
.j.
36"
(Xl
Facility (and cable entry holes required for frames 03, 04, and
I
@
(
i
36"
II
CE~
+
I
I
32"
~.
18-1/2"
w
*The number of frames included in the 3851 Mass Storage
Q)
"C
~
A Typical dimensions for casters and leveling pads for frames 0 I,
~
02, 03, 04, OS, and 06.
~
Q)
n
::r
s·
PLAN VIEW (MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION)* English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft
•
Typical dimensions for front and rear cover swings on all frames.
•
Typical dimensions for rear gate on frames 02, 03, 04, 05.
CD
en
"C
CD
n
::;;
o·
~
o
:::J
(I)
Q)
:::J
0.
n
Q)
Q:
:::J
IC
en
n
::r
CD
3
~
o·
(I)
w
Q)
......
U1
I
t=-~:--~l~--;~;,---Io.~~--:~--~T-==:--~"
.r?
r
~
i
3~ I
i, - - - - - -
36"
I
I
'I
ttf
I
L:
36"
18- 1/ 2
4" x 6"
~.?t
8"~
I
4"
i-1'''
I
n+
1
32"
__ j4
6"
I
I
I
4";(
1"
'\
I
,-l""
'I
I,'
I
+nn+
@
J
+_0+
I
+00+
I
+00+
.
I
H
60"
10" -r=-tl:"
__
I
------20-=~:t\F~--------.6""
~'~
i-I',
x
~4
60"
~
""-
I
23"
I
I
II
I
I
1.-17"
,
en
~
w
...
Q)
U1
=s:
I»
en
en
-..,
en
o
I»
CD
m
-n
I~
"---I~
I»
"--
~~~--j:--------------------
!!.
;::;
'<
3851 Mass Storage Facility
3851 MASS STORAGE FACI LlTY
Totals (By Model)
SPECI FICATIONS
Details (By Frame)
Model
Weight*
Ib
(kg)
Airflow
cfm
(m3/min)
Heat Output
BTU/hr
(kcal/hr)
kVA
Airflow
cfm
(m3/min)
Heat Output
BTU/hr
(kcalfhr)
AOI
4,250
(1 950)
1,130
(32)
19,000
(4 SOO)
6.2
Frame
Weight
Ib
(kg)
A02
1,720
(7S0)
630
(IS)
11,500
(2900)
6,270
(2 S50)
1,630
(47)
26,500
(6700)
8.6
01
(A-models)
A03
1,970
(900)
730
(21)
17,700
(4500)
8,290
(3 SOO)
2,130
(61)
34,000
(8 600)
11.0
01
(B-models)
A04
1,765*
(SI0*)
500
(15)
7,500
(I 900)
10,310
(4700)
2,630
(75)
41,500
(10 500)
13.4
02
All
2,020*
(920*)
500
(15)
5,5S0
(2250)
1,130
(32)
19,000
(4 SOO)
6.2
03,04, or
05
(With DRn
(1 900)
A12
7,600
(3 450)
1,630
(47)
26,500
(6 700)
8.6
03,04, or
OS
(Without
DRC)
1,330*
(605*)
-
--
A13
9,620
(4400)
2,130
(61)
34,000
(8 600)
11.0
A21
6,910
(3 150)
1,130
(32)
19,000
(4 800)
6.2
06
765
(350)
A22
8,930
(4 000)
1,630
(47)
26,500
(6 700)
8.6
A31
8,240
(3 750)
1,130
(32)
19,000
(4800)
6.2
BOI
4,500
(2050)
1,230
(35)
25,200
(6400)
8.2
B02
6,520
(3 000)
1,730
(49)
32,700
(S 250)
10.7
B03
8,540
(3 900)
2,230
(64)
40,200.
(10150)
13.2
B04
10,560
(4 SOO)
2,730
(7S)
47,700
(12050)
15.6
Bll
5,830
(2650)
1,230
(35)
25,200
(6400)
8.2
B12
7,850
(3 600)
1,730
(49)
32,700
(8 250)
10.7
B13
9,S70
(4 500)
2,230
(64)
40,200
(10 ISO)
13.2
B21
7,160
(3 250)
1,230
(35)
25,200
(6400)
8.2
B22
9,1S0
(4200)
1,730
(49)
32,700
(8 250)
10.7
B31
S,490
(3 850)
1,230
(35)
25,200
. (6 400)
8.2
--
7,500
-
Note:
*Weight includes a maximum complement of cartridges:
235 Ib (ll 0 kg) for frame 02 and
4461b (210 kg) each for frames 03, 04, and 05
3851-2 . Input/Output
Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3851 Mass Storage Facility
. 3851 MASS STORAGE FACILITY
SPEC I FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Front
**
(**)
Inches
(cm)
Height
75-1/2
(192)
Side
32
(81)
Service Clearances:
Frontt
Reart
Inches
36
36
(cm)
(91)
(91)
Right
36
(91)
Left
36
(91)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Al:oustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Ill.lbrmaliol1 Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
LWAd
m
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bcls)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
8.4
8.4
58.0
57.0
Power Requirements:*
Phases
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
I
T
No No
3
R&S, SC7328
R&S, SC7428
R&S, SC7324
E7
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-85°F (16 oC-290C)
20%-80%
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
700F (21°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
50°F-90°F (lOoC-320C)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
70°F (21°C)
Notes:
* See Totals (By Model) for kV A.
** See plan view.
t Based on IBM's method of computation, the
3851 Model A03 and larger exceed 75 Ib/ft 2
(370 kg/m 2) distributed floor loading when
specified service clearances are used. Additional
front and/or rear service clearances may be
required to meet the building floor live-load
rating.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3851-3
3851 Mass Storage Facility·
3851 MASS STORAGE FACILITY CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
20
-
Conn
Conn
10
10
Std
---
C --
1
15
3
17
8171
C-
5
19
7
21
1178
3920
1178
20
1178
3920
1178
6148
{ 1178
1178
-
---
.-
-.
-
..,.
-
..-
-------
2
-------
4
-------
6
~----
{ 1178
1178
Std
4901
6456
6456
.-
--
9
11
9121
3852
--
13
---
31 f - 33 f- -
All
Models
}
Models A02, A03, A04, A 12,}
A13,A22, 802,803, 804,
812, 813,and 822
6456
6456
6456
6456
---
.-
"'
-..
---
8
---
Channel A
Channel 8
Channel C
Channel 0
23
25
27
29
6150
.-
-
--
.- --
-- t------
.-
Port 0
Port 1
14
-
SF 9120
Frame 01
- ---
----
-
10
12
16
18
~
-
ORC
ORC
Frame 02
35
37
----- ---- --
20
22
.-
-
ORC
ORC
Frame 03
Models A03, A04, A 13,803,)
804, and 813
6456
6456
Models A04 and 804
6456
6456
3851-4
--..
--
--
39
41
-----_ . 24 ------ 26 Frame 04
ORC
ORC
43
45
------ 3028 -------Frame 05
ORC
ORC
~
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
..,.-
3851 Mass Storage Facility
3851 MASS STORAGE FACILITY CABLING SCHEMATIC
Fr0111 385/
Feature
Code
Sid
Std
Groll!)
No,
No, of
Cah/es
COli II
fD
Max f.CIIKth
111
(.Ii)
Model
Notcs
(200)
All
1,2,5,9
3920
2
I
61
1178
1
15
-
-
All
6
(200)
All
1,2,5,9
3920
2
3
61
1178
1
17
-
-
All
6
9
91
(300)
All
3,10
Std
6456
2
Std
6456
2
31
61
(200)
All
4,9
61
(200)
All
4,9
61
(200)
*
4,9
*
4,9
Std
6456
2
33
Std
6456
2
35
Std
6456
2
37
61
(200)
Std
6456
2
39
61
(200)
*
4,9
Sid
6456
2
41
61
(200)
*
4,9
Std
6456
2
43
61
(200)
*
4,9
Std
6456
2
45
61
(200)
*
4.9
4901
6456
2
11
91
(300)
*
3,11
6148
1178
1
23
61
(200)
All
7
6148
1178
1
25
61
(200)
All
7
6150
1178
1
27
61
(200)
B
7
1178
1
29
61
(200)
B
7
3920
2
5
61
(200)
All
1,2,5,9
-
-
All
6
61
(200)
All
1,4,5,9
6150
8171
9121
1178
1
19
3920
2
7
1178
1
21
-
---
Ali
6
3852
1
13
-
-
A
8,9
*Model dependent; see cablini! schematic on page 3851.4.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3851-5
3851 Mass Storage Facility
3851 MASS STORAGE FACILITY CABLING SCHEMATIC
To 3851
Feature
Code
Std
COlin
JD
2
Model
Notes
All
1,2,5,9
Std
4
All
1,2,5,9
Std
10
All
3, 10
Std
16
All
4,9
Std
18
All
4,9
Std
20
*
4,9
Std
22
*
4,9
Std
24
*
4,9
Std
26
*
4,9
Std
28
*
4,9
Std
30
*
4,9
4901
12
All
3
6
All
1,2,5,9
8
All
1,2,5,9
14
A
8
8171
9120
*Model dependent; see cabling schematic on
page 3851.4.
Notes:
1. Total cable length of 61 meters (200 feet) is available to attach as many as eight
control units (unless modified by general control-to-channel cabling schematic).
2. Special features may be ordered for connecting 3851 to more than one channel.
One set of cables is required for each channel. Maximum cable length applies to
each channel.
3. A maximum cumulative cable length of 91 meters (300 feet) is available to attach
seven devices to the standard port. An additional 91-meter (300-foot) cable length
is available to attach eight devices to the optional port. The 3830 Model 3 controlling the DASD devices, which contain control information for the mass storage
system, must be within 45 meters (150 feet) of the primary and secondary 3851.
4. Each frame 02,03, 04, or 05 may be attached to two cable paths. Maximum
cumulative cable length is 61 meters (200 feet) for each path.
5. An A-series 3851 (frame 01) requires one position on a channel. A B-series 3851
(frame 01) requires two positions on a channel.
6. Power sequence and control cable. This machine must have the power sequence
and control cable installed for proper operation.
7. Required for remote-switch attachment features. Specify:
a. One for A- or B-models with SF 6148 and without SF 8171
b. Two for A- or B-models with SF 6148 and with SF 8171
c. Three for B-models with SF 6150 and without SF 8172
d. Four for B-models with SF 6150 and with SF 8172
8. Required when two A-series are part of a mass storage system.
9. See "General Cabling Schematics" under "3850 Mass Storage System" for additional information.
10. Port 0 standard.
11. Port 1 SF 4901.
3851-6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3880 Storage Control
3880 STORAGE CONTROL MODELS 1-4, 11, 13, 21, AND 23
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Dual-Frame Configuration (Model 13 or 23*)
Single-Frame Configuration
155
~36~l
1 4 - - - - - - 2 145-----------..--- 8 6 5 l
(84·112)
(2 ~:!es)
(6)
190X380
(7·1/2 X 15)
12P1~'
----ll
480
(19)
I
I
I
(4 Places)
+
3880-110-4,-11,
·13, -21, -23
+
~+~-)-lr90--r.,..+~~~~~I~
m~+~
I
___
865
(34)
-----1
r-----
I
I
/:~
I
i
I
\~il: i~
_______
-------,r
I
yt (33)
i
I
I
I
I
(2 Places)
: :
1/
1(30)
I~
I
\
300
(12)
(19)
L~~~
815
(32)
+
Ll)
480
380
(15)
I
I
I
I
815
(3,2)
.--------r+----~----+~I~+------~~I~---+-----r__t
+
760
865
(34)
I
840
3880·13, ·23
I
155
(6)
"PI~'
......... --r-j
I
(7·1/2)
460 --t+----.(
(18)
21011
(8·1/4)
~_I~I""I
I
I
I
I
I
'--
\
"PI"..,
I'
I
(73~~
I
(2 Places)
I~
__L_J_-""'£r~J-460---1-0__---+-1
(18)
(2 Places)
H
815
(32)
(2 Places)
*Two Model 13s or 23s may be bolted together in a dualframe configuration. The cover on the zero-clearance end
of each frame is removed before the frames are bolted
together.
CAUTION
If a dual-frame 3880 Model 23 is to be installed on a
non-raised floor or on a raised floor that has no metallic
shielding, RETAIN, search argument 3880 TIP 781.
3880 (Design Model)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3880-1
3880 Storage Control
3880 STORAGE CONTROL MODELS 1-4, 11, 13, 21, AND 23
Power Requirements:
SPECIFICATIONS
kVA
Phases
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Power Cord Style
Dimensions:
Front
Side
Height
1 130
(44-1/2)
815
(32)
1 790
(70-1/2)
2 145
(84-1/2)
815
(32)
1 790
(70-1/2)
Single Frame:
mm
(inches)
1.7
3
R&S, 3730
R&S, 3744
R&S, 3914
B2
0.9
3
R&S, 3730
R&S, 3744
R&S, 3914
B2
2.5*
3
R&S,3730
R&S,3744
R&S, 3914
B2
2.8**
3
R&S, 3730
R&S, 3744
R&S, 3914
B2
A phase imbalance will exist depending on cache size, channel
configuration, and power configuration.
Dual Frame:
mm
(inches)
Typical Configurations and Measurements
Power
Configuration
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Dual Frame:
Front
Rear
Right
Left
760
(30)
865
(34)
865
(34)
0
60-Hz Delta
50-Hz Delta
50-Hz Wye
CO)
See the dual-frame plan view on page 3880.1.
Models 1-3
Model 4
Models 11
and 13
Models 21
and 23
325
(720)
315
(690)
545
(1,200)
525
(1,150)
Weight:
kg
(lb)
750
(2,500)
I 600
(5,500)
(BTU/hr)
2 300*
(7,700)
8.65
5.92
4.33
9.67
8.00
2.90
Channel
Configura tion
Cache
Size
(M-bytes)
8
4
4
16
32
16
C
7.54
7.29
4.71
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
0
16°C-32°C (60 F-9000
20%-80%
26°C (78°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Heat Output:
W
Amperes in
Phase
B
A
2500"'*
(8,550**)
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
IOoC-430C (50°1-"-110°1-")
8%-807c
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
Airflow:
3
m /min
(cfm)
9.0
(320)
15.0
(530)
9.0
(20)
., On the Model 13 with the eight-channel-switch feature, heat output
is 2560 W (8,800 BTU/lH) and kVA is 3.2.
** On the Model 23 with the eight-channel-switch feature, heat output
is 2 830 \V (9,700 BTU/hr) and kV A is 3.3.
30.3
(1,070)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General Illformation
Manllal: Installarion .\[allual-Plzysical Planning, GC2 2-7072.
LWAd
Operating
(bels)
m
I
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
T
Idling
(dB)
3880-13
7.7
7.7
53.0
53.0
No
No
3880-23
8.0
8.0
56.0
56.0
No
No
3880-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3880 Storage Control
3880 STORAGE CONTROL MODELS 1-4, 11, 13, 21, AND 23 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Feature
Code
Std
8170
or
8160
8171
Cable
Group
Conn
ID
Conn
ID
0185
{ 1178
0185
{ 1178
--
1f- 17
-
-
-
2
-
Channel A
5f- 21
-
-
-
6
-
Channel B
0185
1178
0185
1178
9r- 25
13 r- 29
-
-
-
10
-
-
-
14
""-
{
""-
""-
-
6148
1178
6149
1178
6150
-{ 1178
1178
""-
8170
8171
0185
{ 1178
0185
{ 1178
{
22
24
26
28
--
41
43
-
-
4
...
7,- 23
-
-
-
8
11 - - 27
15 I- 31
-
-
12
-
- 16
~
20
6148
1178
6149
1178
6150
{ 1178
1178
DASD Signal
35
-
~
Channel D
-
3f- 19
0185
1178 ...
0185
1178 ...
~
18
-
Channel C
33
Storage
Director 1
Std
~
}
DASD
Power
Control
Channel A
-
Channel B
~
Channel C
-
Channel D
...
DASD Signal
37
""-
--
39
45
47
Storage
Director 2
30
32
34
36
--
}
DASD
Power
Control
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3880-3
3880 Storage Control
3880 STORAGE CONTROL MODELS 1-4, 11, 13,21, AND 23 CABLING SCHEMATIC
From 3880
Max Length
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn
ID
m
(ft)
Model
Notes
0185
2
1
122
(400)
4
1,6,7
1178
1
17
122
(400)
4
3
0185
2
1
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 1,6,7
1178
1
17
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 3
0185
2
3
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 1,6,8
1178
1
19
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 3
0185
2
5
122
(400)
4
1,2,6,7
1178
1
21
122
(400)
4
3
0185
2
5
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 1,2,6,7
1178
1
21
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 3
0185
2
7
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 1,2,6,8
1178
1
23
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 3
0185
2
9
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 1,2,6,7
1178
1
25
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 3
0185
2
11
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 1,2,6,8
1178
1
27
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 3
0185
2
13
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 1,2,6,7
1178
1
29
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 3
0185
2
15
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 1,2,6,8
1178
1
31
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 3
1178
1
33
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 5,7
1178
1
37
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 5,8
1178
1
35
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 5,7
1178
1
39
122
(400)
1,2,3,11,13,21,23 5,8
1178
1
41
122
(400)
1,2,3,13,23
2,5,7
1178
1
43
122
(400)
1,2,3,13,23
2,5,7
1178
1
45
122
(400)
1,2,3,13,23
2,5,8
1178
1
47
122
(400)
1,2,3,13,23
2,5,8
Std
Std
8160
8170
8171
6148
6149
---
6150
3880-4
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3880 Storage Control
3880 STORAGE CONTROL MODELS 1-4, 11, 13, 21, AND 23 CABLING SCHEMATIC
To 3880
Feature
Code
Std
Conn
ID
Model
Notes
2
4
1, 7
2
1,2,3, 11, 13, 21, 23
1, 7
4
1,2,3, 11, 13,21,23
1,8
8160
6
4
1,2, 7
8170
6
1, 2,3, 11, 13,21,23
1,2,7
1,2,8
Std
8170
8171
Std
Std
Std
8
1,2,3, 11, 13, 21, 23
10
1,2,3, 11, 13,21,23
1,2, 7
12
1,2,3,11,13,21,23
1,2,8
14
1,2,3, 11, 13, 21, 23
1,2,7
16
1,2,3,11, 13, 21, 23
1,2,8
18
1,2,3, 11, 13, 21, 23
4,5,7
20
1,2,3,11,13,21,23
4,8,9
22
1,2,3, 11, 13, 21, 23
3,7,9
24
1, 2, 3, 11, 13, 21, 23
3,7,9
26
1,2,3,11,13,21,23
3,7,9
28
1,2,3,11,13,21,23
3,7,9
30
1,2,3, 11, 13,21, 23
3,8,9
32
1,2,3,11, 13,21,23
3,8,9
34
1,2,3,11,13,21,23
3,8,9
36
I,}, 3,11,13,21,23
3,8,9
Notes:
1. A 3880 Modell, 2, 3,11,13,21, or 23 each contain two storage directors. A 3880
Model 4 contains one storage director. Each storage director can be attached to a system channel directly or by means of intervening control devices. Available cable lengths
are computed as follows:
a. For attachment of one storage director of a 3880 to a 2880, maximum length is 85
meters (280 feet). This maximum length is increased to 107 meters (350 feet) if
SI: 6550 is installed.
b. For attachment of one storage director of a 3880 to a 3031,3032,3033, 3042-2,
3082 008x systems), 4331 Model Group 2, or 4341. maximum length is 122 meters
(400 feet). With SF 6550 installed, the maximum length is reduced to 107 meters
(350 feet).
c. For attachmen t of one storage director of a 3880 with 3370-Al s or 3375 -A 1s to a
4331 Model Group 2 or to a 4341, maximum length is 61 meters (200 feet).
Maximum length may be increased to 122 meters (400 feet) when the data-streamingstorage-director-to-channel protocol is used.
d. Maximum length for attachment to a 3158 is 75 meters (250 feet). If SI: 6550 is
installed, the maximum length is increased to 110 meters (325 feet).
e. Maximum length for all other channels is 75 meters (250 feet).
C These maximum lengths must be reduced by 4.5 meters (15 teet) for each control
unit or storage director connected between a storage direl'tor 0 fa 3880 a nd a
channel.
g.. Models 13 and 23 in a dual-frame l'onfiguration are cabled in the same manner as two
single 3880 Model 13s or 23s.
2. Special features may be ordered to attach each storage director to more than one
channel.
a. SF 8160 provides the second channel attachment for the storagl' director on 3880
Model 4.
b. SF 8170 provides the second dlannel attal'hment for each storage director on 3880
Models 1,2,3, 11. 13.21. and 23.
SF 8170 is the minimum l'onfiguration for the 3880 Models 21 and 23.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling SchematiCS
3880-5
3880 Storage Control
3880 STORAGE CONTROL MODELS 1-4,11,13,21, AND 23 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Notes (Continued):
c. SF 8171 provides two additional channel attachments for each storage director on
3880 Models 1, 2, 3, 11, 13, 21, and 23.
d. SF 8172 (eight-channel switch) internally connects the two storage directors so that
each director has access to all eight channels on 3880 Models 1, 2, 3, 13, and 23.
3. Power sequence and control cable. This cable is optional and should be ordered if the
installation uses power sequencing controls.
4. Attachment options for each of the 3880 are shown in the following table:
Model
Attachment Options
1
Each storage director can attach:
•
•
•
•
As many as four 3340-A2s or
As many as four 3370-Als or
As many as four 3375-Als or 3375-D1s or
As many as four 3333s (any model) and/or 3350-A2s and 3350-A2Fs
in any combination. Each 3350-A2 or 3350-A2F can attach one
3350-C2 or 3350-C2F for a maximum of four 3350-A2s or 3350-A2Fs
and four 3350-C2s or 3350-C2Fs.
2
Storage director 1 provides for the attachment as described above for one
3880 Model 1 storage director. Storage director 2 provides for the attachment of either as many as two 3380-A4s or as many as two 3380-AA4s.
3
Each storage director can attach as many as two 3380-AA4s, -AD4s, or
-AE4s in any combination. Two 3380-A4s can attach; however, 3380
Model A4 cannot be attached to the same director with any other model of
3380.
4
The storage director can attach as many as four 3370s or 3375s. The
3370s and 3375s cannot be attached at the same time.
11
Storage director 1 can attach only one string of 3350s. Storage director 2
can attach as many as four strings of 3333s/3330s and/or 3350s in any
combination.
13
The 3880 Model 13 can attach one or two strings of 3380-AA4s. Each
3380-AA4 can attach up to three additional 3380-B4s. Each string of
3380-AA4s must be attached to both storage directors of the same 3880
Model 13.
The 3880 Model 13 in a dual-frame configuration (two 3880s bolted together providing four storage directors) can attach as many as two strings
of 3380-AA4s to each frame. Each 3380-AA4 unit can attach up to three
additional 3380-B4s. The 3380 strings must be cross-connected to the
storage directors in alternate 3880s to enhance data availability.
21
The 3880 Model 21 can attach one or two strings of 3350-A2s or
3350-A2Fs (each with one 3350-B2 or 3350-B2F or 3350-C2 or
3350-C2F). Each 3350-A2 or 3350-A2F or 3350-C2 or 3350-C2F must be
attached to both storage directors of the same 3880.
21
The 3350-A2s/3350-A2Fs and 3350-C2s/3350-C2Fs attached to the 3880
Model 21 must have a string switch installed and each l~g of the string
switch must be attached to the same 3880.
23
The 3880 Model 23 can attach as many as two 3380-AA4s, -AD4s, or
-AE4s in any combination. Each 3380-AA4 can attach up to three
additional 3380-B4s. Each 3380-AD4 or -AE4 can attach up to three
additional 3380-BD4s or 3380-BE4s. Each string of 3380-AA4s, -AD4s,
and -AE4s must be attached to the same 3880 Model 23.
The 3880 Model 23 in the dual-frame configuration (two 3880s bolted
together providing four storage directors) can attach as many as two
3380-AA4s, -AD4s or -AE4s to each frame in any combination. Additional
3380-Bs can be attached as previously described. The 3380 strings must be
cross"connected to the storage directors in alternate 3880s to enhance data
availability.
3880-6
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3880 Storage Control
3880 STORAGE CONTROL MODELS 1-4,11, 13, 21, AND 23 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Notes (Continued):
5. Required for SF 6148, SF 6149, and SF 6150. Two cable groups
(1178) may be ordered for SF 6148 and SF 6149. Four cable groups
may be ordered for SF 6150.
6. Specify cable group 790 (instead of cable group 0185) to connect
both storage directors of a 3880 to the same channel. Group 790 is
a fixed.length, 765·mm (2·1/2 ft) cable. This cable must be ordered
at 610·mm (2·ft) length and both connector identifiers (IDs) given;
for example, from connector ID3 to connector ID2. This cable
cannot be ordered by metric measure or by inches; it must be ordered
at a 2·foot length. Not available with SF 8172.
7. Storage director 1.
8. Storage director 2.
9. From DASD.
10. The following link length restrictions apply for combinations of parallel and ESCON ports or parallel
ports or ESCO N ports.
From
~
To - . CPU
channel
9032/9033
9034
3880
CPU channel
ESCON
Parallel
--
---
*
0.9 Km
--
--
122 m
*
--
*
--
--
-122 m
9032/9033
ESCON
Parallel
--
--
--
--
9034
ESCON
Parallel
0.9 Km
*
--
--
-122 m
--
--
3880
ESCON
Parallel
--
-122 m
--
--
* For 3880 attachment, when a 9032 or 9033 ESCON Director is installed
between the 9034 and the ESCON channel, subtract 0.2 Km (634 feet)
from the allowed distance of 0.9 Knl (2 957 feet) between
the 9034 and the ESCON channel.
All the channel paths from a particular 3880 to a given processor image must be of the same type. That
is, all parallel channels or all ESCON channels configured for the 9034 ESCON Converter.
The maximum length for parallel ports is 122 meters (400 feet) depending on the channel cable type;
that is, gray or blue cable.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3880-7
3880 storage Control
This page is intentionally left blank.
3880-8
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3881 Optical Mark Reader
3881 OPTICAL MARK READER MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
11- - ------ -- --- --- - -.. ----;
I
1
1,4
ii
I
36"
....... -2-1
I
\
4"
,
Ii' 0
"
5-1
~ t~~,
M
214
,I
14 Piace'l
!"
-.i
: L-I--.; t ,
:1
Dimensions:
I
-~'" ~1-9"
Jo-"-
Piacesi.
'
f. 4
'
'~1aces,
1
__
0
'2"
3881-:
0 :
3"
14 Placesl
SPECI FICATIONS
.-f:·Plo",1
~
Inches
(cm)
F
S
H
60
(152)
24
(61 )
55
(140)
F
R
Rt
L
42
(107)
36
(91)
o
(0)
30
(76)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
I
'
i
I 30"
:
,~
-
I
42"
-
_. -
.1.
-~"':":~O~-'=------i
Weight:
875 Ib (400 kg)
Front
,
_ . _ _ •_ _ ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ •_ _ _ J
Note: For cabling information, see Section 2,
3,500 BTU/hr (890 kcal/hr)
Heat Output:
"Machines with Integral or Ahutted Controls."
Airflow:
25 cfm (l m 3 /min)
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
1.2
1
R&S, FS3750
R&S, FS3933
R&S, FS3753
A2
Environment, Operating:
Temperat ure
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
60°F -90°F (I 6°C-32°C)
20%-80%
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
50°F-I] OOF (10oC-430C)
8%-80%
80°F (27°C)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3881-1
3881 Optical Mark Reader
3881 OPTICAL MARK READER MODEL 2
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(cm)
F
S
H
60
(152)
24
(61)
55
(140)
F
R
Rt
L
36
(91 )
36
(91)
*
(*)
*
(*)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
Weight:
875lb (400 kg)
Heat Output:
Airflow:
3,500 BTU/hr (890 kcal/hr)
25 cfm (1 m 3 /min)
Power Requirements: **
kVA
1.2
Phases
1
Plug
R&S, FS3750
R&S, FS3933
Connector
R&S, FS3753
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
A2
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
60°F-90°F (16°C-32°C)
20%-80%
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
50 o F-] lOaF (JOoC-430C)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
* Clearance should be provided on either side for
access to rear of machine. The 3881-2 and the
3410-1 are physically attached at the front corn
The attachment is flexible, allowing a swing of u
to 90° between devices.
** The 3410-1 is powered from 3881-2.
3410-1
3881-2
3881-2
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3881 Optical Mark Reader
3881 OPTICAL MARK READER MODEL 3
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
r~~1--~=:=J'----rf
I
I
I
I_.______~
4"
9"
(4 Places)
(4 Places)
4-1/2"
I ~~_-J....-_--'--I
I 6-1/2"
I
I
:I
iL
tOO
4"
(4 Pires)
+
24"
0+ .. ~
+0
~
1
t
3881-3
~
r
30"
(4 Places)
/
F,o",
___________
J:i
i
-.-l ___
I
Inches
(cm)
F
S
60
(152)
24
(61)
55
(140)
F
R
Rt
L
36
(91 )
36
(91)
o
(0)
24
(61)
H
36"
I
1
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
I
Weight:
-=
925lb (420 kg)
3"
14 Plo",)
Heat Output:
3,800 BTU/hr (960 kcal/hr)
Airflow: 25 cfm (1 m 3 /min)
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
1.3
1
R&S, FS3750
R&S, FS3933
R&S, FS3753
A2
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-90°F ( 160 C-32 l )C)
Rei Humidity
:X)!;~-8(Y,C
Max Wct Bulb
7f\or C~6uC)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
SOuF-!1 OOF (I OOC-43l)C)
ReI Humidity
gr·r-80r;·;
Max Wet Bulb
ROor (27°C)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3881-3
3881 Optical Mark Reader
This page is intentionally left blank.
3881-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3886 Optical Character Reader
3886 OPTICAL CHARACTER READER MODEL 1
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions: *
F
Inches
(em)
H
S
70
(178)
29-1/2
(75)
60
(l52)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(em)
Weight:
F
R
Rt
L
36
(91)
42
(107)
30
(76)
24
(61)
1,5501b (710 kg)
Heat Output:
Note: For cabling information, see Section 2,
"Machines with Integral or Abutted Controls."
Airflow:
7,000 BTU/hr (I 800 kcal/hr)
820 cfm (24 m 3 /min)
Power Requirements:
kVA
2.3
Phases
3
Plug
R&S, FS3760
Connector
R&S, FS3934
Receptacle
R&S, FS3754
Power Cord Style
D1
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
60°F-90°F (I 6°C-32°C)
20%-80%
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
50°F-110°F (lOoC-430C)
8%-80%
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
* If required, specify SF 9840 for upending kit.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3886-1
3886 Optical Character Reader
3886 OPTICAL CHARACTER READER MODEL 2
SPECI FICATIONS
PLAN VI EW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
Dimensions: *
F
Inches
(em)
70
(178)
H
S
29-1/2
(75)
60
(152)
Service Clearances:
6"
L r - -- - - _/--~~~.:-L---L..----JI--.L....---!
.-~
r ------- +
i
L:I
I1
27"
3410-1
I
3"
'-----1I
M
5"x5"
4"
5
~ 33-1/2"
A
23-1/2""
+
,,+
3886-2
+
12 Places)
-1f+-l-+-~
--l
+
(4 Places)
:
30"
/"
I
/
IL _____________
- --~r~n~
(4 ptlaCeS)
~
:
I
i
36 "
J
I
------__
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ JI
Inches
(em)
Weight:
F
R
Rt
L
36
(91)
42
(107)
**
(**)
**
(**)
1,5501b (710 kg)
Heat Output: 7,600 BTU/hr (I 950 kcal/hr)
Airflow:
820 cfm (24 m 3 /min)
Power Requirements:***
kVA
2.5
Phases
3
Plug
R&S, FS3760
Connector
R&S, FS3934
Receptacle
R&S, FS3754
Power Cord Style
D1
Environment, Operating:
60°F-90°F (16 0 C-320(')
Temperature
Rei Humidity
20%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
78°F (26°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
50°F-110°F (I 00C-430C)
Rei Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
* If required, specify SF 9840 for upending
kit.
** Clearance should be provided on either side for
a'ccess to rear of machine. The 3886-2 and the
3410-1 are physically attached at the fron t
corner. The attachment is flexible, allowing a
swing of up to 90° between devices.
*** The 3410-] is powered from 3886-2.
3410-1
3886-2
3886-2
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3886 Optical Character Reader
3886 OPTICAL CHARACTER READER MODEL 2 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Group
No.
horl
~I
h or I
3277
Model 1
No. of
Cables
1
From
3277-1
3886
Model 2
To
3886-2
Max
Length (ft)
2,000
Notes
1,2
Notes:
1. Required for Sf H701.
2. Customer supplied, installed, and maintained; maximum length not to exceed 2,000 feet. Cables may be ordered through
IBM Branch Office via MES (Miscellaneous Equipment Specification). See Appendix B for cable specifications and IBM
part numbers.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3886-3
3886 Optical Character Reader
This page is intentionally left blank.
3886-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
PLAN VIEW (MODEL 81 WITH MICROFILMER), English Scale: 1/4 in.
= 1 ft
w
(See Note 11)
CO
cg
0
C
0
n
c
S
m
~I~
2
-t
2"9~rTT"
I
I I
(4 Piece)
"JJ0
24-3/4"
s
n
m
+,+
L
139-1 / 4"
-.-+
3" -.--l .
(4 Plo,..)
1.-1/2"
(3 Plow)
@
~~~~-r-I ~
Note: CE penel cover..LI_-------t-swings 180 0 •
o
::::r
Q)
"U
~
-.>.
~
:7"
L,.---------------r__Note: For cabling information, see page 3890.13.
~
0 PI".. )
@
+
1_1.I2"J
I
~l·1·
@
------t
(2 Pieces)
'---1
16"
127-3/4"
30"
(3 Pieces)
57"
(I)
(I)
15-1/4"
0
JJ
en
0
I
I
J:
N
_/ "
49 3I4 I
-~
J
30":1]
352"
See Notes 12 and 15
Note: Shelf swings out on
microfilmer only.
Q)
o
5"
J
+
a
~
Stecker cover swings
forward end down.
MODEL 82 (WITH MICROFILMER)
:J
CD
en
"U
w
CD
o
::;
Q)
CD
o·
o
~
o
a
o
:J
III
n
Q)
E:
:J
3
a.
o
I
Q)
Q:
:J
(Q
en
o
::::r
CD
3
'
~
~
o·
III
w
Q)
CD
...
oI
Blower
,.
~~un;'2
~
~ontrol
Unit 1
(See Notes 12 and 15)
m
~
.,"'tJ
o
n
m
en
en
.,o
-
U1
o
:I:
N
3890 Document Processor (50 HZ)
3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR (50 HZ)
Details (By Frame)
Weight
Ib
(kg)
Frame
50Hz
20012351
3801408 V
60Hz
200 V
50 Hz
Note 12
220 V
Installed
Dimensions
FxSxH
inches (mm)
Control Unit I 67 x 31-1/4 x 60
(Frame 01)
(I 705 x 795 x I 525)
Note I
2,300
(1045)
2,300
(1045)
Control Unit 2 33-112 x 31-1/4 x 60
(Frame 06)
(855 x 795 x I 525)
Note 2
385
(175)
Note 14
225
(105)
Note 14
1,850
(840)
1,850
(840)
33-112 x 31-1/4 x 60
(855 x 795 x I 525)
Note 4
720
(330)
720
(330)
57 x 30 x 60
Note 5
850
(390)
Note 6
850
(390)
NOle 6
16 x 30 x 52-112
(410 x 755 '( I 335)
30
(14)
30
(14)
Feed
(Frame 02)
67 x 31-1/4 x 60
(I 705 x 795 x I 525)
Heat Output
BTUlhr
(W)
50 Hz
20012351
3801408 V
60 Hz
50H;.
200 V
220 V
Note 12
60Hz
Airflow
2081240 V ejm
Notes 12, 15 (m 3Imin)
kVA
50 f/;.
20012351
3801408 V
60 f/;.
60H;.
50 II;.
2081240 V
200 V
220 V
Notes 12, 16 Note 12
60H;.
2081240 V
Notes 12, 16
800
(23)
11,200
(3290)
11,200
(3290)
11,200
(3290)
4.1
4.1
4.1
(I 045)
Note 7
Note 13
11,700
(3430)
NoieR
11,700
(3430)
NOIl'R
NOll' 7
3.R
Notes R, \0
3.R
NOll' 7
1,850
(840)
300
(9)
15,800
(4 (40)
15,Roo
(4 (40)
15,800
(4 (40)
5.8
NOll' \0
5.R
NOll' \0
5.R
Noll' II)
720
(330)
357
(II)
9,300
(2730)
9,300
(2730)
9,300
(2730)
3.4
NOll' \0
3.4
NOll' \0
3.4
NOll' 10
850
(390)
NOll' 6
115
(4)
4,600
(I 350)
4,600
(I 350)
4,600
(I 350)
1.7
NOll' 10
1.7
Note 10
1.7
NOll' \0
30
(14)
30
4,100
(I 210)
4,\00
(I 21t»
4.100
(I 210)
1.5
NOll' \0
1.5
Note \0
1.5
Noll'IO
2,300
Note 3
Microfilmer
(Frame 03)
Stacker
(Frame 04)
Blower
(Frame 05)
End of Last
Stacker
(I 450 x 765 x I 525)
Branch Circuit Requirements
Plan View Metric Equivalents
Dimensions
(I)
Dimensions
inches
mm
inches
mm
352
237
139-114
127-3/4
115
67
60
57
49-3/4
48
45-1/2
33-5/8
33-112
32
31-114
30
28-3/4
28-112
24-3/4
22
8940
6020
3535
3245
2920
1 700
1 525
1 450
1 265
1 220
1 155
855
850
815
795
760
730
725
630
560
17
16
15-114
to-l/5
to
8-1/4
8
7
6
5-112
5
4-1/4
4
3
2-112
2
1-112
1
1/2
430
405
385
265
255
2tO
200
180
150
140
125
ItO
100
75
65
50
40
25
15
Maximum Continuous Load
(Amperes) for: 3890 Model
AI
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B2
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
CI
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
DI
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
If SF 5111 (microfilmer)
is not installed, subtract
amperes (A) from
Maximum Continuous Load
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
3890-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
60
50
Hz
Voltage
Phases
Ampacity
200
3
90
220
3
90
235
3
90
380
3
50
408
3
50
200
3
100
208
3
100
240
3
100
48
53
58
63
69
73
43
58
63
68
73
78
53
58
63
68
74
78
58
64
69
74
79
83
43
48
53
58
62
66
48
53
57
62
67
71
48
53
58
62
67
71
53
58
63
67
72
76
41
45
50
54
58
62
45
50
54
58
62
67
45
50
54
58
63
66
50
54
59
63
67
71
25
28
31
33
36
38
28
31
33
36
39
41
28
31
34
36
39
41
31
34
36
39
42
44
23
26
29
31
34
36
26
29
31
34
36
39
26
29
31
34
36
38
29
31
34
36
39
41
4R
53
58
63
69
73
53
58
63
68
73
78
46
51
56
61
66
70
52
56
61
66
71
75
42
46
51
55
60
64
47
51
55
60
64
68
9.8
8.9
8.4
5.2
4.8
9.8
9.5
8.5
R&S, .IPSI034H
R&S, .ICSI034H
R&S, JRSRI034H
F2
\
208 and 240 V
60 Hz Only
Note 12
3890 Document Processor (50 HZ)
3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR (50 HZ)
Totals (By Model) Note 9
Power Option
I
! Model
AI
50Hz
20012351
3801408 V
60Hz
200 V
50Hz
220 V
60Hz
2081240 V
Note 15
MicroJilmer
(SF 5111)
X
X
X
X
X
~
X
X
!
X
:
i
A2
X
X
i
I
X
X
X'
:
I
X
X
I
X
X
A3
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
I
A4
X
7,835
(3555)
6,955
(3 155)
7,675
(3485)
X
X
7,450
(3380)
X
7,965
(3615)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A6
5,880
(2670)
6,600
(2995)
7,115
(3230)
6,730
(3055)
X
A5
Weight
Ib
(kg)
Note 6
5,415
(2460)
6,135
(2790)
5,255
(2385)
5,975
(2715)
5,030
(2285)
5,750
(2610)
6,265
(2845)
6,985
(3 170)
6,105
(2770)
6,825
(3 1(0)
X
8,430
(3825)
9,150
(4155)
9,665
(4385)
(6135)
241-112
(IV)
kVA
35,800
(10 5(0)
13.1
45,100
(13 220)
16.5
1,245
(36)
35,800
(10 5(0)
13.1
275
(6985)
1,602
(46)
208
(5285)
241-112
(6135)
1,245
(36)
45,100
(13220)
35,800
(10550)
45,100
(13220)
13.1
298-112
1,360
(39)
(6 135)
275
(6985)
241-1/2
. (7585)
1,602
(46)
332
(8435)
298-1/2
(7585)
1,360
(39)
332
(8435)
1,717
(49)
265
(6730)
298-112
(7585)
1,360
(39)
355-112
(9030)
1,475
(42)
389
(9885)
1,832
(52)
355-112
1,475
(42)
(9030)
389
(9885)
322
(8 180)
355-112
'(9030)
412-112
(10 480)
1,717
(49)
1,717
(49)
1,832
(52)
!,475
(42)
1,832
(52)
1,590
(45)
446
(II 3(0)
1,947
(56)
412-112
1,590
(45)
(10 480)
446
(11300)
379
(9625)
412-112
(10480)
469-112
(11930)
503"
(12780)
469-112
(II 930)
503
(12780)
. 436
(11075)
469-112
(II 930)
1,947
(56)
1,590
(45)
1,947
(56)
1,705
(49)
2,062
(59)
1,705
(49)
2,062
(59)
1,705
(49)
2,062
(59)
40,400
(II 850)
49,700
(14570)
40,400
(II 850)
49,700
(14570)
40,400
(II 850)
49,700
(14570)
45,100
(13 220)
54,300
(15920)
45,100
(13 220)
54,300
(IS 920)
45,100
(13220)
16.5
16.5
14.8
18.2
14.8
18.2
14.8
18.2
16.5
19.9
16.5
19.9
16.5
54,300
(15 920)
49,700
(14570)
59,000
(17300)
49,700
(14570)
59,000
(17 3(0)
21.6
49,700
(14570)
18.2
59,000
(17 3(0)
21.6
54,300
(15 920)
63,600
(18650)
54,300
(15 920)
63,600
(18650)
19.9
18.2
18.2
21.6
19.9
23.3
19.9
23.3
54,300
(15 920)
63,600
(18650)
59,000
(17 3(0)
23.3
25.0
19.9
(13 375)
X
560
(14225)
2,177
(62)
68,300
(20020)
526-112
X
9,505
(4315)
10,225
(4640)
1,820
(52)
2,177
(62)
59,000
(17 300)
68,300
(20020)
1,820
(52)
2,177
(62)
59,000
(17320)
21.6
68,300
(20020)
25.0 .
9,280
(4210)
X
X
9,535
(4330)
8,655
(3930)
9,375
(4255)
Heat Output
BTUlhr
10,385
(4715)
X
X
8,300
(3765)
8,815
(4000)
AirJlow
cJm
(m 3 Imin)
1,245
(36)
1,602
(46)
1,820
(52)
X
X
8,685
(3940)
7,805
(3545)
8,525
(3870)
7,580
(3440)
Length
inches
(mm)
X
10,000
(4540)
526-112
(13 375)
560
(14225)
493
(12520)
526~112
~13
375)
21.6
21.6
25.0
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3890-3
3890 Document Processor (50 HZ)
3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR (50 HZ)
Totals (By Model) Note 9
Power Option
Model
BI
50Hz
20012351
3801408 V
60Hz
200 V
Weight
60Hz
2081240 V
Note 15 --
Ib
X
X
6,450
(2925)
298-112
(7585)
1,620
(46)
45,600
(13370)
16.7
X
7,260
(3295)
1,977
(56)
54,900
(16100)
20.1
X
6,380
(2895)
332
(8435)
298-1/2
(7585)
1,620
(46)
X
7,100
(3220)
332
(8435)
1,977
(56)
45,600
(13370)
54,900
(16100)
6,095
(2965)
6,815
(3950)
7,390
(3355)
8,110
(3680)
7,230
(3280)
298-112
(7585)
1,620
(46)
332
(8435)
1,977
(56)
355·112
(9030)
X
X
X
X
41,000
(12020)
15.0
1,862
(53)
1,505
(43)
50,300
(14750)
41,000
(12020)
1,862
(53)
50,300
(14750)
1,505
(43)
1,862
(53)
41,000
(12020)
50,300
(14750)
18.4
15.0
18.4
15.0
18.4
16.7
20.1
20.1
389
(9885)
355-1/2
(9030)
2,092
(59)
59,500
(17300)
21.8
1,735
(49)
50,300
(14750)
18.4
7,725
(3505)
6,945
(3 150)
7,665
(3480)
8,240
(3740)
8,960
(4605)
8,080
(3665)
389
(9885)
355-1/2
(9030)
2,090
(59)
59,500
(17300)
21.8
1,735
(49)
50,300
(14750)
18.4
389
(9885)
412-1/2
(10 480)
446
(11300)
2,090
(59)
50500
(17300)
21.8
1,850
(53)
2,207
(62)
54,900
(16100)
64,200
(18820)
412-1/2
(10480)
1,850
(53)
54,900
(16100)
20.1
446
(11300)
412-1/2
(10480)
446
(II 300)
2,207
(62)
64,200
(18820)
23.5
1,850
(53)
2,207
(62)
54,900
(16100)
64,200
(18820)
X
8,800
(3995)
7,795
(3540)
8,515
(3860)
9,090
(4 125)
469-112
(II 930)
1,965
(56)
59,500
(17300)
21.8
X
9,810
(4450)
503
(12780)
2,322
(66)
68,800
(19940)
25.2
8,930
(4050)
469-112
(II 930)
9,650
(4380)
8,645
(3925)
503
(12780)
1,965
(56)
2,322
(66)
1,965
(II 930)
(56)
X
9,365
(4250)
9,940
(4510)
503
(12780)
526-1/2
(13 375)
2,322
(66)
2,080
(59)
59,500
(17300)
68,800
(19940)
59,500
(17300)
68,800
(19900)
64,200
(18820)
X
10,660
(4835)
560
(14225)
2,437
(69)
9,780
(4440)
526-1/2
560
(14225)
2,080
(59)
2,437
(69)
526-112
(13375)
2,080
(59)
73,500
(21 550)
64,200
(18820)
73,500
(21 550)
64,200
(18820)
560
(14225)
2,437
(69)
73,500
(21 550)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3890-4
kVA
1,505
(43)
1,735
(49)
X
B6
(W)
45,600
(13370)
54,900
(16100)
50,300
(14750)
X
B5
275
(6985)
241-1/2
(6 135)
5,245
(2380)
5,965
(2705)
X
B4
241-1/5
(6 135)
Heat Output
BTVlhr
X
X
X
B3
Airflow
cfm
(m 3Imin)
275
(6985)
241-1/2
(6 135)
275
(6985)
Microfilmer
(SF 5111)
X
X
B2
Length
inches
(mm)
(kg)
Note 6
5,690
(2705)
6,410
(2910)
5,530
(2510)
6,250
(2835)
50Hz
220 V
X
10500
(4765)
9,495
(4310)
10,215
(4635)
469-1/2
(13 375)
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
16.7
18.4
20.1
23.5
20.1
23.5
21.8
25.2
21.8
25.2
23.5
26.9
23.5
26.9
23.5
26.9
3890 Document Processor (50 HZ)
3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR (50 HZ)
Totals (By Model) Note 9
Power Option
Model
CI
C2
50 Hz
2001235/
3801408 V
60 II~
200 V
50 H~
220 V
60 Hz
2081240 V
Note 12
Microfilmer
(SI-"5111)
2,302
(66)
(IV)
X
6,460
(2930)
X
5,580
(2535)
241-112
(6 135)
1,945
(55)
X
6,300
(2860)
275
(6985)
2,302
(66)
40,400
(II 850)
49,700
(14570)
40,400
(II 850)
49,700
(14570)
6,550
(2975)
298-1/2
(7580)
2,060
(59)
4S,300
(13280)
7,310
(3320)
6,430
(2920)
7,150
(3245)
7,440
(3375)
8,160
(3705)
7,280
(3305)
8,000
(3630)
8,290
(3765).
9,010
(4090)
332
(8435)
298-112
(7580)
2,417
(69)
2,060
(59)
54,600
(16010)
45,300
(13280)
332
(8435)
2,417
(69)
355-1/2
(9030)
2,175
(62)
54,600
(16010)
50,200
(14720)
389
(9880)
2,532
355-1/2
(9030)
2,175
(62)
389
(9880)
2,532
412-1/2
(10480)
446
(II 330)
412-1/2
(10480)
2290
(65)
2,647
(75)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8,130
(3690)
X
(72)
(72)
59,500
(17440)
50,200
(14720)
59,500
(17440)
kVA
14.8
18.2
14.8
18.2
16.6
20.0
16.6
20.0
18.4
21.8
18.4
21.8
23.5
2290
(65)
54,900
(16100)
64,200
(18820)
54,900
(16100)
20.1
20.1
446
(II 330)
2,647
(75)
64,200
(18820)
23.5
X
8,850
(40IS)
9,140
(4150)
469-112
(11925)
2,40S
(68)
60,100
(17 620)
22.0
X
9,860
(4475)
503
(12775)
2,762
(79)
69,400
(20350)
2S.4
X
8,980
(4075)
469-1/2
(11925)
2,405
(68)
X
X
9,700
(4400)
503
(12775)
2,762
(79)
526-112
(13 375)
2,520
(72)
X
560
(14225)
526-112
(13375)
2,877
(82)
X
9,990
(4535)
10,710
(4860)
9,830
(4460)
X
10,550
(4790)
560
(14225)
60,100
(17 620)
69,400
(20350)
63,900
(18720)
73,200
(21460)
63,900
(18720)
73,200
(21460)
X
C6
1,945
(55)
Heat OlltPlIt
BTU/hr
241-1/2
(6 135)
275
(6985)
X
C5
Airflow
cfm
(m 3/min)
5,740
(2605)
X
C4
Length
inches
(mm)
X
X
C3
Weight
Ib
(kg)
Note 6
X
X
X
X
X
2,520
(72)
2,877
(82)
22.0
25.4
23.4
26.8
23.4
26.8
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3890-5
3890 Document Processor (50 HZ)
3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR (50 HZ)
'Totals (By Model) Note 9
Power Option
Model
D1
50Hz
20012351
3801408 V
60Hz
200 V
Weight
50 liz
220 V
60Hz
2081240 V
Note 12
Ib
Microfilmer
(SF. 51/ I)
X
X
X
X
X
02
X
05
06
lIeat Olltput
BTUlhr
(W)
kVA
241-1/2
(6 135)
1.945
(55)
45,600
(13630)
16.7
275
(6985)
2,302
(66)
54,900
(16100)
20.1
241-112
(6 135)
275
(6985)
1,945
(55)
45,600
(13630)
16,7
2,302
(66)
54,900
(16100)
20.1
298-112
(7580)
2,060
(59)
50,500
(14810)
18.5
X
7,360
(3340)
332
(8435)
2,417
(69)
59,800
(17530)
21.9
6,490
(2945)
298-112
(7 580)
2,060
(59)
50,500
(14810)
18.5
7,210
(3275)
332
(8435)
2,417
(69)
59,800
(17530)
21.9
X
7,500
(3405)
355-112
(9030)
2,175
(62)
55,400
(16240)
20.3
X
8,220
(3730)
389
(9880)
2,532
(72)
64,700
(18970)
23.7
X
7,340
(3330)
355-112
(9030)
2,175
(62)
55,400
(16240)
20.3
X
8,060
(3660)
389
(9880)
2,532
(72)
64,700
(18970)
23.7
X
8,350
(3790)
412-112
(10480)
2,290
(65)
60,100
(17620)
22.0
X
9,060
(4 110)
446
(II 330)
2,647
(75)
69,400
(20350)
25.4
X
8,190
(3715)
412-112
(10480)
2,290
(65)
60,100
(17620)
22.0
X
8,910
(4045)
446
(11 330)
2,647
(75)
69,400
(20350)
25.4
X
9,200
(4 175)
469-1/2
(II 925)
2,405
(68)
65,300
(19140)
23.9
X
9,920
(4500)
503
(12775)
2,762
(79)
74,500
(21 840)
27.3
X
9,040
(4105)
469-1/2
(II 925)
2,405
(68)
65,300
(19140)
23.9
X
X
9,760
(4430)
503
(12775)
2.762
(79)
74,500
(21 840)
27.3
526-112
(13375)
2,520
X
10,050
(4560)
10,760
(4885)
560
(14225)
2,877
(82)
69,100
(20260)
78,400
(22980)
X
9,890
(4490)
526-1/2
2,520
(13375)
X
10,610
(4815)
560
(14225)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3890-6
Airflow
(fm
(m 3 Imin)
6,650
(3020)
X
04
Length
inches
(mm)
X
X
03
(kg)
Note 6
5,800
(2635)
6,520
(2960)
5,640
(2560)
6,360
(2885)
X
(72)
25.3
28.7
(72)
69,100
(20260)
25.3
2,877
(82)
78,400
(22980)
28.7
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3890 Document Processor (50 HZ)
3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR (50 HZ)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(mm)
F
Note 11
Note 11
S
Note 11
Note 11
H
60
(1 525)
Service Clearances: See plan view.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
65 0 F-80 0 F (18 0C-270C)
ReI Humidity
20%-65%
Floor Requirements:
Maximum machine length is 637 in. (16 180 mm).
Normal raised floor construction providing ±0.10 in.
(±2.54 mm) overall facilitates installation.
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for
frame 01 are 67 in. x 31-1/4 in. x 60-1/4 in. (1 705 mm
x 795 mm x 1 535 mm). Removal of the side covers
reduces the width to 29 in. (740 mm). If further
reduction in length is required, see the IBM representative
to request an upending kit. This modifies the unit to
60 in. x 30-1/4 in. x 71 in. (1 525 mm x 770 mm x
1805 mm).
2. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for
frame 06 are 33-1/2 in. x 31-1/4 in. x 60-1/4 in. (855
mm x 795 mm x 1 535 mm). Removal of the front and
rear covers reduces the width to 29 in. (740 mm).
3. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for
frame 02 are 70-3/4 in. x 31-1/2 in. x 60-1/4 in. (1 800
mm x 795 mm x 1 535 mm). Removal of the rear cover
reduces the width to 30-1/4 in. (770 mm). Removal of
the lower front cover and partially raising the top covers
further reduces the width to 29 in. (740 mm). If further
reduction in size is required, see the IBM representative
for specifying an upending kit. This modifies the unit to
60 in. x 30-1/4 in. x 75-1/2 in. (1 525 mm x 770 mm x
1920 mm).
The side dimension is 39-1/2 in. (1 005 mm), including
8-1/4 in. (210 mm) for the shelf.
The height dimension is 90 in .. (2 290 mm) with the
cover above the shelf raised to the service position.
4. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for
frame 03 are 34-1/4 in. x 31-1/4 in. x 60-1/4 in. (870
mm x 795 mm x 1 535 mm). Removal of the rear
covers reduces the width to 30-1/4 in. (770 mm).
Removal of the front covers and partially raising the top
cover further reduces the width to 29 in. (740 mm).
The side dimension is 39-1/2 in. (1 005 mm), including
8-1/4 in. (210 mm) for the shelf.
The height dimension is 86-1/4 in. (2 195 mm) with the
cover above the shelf raised to the service position.
5. Shipping length for frame 04 is 64 in. (I 630 111m);
shipping height is 61-1/2 in. (I 590 mm). Unless otherwise specified, the end stacker unit is shipped with frame
05 assembled. Shipping length is 75 in. (I 910 111 III ).
These units are shipped separately by request or are
automatically shipped separately if upending kits arc
specified for frame 0 I or frame 02.
The number of stackers varies by model nUlllber. Thc
front dimension for installed stackers is found by
multiplying the length of one stacker,S 7 in. (l 450 mm),
by the modell1umber. (For Model A6 or E6. 57 ill.
II 450 mm] x 6 = stacker dimension plus 16 in. 1410
mm] for framc 05.)
6. The weight of customer's trays and documents is not
included.
7. The 60 Hz, 208/240 V Models AI-A6 do not require
frame 06.
8. Maximum value. See Totals (By Model) for actual values
by feature and power option.
9. Select the model desired and use the values from the line
for the power option and microfilmer (SF 5111) option
required.
10. Powered from frame 01.
11. See "Plan View Metric Equivalents" on page 3890.2.
12. 60 Hz is not applicable to Models C l-C6 and D 1 -D6.
13. Models C l-C6, 700 (20).
Models 01-06,960 (28).
14. Models CI-C6, add 325 (150).
Models 01-06, add 385 (180).
15. References to 60-Hz 3890 Models A and B do not apply
if the 3890 has the monolithic storage device (instead of
the core storage device). The 60-Hz, 208/240 V 3890
Models A and B with monolithic storage do not have
frame 06.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3890-7
w
Q)
(,C)
w
PLAN VIEW (MODEL B1 WITH MICROFILMER), English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft (See Notes 10, 11)
00
to
C
I
I.
Q)
_I_
115"
237'"
_,
0
C
C
C
(")
n
s:m
3(I)
0
:::J
C
C!
oc
-s
--.......
60"
s.
3
CD
----1
=
: t -".'I
~
S-
III
~
!
~. ~
~;;;
,
•
--±I"
2.1/2,,3L
o·
Ql
/
:::J
C
0-
8"
48"
I
II
~
-u
iii"
:::J
;!.
:::J
(Q
4"!
10"
Ql
III
!
_I
@
~
::r
'<
13P'''~1
!
--'------L..--L
sWings both
ways
/
I '-
I
1
L
10""
8·1/4
±------- ",,--.1-"'1I2,,=-.r.==""352"
/
CE
-..J
~ ~
b~·-·
.1.
Note, Fa' cabBng infa,matian. see page 3890.13.
MODEL 82 (WITH MICROFILMER, See Note 11)
------
~~
--I~ 1~Places~1
@
,.1/2"
1
(4 Places)
" _
4 1/4
See Note 12
@)
~
____
-
(5 Places)
~"'_
Q;
t5
---- ----
(2 Places)
I
(2 Places)
"
::0
48"
0
, I
I
I
I
---I
Note: Stacker cover swings
forward and down.
I
I
I
(")
m
en
en
~Note:
\-
S
on microfilmer only.
0
£:
.,~
"0
0
n
(I)
(I)
(I)
0
.,0
310"
en
0
en
c
I
:I:
~
-
i
127·3/4"
493/4"
~-- \--------t- ___ J---"-------'--I- "'''''
.. \-. -57,,~·I~,,·
~.j
__
c
:2
-i
I
I
17"
--1--
i
I±+r15.L4"
~+'I
~+;III
31·1/4"
:::J
T
-u
~r-
~:::':, I ~II
139·1/4"
"0
§I
--
I
--,---r----.-
Til
m
.0
!:.
r
---1-------
"0
w
Q)
(,C)
::0
:J:
N
3890 Document Processor (60 HZ)
3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR (60 HZ)
Details (By Frame)
Frail/£'
Weight
lb
(kg)
Installed Dimensions
FxSxH
inches (mm)
Control Unit I
(hamc 01)
(1 700 x 795 x 1 525)
Control Unit 2
(Frame 06) See Notes 1.12
Airflow
clm
(m 3 /min)
Heat Output
BTU/hr
kVA
(hi)
2,300
(1 050)
800
(23)
11,200
(3 290)
4.1
33-1/2x31-1/4x60 } See
(850 x 795 x 1 525)
Note 3
215
(100)
260
(7.5)
5,200 } See
(1 530) Note 8
1.9 See
Notes 8,9
Feed
(Frame 02)
67x31-1/4x60
}see
(1 700 x 795 x 1 525) Note 4
1,850
(840)
300
(8.5)
15,800
(4640)
5.8 See
Note 9
Document Coding
SF 3551 (Frame 07)
33-5/8 x 10-1/2 x 60
(855 x 265 x 1 525)
290
(} 35)
190
(5.5)
1 708
(510)
0.5
Microfilmer (S F 5111 )
(Frame 03) See Note 11
33-1/2x31-1/4x60 } See
Note 5
(850 x 795 x 1 525)
720
(330)
357
(10.5)
9,300
(2 730)
3.4 See
Note 9
Stacker
(Frame 04)
57 x 30 x 60
} See
(1 450 x 765 x 1 525) Note 6
850
(390)
115
(3.5)
4,600
(1 350)
1.7 See
Note 9
Blower
(Frame 05)
End of Last Stacker
16 x 30 x 52-1/2
(410 x 765 xl 335)
30
(14)
30
(1)
4,100
(} 210)
1.5 See
Note 9
67 x 31-1/4 x 60
} See
Note 2
I
I
See
Note 7
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3890-9
3890 Document Processor (60 HZ)
3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR (60 HZ)
Totals (By Model)
Modd
See NOles II, 12
Weight
Ib (kg) See Note 7
/,ength
inches (mm)
Airflow
cim (m 3 /min)
Heat Output
BTU/hr (W)
kVA
Al
With SF 5111
5,030 (2 265)
5,750 (2610)
208 (5 285)
241-1/2 (6 135)
1,245 (35.5)
1,602 (45.5)
35,800 (10 500)
45,100 (13 220)
13.1
16.5
A2/E2
With SF 5111
5,880 (2 670)
6,600 (2 995)
265 (6735)
298-1/2 (7 585)
1,360 (38.5)
1,717 (49)
40,400 (11 850)
49,700 (14 570)
14.8
18.2
A3/E3
WithSF5111
6,730 (3055)
7,450 (3 380)
322(8180)
355-1/2 (9 030)
1,475 (42)
1,832 (52)
45,100 (13 220)
54,300 (15 920)
16.5
19.9
A4/E4
With SF SIll
7,580 (3440)
8,300 (3 765)
379 (9 630)
412-1/2 (10480)
1,590 (45)
1,947 (55.5)
49,700 (14 570)
59,000 (17 300)
18.2
21.6
A5/E5
With SF 5111
8,430 (3 825)
9,150 (4 155)
436 (11 075)
469-1/2 (11 930)
1,705 (48.5)
2,062 (58.5)
54,300 (15 920)
63,600 (18 650)
19.9
23.3
A6/E6
With SF 5111
9,280(4210)
10,000 (4540)
493 (12525)
526-1/2 (13 375)
1,820 (52)
2,177 (62)
59,000 (17 300)
68,300 (20 020)
21.6
25.0
B1
With SF 5111
5,245 (2 380)
5,965(2710)
241-1/2 (6 135)
275 (6 985)
1,505 (43)
1,862 (53)
41,000 (12 020)
50,200 (14 720)
15.0
18.4
132/1"2
WithSF5111
6,095 (2 765)
6,815 (3095)
298-1/2 (7 585)
332 (8435)
1,620 (46)
1,977 (56)
45,600 (13 370)
54,900 (16 100)
16.7
20.1
B3/F3
WithSF5111
6,945 (3 155)
7,665 (3480)
355-1/2 (9 030)
389 (9 885)
1,735 (50)
2,092 (60)
50,200 (14 720)
59,500 (17 440)
18.4
21.8
B4/F4
With SF SIll
7,795 (3540)
8,515 (3 865)
412-1/2 (10480)
446 (11 330)
1,850 (53.5)
2,207 (63)
54,900 (16 100)
65,000 (19 060)
20.1
23.5
B5/F5
WithSF5111
8,645 (3925)
9,365 (4 250)
469-1/2 (11 930)
503 (12780)
1,965 (56)
2,322 (66)
59,500 (17 440)
68,800 (20 170)
21.8
25.2
B6/F6
With SF 5111
9,495 (4 310)
10,215 (4 635)
526-1/2 (13 375)
560 (14 225)
2,080 (59)
2,437 (69)
65,000 (19 060)
73,400 (21 520)
23.5
26.9
3890-10
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3890 Document Processor (60 HZ)
3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR (60 HZ)
Branch Circuit Requirements
SPECI F ICATIONS
60
Hz
Voltage
Phases'
Ampacity
208
3
100
Dimensions:
240
3
100
Maximum Continuous Load (Amperes) for:
Model Al
Model A2/E2
Model A3/E3
Model A4/E4
Model AS/E5
Model A6/E6
Model Bl
Model B2/F2
Model B3/F3
Model B4/F4
Model BS/FS
Model B6/F6
46
51
56
61
66
70
52
56
61
66
71
75
42
46
51
55
60
64
47
51
55
60
64
68
If SF 5] 11 (microfilmer) is not installed,
subtract these values from Maximum
Continuous Load. See Note 11.
9.S
8.S
If SF 3551 (document coding) is not
installed, subtract these values from
Maximum Continuous Load.
3.S
3.0
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
F
Inches Note 10
(mm) (Note 10)
S
Note 10
(Note 10)
H
60
(1 525)
Service Clearances:
F
Inches Note 10
(mm) (Note 10)
R
Rt
L
Note 10
Note 10 Note 10
(Note 10) (Note 10) (Note 10)
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
65°F-80°F (l8oC-270C)
20%-65%
Floor Requirements:
Floor beneath machine must be level with maximum
variance of 2 in. (55 mm). Maximum machine length
is 637 in. (16 180 mm). Normal raised floor construction providing ±O.lO in. (±2.54 mm) overall
facilitates installation.
R&S, JPSI034H
R&S, JCSI034H
R&S, JRSRI034H
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3890-11
3890 Document Processor (60 HZ)
3890 Document Processor (60 Hz)
Notes:
1. Required for Models BI-B2 and F2-F6 that
have core storage.
2. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for frame 01 are 67 in. x 31-1/4 in x
60-1/4 in. (1 700 mm x 790 mm x 1 530 mm).
Removal of the side covers reduces the width to
29 in. (740 mm). If further reduction in length
is required, see the IBM representative to
request an upending kit. This modifies the
machine to 60 in. x 30-1/4 in. x 71 in. (1 520
mm x 770 mm x 1 800 mm).
3. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for frame 06 are 33-1/2 in. x 31-1/4 in. x
60-1/4 in. (850 mm x 790 mm x 1 530 mm).
Removal of the front and rear covers reduces
the width to 29 in. (740 mm).
4. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for frame 02 are 70-3/4 in. x 31-1/2 in. x
60-1/4 in. (1 800 mm x 800 mm x I 530 mm).
Removal of the rear cover reduces the width to
30-1/4 in. (770 mm). Removal of the lower
front cover and partially raising the top covers
further reduces the width to 29 in. (740 mm).
If further reduction in size is required, see the
IBM representative for specifying an upending
kit. This modifies the machine to 60 in. x
30-1/4 in. x 75-1/2 in. (1 520 mm x 770 mm x
1 920 mm). The side dimension is 39-1/2 in.
(1 000 mm), including 8-1/4 in. (210 mm) for
the shelf. The height dimension is 90 in. (2 290
mm) with the cover above the shelf raised to
the service position.
5. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for frame 03 are 34-1/4 in. x 31-1/4 in. x
60-1/4 in. (870 mm x 790 mm x 1 530 mm).
Removal of the rear covers reduces the width to
30-1/4 in. (770 mm). Removal of the front
covers and partially raising the top cover
further reduces the width to 29 in. (740 mm).
3890-12
The side dimension is 39-1/2 in. (1 000 mm),
including 8-1/4 in. (210 mm) for the shelf. The
height dimension is 91-1/2 in. (2 320 mm) with
the cover above the shelf raised to the service
position.
6. Shipping length for frame 04 is 64 in. (1 630
mm); shipping height is 61-1/2 in. (1 590 mm).
Unless otherwise specified, the end stacker unit
is shipped with frame 05 assembled. Shipping
length is·75 in. (1 910 mm). These units are
shipped separately by request or are automatically shipped separately if upending kits are
specified for frame 01 or frame 02. The
number of stackers varies by model number.
The front dimension for installed stackers is
found by multiplying the length of one stacker,
57 in. (1 450 mm), by the model number. (For
Model A6 or E6, 57 in. [1 450 mm] x 6 =
stacker dimension plus 16 in. [410 mm] for
frame 05).
7. The weight of customer's trays and documents
is not included.
8. Maximum values (Models A6, B6, E6, and F6).
See Totals (By Model) for actual values with or
without SF 5111 (microfilmer) installed. See
Note 11.
9. Powered from control unit 1 (frame 01).
10. See "Plan View Metric Equivalents" on page
3890.2.
11. SF 5111 (microfilmer) is standard on Models
E2-E6 and F2-F6.
12. References to 60-Hz 3890 Models Band F do
not apply if the 3890 has the monolithic storage
device (instead of the core storage device). The
60-Hz 3890 Models Band F with monolithic
storage do not have frame 06, but do have the
physical characteristics of Models A and E,
respectively.
13. Frame 07 is currently available on Models.
AI-A6 and BI-B6 only.
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
~z
~
0
S~
CD
o~
oo~
o
S
cr-CD
CD
0
o _
_f.;,)
£0
-cr8..
CD
cr-~
CD~
~ ~
CD
-CD
p..
~
~~
S;
S
~
~CD
~p.. ~
~
;r
til
CD
=
<
td
s:
til·
--
~
==
~
Z
0
....
-
til
(")
e.
0
D
f;-
~
~
CD
Cot)
CO
CD
0
.......
><
-a
C
0
n
c
3(I)
....::s
.,-a
S
~
0
n
(I)
en
en
~
CD
GJ
:x
tv
.,0
tv
~
0
0
n
=r
c
~
f.;,)
~
Ol
-0
~
~
~
Ol
o
~
:::J
CD
en
"0
CD
o
~
o
~
-+i
o·
:::J
III
Ol
-.
:::J
a.
n
Ol
31-1/4"
:::J
(Q
en
o
=r
"
CD
3
~
o·
III
Co.)
Q)
CD
C
I
...Ii.
Co.)
4 8 -3/4
~
i
~,
19" T "
I
.
1
1
~
~
/
Q:
T
31-3/16"
_ --L--
~'-3/'6"
.....
.... I
VI
VI
]
K
]
1"7"
t ______ ..1!I '--
I
5"
(2X)
.------~--
/'1_'-
~i~:~r~;:~~~orl
j
Co.)
Q)
CD
o
><
130
50"
L ~-~-~~~;::t_m___~=~~:------t---------~::~----t~~::~~~::.~~~-~:':~ - ,~"- =~O~~ "
!
----
---
'I
ICCI--------------------334-3/4"~
Uote: 3890/XP has two stacker
modules. Only one Is shown
because of limited space.
!
-J
Note: Shelf swings out on
mlcrofllmer and Image scanner.
"
"'0
o
o
n
c
3
m
:::J
.,"'0
o
m
(I)
n
(I)
.,o
3890/XP Document Processor
Table of Metric Equivalent
3890/XP Declaration of Noise
Emission Values
Operating
(bel s)
{9.8}
m
(LPA)m
LWAd
Plan View Metric Equivalent
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(db)
Idling
(db)
Operating
(db)
Idling
(db)
{8.9}
79
68
75
67
Notes:
1. The above values are for a machine that has the Microfilm
feature and four stacker modules installed.
2.
{} implies a projected value.
3. The data is preliminary, and subject to change.
LWAd
is the declared sound power emission level for a
production series of machines.
(LPA)m is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels
at the operator position for a production series of machines.
m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound
pressure emission levels at the one-meter positions for a
production series of machines.
All measurements made in accordance with ANSI S12.18, and
reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
3890-14
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Inch
1/2
1
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
3-7/8
5
6
8
8-1/4
15-1/4
16
17
18
22
22-3/16
28-3/4
38
31-3/16
31-1/4
33-1/2
33-5/8
34/1/2
35
48-3/4
58
57
63-1/4
67
138
388
MM
12.7
25
48
58
68
88
98
185
138
158
288
285
388
418
438
468
568
588
738
768
795
795
855
855
888
898
1 265
1 278
1 458
1 618
1 788
3 388
7 655
3890/XP Document Processor
Details (By Frame)
Frame
Heat
Weight Ai rfl ow Output kVA Notes
Kg
m /min
W
(1 b)
(c fm)
(BTU/hr
Dimensions
FxSx H
ImI (inches)
Control Unit 1 61e x 795 x 1 525
7e9
(91)
(63-1/4 x 31-1/4 x 69) (1 559*)
23
(899)
3 159
(19 759 3.9 1
Feed
(92)
1 799 x 795 x 1 525
(67 x 31-1/4 x 6e)
849
(1 859)
7.5
(269)
4 459
8,9
(15 159 5.6 3,5,
9 x 995 x 9
(9 x 37-3/4 x 9)
169
(359)
1e.5
(365)
1 e35
(3 5ge) 1.2
OCR **
Microfilm
(e3)
859 x 795 x 1 525
(33 1/2 x 31-1/4 x 69)
339
(72e)
18.5
(369)
1 898
(6 95e) 2.2 4,8
Scanner
(e8)
858 x 795 x 1 525
(33-1/2 x 31-1/4 x 69)
239
(5B9)
8.8
(399)
3 26e
(13 9B9 3.8 4,8,
Stacker
(94)
1 45e x 765 x 1 699
(57 x 39 x 63)
399
(859)
3.5
(115)
1 35e
(4 699) 1.7 5,6,7
Blower
(B5)
419 x 765 x 649
(16 x 39 x 25-1/4)
69
(149)
1
(39)
1 25e
(4 199) 1.5 6,8
* 1799 lb for 59 Hz machines
** If the feature is installed,
add the appropriate numbers to the feed frame numbers.
Branch Circuit Requirements
Hz
Totals (Modules and Feature)
Modules Weight
Ai rflow
Heat
Output
(i nches)
m3/min
(cfm)
(BTU/hr)
6 695
(269-1/4)
37.5
(1 329)
11 e99
(39 299)
14.4
Micro339
film ** (729)
859
(33-1/2)
1e.5
(369)
1 8ge
(6 95e)
2.2
Scanner
239
**
(599)
859
(33-1/2)
8.8
(399)
3 26e
(13 9Be) 3.8
OCR
**
169
(359)
85e
(33-1/2)
19.5
(365)
1 935
(3 599)
1.2
3
Stkrs
2 779
(6 e99)
8 959
(317-1/4)
41
(1 435)
12 839
(43 899)
16.1
4
Stkrs
3 155
(6 949)
9 599
(374-1/4)
44
(1 559)
14 189
(48 4B9)
17.8
5
Stkrs
3 545
(7 799)
19 945
(431-1/4)
(1 665)
15 529
(53 999)
19.5
6
Stkrs
3 945
(8 64e)
12 395
(488 1/4)
(1 789)
16 889
(57 699)
21.2
and
Feature
Basic
*
kg
(l b)
2 389
(5 259)
Length
.1mI
48
51
Voltage
Phase
Ampaci ty
kVA
Maximum Conti nuous
Load (Amperes)
W
Stackers
2
3
4
5
6
If microfilmer
(SF 51l1) is not
install ed,
subtract "A" from
Maximum Continuous
Load
If scanner is not
installed,
subtract "AN from
Maximum Continuous
Load
* Basic weight includes the control unit, feed, two stackers,
and blower.
For 59 Hz machines, add 159 lbs to the totals.
** If the feature is installed,
add the appropriate numbers to the total numbers.
N/A • Not available at this time.
If OCR is not
installed,
subtract "AN from
Maximum Continuous
Load
5e
69
298 239 229 389 498
3
3
3
3
3
199 199 99 59 59
A
69
65
79
74
79
A
54
59
63
67
72
A
57
61
66
79
75
A
33
36
38
41
43
A
31
33
35
38
49
9.5 8.5 8.9 5.2 4.8
1l.9 19.9 19.4 6.B 5.6
3.9 2.7 2.8 1.6 1.5
* Plug
Russell & Stoll, JPS1934H
* Connector
Russell & Stoll, JCSIB34H
* Receptacle
Russell & Stoll, JRSR1934H
Power Cord Styl e
F2
* 69 Hz only.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3890-15
3890/XP Document Processor
Specifications
Dimensions:
See "Details (By Frame)" and Note 11.
Service Clearances:
See "Totals (Modules and Feature)" and Note 11.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature 15°C - 27°C (60 0P-800P)
ReI Humidity 200/0-650/0
Floor Requirements:
The floor beneath the machine must be level with a
maximum variance of 55 mm (2 in.). The
maximum machine length is 13 255 mm (521-3/4
in.). Normal raised floor construction providing
±2.54 mm (±0.10 in.) overall facilitates installation.
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for frame 01 are 1 610 mm x 795 mm x 1
525 mm (63-1/4 in. x 31-1/4 x 60 in.).
Removal of the side covers and related hardware, such as hinge assemblies and mounting
brackets, reduces the width to 740 mm (29 in.).
If further reduction in length is required,
contact an IBM representative to request an
upending kit. This kit modifies the machine to
1 525 mm x 770 m.m x 1 805 mm (60 in. x
30-1/4 in. x 71 in.).
4. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for frames 03 and 08 are 870 mm x 790
mm x 1 530 mm (34-1/4 in. x 31-1/4 in. x
60-1/4 in.). Removal of the lower front cover
and related hardware and partially raising the
top cover further reduces the width to 735 mm
(29 in.).
The side dimension is 1 000 m.m (39-1/2 in.),
including 220mm (8-3/4 in.) for the shelf.
5. The height dimension is 2 340 mm (92 in.)
with the cover above the shelf raised to the
service position.
6. Shipping length for frame 04 is 1 625 mm (64
in.); shipping height is 1 560 mm (61-1/2 in.).
Unless otherwise specified, the end stacker unit
is shipped with frame 05 assembled. The shipping length is 1 905 mm (75 in.).
These units are shipped separately by request
or are automatically shipped separately if
upending kits are specified for frame 01 or
frame 02.
The number of stacker modules to be used is
identified when feature code SF 3022 is
selected. The front dimension for installed
stackers is found by multiplying the length of
one stacker, 1 450 mm (57 in.), by the number
of stackers selected and adding it to the basic
dimension. That is:
Four additional stackers are selected,
2. Add 485 mm (19 in.) to the width(S) when the
shelf is installed.
4'x 1450 mm (57 in.) = 5 795 mm (228 in.)
Basic dimension = 2 895 mm (114 in.).
3. Unless otherwise specified, the shipping dimensions for frame 02 are 1 800 mm x 800 mm x 1
530 mm (70-3/4 in. x 31-1/2 in. x 60-1/4 in.).
Removal of the rear cover and related hardware
reduces the width to 770 mm (30-1/4 in.).
Removal of the lower front cover and partially
raising the top covers further reduces the width
to 735 mm (29 in.). If further reduction in
length is required, contact an IBM representative to request an upending kit. This kit
modifies the machine to 1 525 mm x 770 mm x
1 815 mm (60 in. x 30-1/4 in.x 71-1/2 in.).
Total = 8 690 mm (342 in.).
3890-16
7. The weight of the trays and documents
belonging to the customer is not included.
8. Powered from control unit 1 (frame 01).
9. Add 210 mm (8-1/4 in.) to the width (S) when
the shelf is installed.
10. Height is 1 355 mm (52-1/2 in.) from the floor.
11. See "Inch-to-Millimeter Conversion Table" in
Appendix E.
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3890/XP Document Processor
3890 Document Processor (All Models) Cabling Schematic
References to 3890 Models B and F (60 Hz) do not apply if the 3890 has monolithic storage (instead of core
storage). The 3890 Models B and F (60 Hz) with monolithic storage do not have frame 06, but do have the
physical characteristics of Models A and E, respectively.
Note: Cable group 1178 should be ordered only when the customer wants to enable power sequence and
control.
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Standard Channel
Power Sequence
and Control
Conn
ID
Conn
ID
: : =1 :
t --- --- j
21-
Channel
From 389B
Max Length
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of Conn
Cables ID
Std
B185
2
1
61. a (2aB)
All
Opt
1178
1
3
45.7 (lSS)
All
m
(ft)
Model
To 389B
Conn
ID
Model
2
All
60Hz
When a 3890 is installed on a raised floor, cables enter the machine through the cable entry in the frrst
module to the right of frame 01. That is:
•
•
•
•
Frame
Frame
Frame
Frame
02 for
06 for
02 for
02 for
Models A and E
Models B, C, D, and F
Models B and F with monolithic storage
3890/XP
When a 3890 is installed on a nonraised floor, cables must be routed under frame 01 and exit at the left.end
of the machine, or routed under frames 06, 02, and 03 (if installed) and must exit under the frrst stacker.
The sequence and control (EPO) cable enters the machine through frame 02 or through frame 06 when
frame 06 is installed.
50Hz
When a 3890 Model A through F is installed on a raised floor, all cables enter the machine through the cable
entry in frame 06.
Note: The 3890/XP cables enter through the cable entry in frame 02.
When a 3890 is installed on a nonraised floor, cables must be routed under frame 01 and exit at the left end
of the machine, or routed under frames 06, 02, and 03 (if installed) and must exit under the first stacker.
The sequence and control (EPO) cable enters the machine through frame 02 or through frame 06 when
frame 06 is installed.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3890-17
3890/XP Document Processor
This page is intentionally left blank.
3890-18
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
389X Optical Character Processor Unit (OCP)
389X Optical Character Processor Unit (OCP)
Figure 1. IBM 389X Optical Character Processor Unit (OCP)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
389X-1
389X Optical Character Processor Unit (OCP)
Plan View (Not to Scale)-English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Plan View
635
~5)
760
~ru
~-610~
I
~
r--(24)~
203
(8)
T
76
(3)
127
(5)
915
(36)
921
(36.25)
650
I
(25.5)
+
~'r-+-~
50~
(2)
152
(6)
~3~)-11
26
(1.125)
I~
-----+j I
750
(29.5)
1
!
L
....... __•..........................•......;
tI
--L--
1650
(65)
Service
Clearance
FRONT
Figure 2. Plan View of the 389X Optical Character Processor Unit
Note: If two or more racks are install as a group (side by side), the side service clearance is required for the
end racks only.
389X·2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
389X Optical Character Processor Unit (OCP)
389X Declaration of Noise Emission Values
LWAd
m
(LPA)m
Operating
(db)
Idling
(db)
Operating
(db)
Idling
(db)
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
6.4*
6.4*
N/A
N/A
45*
45*
5.7**
5.7**
N/A
N/A
42**
42**
Notes:
LWAd
is the declared sound power emission level for a
production series of machines.
(LPA)m is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels
at the operator position for a production series of machines.
~LpA~
is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure
emission levels at the one-meter positions for a
production series of machines.
*
= 68
**
= 58 Hz machine.
N/A
=
Hz machine.
Not applicable.
All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and
reported in conformance with ISO 7574/4.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
389X-3
389X Optical Character Processor Unit (OCP)
Physical Characteristics
Weight
250 kg (550 1b)
Dimensions
mm
(i n)
Width
Service Clearance
mm
(i n)
Front
1650
(65)
650
(25-1/2)
Depth
Height
921
1588
(62)
(36-1/4)
Rear
760
(30)
Right* Left*
915
915
(36)
(36)
* If two or more racks are installed as a group (side
by side), the side service clearance is required for
the end racks only.
Heat Output
Power Requirements
820 W (2800 BTU Ihr) maximum
Low Voltage Input ac
Airflow
The rack does not have a fan; the system unit has
its own fan. Air flows from the front of the system
unit to the back at 200 CFM, with the air exiting
out of the top and bottom of the rear of the rack
frame.
Nominal: 208-240 V (one phase, 50 or 60 HZ)
Minimum: 180 V
Maximum: 254 V
AC Loads: 1.0 kVA
4.6 A Maximum
High Voltage Input ac
Nominal: 380-415 V (three phase, 50 HZ)
Minimum: 333 V
Maximum: 448 V
2.3 A Maximum
AC Loads (50 HZ): 1.0 kVA
389X-4
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
389X Optical Character Processor Unit (OCP)
Plug Types
Power Cord
Standard 4.27 mm (14 ft)
Plug Type 60 HZ (See note 1):
Russell & Stoll 3750
Service Rating:
Volts
220/250
Amps
30
Phase
1
Wires
3
Note: For 60 HZ machines, an optional 1.83 mm
(6 ft) power cord is available.
Patch Cable
Patch cable of the appropriate length to connect
the 389X to the token-ring LAN. See the IBM
Cabling System Catalog GS70-2040-2.
Plug Type 50 HZ (See note 2)
Environment (Operating)
Connector Type (See Note 1)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Russell & Stoll 3933
16°C - 32°C (60°F - 90°F)
80/0 - 80%
Receptacle Type (See Note 1)
Shipping Dimensions
Russell & Stoll 3753
Front
Notes:
1. 60 HZ machines only. 50 HZ machines use a
three round pin connector that is rated at 5
kVA.
743 mm
(29.25 in)
Side
Height
1048 mm
1600 mm
(41.25 in)
(63 in)
2. With this plug installed, the 4.4/5 kVA three
phase plug power is not balanced. The plug
uses phases one and two of the three incoming
phases.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
389X-S
389X Optical Character Processor Unit (OCP)
This page is intentionally left blank.
389X-6
Input/output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3891/XP Document· Processor
3891/XP Document Processor
Plan View with OCR (Not .to Scale): English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7131.
5545
(218-1/2)
1065
685
685
+
Console
+
OCR
2210
(27)-......---- (87) - - - - . . . . .
(42) -1--- (27)
++
fFeed
+
Micro-
+ + fllmer +I-----I.r------T'---.IT--I
~~~--~-~---~--~-~----~
Rack
915
(36)
Front
I
--t--l '----_______,
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3891-1
3891/XP Document Processor
Details (By Frame)
Frame
Consol e
Feed
OCR
Dimensions
Fx Sx H
II1II (1 nches)
Heat
Weight Airflow Output kVA Notes
Kg
II /m1n
W
(lb)
(cfll) (BTU/hr
1 865 x 618 x 1 B48
(42 x 24 x 41)
98
(288)
1.8
(48)
988 x 768 x 1 715
(35-1/2 x 38 x 67-1/2)
288
(615)
19.5
(688)
388
(1 828)
.2
3 168
(18 888 7.3
1
4
685 x 768 x 1 715
(27 x 38 x 67-1/2)
268
(598)
18.5
(365)
1 835
(3 588) 1.2
M1 crofl1l1
685 x 768 x 1 715
(27 x 38 x 67-1/2)
258
(558)
2
(68)
1 648
(5 688) 1.1 2, 5
Stacker
685 x 585 x 1 525
(27 x 23 x 68)
185
(23a)
3.8
(188)
428
(1 458) I.e
3
(2,4,6)
685 x 585 x 1 525
(27 x 23 x 68)
95
(218)
3.8
(188)
428
(1 458) 1.8
3
Auxl11ary
Pocket
155 x 585 x 1 525
(6 x 23 x 68)
7
(16)
8
8
8
685 x 432 x 585
(27 x 17 x 23)
24
(54)
8
8
8
(1,3,5)
Stacker
One Tray
Rack
Notes:
1. When the feed module upper front cover Is opened, add
75 mm (3 In.) to H.
2. When the mlcrofllmor front cover Is opened, add
70 mm (2-3/4 In.) to H.
Totals (Modules and Feature)
3. When the stacker front cover Is opened, add
4. If the feature Is Installed,
add the appropriate numbers to the total numbers.
Modules Weight Length
kg
and
l1l1I
Feature (lb)
(in. )
5. The maximum microfilm values are shown for
Basic
45 mm (1-3/4 In.) to H.
weight, airflow, heat output, and kVA
625
3 498
(1 375) (137-1/2)
Heat
Airflow Output
ml/mi n W
(cfm) (BTU/hr) kVA
26.5
(928)
4 3a8
(14 78a)
5.4
Microf1lmer*
258
(558)
685
(27)
2
(68)
OCR *
268
(598)
685
(27)
18.5
(365)
1 835
(3 5e8)
1.2
754
4 188
29.5
(1 659) (164-1/2) (1 828)
4 728
(16 158)
5.9
873
4 868
32.5
(1 921) (191-1/2) (1 128)
5 148 6.4
(17 688)
5 558
35.5
1 e82
(2 284) (218-1/2) (1 228)
5 568
(19 858)
7.8
1 121
6 235
38.5
(2 466) (245-1/2) (1 328)
5 988
(28 588)
7.6
3
Stkrs
4
Stkrs
5
Stkrs
6
Stkrs
1 648 n.n
(5 688)
The basi c processor 1ncl udes the consol e, feed modul e,
2 stackers, 2 tray racks and auxiliary pocket. The
console includes the keyboard, display, and system unit.
The basic length includes the feed module, 2 stackers,
and auxiliary pocket. Add console length if the console
is located aga1 nst the end of the machi ne. Stackers wei ght
includes the tray racks.
Note:
* If the feature is installed,
add the appropriate numbers to the total numbers.
3891-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3891/XP Document Processor
Power Requirements (kVA) See "Totals {Modules
Acoustics and Noise-Emission Levels
and Feature)."
Specifications: Dimensions: See "Details {By
Frame)."
For definitions, see "Acoustics'" in Chapter 3 of
the IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
Service Clearances: 915 mm (36 in.) at the front
and rear.
Plug
Plug Type:
Russellstoll, JP7328-78
Service Rating:
Volts
208
Amperes
60
Phases
3
Wires
4
Receptacle Receptacle Type:
Russellstoll,
JR7428-78
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
< LpA>m
(LpA)m
LwAd
Operatlng
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operatlng
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
Operatlng
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
9.1
7.6
79
55
73
57
Note: The above values are for a machine that
has the microfilmer feature and 3 stacker
modules installed.
Floor Requirements: The floor below the
machine must be level with a maximum variance
of 55 mm (2 in.). Maximum machine length is 13
255 mm (521-3/4 in.). Normal raised floor construction providing ±2.54 mm (±0.10 in.) overall
facilitates installation.
15°C - 27°C (60°F - 80°F)
20% - 80%
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3891-3
3891/XP Document Processor
This page is intentionally left blank.
3891-4
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3892 Document Processor
Plan View (Not to Scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7132.
..
...
3 795
(149-1/2)
900 ,-.~685 .. _
(35-1/2)
(27)
~
..
2 210
(87)
50
1-- (2)
$1
I
,
280
(11)
t
+
765
(30)
t
455
(18)
-t
t 3892
+
Feed
-/)
Front
+
+
Ef
Micro-
+ +fllmer +
9\5
(36)
~L-.
Stacker
Stocker
Stacker
Rack
Rack
Rack
155
(6)
--1
12 590
--t (101)
I~
585
~
I__(17)915
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- - '
(36)
1
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3892-1
3892 Document Processor
Details (By Frame)
Frame
Dimensions
Fx Sx H
mm (in.)
Heat
Wei ght Airflow Output
kg
'Ill/min W
(lb)
(cfm)
(BTU/hr) kVA Notes
Feed
9aa x 765 x 1 715
3aa
(35-1/2 x 3a x 67-1/2) (66a)
8.5
(3aa)
1 73a 2.8
(5 9aa)
1
H1crofl1mer
685 x 765 x 1 525
(27 x 39 x 6a)
2aa
(449)
a
(a)
3aa 9.5
(1 a2a)
2
Stacker
685 x 585 x 1 525
(27 x 23 x 69)
laS
(23a)
3.5
(l1a)
169 9.3 3
(55a)
685 x 585 x 1 525
(27 x 23 x 69)
95
(21a)
3.5
(l1a)
138 9.2 3
(45a)
Aux111ary 155 x 585 x 1 525
Pocket
(6 x 23 x 6a)
7
(16)
a
(a)
9
(a)
a
One Tray 685 432 x 585
Rack
(27 x 17 x 23)
24
(54)
a
(a)
a
(a)
a
(1,3,5)
Stacker
(2,4,6)
a
Notes:
1. When the feed module upper front cover is opened, add
70 mm (2-3/4 In.) to H.
2. When the mlcrofllmer front cover Is opened, add
75 mm (3 In.) to H.
3. When the stacker front cover is opened, add
44 mm (1-3/4 In.) to H.
Totals (Modules and Feature)
Modules Wei ght Length
kg
and
II1II
(1 n.)
Feature (1b)
Basic
415
(91a)
Microfl1mer*
2aa
(44a)
2
Stkrs
3
Stkrs
4
Stkrs
5
Stkrs
6
Stkrs
1 Tray
Rack -
Heat
Airflow Output
Ill/min W
(cfll)
(BTU/hr) kVA
1 74a
37.5
(68-1/2) (1 32a)
685
(27)
a
(a)
2 959
(7 a9a) 3.1
3aa
(1 a2a)
9.5
41
2 425
(95-1/2) (1 435)
2 93a 3.3
(6 99a)
615
3 11a
41
(1 358) (122-1/2) (1 435)
2 198 3.6
(7 45a)
3 795
44
718
(1 56a) (149-1/2) (1 558)
2 329 3.8
(7 9aa)
4 48a
815
48
(1 79a) (176-1/2) (1 665)
248a 4.1
(8 45a)
51
91a
5 17a
(2 aaa) (2a3-1/2) (1 78a)
2 61a 4.3
(8 9aa)
51a
(1 12a)
24
(54)
N/A
a
a
a
Notes:
1. The basic processor Includes the feed module,
ona stacker, and auxiliary pocket.
2. Feed Includes front and rear Ink Jet and endorser.
3892-2
3.
"110
4.
M
Add these numbers to totals if Installed.
Add this weight for each tray rack Installed.
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Acoustics and Noise-Emission Levels
Power Requirements (kVA)
(LpA)m
See IITotals (Modules and Feature)"
LwAd
m
Operatlng
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operatlng
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
Operatlng
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
8.7
7.2
77
57
70
55
For definitions, see IIAcoustics" in Chapter 3 of
the IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
Note: The above values are for a machine that
has the mi,crofilmer feature and one stacker
module installed. Data is preliminary and
subject to change.
Plug
Plug Type:
Russellstoll, JPS334H
Service Rating:
Volts
208
Amperes
30
Phases
3
Wires
4
Receptacle
Receptacle Type:
Russellstoll, JRS334H
Power Cord
Standard 4.3 m (14 tt)
Style B1 30 Amps
Specifications
Dimensions:: See IIDetaiis (By Frame)"
Service Clearances:: 915 mm (36 in.) at the
front and rear.
Environment, Operating::
Temperature
Rei Humidity
15°C-27°C (60°F-80°F)
20%-800/0
Floor Requirements:: The floor beneath the
machine must be level with a maximum variance
of 55 mm (2 in.). Maximum machine length is 13
255 mm (521-3/4 in.). Normal raised floor construction providing
±2.54 mm (±O.10 in.) overall facilitates installation.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3892-3
3892/XP Document Processor
Plan View with OCR (Not to Scale) and Mlcrofllmer
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7132.
5545
(218-1/2)
1065
685
68S
2210
(27)--------- (87)
(42) -1--- (27)
---~
----------------------1 ~
I
I
I
..........-.......-- 1----I!.....-----I~--_:_r_:-.I!.....--~~--+":"'T""---r:T----r:"1r-------r::T"""I
~
Stocker I
Console
-f---.,.4=SS,....----u--....
Rack
Rack
915
(36)
(18)
I
~-------~.-~~-------F'ront
Figure 1. 3892/XP Document Processor Plan View
3892-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
1 2590
---J(101)
585
(23)
I
Feed
---1--------- + OCR + +
I ,,/
915
(36)
Stocker
Rack
1&i1
~
1 432
r
I
(17)
915
(3.6)
Plan View with Encoder, Mlcrofllmer (Not to Scale), and Scanner
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7132.
7 075
----------------(278.5)---------------1--.1
762
(30)
Jl
(3:~5)
~~~
~~~) I
+
+
--1-2 590
r-:~==:_;t_I+:-'--__:tl+-----+I+-+H:--~r-'I-1H-__m
(101)
+
I e "
""10
(24)
jConsole
3B92/XP
~e
6
t
&1~
n
,
-
I
-'---
-------4+
....
1
:
Feed
1 ____ )
455
- (18)
++
++
+
Micro-
Power Encoder
+
ITt
~
Scanner
+ +fllmerj- +
Stacker
~
IH-lI
m
m
II~ [283~
StackerHi Stacker Htici:
I
II
I
I
.-1-
Rack Rack ~::k--l!!.f:
g!s
(36)
(6)
I
I
__~F~r~on~t___~.~____________________~
~------~I.
915
(36)
1_ _ _ _ _. _ - -
I
Figure 2. 3892/XP Document Processor and Encoder, Microfilmer, and Scanner Plan View
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3892-5
3892/XP Document Processor
Details (By Frame)
Dimensions
Fx Sx H
I11III (1 n.)
Heat
Weight Airflow Output
kg
JIll/min W
(1 b) (cfll) (BTU/hr) kVA Notes
Console
1 865 x 618 x 1 848
(42 x 24 x 41)
98
(288)
1.8
(48)
388 8.2
(1 826)
Feed
986 x 765 x 1 715
348
(35-1/2 x 36 x 67-1/2) (758)
19.5
(688)
1 898 3.6
(6 458)
1
OCR
685
(27
18.5
(365)
1 835 1.2
(3 586)
5
Encoder
1 525 x 766 x 1 715
(66 x 38 x 67-1/2)
2 366 2.9
(7 858)
2
Hi crofl1J11er
685
(27
x 765 x 1 715
x 36 x 67-1/2)
258
(558)
2
(66)
1 646 1.1
(5 668)
3, 6
Scanner
685
(27
x 765 x 1 715
x 38 x 67-1/2)
348
(758)
8.8
(399)
2 466 2.8
(8 299)
7, 8
Stacker
685
(27
x 585 x 1 525
x 23 x 6a)
185
(238)
3.5
(l1a)
169 9.7
(55a)
4
685
(27
x 585 x 1 525
x 23 x 6a)
95
(218)
3.5
(l1a)
13a 8.7
(45a)
4
Auxiliary 155 x 585 x 1 525
Pocket
(6 x 23 x 68)
7
(16)
a
(6)
6
(a)
8
One Tray 685 432 x 585
(27 x 17 x 23)
Rack
24
(54)
8
(a)
a
(a)
8
Frame
(1,3,5)
Stacker
(2,4,6)
x 765 x 1 715
x 38 x 67-1/2)
268
(598)
396
(866)
17
(686)
Totals (Modules and Featu~e)
Hodu1 es Weight Length
kg
and
mil
Feature (lb)
(in. )
Basi c
Encoder
545
2 816
(1 2aa) (118-1/2)
Heat
Airflow Output
ml/m1n W
(cfm) (BTU/hr) kVA
24.6
(838)
2 356 3.9
(8 a29)
39a
(86a)
1 525
(68)
17
(6aa)
2 3a6
(7 85a)
2.9
Hicrofl1mer lt
25a
(556)
685
(27)
2
(66)
816
(2 756)
1.3
1. When the feed module upper front cover Is opened, add
75 mm (3 In.) to H.
OCR *
268
(598)
685
(27)
16.5
(365)
1 835
(3 59a)
1.2
2. When the encoder front cover Is opened, add
590 mm (23 114 In.) to H.
Scanner
346
(758)
685
(27)
8.8
(388)
2 4a8
(8 288)
2.8
64a
3 498
(1 418) (137-1/2)
27.5
(948)
2 489
(8 479)
4.6
31.9
745
4 186
(1 648) (164-1/2) (1 858)
2 649
(9 828)
5.3
848
4 866
34.5
(1 858) (191-1/2) (1 168)
2 778
(9 478)
6.8
945
5 558
38.6
(2 a8a) (218-1/2) (1 276)
2 93a
(la 82a)
6.7
1 84a
6 235
41.5
(2 29a) (245-1/2) (1 38a)
3 86a
(1a 478)
7.4
a
8
Notes:
3. When the mlcrofllmer front cover Is opened, add
70 mm (2-3/4 In.) to H.
6
*
..
*
2
4. When the stacker front cover Is opened, add
44 mm (1-3/4 In.) to H.
Stkrs
5. If the feature Is Installed,
add the appropriate numbers to the total numbers.
3
6. The maxImum mIcrofilm values are shown for
weIght, aIrflow, heat ou1put, and kVA.
7. When the scanner front cover Is open,
add 70 mm (23/4 In.) to H.
8. The maximum scanner values are shown for weIght,
aIrflow, heat output, and kVA.
Stkrs
4
Stkrs
5
Stkrs
6
Stkrs
1 Tray
Rack *
24
(54)
N/A
8
The basic processor includes the feed module, console,
one stacker, and auxiliary pocket. The console includes
the keyboard, display, and syste. unit. The basic
length includes the feed module, one stacker, and
auxiliary pocket. Add console length if the console is
located against the end of the machine.
Note:
* If the feature is installed,
add the appropriate numbers to the total numbers.
** Scanner has its own 1inecord.
3892-6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Acoustics and Noise-Emission Levels
(!-PA)m
!.wAd
Power Requirements with Power
Encoder (kVA)
m
Operatlng
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operatlng
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
Operatlng
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
8.7
7.2
77
57
70
55
See IITotals (Modules and Feature)" on
page 3892-6
Plug
For definition's, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
the IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
Note: The above values are for a machine that
has the microfilmer feature and one stacker
module installed. Data is preliminary and
subject to change.
Plug Type:
Service Rating
Volts
208
Amps
60
Phase
3
Wires
4
Russellstoll 7328-78
Receptacle
Power Requirements without Power
Encoder (kVA)
Receptacle Type:
See IITotals (Modules and Feature)" on
page 3892-6
Additional Power Requirements with
Scanner
Plug
Note: Scanner requires a separate receptacle,
see page 3892-8.
Plug Type:
Russellstoll, JPS334H
Service Rating:
Volts
208
Amperes
30
Phases
3
Wires
4
Input ac:
Nominal: 208 V
10 A maximum
AC Loads (60 Hz):
Receptacle
Receptacle Type:
Russellstoll 7428-78
Russellstoll, JRS334H
Power Cord
Standard 4.3 m (14 tt)
Style 81 30 Amp
E4 - 60 Amp with power encoder
2.8 kVA
Plugs'
Plug Type:
Service Rating
Volts
208
Amps
14
Phase
3
Wires
4
Russellstoll 3730
Dual 115 V I single phase receptacle
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and cabling Schematics
3892-7
Receptacle (for Scanner ICP)
Service Clearances:: 915 mm (36 in.) at the
front and rear.
Russellstoll 3744
Environment, Operating::
Receptacle (for Scanner ISM)
Russellstoll 3744
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Power Cord Style
Floor Requirements:: The floor beneath the
Standard 4.27 m (14 tt); Optional 1.83 m (6 tt)
Specifications
Dimensions:: See "Details (By Frame)" on
machine must be level with a maximum variance
of 55 mm (2 in.). Maximum machine length is 13
255 mm (521-3/4 in.). Normal raised floor construction providing
±2.54 mm (±0.10 in.) overall facilitates installation.
page 3892-6
3892-8
15°C-27°C (60°F-80°F)
20%-80%
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3895 Document Reader/Inscriber (60 HZ)
3895 DOCUMENT READER/INSCRIBER (60 HZ)
PLAN VIEW (WITHOUT MICROFILMING FEATURE, SF 5110), English Scale: 1/4 in.
=
1 ft
:------701l2.~~~lri--,---' ':/4~--l'~11
I
,
II P~:;;,s)
(4
IIII
------
r :1:1'---
14'
(2 Places)
32"
I
-38-95
20"
+
I
1"
+
+
5·1/2"
Cover)
0
7·1/8"
L
24"
I
"
''''''~:I
---I J J60
t---+--l..l.--6"-tt:--@--'---~--'--+
-@--'--4'~E:& 3~"
ri
20-1/2"
45"
1·112"
12 Places)
l/ '
INote 2)
INote 1)
~32"-.f~
42"
j
FwOl
L ______________ ~----------l
PLAN VIEW (WITH MICROFILMING FEATURE, SF 5110), English Scale: 1/4 in.
1-----7:"-~-f-4611:~.,114. 'liTII
I
45"
(2 Places)
I
25"
I
---r-
"-::---'1
I
60"
X"
(2 Places)
I
I
1/I
I
+
32"
,
"
t-32~
+.+
+
.., 6"tt
20"~
5·1/2"
+
2
+
L
24
I
~
1"7
(5 PlaCes)20.'1I2"
I
= 1 ft
7·1/8"
@)'
3895
+
+
@
L
+
8"
~
tf.9·~
14"
+
;~l~;:~es)
+
1"
+
4
+
@)
32"
+
INote2)
INote 1)
________~O~
42"
_________
l~
Notes:
1. Handles on covers are not removable.
Covers can be raised for clearance.
2. Except for the two fixed casters on the
right end of frame 02, all casters have a
5/8" vertical adjustment.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3895-1
3895 Document Readerllnscriber (60 HZ)
3895 DOCUMENT READER/INSCRIBER (60 HZ)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions: *
Front
Inches
(cm)
Side
**
Height
**
(**)
60***
(153***)
(**)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right
Left
Inches
(cm)
42
(107)
60
(152)
32
(81)
32
(81)
Weight:
3,900 lb (I 780 kg)
4,700 Ib (2 ISO kg)t
Heat Output: 33,500 BTU/hr (8450 kcal/hr)
37,500 BTU/hr (9 500 kcal/hr)t
Airflow:
1,850 cfm (53 m 3fmin)
2,250 cfm (63 m3/min)t
Power Requirements:
kVA
12.5 (14.3 with microfilming
feature)
Branch Circuit Amperes 60
3
Phases
Plug
R&S, SC7328
Connector
R&S, SC7428
Receptacle
R&S, SC7324
Power Cord Length
14 feet (4.3 m)
Environment, Operating:
60°F-85°F (16 oC-30oC)
Temperature
ReI Humidity
20%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
73°F (23°C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
50°F-110°F (10oC-430C) :
Temperature
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
* Dimensions shown on plan view are with covers.
If further reduction in shipping size is required, request the IBM rep'resentative to
specify an upending kit. This reduces the upended dimensions
(without covers) to:
Front
59"
(I50 em)
74"
(188 em)
Frame 02
29-1/2"
(75 em)
59"
(150 em)
75"
(191 em).
raised is 81 inches (206 cm) above floor level.
t With microfilming feature.
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual~Physical Planning
Height
29-1/2 "
(75 em)
** See plan view.
*** Top cover when
3895-2
Side
Frame 01
3895 Document Reader/Inscriber (60 HZ)
3895 DOCUMENT READER/INSCRIBER CABLING SCHEMATIC (60 HZ)
1------1~~
700 or 701
I-------,l~.
746
3895
Group
No.
700
701
746
No. of
Cables
2
2
2
From
To
Max
Length (ft)
3895
3895
3895
Multiplexer Channel
Control Unit
Selector or Block-Multiplexer Channel
200
200
200
Notes
Notes:
1. Total cable length of 200 feet (unless modified by general control-to-channel cabling schematic)
available to attach up to eight control units. (See IBM System/370 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GC22-7004.) Cables are attached through cable entry/exit 1.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3895-3
3895 Document Reader/Inscriber (60 HZ)
This page is intentionally left blank.
3895-4
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3896 Tape-Document Converter (60 HZ)
3896 TAPE-DOCUMENT CONVERTER (60 HZ)
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
25"
1
F--~-
1
I
I
H
35"
8 1/2
(2
\:---L
+-l
-t-:---~-J
. --,-"
25"
+
I
5·1/2"
lL_
k23"
38"
Height
42
(107)
25
(64)
47
(119)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right
Left
Inches
(cm)
30*
(76*)
30*
(76*)
30
(76)
23
(58)
Weight:
900 Ib (410 kg)
I
-~-~
+
35"
Side
I
I
I
(2 Places)
t
CE
38"
Inches
(cm)
Front
Heat Output:**
Airflow:
7,000 BTU/hr (1 800 kcal/hr)
200 cfm (6 m 3 /min)
30,,---1
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phase
Branch Circuit Amperes***
Plug t
Receptaclett
Power Cord Length
4.3
1
30
NEMA Type 14-30 P
NEMA Type 14-30 R
10 feet (3 m)
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-85°F (16 oC-30oC)
ReI H umidi ty
20%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
73°F (23°C)
Notes:
* Covers can be removed for servicing.
** Based on 60% duty cycle. For continuous operation,
heat outpu tis 13,000 BTU/hr (3 300 kcal/hr).
*** The 3896 should be the only load connected to the
branch circuit.
t With both neutral and equipment ground.
tt Receptacles:
Hubbe19430
General Electric 4193-1 (surface)
General Electric 4193-3 (flush)
or equivalent
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3896-1
3896 Tape-Document Converter (60 HZ)
This page is intentionally left blank.
3896-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3897 Image Capture Processor
3897 Image Capture Processor
Figure 3. IBM 3897 Image Capture Processor
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3897-1
Plan View
Plan View (Not to Scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
--
...-...-...
f
......, ...
I
725
(28-1/2)
620
(24-1/2)
(2X)
140
··1
+
775
(30-1/2)
(5-1/2)-1
2 170
(85-1/2)
. 565
(22-1/4)
(2X)
670
-
1
'.-/'/
_ _ _ _ _--'...... (26-1/4)
Front
1 260
~--(49-3/4)
1 580
1e------(62-1/4)-------..
(ref)
Noie:
Shaded clearance denoies aIr space requIred
Figure 4. Plan View of Image Capture Processor
Notes:
1. The customer is to provide the stand and the
power receptacle for the 8514 Display.
2. If the ICP and the document processor
cannot be installed in the same room, an
installation review for serviceability is
required.
3897-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3897 Cable Overview
38071CP
(Front)
3800/XP
m
J
~
Control
Unit
t8J
3892/XP
MicroFilm
Module
Feed
Module
Image
~
Module
(3897)
(1-8)
•I
-~
~
Console
Stacker
Modules
~ Scanner
Feed
Module
Power Encoder
MicroFilm
Module
~
Image
Scanner
Module
Stacker
Stacker
Stacker
Figure 5. Cable Connections 3897 to 389XIXP
• There are two lengths of cables shipped with
the 3897, a 12.2 m (40 tt) specify code
number 9040 or a 30.5 m (100 tt) specify code
number 9100.
Cable
name
To
From
Basic
Quantlty
Full
Feature
Quantity
Image
Scanner
A
0
5
10
Image
Tracking
A
0
Image
Communication
(HSA)
A
C
• Channel cables
Connect from the host channel to A for the
3897 and to C for the 3890/XP.
Chapter 1. Machine Speclncatlons and cabling Schematics
3897-3
3897 Image Capture Processor
Channel Cabling Schematic
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Conn
ID
Std
0185
1
2
3
4
Conn
ID
Figure 6. 3897 Channel Cable Schematic
Note: The maximum length of channel cable
between the 3897 and the host computer is 122
m (400 ft).
3897-4
Input/output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Physical Characteristics
Specifications
Dlmenslons:
Front
Side
Height
mm
1 250
780
1 580
(in.)
(49-%)
(30-%)
(62)
Service
Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
660
740
-
(in.)
(26)
(29)
-
Weight
Acoustics and Noise-Emission Levels
322 kg (700 lb.)
Heat Output
LwAd
(LpA)m
< LpA>m
Operatl gldllng
(bels)
(bels)
Operatl gldllng
(dB)
(dB)
Operatl gldllng
(dB)
(dB)
7.5
7.5
N/A
N/A
57
57
4000 W (13,652 BTU/hr) maximum
Airiiow
11.5 ml/min (400 cfm)
Power Requirements
For definitions, see" Acoustics n in Chapter 3 of
the IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
Note: The above values are for a machine that
has the microfilmer feature and one stacker
module installed. Data is preliminary and
subject to change.
Input ae: (60 Hz)
Nominal: 208/240 V (Model 3 is 208 V only)
10 A maximum
AC Loads: (60 Hz)
4.2 kVA
Input ae: (50 Hz)
Nominal: 380 V
Nominal: 415 V
6 A maximum
Plugs
Plug Type:
Russellstoll 3730
Service Rating
Volts
208/240 (Model 3 is 208V only)
Amps
15
Phase
3
Wires
4
Dual 115 V 1 single phase receptacle
Receptacle
Russellstoll 3744
Power Cord Style
AC Loads: (50 Hz)
Standard 4.27 m (14 tt); Optional 1.83 m (6 tt)
4 kVA
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3897-5
Environment (Operating)
Shipping Dimensions
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Front
1450 mm
(57 in)
15°C - 27°C (60°F - 80°F)
200/0 - 650/0
Side
1600 mm
(40 in)
Height
1675 mm
(66 in)
Notes:
1. Maximum distance between 3897 and
reader/sorter is 100 feet (305 mm).
3897-6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3898 Image Processor Unit
3898 Image Processor Unit
Figure 7. IBM 3898 Image Processor
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3898-1
3898 Image Processor Unit
Plan View (Not to Scale): English measurements are shown in parentheses.
2 490
(98)
660
(26)
915
(36)
610
(24)
915
(36)
l
f
760
(30)
520
(20-1/2)
1
130
200
(5)
(8)
r,
30
(1-1/4)
920
(36-1/4)
50
(2)
3 330
+---+
(131)
650
(25-1/2)
750
(29-1/2)
1 650
(65)
480
(19)
Front
Figure 8. Plan View of the 3898 Image Processor Unit
Note: If 2 or more racks are installed as a group (side by side), the side service clearance is required
for the end racks only.
3898-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3898 Image Processor Unit
3898 Declaration of Noise Emission
Values: For definitions, see "Acoustics" in
Chapter 3 of the IBM General Information
Manual: Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
LwAd
(LpA)m
m
Operatl gldllng
(bels)
(bels)
Operatl gldllng
(dB)
(dB)
Operatlr gldllng
(dB)
(dB)
5.6
5.6
N/A
N/A
42.5
43.6
Specifications
Dlmenslons:
Front
Side
Height
mm
650
920
1 580
(in.)
(25-%)
(36-V.. )
(62)
Service
Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
1 650
760
915
915
(in.)
(65)
(30)
(36)
(36)
* If 2 or more racks are installed as a group
(side by side), the side service clearance is
required for the end racks only.
Weight 250 kg (550 lb.)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3898-3
3898 Image Processor Unit
Heat Output: 400 W (1367 BTU/hr) maximum
Connector
Airflow
Connector Type:
The rack does not have a fan; each system unit
has its own fan. Air flows from the front to the
back of the system units, with the air exiting out
of the top and bottom of the rear of the rack
frame.
Receptacle
Power Requirements
Standard 4.27 m (14 tt);
Input ac
Optional 1.83 m (6 tt)
Russellstoll 3933
Receptacle Type: Russellstoll 3753
Power Cord
Nominal: 200-240 V
Minimum: 180 V
Maximum: 254 V
0.66 kVA maximum
400 Watts maximum
Patch Cable
Patch cable of the appropriate length to connect
the 3898 to the token-ring LAN. See the IBM
Cabling System Catalog GS70-2040-2.
Plug
Environment (Operating)
Plug Type:
Russellstoll 3750
Service Rating
Volts
220/250
Amps
30
Phase
1
Wires
3
Temperature
Rei Humidity
16°C - 32°C (60°F - 90°F)
8°1o *endash.800/o
Shipping Dimensions
Height
Front
Side
743 mm
(29.25 in)
1048 mm
1600 mm
(41.25 in)
(63 in)
Cabling Schematic
Code
Feature
Cable
Group
Sid
0185
Conn
Conn
ID
ID
Ch anne I 1
1
2
3
4
LAN
Figure 9. 3898 Cable Schematic
Note: The 3898 contains a 3172. The channel restrictions explained in the 3172 section of this manual
apply to the 3898 connection to the host. The maximum length of channel cable between the 3898 and
the host computer is 122 m (400 tt). If there are other channel-attached devices located between the
3898 and the host, subtract 4.5 m (15 tt) from the maximum allowable distance for each attached
device.
3898-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3900 Advanced Function Printer
3900 Advanced Function Printer
For installation planning. use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7140.
Plan View (Not to Scale)
r-----------------------------------------,
1 880
(74)
T
!
~
1(~~5
~li>
660
(26)
roo
I.
I
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
865
(34)
0
0+
....-- ... _
r
~g)J---_===== 1 (40 ~0
I I
I
~
(1)
(21)
+0
610
775
(30-1/2) - - -
ii'
I
25
TT~~~535-=:~XO+
-.
I
.--
m)-]
3:0
(15)
(24) --.. '----'
-
0
+
0
0 +
+0 0+
230
(9-1/4)
IL..---------·-zM)ol
(;1-~fo)
oOL
. . (94-1/2)
(ref)
' - -
"---
+0
I 890
I (35)
I
II
3 050
(1r2eOf~
(
)
r
~
I
(9)
I
I
'I.
I 1 145
I (45)
r-- ________ -.J
_250
__
I
I
L ________________ -.J _ _ _ _ _ _ _+ - - - - S - - - ' ' - - -
1 300 _ _ _~14----_1 7 0 0 - - - - - _ t - - - - 1 070 _ _~
14----(51-1/4)
• ..
(70)
~ •
(42)
r
4 070
(160) - - - - - - - - - . . !
(ref)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and cabling Schematics
3900-1
3900 Advanced Function Printer
Specifications:
Dimensions:
Printer
mm
(inches)
Front
Side
Height
1803 -1880
(91 - 94)
890
(35)
1420
(56)
Weight:
890
(35)
1420
(56)
Printer
Control Unit
Total
890
(35)
1420
(56)
Control Unit
mm
510
(inches)
(20)
Total
mm
(inches)
Notes:
2. When installing a 3900 printer at the recommended minimum distance from the rear of
the 3900 to a wall or other object, you must
be aware that the rear covers may latch in
an open position and be difficult to unlatch
from the top of the cover.
Air Flow:
2313-2402
(91 -94)
1. Printer front length depends on the stacker forms
length setting.
2. Check the path of delivery to the final location for
both front and side access dimensions before
arrival of the printer.
3. The 3900 is shipped on a pallet and should not be
removed from the pallet until it arrives at the customer's location. A forklift may be required to
place the printer on the floor so it can be rolled
into position on its casters. See your IBM representative.
4. If a preprocessor (such as a roll feed) is used and
the forms path from it passes under the printer
through the channel-cable access, special measures may be necessary to prevent interference
between the channel cables and the forms. If 4 or
fewer channel cables are used to attach the
printer, the cables may simply be moved to the
rear of the channel-cable access, and no interference will occur. If more than 4 cables are used, a
protective tray, through which the forms will
move, must be installed under the control unit.
This protective tray is provided by the preprocessor vendor.
5. A 160-mm (6-1/2 in.) square floor cutout is
required for the power cord.· This cutout must be
located under the power cord exit point and as far
to the front of the machine as practical.
Printer
Control Unit
cmm
15.0
6.6
(cfm)
530
233
Note: Ventilation must be supplied to the printer
area. The American Society of Heating, Refrigeration,
and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) recommends a minimum of 0.42 - 0.57 cmm (15 - 20 cfm) of
outdoor makeup air per person in the printer area
(ASHRAE 62 -1989). Adherence to IBM preprinted
forms recommendations and the provision of appropriate ventilation should prevent adverse human
health effects due to outgassing/emissions from preprinted forms. See the IBM 3900 Advanced Function
Printer Forms Design Reference for more information
about selecting preprinted forms and using them
safely.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Elevation
Front
1143
(45)
Rear
1020
(40)
Right
895
(35)
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Left
864
(34)
Notes:
1. Clearance can be reduced to 381 (15) x 1300
(51-1/4) at the left front and 940 (37) x 381
(15) at the right front. Front service clearance can be reduced to 765 mm (30 inches)
if adequate room is left to service the photoconductor drum.
3900-2
16°C - 29°C (60°F - 84.2°F)
20%-80%
18°C (64.4°F)
o to 2134 m (0 to 7000 ft)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
848 kg (1870 Ib)
148 kg (326 Ib)
996 kg (2196 Ib)
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
10°C-43°C (50°F-109.4°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80.6°F)
3900 Advanced Function Printer
Environment storage, Extremes:
(Printer with developer mix installed)
Temperature
40°C (104°F)
-25°C (-13°F)
36°C (97°F)
Extreme
Heat
Cold
Moisture
Notes:
%RH
5-15%
90%
Duration
8 hours
8 hours
48 hours
1. The transition from hot to cold should not be
made more than 3 times for each filling of developer mix.
2. All condensation must be evaporated before
power is applied.
Power and Heat Dissipation:
Power and Heat Dissipation
Idle
Printing
50 Hz
60 Hz
kVA
3.48
kW
kBTU/Hr
50 Hz
60 Hz
421b
20 Ib
421b
3.43
10.78
8.18
11.87
2.99
2.81
10.53
8.10
10.94
10.20
9.59
35.94
27.65
37.34
Notes:
1. 50-Hz values may be expected to be within
10% of BO-Hz values.
2. The printer consumes 1B.2 kVA for approximately 5 seconds of every 20-second interval
of operation.
Acoustical Data:
For definitions. see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
the IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning. GC22-7072.
<~>m
lwAd
Printing
(bels)
Idle
(bels)
Printing
(dB)
Idle
(dB)
I
T
60
Hz
8.7
8.3
65
58
Y
Y
50
Hz
8.4
7.7
65
57
Y
N
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling SchematiCS
3900-3
3900 Advanced Function Printer
Power Requirements
Country
ac Voltages
Wiring Information
Phase·
60 Hzl229
60 Hzl253
60 Hzl264
4-wire power cable with 3 phases and
ground. Neutral is not required.
3
60 Hzl180
60 Hzl180
60 Hzl220
60 Hzl220
4-wire power cable with 3 phases and
ground.
3
50 Hzl220
50 Hzl230
50 Hzl198
50 Hzl207
50 Hzl242
50 Hzl253
4-wire power cable with 3 phases and
ground.
3
50 Hzl380
50 Hz/400
50 Hzl415
50 Hzl342
50 Hzl360
50 Hzl374
50 Hzl418
50 Hz/440
50 Hzl456
5-wire power cable with 3 phases,
ground, and neutral. Direct connection of neutral to ground required.
3
NOMINAL
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
U.S.
Canada
60 Hzl208
60 Hzl230
60 Hzl240
60 Hzl187
60 Hzl207
60 Hzl216
Japan
50 Hzl200
60 Hzl200
Europe
Europe
(See note)
Note: Nonearthed neutral and impedance grounded neutral power distribution systems are not supported by
the 50-Hz 380/400/415 volt version. Installation on an impedance grounded neutral power system (IT Power
System) could result in failures of motors an~ transformers in the printer.
Power Plug and Receptacle- U.S.A. and Canada:
Description
Color Plug
Receptacle Back Box
2SeV 6eA 3P 4W Blue 46ep9Ve 46eR9Ve or BB6e1W (1-1/4 in.)
46eR9W or BB6e2W (1-1/2 in.)
46eR9
Notes:
1. A receptacle with an internal jumper between the box and the grounding wire, mounted on a metal
back box, is required for power attachment if the branch circuit wiring uses a metallic conduit.
This jumper is in addition to the required grounding wire. Receptacles are the only form of connection approved by IBM for attachment of the 3900 to customer-supplied power.
2. IBM recommends the use of Va-designated receptacles. Va-designated receptacles are available
from Hubbell. The va designation in the part number indicates that the receptacle meets Underwriters Laboratory standard UL94-5V for flammability.
3. Printers shipped outside the U.S. and Canada will not have a power plug attached. The country of
final destination must provide a power plug suitable for the printer power requirements that meets
the electrical requirements of that country.
Power Cord:
Cord 00 is 23 mm (.91 in) 3-phase leads and green/yellow, no shield. Leads are 6 AWG stranded
wire.
meters
(feet)
3900-4
Standard
Chicago, illinois U.S.A.
(Specify code 9986)
4.3
(14)
1.8
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
(6)
3900 Advanced Function Printer
3900 Advanced Function Printer Cabling Schematic:
Connector
10
Cable
Group
F'eature
Code
Std
4020
0185 SIgnal Cables
1178 Power Sequence ...
and Control
..
1
5
0185 SIgnal Cables
1178 Power Sequence ...
and Control
3
7
1178 Remote Enable/
DIsable
9
~
Connector
10
f-----
2
f - - Channel
-----
4
~ Channel 8
Slgnol Cable
A
S1gnal Cable
From 3900
Feature
Code
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Connector 10
Maximum
Length
Std
0185
1178
2
1
1
5
122 m (400 tt)
122 m (400 tt)
Bus and tag
Power sequence and contre I
4020
0185
1178
1178
2
1
1
3
7
9
122 m (400 tt)
122 m (400 tt)
122 m (400 tt)
Bus and tag
1,2,3,6,7,8
Power sequence and contre I
4
Remote Enable/Disable
5
Comments
Notes
1,2,3,6,8
4
To 3900
Connector No.
Comments
Notes
2
Bus and tag
1,2,3,6,8
4
Bus and tag
1,2,3,6,7,8
Notes:
1. The 3900 supports parallel channel attachment to 4361,4381, 308X, 309X, and ES/9000 processors
through the S/370 block multiplex channel in single tag interlock, high-speed data-transfer (double
tag interlock), or in data streaming mode.
2. Attachment can be through a 2-channel switch or directly to a channel. Attachment through a 3044
fiber optic channel extender is supported on the 4361,4381, 308X, and 309X processors (attachment
to the 4361 High-Speed Channel through .the 3044 is limited to single tag-interlock mode).
3. Attachment to the 3044 is to the remote end (001 or 002 unit). The maximum distance from the
printer to the channel through a 3044 is 2 km (6562 tt).
4. Remote Power Sequence and Control is optional and can be ordered for each connected channel
by cable group 1178.
5. Remote enable/disable is optional and can be attached with cable group 1178.
6. The IBM 3900 Printer supports a maximum channel cable length of 122 m (400 tt) if it is the only
control unit on the interface. For each additional control unit (up to a maximum of 8 control units)
this measurement is reduced by 4.6 m (15 tt).
7. SF 4020 two channel switch allows connection to a 2nd channel interface.
8. Cable group 0185 is preferred; however, cable group 3920 (old style channel cable) can be used.
9. No chemical solvents should be used for cleaning the 3900 covers.
10. For proper operating conditions, there should be a minimum of 0.57 cubic meters/min. (20 cfm) of
outdoor makeup air per person in the printer area.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3900-5
3900 Advanced Function Printer
This page is intentionally left blank.
3900-6
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3990 Storage Control
3990 Storage Control
Models 1, 2, and 3
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
Dual-Frame Configuration (Model 2 or 3)
urements are shown in parentheses.
See
Single-Frame Configuration
Noje
495
-=--...--++- See
Note 1
(19-1/2)
(8X)
815
(32)
495
~~~-t
(19-1/2) I - - - - - t - - - - . --r
(4X)
1l
T
,
815
-f--f
(32)
280
(11)
815
(32)
280
Front
(11)
230
(9)
(2X)
660
(26)
(2X)
Notes:
1. See the service clearances on page 3990-3
for the correct left or right side clearances.
2. Two Model 2s or Model 3s can be bolted
together in a dual-frame configuration with
the operator panels facing the same direction.
3990 Models 2 or 3 with modular power subsystems cannot be installed in a dual-frame
configuration.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3990-1
3990 storage Control
Power Requirements with Modular Power:
Modular power provides a power cord
for each cluster in a 3990 frame.
Specifications
Dimensions:
Side
Front
Modular Power - Single Line Cord
Height
Single Frame
mm
(Inches)
1130
(44-1/2)
815
(32)
1790
(70-1/2)
Dual Frame
mm
(Inches)
2145
(84-112)
815
(32)
1790
(70-1/2)
Weight:
kg
(lb)
Model 1
320
(700)
Model 2
385
(840)
Model 3
545
Airflow:
m3/mln
(cfm)
Model 1
12
(420)
Model 2
24
(840)
Model 3
48.0
(1700)
(1200)
For definitions, see "Acoustics" In Chapter 3 of IBM
General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
Operating
(bels)
< LpA>m
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
-
7.4
Idling
(dB)
-
55.5
Max
kVA
2
Max
kW
3
1
2
8.7 1.3 2.6
2.3 4.6 8.9
228/388
1.1 1.7 3.2
8.7 1.4 2.7
2.5 4.7 9.3
238/488
1.3 1.9 3.3
a.7 1.4 2.7
2.6 4.8 9.4
248/415
1.6 2.1 3.5
8.8 1.4 2.8
2.7 5.8 9.7
1
1
2
68-Hz
58-Hz
58-Hz
2.19 2.23 1.68
1.41 1. 68 1. 71
5.61 4.37 5.86
3990-2
2
288/288
1.6 2.9
1.3 2.4
4.5 8.2
228/388
1.8 3.a
1.4 2.6
4.7 8.9
238/4a8
1.7 3.8
1.4 2.6
4.7 8.9
248/415
1.8 3.1
1.4 2.6
4.8 8.9
Vol tages
(Nominal)
Max
kVA
3
Max
kW
2
3
2
Max
(kBTU/hr)
3
2
3
3
Models
2
2a8/288
8.9 2.8
8.7 1.7
2.4 5.8
228/388
1.2 2.3
8.7 1.8
2.5 6.1
238/488
1.1 2.2
8.7 1.8
2.4 6.1
248/415
1.3 2.4
8.7 1.8
2.5 6.1
Vol tages
(Nominal)
8.9 1.6 3.8
Model
3
No
288/268
Amperes per Phase
ABC
2
No
1
Power
Confi gurati on
2
Modular Power - Dual L1ne Cord 1
Model s
Phase Imbalance
1
Models
T
Max
(kBTU/hr)
3
3
Max
(kBTU/hr)
Max
kW
I
Power Requirements without Modular Power:
Vol tages
(Nominal)
Max
kVA
Modular Power - Dual Line Cord 8
Acoustical Data:
LwAd
Voltages
(Nominal)
Max
kVA
3
Max
kW
2
Max
(kBTU/hr)
3
Model s
2
288/288
8.8 1.8
8.7 8.7
2.3 2.5
228/388
8.9 1.8
8.7 8.9
2.4 2.9
238/488
8.9 1.8
8.7 8.8
2.4 2.9
248/415
8.9 1.1
8.7 8.9
2.4 2.9
Phases
Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Power Cord Style
for Standard Power
Power Cord Specification
for Modular Power
(Neutral Not Used)
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
2
3
3
Russellstoll,3730
Russellstoll,3744
Russellstoll, 3914
B2 (Shield not used)
Cable Nominal 00
15.4 mm (0.61 In)
no shield
4 conductors
Conductor Nominal 00
2.0 mm (0.078 In) 14 AWG
(bare wire)
or
Cable Nominal 00
12.2 mm (0.48 In)
no shield
4 conductors
Conductor Nominal 00
2.0 mm (0.078 In) 14 AWG
(bare wire)
3990 Storage Control
Environment, Operating:
3990 Port Cabling Specifications: The
1S0C-32°C (SO°F-90°F)
20% -80%
23°C (73°F)
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-43°C (50°F-110°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80°F)
Service Clearances:
1. A service clearance of 815 mm (32 In.) Is required In
the front and rear of the machine.
2. Single-frame configurations of a Model 1 or Model 2
with no future upgrades planned do not require a side
clearance, based on IBM's method of calculating floor
load.
3. Dual-frame configurations Installed on a floor rated at
440 kg/m 2 (90 Ib/ftZ) or stronger do not require a side
clearance, based on IBM's method of calculating floor
load.
4. Dual-frame configurations must be Installed on floors
of less than 365 kg/m Z (75 Ib1ft2) In any World Trade
county, based on IBM's method of calculating floor
load.
5. All 3990s shipped to countries other than the United
States and Canada contain a 70 kg (150 Ib) Isolation
transformer.
S. Single-frame floor loading applies to 3990s with
modular power.
S1 ngl e-Fralle
kg/m z
United States
World Trade
and Canada
Countries
(lb/ft2) Left or R1 ght S1 de* Left or Right S1de*
415
396
376
345
(85)
(86)
(75)
(76)
( 6
( 8
( 6
(17
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
55 11111
255 IDII
516 II1II
815 IlIII
( 2
(16
(26
(32
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
Dual-Fralle
Floor Load Rating Requ1 red End Cl earance
kg/mz
Un1 ted States
World Trade
and Canada
Countries
(lb/ft2) Left or R1 ght S1 de* Left or Right S1de*
415
398
376
345
(85)
(88)
(75)
(76)
6l\111
138 11\11
566 mm
n68 l\III
( 6
( 5
(22
(43
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
(13 in.)
(29 in.)
(49 in.)
(See item 4 above)
348
748
1256
• "3990 Models 2 and 3 ESCON Port Cabling
Schematics Cluster a)" on page 3990-4
• "3990 Models 2 and 3 ESCON Port Cabling
Schematics (Cluster 1)" on page 3990-4
• "From Cluster 0 ESCON Ports, Models 2 and
3 Cabling Table" on page 3990-5
• "From Cluster 1 ESCON Ports, Models 2 and
3 Cabling Table" on page 3990-5
• "ESCON Ports-Maximum Number of Cable
Groups by Model and Feature Code per
Machine" on page 3990-6
• "Notes for ESCON Port Attachment" on
page 3990-6
• "3990 Models 1, 2, and 3 Parallel Port
Cabling Schematics (Cluster 0)" on
page 3990-10
Q
"3990 Models 2 and 3 Parallel Port Cabling
Schematics (Cluster 1)" on page 3990-10
• "From Cluster 0 Parallel Ports, Models 1, 2,
and 3 Cabling Table" on page 3990-11
Floor Load Rating Requ1 red End Cl earance
611111
6na
158 IIIlI
435 IIIlI
3990 port cabling specifications include the following cabling schematics, cable tables, and
attachment notes:
IlIII
mil
lUll
• "From Cluster 1 Parallel Ports (Models 2 and
3) Cabling Table" on page 3990-11
• "To Cluster 0 Parallel Ports (Models 1, 2, and
3) Cabling Table" on page 3990-12
• "To Cluster 1 Parallel Ports (Models 2 and 3)
Cabling Table" on page 3990-12
• "Parallel Ports-Maximum Number of Cable
Groups by Model and Feature Code Per
Machine" on page 3990-13
• UNotes for Parallel Port Attachment" on
page 3990-13.
*The left or right side service clearance can be applied to
either the left or right side, depending on the Installation.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3990-3
3990 storage Control
3990 Models 2 and 3 ESCON Port
Cabling Schematics Cluster 0)
3990 Models 2 and 3 ESCON Port
Cabling Schematics (Cluster 1)
Feature
Code
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Connector
ID
6151'{ 3797
4-
3797
4-
153
3797
4-
155
3797
4-
157
4-
159
6171,
6351,
6371,
or
6372
{3797
6172,
6351,
or
6371
Connector
10
151
3797
4-
161
3797
4-
163
3797
4-
165
Cable
Group
4-
251
3797
4-
253
3797
4-
255
3797
4-
257
4-
259
3797
4-
261
3797
4-
263
3797
4-
265
{3797
6172.
6351.
or
6371
128
Not
Cluster
Dependent
Connector
10
6151'{ 3797
6171,
6351,
6371.
or
6372
Storage
Cluster
8
3990-4
Cable
Function
Connector
ID
DASD S1 gna1
4-
122
4-
18
28
22
24
26
28
38
32
~
DASD S1 gna 1
DASD
Power
Control
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Storage
C1 uster
1
Cable
Funct10n
128
4-
DASD Si gna 1
122
4-
DASD S1 gna 1
3990 Storage Control
From Cluster 0 ESCON Ports, Models 2
and 3 Cabling Table
Max. Link
Feature Group No. of Conn Length *
Code
No. Cabl es 10
II
(ft)
6151,
6171,
6351,
6371,
3797
1
I, 2, 7, 8,
151 3 km (9 821) 2, 3 9, 1B, 11, 12
3797
1
I, 2, 7, 8,
153 3 km (9 821) 2, 3 9, 1B, 11, 12
3797
1
I, 2, 7, 8,
155 3 kll (9 821) 2, 3 9, 1B, 11, 12
3797
1
3797
3797
Model Notes
1
I, 2, 7, 8,
251 3 km (9 821) 2, 3 9, 16, 11, 12
3797
1
253
3 km (9 821) 2, 3
3797
1
255
I, 2, 7, 8,
3 klR (9 821) 2. 3 9, 16, 11, 12
I, 2, 7, 8,
157 3 km (9 821) 2, 3 9, 1B, 11, 12
3797
1
257 3 km (9 821) 2, 3
1
I, 2, 7, 8,
159 3 km (9 821) 2, 3 9, 1B, 11, 12
3797
1
259
1
I, 2, 7, 8,
161 3 km (9 821) 2, 3 9, 1B, 11, 12
3797
1
261 3 kll (9 821) 2, 3
I, 2, 7, 8,
9, 16, 11, 12
3797
1
163 3 km (9 821) 2, 3
I, 2. 7. 8,
9, 1B, 11, 12
3797
1
263
3 km (9 821) 2, 3
I, 2, 7, 8,
9, 16, 11, 12
3797
1
165 3 km (9 821) 2, 3
I, 2, 7, 8,
9, 1B, 11, 12
3797
1
265
I, 2, 7, 8,
3 km (9 821) 2, 3 9, 1B, 11, 12
6172,
6351,
or
Max. Link
Feature Group No. of Conn Length *
(ft)
No. Cables 10
Code
III
3797
or
6372
Model Notes
From Cluster 1 ESCON Ports, Models 2
and 3 Cabling Table
6151,
6171,
or
6372
I, 2, 7, 8,
9, 1B, 11, 12
I, 2, 7, 8,
9, 16, 11, 12
I, 2. 7, 8,
3 km (9 821) 2, 3 9, 1B, 11, 12
6172
6371
* Add
2135 lDII (84 in.) to each channel
fiber optic cable. This is the length
of cable required to reach from floor
level to the ESCON ports in the 399B.
* The maximum IBH standard jumper cable
length is 122
II
(466 feet).
Custom jumper cables are available
up to 5B6 m (1646 feet).
Fiber trunks can be used to a maximu.
link length of 3 kll (982B feet).
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3990-5
3990 storage Control
ESCON Ports-Maximum Number of
Cable Groups by Model and Feature
Code per Machine
Channel
3999 Feature Group
Model Code
9185*
2
or
3
Power
Control
Group
1178
Locall
Relllote
Group
1178
ESCON
Group
3797 ***
8171
8
8-
9
9
7149
8
8-
a
9
8172
16
8-
9
9
7149
and
8172
16
8-
16
9
6151.
6351
9
9
9
4
6171.
6371
9
9
9
8
6172
9
9
9
8
6372
9
9
9
8
* Channel cable group 3929 can
a 3999 to a parallel channel.
length restrictions in note 1
Parallel Port Attachment" on
be used to attach
according to the
under "Notes for
page 3999-13.
Note:
For parallel port attachment, both bus and tag
cables In a pair must be the same color and length.
- A maximum of 8 cable groups
for each storage control.
*** Each ESCON Adapter feature includes
one jumper cable (group number 3797) per port.
However. to get these cables. you must specify
the number of jumper cables (one per port)
and the length of eac~ cable in a cable order.
Notes for ESCON Port Attachment
1. For all 3990 Models 2 or 3, channel attachment features must be symmetrical for both clusters.
For dual-frame configurations, the channel attachment features for all 4 clusters must be symmetrical.
2. For parallel port attachment, the 3990 attaches to 3090, ES/3090, 3084, 3083, 3081, 9370, and 4381
processors by 3.0 or 4.5 M-bytes (3090 and ES/3090 only) block multiplexer data streaming
channel.
For ESCON port attachment, the 3990 attaches to processors with the ESCON channel capability.
3. From DASD. Odd-numbered controllers use connectors 18, 20, 22, and 24; even-numbered controllers use connectors 26, 28, 30, and 32. Connectors 18 through 32 are not cluster dependent.
4. An analog telephone line must be installed within 15 meters (50 feet) of the 3990 for those installations allowing remote support attachment. The 3990 interfaces with a V.23 (Bell 202 compatible),
half-duplex, 1200-bps modem, supplied with an internal clock that attaches to data link 1 or data
link 3. Cable, part 8547667, length 15 meters (50 feet), can be ordered for attachment.
5. The maximum device cable length is 61 meters (200 feet).
6. When installing the modular power dual-line cord feature, a second (Russellstoll 3744) power
receptacle must be installed within 3 meters (10 feet) of the original power receptacle.
3990-6
InpuUoutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3990 Storage Control
For maximum utilization of the modular power dual-line cord feature, the 3990 should be attached
to 6 separate facility power sources to reduce the impact of power outages.
This feature gives each cluster a separate and independent ac line cord, line circuit breaker, line
filter, and ac transformer.
7. 3990 ESCON Adapter features allow 3990 Models 2 or 3 to attach to ESCON channels, ESCON
Director devices (9032 and 9033), and ESCON Converters (9035).
When the 3990 is attached to ESCON channels, 3390 and 3380 Models (excluding CJ2, AA4, and
A04) can be attached to the 3990.
3390s operating in 3380 track compatibility mode must not be accessed by channels configured
with the 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender Link Model 2, the 9034 ESCON Converter, the 9035
ESCON Converter, or with any of the installed ESCON Adapter features.
8. When operating in an ESCON channel environment, 3990 Storage Controls and attached DASD can
be installed or removed concurrent with system operation (with appropriate system planning).
9. The Feature Codes for ESCON port attachment include:
6151
6171
6172
6351
6371
6372
-
ESCON Adapter with two ports
ESCON Adapter with four ports
ESCON Adapter with four ports, additional
Adds 2 ESCON ports, deletes 4 parallel channels
Adds 4 ESCON ports, deletes 4 parallel channels
ESCON Adapter deletes 6151 and adds 6171
Each ESCON Adapter feature includes 1 jumper cable (group number 3797) per port. However, to
get these cables, you must specify the number of jumper cables (1 per port) and the length of each
cable in a cable order.
Parts removed or replaced become the property of IBM and must be returned to IBM.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3990-7
3990 Storage Control
10. The ESCON Adapter feature is available in the following configurations for 3990 Models 2 or 3:
Feature
Number
Combinations
Number of Ports
Per Cluster
Number of Ports
Per 3990
Parallel
Parallel
ESCON
ESCON
8171
4
--
8
--
8171 and 8172
8
--
16
--
6151, 6351, and
8171
4
4
2
2
8
8
4
4
6171 , 6371 , and
8171
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
6171 and 6371
0
4
0
8
6171 , 6172, and
6371
0
(;)
8
8
0
0
16
16
6372
0
4
0
8
11. A 3990 Model 2, or 3 with ESCON Adapter features can be located up to 9 km from the host
processor by interconnecting 1 or 2 ESCON Director devices.
Distance per link is limited as follows:
50/125 micron cable
62.5/125 micron cable
= 2 km (6547 feet)
= 3 km
(9821 feet).
Total distance capability using 2 ESCON Director devices is limited
as follows:
50/125 micron cable
62.5/125 micron cable
= 6 km
(19 694 feet)
= 9 km (29 515 feet).
Fiber optic jumper cables are required for attaching a 3990 Model 2 or 3 with ESCON Adapters to
ESCON Director devices. Duplex-to-duplex 62.5/125 micron fiber optic jumper cables (part number
14F3797) are available from IBM in standard lengths up to 122 meters (400 feet). Custom lengths
are available above 122 meters (400 feet), to a maximum length of 500 meters (1640 feet). The
jumper cables are stocked in the following fixed lengths.
4
7
13
22
meters
meters
meters
meters
(12
(28
(48
(78
feet)
feet)
feet)
feet)
31
46
61
77
meters
meters
meters
meters
(l88
(158
(288
(258
feet)
feet)
feet)
feet)
92 meters
187 meters
122 meters
(388 feet)
(358 feet)
(488 feet)
For more fiber installation information, see the Fiber Optic Channel Link Planning and Installation
manual, GA23-0367.
3990-8
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3990 storage Control
12. The following link length restrictions apply for combinations of parallel and ESCON ports or parallel
ports or ESCON ports.
From
~
To - .
CPU
channel
9932/9933
9934
---
3.9 km ***
1.2 km
3.9 km ***
1.2 km
9935
39ge
CPU channel
ESCON
Parallel
--
122 m
--
3.9 km
122 m
3.8 km
*
**
3.8 km ***
*
--
---
---
122 m
---
--
3.e km
--
3.8 km
--
9932/9833
ESCON
Parallel
--
--
--
--
--
ge34
ESCON
Parallel
--
--
9835
ESCON
Parallel
--
**
122 m
--
3.e km
122 m
3.8 km ***
--
--
3998
ESCON
Parallel
--
122 m
--
--
--
All the channel paths from a particular 3990 to a given processor image must be of the same type.
That is, all parallel channels, all ESCON channels, all parallel channels configured with the 9035
ESCON Converter, or all ESCON channels configured for the 9034 ESCON Converter.
The maximum length for parallel ports is 122 meters (400 feet) depending on the channel cable
type; that is, gray or blue cable.
* For 3990 attachment, when a 9032 or 9033 ESCON Director device is installed
between the 9034 and the ESCON channel, subtract 0.2 km (634 feet)
from the allowed distance of 1.2 km (3960 feet) between
the 9034 and the ESCON channel.
** Presence of a 9032 or 9033 between the 9035 and the 3990 ESCON port
has no effect on the maximum allowed distance of 3.0 km (9821 feet).
*** For ESCON operation only.
See 9034 and 9035 entries for distance limitations.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3990-9
3990 Storage Control
3990 Models 1, 2, and 3 Parallel Port
Cabling Schematics (Cluster 0)
3990 Models 2 and 3 Parallel Port
Cabling Schematics (Cluster 1 )
Feature
Code
Feature
Code
cable
Group
{Bm
B185
8171
Connector
10
ID
Cable
Function
4-
1Bl
1B2
4-
Channel A
4-
1B3
164
4-
Channel 8
{BI8S
Connector
Connector
ID
ID
Cable
Function
4-
281
282
4-
Channel A
B185
4-
283
264
4-
Channel 8
8171
4-
1B5
1B6
4-
Channel C
B185
4-
285
266
4-
Channel C
B185
4-
1B7
1B8
4-
Channel 0
B185
4--
287
288
4-
Channel 0
4-
1B9
11B
4-
Channel E
4--
289
218
4-
Channel E
4-
111
112
4-
Channel F
{BI8S
B185
4--
211
212
4-
Channel F
{Bm
8172
B185
4-
113
114
4-
Channel G
B185
4--
213
214
4-
Channel G
B185
4-
115
116
4-
Channel H
B185
4--
215
216
4-
Channel H
1178
1178
1178
1178
4-
17
21
25
29
4--
DASD S1 gna 1
1178
1178
1178
1178
19
23
27
31
228
4-
DASD S1 gna 1
1178
1178
1178
1178
4--
222
4-
DASD S1 gna 1
444-
12B
4-
7149
4-4-4--
7149
1178
1178
1178
1178
Std
Cable
Group
B185
B185
8172
Connector
{1178
3990-10
1178
1178
1178
1178
1178
1178
1178
4444-
44444444-
33
37
41
45
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
122
4--
DASD S1 gna 1
Storage
Cluster
B
Not
Cl usterDependent
18
2B
22
24
26
28
3B
32
~
DASD
Power
Control
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
4-4-4--
35
39
43
47
Storage
Cl uster
1
3990 Storage Control
From Cluster 0 Parallel Ports, Models 1,
2, and 3 Cabling Table
Feature Group No. of Conn Max Length
Code
No.
cabl es 10
m (ft) Model
Notes
From Cluster 1 Parallel Ports (Models 2
and 3) Cabling Table
Feature Group No. of Conn Max Length
m (ft) Model Notes
Code
No.
Cables 10
6185
2
161 122
1. 2. 3.
(488) 1. 2. 3 4. and 11
6185
2
281
122
1. 2. 3.
(488) 2. 3 4. and 11
6185
2
163
122
1. 2. 3.
(488) 1. 2. 3 4. and 11
6185
2
283
122
1. 2. 3.
(466) 2. 3 4. and 11
6185
2
285
122
1. 2. 3.
(488) 2. 3 4. and 11
8171
8171
6185
2
165
122
1. 2. 3.
(468) 1. 2. 3 4. and 11
6185
2
167
122
1. 2. 3.
(488) 1. 2. 3 4. and 11
6185
2
267
122
1. 2. 3.
(466) 2. 3 4. and 11
6185
2
169
122
1. 2. 3.
(488) 1. 2. 3 4. 9. 11
8185
2
269
122
1. 2. 3.
(466) 2. 3 4. 9. 11
6185
2
111 122
1. 2. 3.
(488) 1. 2. 3 4. 9. 11
6185
2
211
122
1. 2. 3.
(466) 2. 3 4. 9. 11
8185
2
213
122
. 1. 2. 3.
(466) 2. 3 4. 9. 11
8172
8172
6185
2
113
122
1. 2. 3.
(488) 1. 2. 3 4. 9. 11
6185
2
115
122
1. 2. 3.
(488) 1. 2. 3 4. 9. 11
8185
2
215
122
1. 2. 3.
(468) 2. 3 4. 9. 11
1178
1
17
122
(488) 1. 2. 3 16
1178
1
19
122
(466) 2. 3
16
1178
1
21
122
(466) 1. 2. 3 16
1178
1
23
122
(466) 2. 3
16
7149
7149
1178
1
25
122
(488) 1. 2. 3 16
1178
1
27
122
(466) 2. 3
16
1178
1
29
122
(488) 1. 2. 3
16
1178
1
31
122
(466) 2. 3
16
1178
1
33
122
(466) 1. 2. 3
16
1178
1
35
122
(466) 2. 3
16
1178
1
37
122
(488) 1. 2. 3
16
1178
1
39
122
(488) 2. 3
16
7149
7149
1178
1
41
122
(486) 1. 2. 3 16
1178
1
43
122
(466) 2. 3
16
1178
1
45
122
(488) 1. 2. 3
16
1178
1
47
122
(466) 2. 3
16
1178
1
53
122
(466) 1. 2. 3
5
1178
1
55
122
(486) 1. 2. 3 5
1178
1
57
122
(486) 1. 2. 3
5
1178
1
59
122
(486) 1. 2. 3
5
1178
1
61
122
(486) 1. 2. 3 5
1178
1
63
122
(466) 1. 2. 3 5
1178
1
65
122
(488) 1. 2. 3
1178
1
67
122
(488) 1. 2. 3 5
5
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and cabling SchematIcs
3990-11
3990 storage Control
To Cluster 0 Parallel Ports (Models 1, 2,
and 3) Cabling Table
Feature
Code
Conn No. of
IO
Cables Hodel
Notes
Feature
Code
Conn No. of
Cables Hodel
ID
Notes
182
2
1, 2, 3,
1, 2, 3 4, and 11
202
2
2, 3
1, 2, 3
4, and 11
le4
2
1, 2, 3,
1, 2, 3 4, and 11
284
2
2, 3
1, 2, 3
4, and 11
186
2
1, 2, 3,
1, 2, 3 4, and 11
206
2
2, 3
1, 2, 3
4, and 11
188
2
1, 2, 3,
1, 2, 3 4, and 11
208
2
2, 3
1, 2, 3
4, and 11
lUI
2
1, 2, 3,
1, 2, 3 4, 9, 11
210
2
2, 3
1, 2, 3
4, 9, 11
112
2
1, 2, 3,
1, 2, 3 4, 9, 11
212
2
2, 3
1, 2, 3
4, 9, 11
114
2
1, 2, 3,
1, 2, 3 4, 9, 11
214
2
2, 3
1, 2, 3
4, 9, 11
116
2
1, 2, 3,
1, 2, 3 4, 9, 11
216
2
2, 3
1, 2, 3
4, 9, 11
128
1
1, 2, 3
220
1
2, 3
8
222
1
2, 3
8
8171
8171
8172
8172
8
Std
3990-12
To Cluster 1 Parallel Ports (Models 2
and 3) Cabling Table
Std
122
1
1, 2, 3
8
18
1
1, 2, 3
6
28
1
1, 2, 3
6
22
1
1, 2, 3
6
24
1
1, 2, 3
6
26
1
1, 2, 3
6
28
1
1, 2, 3
6
38
1
1, 2, 3
6
32
1
1, 2, 3
6
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3990 Storage Control
Parallel Ports-Maximum Number of
Cable Groups by Model and Feature
Code Per Machine
3998 Channel
3998 Feature Group
Model Code
8185*
1
2
or
3
Power
Control
Group
1178
Local/
Remote
Group
1178
8171
4
4
8
7149
4
4
4
8172
8
8**
e
7149
and
8172
8
8**
8
8171
8
8**
e
7149
8
8**
8
8172
16
8**
e
7149
and
8172
16
8**
16
*Channel cable group 3928 can be used to
attach a 3998 to a channel. according to
the length restrictions in note 1 under
"Notes for Parallel Port Attachment"
on page 3998-13.
Note: Both bus and tag cables in a pair
must be the same color and length.
**A maximum of 8 cable groups
for each storage control.
Notes for Parallel Port Attachment
1. A 3990 Model 1 contains one storage cluster (usually shortened to "cluster"). A 3990 Model 2 or 3
contains 2 clusters. Each cluster can be attached to a system channel directly or through an intervening switching device.
Determination of applicable channel cable usage (blue or gray cables) for a specific device follows:
All 3990 Storage Controls meet the OEMI 4.5 M-bytes data transfer interface specifications and can
use either blue or gray cable in matched color pairs of the same length, within the length
restrictions controlled by channel speed.
Cable Group 0185 (IBM-manufactured blue cable) has a maximum length of 122 m (400 tt) for
attachment to a S/370 data-streaming channel.
Customers attaching a 3990 using IBM-manufactured gray cable (or a mix of gray and blue cables,
within the restrictions noted above) to a 4.5 M-bytes channel at channel-to-terminator distances
greater than 90 m (300 ft), must submit a no-charge RPQ 8B0115. A description of the configuration
must be included. Standard rules related to cable length deductions for additional control unit
attachments should be applied to the 90 m (300 tt) base. The maximum lengths must be reduced
by 4.5 m (15 tt) for each control unit or cluster connected between a cluster of a 3990 and a
channel.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3990-13
3990 Storage Control
Physical placement of all 3990 Models 1, 2, and 3 and other channel attaching devices should be in
the following order:
a. All devices that meet the 4.5 M-bytes data tran~fer interface specifications with PROTOCL = S4
and that have data rates between 4.2 and 4.5 M-bytes in DC-interlock or data-streaming mode
must be first.
b. All remaining units. Physical placement of all 3990 Models 1, 2, and 3 is arbitrary if the
channel operates at 3 M-bytes data transfer rate.
2. For all 3990 Models 2 or 3, channel attachment features must be symmetrical for both clusters.
For dual-frame configurations, the channel attachment features for all 4 clusters must be symmetrical.
3. The 3990 subsystem attaches to 3090, ES/3090, 3084, 3083, 3081, 9370, and 4381 processors by 3 or
4.5 M-bytes (3090 and ES/3090 processors only) block multiplexer data streaming channel.
4. The 3990 supports attachment to the 3380 AA4 stage 2 only, with serial numbers greater than 15
000 for 60 Hz and serial numbers greater than XO 300 for 50 Hz. All models of 3990 attach to 3380
Models AJ4, BJ4, AK4, and BK4, as well as most of the 3380 Models AA4, B04, AD4, BD4, AE4, and
BE4. However, if feature code 6120 is installed, AA4 and B04 are not supported.
5. Power sequence and control cables (part 5351178) are optional and should be ordered if the installation uses power sequencing controls. These cables are not cluster-dependent. The maximum is
8 per storage control.
6. From DASD. Odd-numbered controllers use connectors 18, 20, 22, and 24; even-numbered controllers use connectors 26, 28, 30, and 32. Connectors 18 through 32 are not cluster-dependent.
7. An analog telephone line must be installed within 15 m (50 tt) of the 3990 for those installations
allowing remote support attachment. The 3990 interfaces with a V.23 (Bell 202 compatible). halfduplex, 1200-bps modem, supplied with an internal clock that attaches to data link 1 or data link 3.
Cable (part 8547667) length 15 m (50 tt), can be ordered for attachment.
8. Maximum device cable length is 61 m (200 tt).
9. Feature code 8172 (4-channel switch, additional) provides for attachment of 4 additional parallel
ports for each cluster on all 3990 models. The maximum is 1 for Model 1 and 2 for Models 2 and 3.
10. Four cable groups (1178) can be ordered for feature code 7149 (remote and local switch attachment
for 4-channel switch). The maximum is 8 for Model 1 and 16 for Models 2 and 3.
11. Specify cable group 799 for Model 2 and Model 3 (instead of cable group 0185) to connect both
storage clusters of a 3990 to the same channel. Cable group 799 is a fixed-length, 1370 mm (54 in.)
cable. This cable must be ordered at 1220 mm (4 tt) length and both connector identifiers (IDs)
given; for example, from connector 10 103 to connector 10 202. This cable cannot bOe ordered by
metric measure or by Inches; it must be ordered at a 4-foot length.
In dual-frame configurations, there must be no cross-coupling of clusters in the same frame.
Cable group 799 is to be used to cross-couple clusters in different frames only.
12. When installing the modular power dual-line cord feature, a second (Russellstoll 3744) power
receptacle must be installed within 3 m (10 tt) of the original power receptacle.
For maximum utilization of the modular power dual-line cord feature, the 3990 should be attached
to 2 separate facility power sources to reduce the impact of power outages.
This feature gives each cluster a separate and independent ac line cord, line circuit breaker, line
filter, and ac transformer.
13. For upgrade to modular power in a 3990 Model 2, specify feature code 4353. For upgrade to
modular power in a 3990 Model 3, specify feature code 5353.
3990-14
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3995 Optical Library Dataserver
3995 Optical Library Dataserver
Models 111, 112, 131, 132, and 151
Plan View (Not to Scale): English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX22-7139.
90
(3-1/2)
r--
I-~
__
+
l
I
115
(4-1/2)
1 020
165
(40)
(6-1/2)
+
2 985
945 (117-1/4)
•
3395-0'-F=~-~--L..-rf
~;1
+
132
I
250
(37-1/4)
(9-3/4)!
+
1 020
(40)
50
(2)
_ _ . . _ - - - - - 150
(5-3/4)
690
r
(27-1/4)
I
1 380
(54-1/4) --j
1-(3!'~~;-=--J--rl (6~1/2)11 (~~)
690
(27-1/4)
Note: The Model 111 can be placed on either
side of the Model 131 or 151. The Model
112 can be placed on either side of the
Model 132.
II
+
+ +
T!
3995- 3995.El
111, 112 131. 1321
+
-Ie +
I
!
i
Ii
+EI
-- --
J
I-
560
.
' 945
i50 (37-1/4)
(9-3/4)
,
1 020
(40)
I
L______
_____ I
Front _____________ __ _
(22)
2 985
(117-1/4)
+ I----r!.
_ _ _--1-_--1...
SO
~(2)
--
\-tS60
(22)
----l
(98-1/2)
150
(5-3/4)
690
(27-1/4)
500
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
(2X)
3995-1
3995 Optical Library Dataserver
Specifications:
LWAd
Dimensions:
Front
692
(27.24)
mm
(in.)
Service Clearances:
Front
mm
1016
(in.)
(40)
Side
943
(37.13)
Height
1800
(71 )
Left
559"
(22")
Note: Leave enough clearance above the machine
for airflow.
Models 111
or 112
Models 131,
132, or 151
420
(926)
472
(1041 )
kW
(kBTU/hr)
Calorific Value
kCal/hr
Model 111 or
112
.22
(.75)
53
.19
Model 131,
132, or 151
.425
(1.5)
96
.38
Airflow:
m 3 /min
(cfm)
3.8
(135)
6.2
(220)
Heat Output:
6.5
6.4
47.0
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Idling
(dB)
46.0
16°C to 32°C
(60.8°F to 89.6°F)
8% to 80%
23°C (73.4°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
0.5
1
50/60
Russellstoll, 3720U-2-P
Russell stoll, 3743U-2
Russellstoll, 3913U-2
A8
See "Power Cords, Plugs, and Receptacles for USA
and Canada" on page 3995-3 for power plug information.
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
the IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
3995-2
Operating
(dB)
Temperature
Power Requirements:
kVA
0.3
Phases
Frequency
Plug Type
Receptacle Type
Connector Housing
Power Cord Style
m
Idling
(bels)
Environment, Operating:
Right
559"
(22")
Rear
1016
(40)
"Required for a 2-frame installation. A 3995 Model
131, 132, or 151 requires only 686 mm (27 in.)
clearance on the right side when installed without
a Model 111 or 112.
Weight:
(includes 144
cartridges per
model)
kg
(Ib)
Operating
(bels)
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
10°C to 43°C
(50°F to 110°F)
8% to 80%
27°C (80.6°F)
I
Yes
T
No
3995 Optical Library Dataserver
Power Cords, Plugs, and Receptacles for USA and Canada
Service Rating
Plug
Type
3720U-2-P
Maximum
Voltage
A
208/240
15
Phases
Wires
3
Connector
Receptacle
3913U-2
3743U-2
Notes
Diagram
number
In
Appendix
A
1,2,3
34
Power Cords, Plugs, and Receptacles for Latin America, Asia Pacific, and
Europe/Middle East/Africa
Connector
Receptacle
Notes
Diagram
number
In
Appendix
A
-
3,4
23
3
-
-
3,4
18
1
3
-
3,4
22
10/16
1
3
3,4
25
16132
1
3
-
-
3, 5
46
Service Rating
Plug
Type
Maximum
Voltage
A
-
250
13
1
3
-
250
16
1
-
250
16
-
250
-
220/380
Phases
Wires
Notes:
1. Raised-floor installations require a Russellstoll watertight plug and connector/receptacle.
2. A Russellstoll inline connector used with flexible metal conduit or liquid-tight flexible metal conduit
requires a Russellstoll FSA adapter.
3. See the power plug diagrams in Appendix C, "Template Index" on page C-1.
4. Plug is rated for 3 kVA single phase.
5. Plug is rated for 5 kVA single phase.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3995-3
3995 Optical Library Dataserver
Power Cords, Plugs, and Receptacles for IBM World Trade Europe/Middle East/Africa
(E/ME/A) Corporation Countries: For E/ME/A countries, IBM supplies the power cord for each
unit with an attached plug that corresponds to the power-outlet receptacle most used in that country.
To find the plugs and receptacles needed for each country, match the country diagram number with the
number of the plug diagram in Appendix A, "Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications on
page A-1.
II
Diagram
Number
Country
Afghanistan
18
Algeria
Andorra
Country
Diagram
Number
Egypt
18
18
EI Salvador
5
18
Equador
5
Angola
18
Ethiopia
25
Antigua
46
FIJI
46
AREAS/South (Africa)
46
Finland
18
Argentina
11
France
18
Aruba
18
French Guiana
18
Australia
53
Germany
18
Austria
18
Ghana
46
Bahamas
5
Greece
18
Bahrain
46
Guatemala
5
Bangladesh
22
Guinea
18
Barbados
5
Guyana
46
Belgium
18
Haiti
5
Benin Republic
18
Honduras
5
Bermuda
46
Hong Kong
46
Bolivia
5
Hungary
18
Brazil
18
Iceland
18
Brunei
46
India
46
Bulgaria
18
Indonesia
18
Burkina Faso (Upper Volta)
18
Iran
18
Burma
22
Iraq
46
Burundi
18
Ireland
46
Cameroon
18
Israel
46
Central Africa Republic
18
Italy
25
Chad
18
Ivory Coast
18
Channel Islands
46
Jamaica
5
Chile
25
Japan
33
China (PR)
18
Jordan
18, 23
Colombia
2
Kenya
46
Congo
18
Korea (S)
18
Costa Rica
5
Kuwait
46
Curacao
5
Lebanon
18
Cyprus
46
Ubya
25
Czechoslovakia
18
Uechtensteln
24
Denmark
46
Luxembourg
18
Dominican Republic
5
Macau
18
3995-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
3995 Optical Library Dataserver
Country
Diagram
Number
Malagasy Republic
18
Malawi
Malaysia
Diagram
Number
Country
Switzerland
46
46
Syria
18
46
Taiwan
5
Mall
18
Tanzania
46
Malta
46
Thlaland
5
Martinique
18
Togo
18
Mauritania
18
Trinidad Tobago
5
Mauritius
18
Tunisia
18
Mexico
11
Turkey
18
Monaco
18
Uganda
Morocco
18
United Arab
Mozambique
18
United Kingdom
23
Nepal
46
Upper Volta
18
Netherlands
18
Uruguay
2
Netherlands Antlles
18
USSR
18
New Caledonia
18
Venezuela
5
New Zealand
49
Western Samoa
Nicaragua
3
Yemen
46
Niger
18
Yugoslavia
18
Nigeria
46
Zaire
18
Norway
18
Zambia
46
Oman
46
Zimbabwe
18
Pakistan
22
Panama (Republic of)
5
Papua New Guinea
6
Paraguay
2
Peru
5
Philippines
5
Poland
18
Polynesia
46
Portugal
18
Qatar
46
ROECE
46
Romania
18
Saudi Arabia
18
Senegal
18
Sierra Leone
46
Singapore
46
Somalia
46
South Africa
22
South Asia Region (SAR)
18
Spain
18
Sri Lanka
22
Sudan
18
Sweden
18
23
Eml~ates
(UAE)
23
6
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
3995-5
3995 Optical Library Dataserver
Cabling Schematic for 3995 Model 131, 132, or 151
Feature
Code
Cable Conn
Group ID
Std
SIBS
Std
SIBS
Conn
IO
~+~+-
Channel A
Channel B
From 3995
Feature
Code
Group No.
Std
Std
Max Length *
m (ft)
Model
Notes
1
122 (400)
131, 132, or
151
1,2,4
3
122 (400)
131,132, or
151
1,2,4
No. of
Cables
Conn. 10
0185
2
0185
2
Note: '" The maximum length must be reduced by 9 m (30 tt) for each 3995 connected to the channel. See
planning documentation for the channel for any additional restrictions.
To 3995
Feature
Code
Conn.
10
Model
Notes
Std
2
131,132, or 151
1,4
Std
4
131,132, or 151
1,4
Notes:
1. The 3995 Optical Library Dataserver attaches to:
• All ES/9000 processor models
• ES/3090 processor Models E, S, J, JH, and T
• ES/4381 processor Model Groups 90E, 91E, and 92E.
2. The maximum configuration is 1 controller Model 131 or 151 and 1 optical library expansion unit
Model 111 or 1 controller Model 132 and 1 optical library expansion unit Model 112. All cables
needed to attach a Model 111 to a Model 131 or 151 are shipped with the Model 111. All cables
needed to attach a Model 112 to a Model 132 are shipped with the Model 112.
3. Storage size of the Model 131, 132, or 151 controller and the expansion unit Model 111 or 112 is 144
cartridges each.
4. Two channels are standard on the Model 131, 132, or 151.
3995-6
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
4245 Printer
4245 PRINTER MODEL 1 POWER CORD SPECIFICATIONS
Cable
NominalOD
Length
4.27 m (14ft!.
Chicago, Illinois,
U.S.A. - 1.83 m
(6 ft)
All 60 Hz:
Japan
50/60 Hz
4.27 mm
(14 ft)
50 Hz
(Except
Japan)
Conductors
Number
of Shields
Number
NominalOD
AWG No.
15.4 mm
(0.604 in.l
0
4
1.63 mm
(0.064 in.)
14
11 mm
(0.43 in.l
0
5
1.38 mm
(0.054 in.)
-
4245 PRINTER MODEL 1 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Cable
Group
Conn
10
To
Conn
10
Cable
Group
From
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
3920
Power Sequence
and Control (Optional)
From 4245-1
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
3920
1178
2
1
Conn
ID
Max Length
11/
(ft)
1
122
3
46
(400)
(150)
Commcnts
Bus and tag
Po\ver sequence and control
Notes
1
2
To 4245-1
Conn
ID
Comments
2
Bus and tag
Notes:
1. Maximum cumulative X-length is 122 meters (400 feet), unless modified by system or channel limitation. Maximum cable length must be
reduced by 5 meters (15 feet) for each control unit connected between the 4245 and the channel.
2. Cable group 1178, power sequence and control cable, is optional.
4245-2
InpuVOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
4245 Printer
4245 PRINTER MODELS 12 AND 20 (CHANNEL
ATTACHED) AND MODELS D12 AND D20 (COAXIAL
CABLE ATTACHED, CHANNEL PROTOCOL)
SPECI F ICATIONS
Dimensions:
Height
stacker
Side
with
stacker
710
(28)
950
07-1/2)
1 170
(46-1/4
Front
Rear
Right
Left
760
(30)
970
(38)
610
(24)
610
(24)
Side
Front
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.5 m)
wlo
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
mm
(inches)
1 525
(60)
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Weight:
410 kg (910 Ib)
Heat Output (approx):
W
(BTU/hr)
660
(26)
Front
',,--.-l
Airflow:
Model 12
Model 20
2000
(6,850)
2500
(8,550)
3
17 m /min (600 crm)
Acoustical Data:
I:or definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM General
Information Manual: Installation Mallual-Physical Planning.
GC22-70n.
.
m
LWAd
Operating Idling
(bets)
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
I
T
Idling
(dB)
4245-1250 Hz
7.9
6.6
62.0
50.0
No
No
4245-1260 Hz
7.8
6.9
63.0
52.5
No
No
4245 -20 50 Hz
7.5
6.5
63.5
50.0
No
No
4245 -20 60 Hz
7.9
6.8
62.0
52.5
No
No
Power Requirements:
60 Hz
50 Hz
200,208,
200,220,
220,240,
3RO,400,
380 V
415 V
2.6
2.6
kVA
Model 12
3.1
3.1
Model 20
3
3
Phases
Inrush Current
160 A mu:-.imum
Power Factor
Better than 0.9
Plug
R&S,3760
Connedor
R&S,3934
Receptacle
R&S, 3754
Power Cord Style (sec following pa~c)
Voltages
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Ma:x Wet Bulb
16°C-32°C (60°1:_90°1")
WYr,-80%
0
23(\: (73 F)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
4245-3
4245 Printer
4245 PRINTER MODELS 12, 20,012, AND 020 POWER CORD SPECIFICATIONS
Conductors
Cable
Nominal 00
Length
Number
of Shields
Number
Nominal 00
AWG No.
All 60 Hz:
Japan
50/60 Hz
4.27 m (14 ft)
Chicago, Illinois,
U.S.A. 1.83 m (6 ft)
15.4 mm
(0.604 in.!
0
4
1.63 mm
(0.064 in.)
14
50 Hz
(Except
Japan)
4.27 m
(14 ft)
11 mm
(0.43 in.!
0
5*
1.38 mm
(0.054 in.!
-
*For Brazil and Taiwan, 60 Hz
4245 PRINTER MODELS 12, 20,012, AND 020 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Cable
Group
3920
Conn
10
To
Conn
10
Signal Cables - 1 2
(Bus and Tag)
I I
3
t:
Cable
Group
From
392O
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
1178
Power Sequence
and Control (Optional)
From 4245
Max l:ength
Group
No.
3920
117R
No. of
Cables
2
I
Conn
ID
I
3
m
(It)
Comments
Notes
127
46
(416)
(150)
Bus and ta?,
Power sequence and control
2
1, 3
To 4245
Conn
ID
Comments
2
Bus and tag
Notes:
1. Used on Models 12 and 20 only.
2. U sed on Models 12, 20, 012, and 1)20 if remote power control is needed.
3. Maximum cable length must be reduced by 5 meters (15 feet) for each additional control unit
between the 4245 and the channel.
4. Coaxial signal cables (a maximum kngth of 1 500 meters (4,920 feet)) for Models 012 and 020
are supplied by the customer. See Assembly Of Coaxial Cable and Accessories for Attachment
to IBM Products, GA27-2805.
4245-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
4248 Printer
4248 PRINTER MODELS 1 AND 2
PLAN VIEW (Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
II
I
I
--~--'---r--6-8;---====--87---f-'l
(26·3/41
(3·1/21
395
(15+.1_12_1- - 1 - .
680
(26·3/4)
I
I
1270
(50)
I
I
I
I
I
445
I (17·1/2)
I
750
(29·1/2)
__
____~~-~~-4--~
I
I 915
Front
(35)
~
m
L_________~
____
-
L890_~0!4-
(26.3/4)-1
Shipping dimensions of stacker with outriggers.
Line Cord ~.;;;r:==r
~+~---~
~
I
Cj
U680 ~JI
I
~
I
I
~
685
I~
(131
_____ J
_ _ _ 1 525 _ _ _. . ._ .
(60)
890
(35)
I
----.j
Notcs:
1. The stacker contains light-sensitive sensors: Do not expose
the stal:ker door to direct sunlight.
2. A 150 111m x 150 mm (6 in. x 6 in.) floor cutout is recommended to accommodate the external cables. Locate the
cutout at the right rear corner of the printer (where the bus
and tag: cables arc indicated on the plan view).
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
4248-1
4248 Printer
4248 PRINTER MODELS 1 AND 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions: (With Covers and Stacker)
Front
Side
Height
111m
1 525
1 220
1 350
(inches)
(60)
(48)
(53)
Power Requirements:
Height
1 420*
(56*)
50Hz
60Hz
5
3
5
3
kVA
Phases
Voltages
Side Dimension: (Without Stacker)
111m
750
(inches)
(29-1/2)
Nominal
Minimum
Maximum
200
220
230
240
380
400
415
200
208
220
240
180
193
202
210
333
350
363
180
180
193
208
220
238
249
259
410
432
448
220
220
238
254
50 Hz
Height (Cover Raised):
2032
(80)
nll11
(inches)
Service Clearances:
Front
111111
915
(inches)
(36)
Weight:
With Stacker
Without Stacker
Rear
I 270
(50)
Right
890
(35)
Left
890
(35)
60 Hz
Power Cord:
865 kg ( 1.91 0 Ib)
725 kg (1,600 Ib)
meters
(fcct)
50 HI. 4 500 W (15 AOO BTU/hr)
60 Hz 4 400 W (J 5 ,000 BTU/hr)
Heat Output:
Genera/inlonnation Manual: installation ManualPhysical Planning, GC22-7072.
LWAd
Operating
(bets)
Environment, Operating:
Tcmperature
16°C_32°C (60°F_90°F)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
23°C (73°F)
m
Idling
(bets)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
l.8
(6)
USA and Canada:
(See Appendix D.)
Plug
R&S, 3760 (Provided by IBM)
Receptacle
R&S, 3754 (Provided by Customer)
Connector
R&S, 3934 (Provided by Customer)
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of IBM
Hz
Optional
4.3
( 14)
Power Cord Style: D2 (See Appendix A.)
21 m 3 /min (725 dIn)
Airflow:
Standard
I
T
50
7.9
7.3
61.0
55.0
No
No
60
8.0
7.3
62.0
55.0
No
No
OCR Applications
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C-29°C (60°F-85°F)
20%-70%
21 °c (70°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
10°C_43°C (50°F-l 1OaF)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
27°C (80°F)
Note:
*Height includes Attention light.
4248·2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
4248 Printer
4248 PRINTER MODELS 1 AND 2 CABLING SCHEMATIC
Cable
Group
3920
To
Conn
Conn
ID
ID
Signal Cables - 1 2
(Bus and Tag)
Cable
Group
From
11
t:39~
3
1178
Power Sequence
and Control (Optional)
Notes
I
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
From 4248
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn
ID
3920
1178
2
I
I
3
Max Length
111
(It)
Comments
122
46
(400)
Bus and tag
Power sequl.!nce and control
( ISO)
I
2
To 4248
Conn
ID
Comments
2
Bus and tag
Notes:
1. Maximum cumulative X-length is 122 m (400 ft) unless modified by system or channd
limitation. Maximum cable length must be reduced by 5 III (15 ft) for each control
unit connected between the 4248 and the channel.
2. Cable group 1178, power sequence and control, is optional.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
4248-3
4248 Printer
This page is intentionally left blank.
4248-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
5203 Printer
5203 PR INTER MODEL 3
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
SPEC I FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(cm)
F
S
H
56-1/4
(143)
20
(51)
41-1/2
(105)
R
30
(76)
Rt
0
(0)
Service Clearances:
F
Inches
(cm)
30
(76)
Weight:
475lb (220kg)
L
24
(61 )
Heat Output: 3,300 BTU/hr (840 kcal/hr)
Nota: No external
3115·0 or 3115·2.
c~bles
are required for usc with
Airflow:
300 cfm (9 m3/min)
Power Requirements:*
kVA
1.1
Phases
3
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-100°F (16°C-38°C)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
73°F (23 0 C)
Notes:
* Powered from and abutted to 3115-0 or
3115 -2 when SF 4690 is installed.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
5203-1
5203 Printer
This page is intentionally left blank.
5203-2
.lnputiOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
5213 Console Printer
5213 CONSOLE PRINTER MODEL 1 (WITH 3115-0,
3115-2,3125-0, OR 3125-2)
SPECIFICATIONS
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ft)
Dimensions: *
4"l~r8'
,-Mr
\I (
1/2"
4 Places)
i-----
I
1"
t
i
I
Front
Inches
(em)
1/2"
(4 Places)
---i-+-l-r t
1
I
Farms I
Stand I
17"
I
---~-+I-----
S
H
26-1/2
(67)
15-1/4
(39)
37-3/4
(96)
F
R
Rt
L
30
(76)
30**
(76**)
0
(0)
(0)
Service Clearances:
26-1/2"
1[3~'-= 15_~;::J
F
l
Inches
(em)
Weight:
135 lb (62 kg)
-Heat Output:
Farms
Stand
J4"~
~
Airflow:
ri/2'
250 BTU /hr (64 kcal/hr)
Convection only
Power Requirements: *** 50 Hz
kVA
0.1
"117,,J
o
60Hz
0.2
Environment, Operating:
Telllperature
60°F-90°F (16 o C-32oC)
ReI Humidity
20~.~-80r;~,
Max Wet Bulb
78°F (26°C)
I Recommended
Clearance to
Stand)
Note: For cabling information, see 3115-0, 3115-2,
3125-0, or 3125-2.
5213-1
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
SOoF-II OaF (10oC-430C)
ReI Humidity
8%-80fj{
Max Wet Bulb
80°F (27°C)
Notes:
* Dimensions are with,base frame installed.
** A 6-inch (I5-cm) clearance is recommended
to forms stand (SF 4450), if used.
*** Powered from 3115-0,3115-2,3125-0, or
3125-2 when SF 4692 is installed.
Base frame
available
only with
SF 4692
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
5213·1
5213 Console Printer
This page is intentionally left blank.
5213-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
5424 Multi-Function Card Unit
5424 MULTI-FUNCTION CARD UN IT MODELS A 1, A2, K 1, K2, AND K3 (WITH SF 6510)
PLAN VIEW \Metric Scale: 10 mm = 0.25 m)
SPECIFICATIONS
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
I
Ir,. - - 865=r460~
- - - --If
I
I
(34)
...,...--.1
I
410
(18)
~
~
(16)
Dimensions:
1
t I
460
I
(18)
I
t
760
(30)
mm
(inches)
Front Side Height
I 400
865
750
(34) (29Yz) (55)
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
270
(10-1/2)
Front Rear
760
760
(30) (30)
Right
460
(18)
Left
0
(0)
Weight: 260 kg (570 lb)
63 x 128
(2-1/2 x 5)
750
(29-1/2)
5424
Heat Output: 880 W (3,000 BTU/hr)
Airflow: Convection
I
I
150~
(6)
I
Front
I
I
760
(30)
L________ J~
Note: Two 10-foot (3-meter) signal cables and a 15.6-foot
5-meterl dc common (ground) cable are supplied.
Power Requirements:
kVA
1.3
Phases
I
Voltages
50 Hz
200
60 Hz
200*
Plug
R&S,
Receptacle
R&S,
Connector
R&S,
Power Cord Style
A6
220
208
FS3720
FS3743
FS3913
235
230
(Provided by IBM)
(Provided by Customer)
(Provided by Customer)
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
16°C-38°C (50°F-110°F)
ReI Humidity
80/0-80%
Max Wet Bulh
23°C (73°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
10oC-430C (500F-1100F)
ReI Humidity
80/0-80%
Max Wet Bulb
27°C (80°F)
Notes:
* Not available in U. S.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
5424-1
5424 Multi-Function Card Unit
This page is intentionally left blank.
5424-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
5425 MUlti-Function Card Unit
5425 MULTI-FUNCTION CARD UNIT MODELS A1 AND A2
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in. = 1 ftl
SPECI FICATIONS
Dimensions:
Inches
(em)
F
S
H
34
(86)
29-1/2
(75)
55
(140)
F
R
Rt
L
30
(76)
30
(76)
18
(46)
0*
(0*)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(em)
Weight:
Note: No external cables are required for use with
450lb (210 kg)
Heat Output:
2,000 BTU/hr (510 kcal/hr)
3115-0,3115-2,3125-0, or 3125-2.
Airflow:
Convection only
Power Requirements: **
kVA
0.8
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-100°F (l6 oC-38oC)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
78°F (26°C)
Notes:
*The 5425 Model Al or A2 attaches to the right
end of the 3115-0 or 3115-2 (frame 02) or the
3125-0 or 3125-2 (frame 02) configuration 1
only_
** Powered from 3115-0,3115-2,3125-0, or
3125-2 when SF 4695 is installed.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
5425-1
5425 Multi-Function Card Unit
This page is intentionally left blank.
5425-2
Input/Output EquIpment InstallatIon Manual-PhysIcal PlannIng
6262 Printer
6262 Printer Models 014 and 022
PLAN VIEW (Not to Scale)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX24-3995
(English Scale) or GX24-3996 (Metric Scale).
710
150
(28)-1
100
(4)
180 0
I /
I
swing
swing
'10
* !
,
Stacker
:i=========
+
,".......
,
/
•
"0
(4-1/4)
160
-------1- +:::~::.-lI
[---«2'{)l - :
(6)
I
115
....
/
II
~
6262-014, 022
-f-----+-...L.
2 370
(93-1/2)
+
L~o.t
..
I
760
(30)
-+-1_ _(_4--.l.-1;'_~)+1
,-~ :~ I'- - -_f.;f,=t~- -~
(30)
=rr
'000
2 520 (39-1/2)
760
(.30)
760
(.30)
(99-1/4)------~
Note: The stacker contains light-sensitive sensors;
do not expose the stacker door to direct sunlight.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
.6262-1
6262 Printer
6262 Printer Models 014 and 022
Specifications
Power Requirements:
Dimensions:
mm
(inches)
Front
Side
Height
1 000
(39-1/2)
850
(33-1/2)
1 360
(53-1/2)
Note: The side dimension is 750 mm (29-1/2 in.)
with the rear cover fully open.
Model 014
Model 022
mm
(inches)
Rear
Right
Left
760
(30)
760
(30)
760
(30)
(30)
50 Hz
760
60 Hz
Weight:
kg
(lb)
Model 014
30{)
(665)
Model 022
360
(795)
Modtl 014
1.3
(4.3)
Model 022
Heat Output:
kW
(kBTU/hr)
Airflow:
m 3 /min
(cfm)
5.7
(200)
Nominal
100
110
127
200
220
230
240
100**
110**
120
127**
200**
208
220**
240
240**
Minimum
90
99
114
180
198
207
216
90
99
104
114
180
180
198
208
216
Maximum
110
121
140
220
242
253
264
110
121
121
140
220
220
242
254
264
Model 022 Voltages (Single Phase)
5.7
(200)
50 Hz
Nominal
Minimum
Maximum
200
220
230
240
180
193
202
210
220
242
253
264
200**
208
220**
240
240**
180
180
193
208
208
220
220
242
264
264
60 Hz
IBA4 General i1?/()rmatio17 /14anua/: Installation
Manual---Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
-T-----~ L~-·A>~-
Operating
Idling
Operating I Idling
---~-·r-·-I---(bels)
(bels)
(dB) ~ (dB)
f-S-O/-6-0-+---_-7.-4-_'1 -6.9=[~-_-5-~_._~==S-3
6262-2
1.5kVA
1.7kVA
1.4
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
Hz
1.5kVA
1.7kVA
(4.8)
Acoustical Data:*
L WAd
60 Hz
Model 014 Voltages (Single Phase)
Service Clearances:
Front
50 liz
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
6262 Printer
Environment, Nonoperating (Models 014
and 022):
Specifications (Continued)
Power Cord and Plug Types (USA and
Canada):***
Input Standard Specify Code Speci fy Code
Voltage Plug
9080
9081
10°C to 52°C (50°F to 125°F)
S% to SO%
27°C (SO°F)
Notes:
S-1SP
Russell stoll NEMA
LS-1SP
3720U-1
*
208/240 NEMA
6-1SP
Russell stoll NEMA
L6-1SP
3720U-2
This is preliminary data based on a low
sample size; it is subject to change as additional samples are tested.
**
World Trade 60-Hz tolerances.
120
NEMA
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
*** For power plugs installed in Japan, use JIS
CS303 (100 V), NEMA 5-20P (125 V), or
NEMA 6-15P (200 V). For power plugs
installed in World Trade countries other than
Canada and Japan, see lBAl 6262 Printer Site
Planning and Preparation Guide, GA24-39S7.
Power Cord Length:
meters
(feet)
Standard
4.3
(14)
Optional
1.S
(6)
Environment, Operating (Model 014):
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
S% to SO%
27°C (SO°F)
Environment, Operating (Model 022):
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
13°C to 40°C (55°F to 104°F)
S% to SO%
27°C (SO°F)
OCR and Bar Code Applications (Model
014):
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C to 29°C (60°F to S5°F)
20% to 52%
22°C (72°F)
OCR and Bar Code Applications (Model
022):
Temperature
ReI Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
16°C to 29°C (60°F to S5°F)
20% to 70%
22°C (72°F)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
6262-3
6262 Printer
6262 Printer Models 014 and 022 Cabling Schematic
0185
Conn
Conn
10
Cable
Group From
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
---
ID
1
2
1178 Power Sequence
and Control
Cable
Group
To
--
Signal Cables
(Bus and Tag)
...
0185
3
From 6262
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
Conn
10
Max Length
m
(ft)
Comments
Notes
0185
2
1
122 (400)
Bus and tag
1
1178
1
3
122 (400)
Power sequence and control
2
To 6262
Conn
10
2
Comments
Bus and tag
Notes:
1. Maximum cumulative cable length is 122 meters (400 feet), unless modified by system or channellimitation. Maximum cable length must be reduced by 5 meters (15 feet) for each control unit between the
6262 and the channel.
2. Cable group 1178, power sequence and control, is optional.
6262-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
7012 POWERstatlon and POWERserver
7012 POWERstation and POWERserver
Models 3xx
Plan View (Not to Scale): English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Specifications:
Dimensions for Desktop Installations:
Front
Side
mm
460
525
(20-3/4)
(in.)
(18)
Height
165
(6-112)
Dimensions for Deskslde Installations:
Front
Side
mm
280
525
(20-3/4)
(in.)
(11)
Height
470
(18-1/2)
Service Clearances:
Front
765
mm
(30)
(in.)
Rear
0
(0)
Right
0
(0)
Left
0
(0)
Airflow Clearances:
Front
155
mm
(in.)
(6)
Rear
155
(6)
Right
0
(0)
Left
0
(0)
'Noight
kg
(M~lmum):
(Ib)
15.5
(34)
Heat Output:
kW
(kBTU/hr)
0.2
(0.6)
Airflow:
m3/min
(cfm)
5.7
(200)
EB
7012-3XX
3XX
I
Desktop
Deskslde
Legend:
mmmmm
~i~~'~:nce
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
7012-1
7012 POWERstatlon and POWERserver
Power Requirements:
Voltage
Cabling for Parallel Channel
Attachment
110/208 nominal, 50/S0
Hz
1
Phases
kVA
Group
No.
O.S Typical, with
options
NEMA 5-15P
NEMA 5-15R
3 wire, no shield
Wire size, 1.5 mm z
Bulk wire 00,
8.S mm
Plug type
Receptacle type
Power cord style
0185
For countries other than the United States and
Canada, IBM supplies power cords with an
attached plug that corresponds to the most commonly used power outlet receptacle in that
country.
Operating
(bels)
< LpA>m
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
I
T
Desktop
5.7
5.5
41.0
41.0
No No
Deskside
5.7
5.5
38.0
38.0
No No
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
1SoC-32°C
(SO°F - SOOF)
8%-80%
23°C (73°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
10°C-43°C
(50°F -110°F)
Relative Humidity
8% -80%
Max Wet Bulb
27°C (80°F)
For additional details, see IBM RIse
Systeml6000-Planning for Your Processor
GA23-2407.
7012-2
2
From
To
Max. Length
m (ft.)
7012
Channel
122 (400)
Note: The 7012 must have no more than 122
meters (400 feet) of channel cable between it
and the host computer. If there are other
channel-attached devices located between the
7012 and the host, subtract 4.5 meters (15 feet)
from the maximum allowable distance for each
attached device.
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of the
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
LwAd
No. of
Cables
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
7013 Rise
System/GOO~
7013 RiSe System/6000 Models 5xx
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
Specifications:
urements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions
mm
(in.)
Front
360
(14-1/4)
Side
675
(26-3/4)
Height
610
(24)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
765
765
765
765
(in.)
(30)
(30)
(30)
(30)
If service clearance is not provided, the unit must
be installed so that it can be moved into a position
that provides the required side clearance for
service.
11111111111111111111
11111111111111111111
111\1111111111111111
11111111111111111111
Airflow Clearances:
Front
mm
o
(in.)
(0)
Rear
155
Right
Left
80
80
(6)
(3)
(3)
Weight (Maximum):
kg
55
(Ib)
(120)
---------------------------------------,
Heat Output:
kW
(kBTU/hr)
0.33
(1.13)
Airflow:
m3/min
(cfm)
7.1
(250)
ED
7013-
5XX
I _______________________________________
J
Legend:
:::::::::::::~ Airflow
•••••••••••.••• CI4Iarance
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
7013-1
7013 Rise System/GOOO
Power Requirements:
Voltage
Cabling for Parallel Channel
Attachment
110/208 nominal, SO/60
Hz
1
Phases
kVA
Plug type
Group
No.
0.33
NEMA S-1SP (110 V)
NEMA 6-1SP (208 V)
NEMA S-1SR (110 V)
NEMA 6-1SR (208 V)
RusseliStoll 37S0
3 wi re, no shield
Wire size, 1.S mm2
Bulk wire 00,
8.9 mm
Receptacle type
Connector type
Power cord style
No. of
Cables
2
0185
For countries other than the United States and
Canada, IBM supplies power cords with an
attached plug that corresponds to the most commonly used power outlet receptacle in that
country.
From
To
Max. Length
m (ft.)
7013
Channel
122 (400)
Note: The 7013 must have no more than 122
meters (400 feet) of channel cable between it
and the host computer. If there are other
channel-attached devices located between the
7013 and the host, subtract 4.5 meters (15 feet)
from the maximum allowable distance for each
attached device.
Cabling for ESCON Channel
Attachment
Notes:
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of the
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
!.wAd
Operating
(bels)
m
Idling
(bels)
5.7
5.5
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
Operating
Idling
(dB)
(dB)
39.0
38.0
16°C-32°C
(60°F - 90°F)
8%-80%
23°C (73°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
10°C-43°C
(SO°F - 110°F)
Relative Humidity
8% -80%
Max Wet Bulb
27°C (80°F)
I
T
No No
1. The 7013 will directly attach to the
ES/ESCON LED channel but will not attach
directly to an ESCON Extended Distance
Feature channel. For attachment to an
ESCON Extended Distance Feature (XDF)
channel, an ESCON director must be positioned between the XDF channel and the
7013.
2. Fiber optic jumper cables are required to
attach the 7013 with ESCON adapters to
dynamic data routers. Duplex to duplex
62.5/125 micron fiber optic jumper cables
(part number 14F3797) are available from
IBM in standard lengths up to 122 meters
(400 feet). The jumper cables are stocked in
the following fixed lengths:
For additional details, see IBM RISe
Systeml6000-Planning for Your Processor
GA23-2407.
4 meters
(12 feet)
meters
13 meters
22 meters
(48 feet)
(78 feet)
7
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
feet)
61 meters
(lee feet)
(l58 feet)
(2ee feet)
77 meters
(258
31 meters
46 meters
92 meters
187 meters
122 meters
7013-2
(28
feet)
(3ee feet)
(358
feet)
(488 feet)
7015 POWERserver
7015 POWERserver
Models 9xx
Plan View (Not to Scale): English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Use IBM Physical Planning Template GX24-4046
(English Scale) or GX24-4047 (Metric Scale)
14--_
915
--(36)
I
!
1660
(65)
I
I
U
Specifications:
Dimensions
" - - -_ _ _
Fr_ont_ _
mm
(in.)
Front
650
(25-112)
Side
920
(36-1/4)
Height
1580
(62)
Service Clearances:
Front
Rear
Right
Left
mm
1650
765
915
915
(in.)
(65)
(30)
(36)
(36)
Note: For racks placed side by side, the left and
right service clearances apply only to the
leftmost and rightmost rack. For 5 or 6
racks placed side by side, the left and right
service clearances must be increased to
1525 mm (60 in.). Placing more than 6 racks
side by side is not recommended.
Airflow Clearances:
The recommended service clearance allows for
adequate airflow.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
7015-1
7015 POWERserver
Weight:
Minimum
Configuration
205
(450)
kg
(Ib)
Environment, Operating
(With Tape Unit Installed):
Temperature
Maximum
Configuration
10°C-40°C
(50°-104°F)
Relative Humidity
20% - 80%
Max Wet Bulb
23°C (73°F)
(Without Tape Unit Installed):
10°C-40°C
Temperature
(50° - 104°F)
8%-80%
Relative Humidity
27°C (80°F)
Max Wet Bulb
440
(970)
Heat Output:
kW
(kBTU/hr)
Minimum
Configuration
0.3
(1.03)
Airflow:
m 3/min
(cfm)
11.3
(400)
Power Requirements:
Voltage
Phases
Minimum kVA
Maximum kVA
Plug type
Receptacle type
Connector housing
Power cord style
Maximum
Configuration
1.0
(3.92)
Environment, Nonoperating
(With Tape Unit Installed):
Temperature
10°C-52°C
(50° -125°F)
Relative Humidity
20% -80%
Max Wet Bulb
27°C (80°F)
(Without Tape Unit Installed):
Temperature
10°C - 52°C
(50°-125°F)
8%-80%
Relative Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
27°C (80°F)
200 to 240, 50/60 Hz
1
0.54
2.0
NEMA L6-30P
NEMA L6-30R
NEMA 3750
3 wire, no shield
Wire size, 1.5 mm z
Bulk wire 00,
8.9 mm
For additional details, see IBM RISe
System/6000-Planning for Your Processor
GA23-2407.
For countries other than the United States and
Canada, IBM supplies power cords with an
attached plug that corresponds to the most commonly used power outlet receptacle in that
country.
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of the
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
!.wAd
Operating
(bels)
6.4
7015-2
Idling
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
(dB)
6.2
49.0
47.0
I
T
No
No
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
7015 POWERserver
Cabling for Parallel Channel
Attachment
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
0185
2
From
To
Max. Length
m (ft.)
7015
Channel
122 (400)
Note: The 7015 must have no more than 122
meters (400 feet) of channel cable between it
and the host computer. If there are other
channel-attached devices located between the
7015 and the host, subtract 4.5 meters (15 feet)
from the maximum allowable distance for each
attached device.
Cabling for ESCON Channel
Attachment
Notes:
1. The 7015 will directly attach to the
ES/ESCON LED channel but will not attach
directly to an ESCON Extended Distance
Feature channel. For attachment to an
ESCON Extended Distance Feature (XDF)
channel, an ESCON director must be positioned between the XDF channel and the
7015.
2. Fiber optic jumper cables are required to
attach the 7015 with ESCON adapters to
dynamic data routers. Duplex to duplex
62.5/125 micron fiber optic jumper cables
(part number 14F3797) are available from
IBM in standard lengths up to 122 meters
(400 feet). The jumper cables are stocked in
the following fixed lengths:
meters
meters
meters
meters
(12
(28
(48
(78
feet)
feet)
feet)
feet)
31 meters
46 meters
61 meters
77 meters
(11:)8
(158
(288
(258
feet)
feet)
feet)
feet)
4
7
13
22
92 meters
187 meters
122 meters
(3(;)(;) feet)
(358 feet)
(488 feet)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
7015-3
7015 POWERserver
This page is intentionally left blank.
7015-4
Input/Output EquIpment InstallatIon Manual-PhysIcal PlannIng
7770 Audio Response Unit
7770 AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT MODEL 3
PLAN VIEW (English Scale: 1/4 in.
=1 ft)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
,------.-- ------ -- '-1
1I
I 23-7/8"
I(4 Places)
!
End
.... -I---...J 36"
I .... "
/'" 1
12"
I
, / - - "'!I---r----I (8 Places)
I r--:;:::::=I~t-~L........,&j~\j+-o- __
- --\L- __
~I
I"
Expander:l"
19-1/2
F:lature
~
31-1/2
I
I
I* t
(4 Places)
I too
: (;6;1~!~)
I
\4--30"
L _ _
t: /\
4"xI6"
e+
I
Fron~
32"
II~
+-~F-:l-~
--f\:---~
L..........
i
' ..... _1
_ _ _ _ __ _ _ _
~---73-1/2"---+-I
I
I
I
10-3/4"
(4 Places)
37-1/2"
I
I
I
I
I
S
H
37-1/2*
(95*)
31-1/2
(80)
70
(178)
Service Clearances:
Inches
(cm)
F
R
Rt
L
42
(107)
36
(91)
30
(76)
30
(76)
I
42 , . :
H
30"
_
Inches
(cm)
F
__ -.l
16 Lines
600
(280)
Weight:
Ib
(kg)
48 Lines
1,200
(550)
Heat Output:
BTU/hr
(kcal/hr)
4,800
(1 250)
7,200
(l 850)
Airflow:
cfm
(m3/min)
400
(12)
800
(23)
Power Requirements:
kVA
50Hz
60Hz
Phases
Plug
Connector
Receptacle
Power Cord Style
1.4
1.6
1
R&S, PS3720
R&S, FS3913
R&S, FS3743
A3
2.0
2.4
1
A3
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
60°F-90°F (16°C-32°C)
8%-80%
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
780F (260C)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
50o F-II0op (lOoC-430C)
ReI Humidity
8%-80%
Max Wet Bulb
80 0 p (27°C)
Notes:
* Dimension is 73-1/2" (187 cm) with expander
feature.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
7770-1
7770 Audio Response Unit
7770 AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT CABLING SCHEMATIC
~
675
-
676
~.
Multiplexer Channel
Other Control Units
7770
677
~
679
~
Croup
No.
Sequence and Control (Ero)
678
Communication
(or 680)
IBM 3975 (or Equivalent) -
Channel-to-Channel Adapter
Max
No.oI
('aMes
675
676
677
678
(or 680)
679
2
2
I
4
4
2
From
7770
7770
7770
7770
7770
7770
To
1,('l/gtl1 (It)
Notes
ISO
40
40
2
4,5
4,5,6
1,3
Multiplexer Channel
Control Unit
Channel
Communication
IBM 3975
Channel-ta-Channel Adapter
Notes:
j.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Total cable length of 200 feet (unless modified by general control-to-channel cahling schematic)
4Ivailable to att4lch up to eight control units.
Sequence and control (EPO).
To channel-tn-channel adapter (SI; 1850).
One group for each four data set~.
See "Cables for IBM and Non-IBM Devices" for cable specifications.
For 50-Hz machines, lise group number in p4lrentheses.
Cables for IBM and Non-IBM Devices
Group
Termination
~
--------c{]
--------ciJ
678
4-25 Pin EIA RS-232A Connectors
-------~ciJ
-------~c{]
---------m
LwAd
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(qB)
Idling
(dB)
7.2
7.2
56
56
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9032-1
9032 ESCON Director
Power Requirements: (without ESCD console)
28 port machine
Each 4 port addition
60 port machine
0.8 kVA (350 W)
0.04 kVA (30 W)
1.1 kVA(580W)
Phases:
Hz:
Voltage:
50/60
200-240 V ac
The 9032 provides a duplex 220 V outlet for the
ESCD console. This outlet is located at the rear
of the 9032 operator panel, under the panel top
cover.
If the customer chooses not to use the 220 V
outlet provided by the 9032, or if a 110 V console
will be used, an appropriate outlet must be provided within reach of the 1.8 meter (6 tt) console
power cord, at the rear of each 9032 on which an
ESCD console will be located. This outlet should
be located so neither the ESCD console power
cord nor receptacle interferes with the 9032
doors. The bottom of the doors are 80 mm (3.15
in) above the floor.
If the Console Sharing Availability feature is
used, another power outlet is required for the
spare ESCD console. An outlet from a 9032 or
one provided by the customer may be used.
9032s sharing the same ESCD console must be
installed side-by-side.
Power Cords
Country
Specify
code
Length
meters
(feet)
Plug
type
sro
4.1
(13.5)
A2
US,
Canada
9800
4.1
(13.5)
L
US,
Canada
9801
4.1
(13.5)
K
US,
Canada
9896
1.7
(5.5)
A2
US
9987
1.7
(5.5)
L
US
9986
1.7
(5.5)
K
US
Z
t
Note:
t
See Appendix A
Z
For all other countries, the 3-dlglt country code Is
used to provide a cord with the plug most commonly
used In that country.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature: 16°C to 32°C (60.8°F to 89.6°F)
Relative Humidity: 8% to 800/0
Max Wet Bulb: 23°C (73.4°F).
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature: 10°C to 43°C (50°F to 109.4°F)
Relative Humidity: 80/0 to 80%
Max Wet Bulb: 27°C (80.6°F)
9032 Ports:
The 9032 must be ordered with a minimum of 28
ports, at least 16 of which must be LED. Additional LED or Extended Distance Feature (XDF)
ports can be ordered, in 4-port increments, to
satisfy the minimum of 28 ports and up to the
maximum of 60 ports. For more information, see
Planning for Enterprise System Connection Directors.
9032-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
9032 ESCON Director
9032 Cabling Schematic
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Std
3797
Std
or
4034
3797
Std
or
4035
Conn
10
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
1
15
2
16
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
n/a
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
17
19
18
20
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
3797
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
21
23
22
24
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
25
27
26
28
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cab 1es
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
29
31
30
32
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
Ffber Optfc
Jumper Cables
33
35
34
36
Fiber Optfc
Jumper Cables
n/a
Std
or
4036
3797
4040
or
4058
3797
4041
or
4051
3797
n/a
n/a
n/a
:
4047
or
4057
Conn
10
3797
n/a
Ffber Optfc
Jumper Cab 1es
:
:
~
57
59
I
I
58
60
:
~
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
Chapter 1. Machine Speclncatlons and Cabling Schematics
9032-3
9032 ESCON Director
Conn
ID
3797
Number
of
Cables
8
1,3,5, ... 27
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1,2,3,4
4040
3797
2
29,31
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1,2,3,4
4041
3797
2
33, 35
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1,2,3,4
4042
3797
2
37, 39
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1,2,3,4
Feature
Code
Cable
GrOUD
Std
Notes
4043
3797
2
41,43
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1,2,3,4
4044
3797
2
45,47
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1,2,3,4
4045
3797
2
49,51
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1,2,3,4
4046
3797
2
53,55
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1,2,3,4
4047
3797
2
57,59
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1,2,3,4
4034
nla
0
17, 19
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4035
nla
0
21, 23
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4036
0
25,27
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
0
29,31
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4051
nla
nla
nla
0
33, 35
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4052
nJa
0
37,39
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4053
nla
nla
0
41,43
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
0
45,47
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
nla
nla
0
49,51
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4056
0
53,55
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4057
nla
0
57,59
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4050
4054
4055
Notes:
1. Multlmode 62.5/125 micrometer fiber optic jumper cables, cable group 3797, In lengths up to 122 m (400 ft) are supplied
with this product for as many as 50% of the ordered multi mode ports. Additional cables required that are not supplied
with the 1/0 devices must be ordered separately. With lengths greater than 122 m, see Planning for Enterprise System
Connection Links, GA23-0367, for other considerations.
2. Using a 62.5/125 micrometer trunk cable, a maximum length of3 km Is allowed, based on link budget considerations.
Using a 50/125 micrometer trunk cable, the maximum length Is 2 km The maximum cable length of a channel to controlunit path may also be control-unit dependent. For more Information, see the link budget calculations In Planning for
Enterprise System Connection Links.
3. IBM multi mode 62.5/125 micrometer fiber optic jumper cables are available In these lengths: 4 m (12 ft), 7 m (20 ft), 13
m (40 ft), 22 m (70 ft), 31 m (100 ft), 46 m (150 ft), 61 m (200 ft), 77 m (250 ft), 92 m (300 ft), 107 m (350 ft), 122 m (400 ft),
manufactured to +0, -2% tolerances. Custom lengths from 4 m (12 ft) to 500 m (1640 ft) may be purchased. English
dimensions are approximate. For Information on multi mode 62.5/125 micrometer fiber optic jumper cables, see
Chapter 3, "ESCON Cabling Information" on page 3-1.
4. Odd-numbered cable connector IDs (for example, 1,3) are for cable-ordering purposes only. When making the actual
physical connection decisions, the cable connector ID Implications of TO or FROM do not apply, because any port can be
either a logical TO or FROM.
5. When ordering the Extended Distance feature, single-mode 9/125 micrometer fiber optic jumper cables are not supplied
and must be purchased. For Information on single-mode fiber optic jumper cables, see Chapter 3, "ESCON Cabling
Information" on page 3-1.
9032-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
9033 ESCON Director
9033 ESCON Director Model 1
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
Specifications:
urements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
.-----------,
•
•
•
ll r
(n't
~
t
914.4
(36)
~
t
:
• [ZJ
140
(5.5)
~
713
(28.1)
+
t
914.4
(36)
483
(19)
L_
100~
(4)
~25
(1)
!
mm
(in.)
Front
Side
Height
485
(19)
715
(28-1/4)
225
(9)
Service Clearances:
mm
(in.)
Front
Rear
Left
Right
915
(36)
915
(36)
100
(4)
25
(1 )
Weight:
40 kg
(88 lb.)
Heat Output:
8 port machine
12 port machine
16 port machine
0.5 kBTU/hr
0.5 kBTU/hr
0.5 kBTU/hr
6.0 m3/min. (210 cfm)
Airflow:
Air flows from the rear of the machine to the
front.
Acoustical Data: For definitions, see "Acoustics"
in Chapter 3 of IBM General Information Manual:
Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GC22-7072.
< LpA>m
'-wAd
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
7.0
7.0
53
53
Power Requirements:
8 port machine
12 port machine
16 port machine
0.25 kVA (132 W)
0.27 kVA (142 W)
0.29 kVA (152 W)
Phases:
Hz:
Voltage:
50/60
200-240 V ac
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9033-1
9033 ESCON Director·
Power Cords
Plug
Country
Specify
code
Length
met en
(feet)
STD
3.2
(10.5)
K
US,
Canada
9800
3.2
(10.5)
L
US,
Canada
9801
3.2
(10.5)
A2
US,
Canada
9896
1.7
(5.5)
A2
US
9986
1.7
(5.5)
K
US
9987
1.7
(5.5)
L
US
Z
type •
Environment, Operating:
Note:
•
Z
If the Console Sharing Availability feature is
used, another power receptacle must be provided for the spare ESCD console.
See Appendix A, "Power Plug and Power Cord
Style Specifications" on page A-1.
For all other countries, the 3-dlglt country code Is
used to provide a cord with the plug most commonly
used In that country.
Temperature: 10°C to 4QoC (50°F to 104°F)
Relative Humidity: S% to 80 0/ 0
Max Wet Bulb: 27°C (80.6°F).
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature: 10°C to 52°C (50°F to 125.6°F)
Relative Humidity: S% to 80 0/0
Max Wet Bulb: 27°C (SO. 6°F)
Note:
The upper limit of dry bulb temperature must be
lowered by 1.00C for every 137 m (450 ft) of elevation above 915 m (3000 ft).
The upper limit of wet bulb temperature must be
lowered by 1.0oC for every 274 m (899 ft) of elevation above 305 m (1000 ft).
The 9033 is connected to its ESCD console or
another director by a 1.7 m (5.6 ft) signal cable
(supplied with 9033). If necessary, a 3.0 m (9.S
tt) cable may be ordered to connect the 9033 to
an ESCD console (but not to connect to another
director).
The temperature/humidity limits shown above
may not apply to the console. For console
limits, refer to appropriate console specifications.
A power receptacle must be provided within
reach of the 1.S m (6 ft) console power cord.
The receptacle must provide the correct voltage
for the console ordered, either 110 or 220 V.
The 9033 can be ordered with a minimum of S
ports, which can be all LED ports, 4 LED ports
and 4 Extended Distance Feature (XDF) ports, or
8 XDF ports. Two additional 9033 port upgrades
can be ordered, which can be XDF ports, LED
ports, or a combination of both. For more information, see Planning for Enterprise System Connection Directors.
When 9033s share an ESCD console, the 9033s
and the console must be next to each other.
9033-2
9033 Ports:
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
9033 ESCON Director
9033 Cabling Schematic
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
4020
or
4030
3797
4020
or
4039
3797
4040
or
4050
3797
4040
or
4050
3797
Conn
Conn
10
10
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cabl es
1
2
3
1
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
5
7
8
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
11
10
12
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
13
15
14
16
Fi ber Optic
Jumper Cables
Fiber Optic
Jumper Cables
nfa
6
nfa
9
nfa
nfa
Feature
Code
4020
Cable
GrouD
3797
Number
of
Cables
2
Conn
ID
1.3
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
NotR!!!
1.2.3.4
4020
3797
2
5. 7
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1.2.3.4
4030
nla
0
1.3
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4030
nla
0
5. 7
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4040
3797
2
9. 11
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1.2.3.4
4040
3797
2
13. 15
Multlmode fiber optic jumper cable
1.2.3.4
4050
nla
nla
0
9. 11
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
0
13.15
Single mode fiber optic jumper cable
5
4050
Notes:
1. Multlmode 62.5/125 micrometer fiber optic jumper cables. cable group 3797. In lengths up to 122 m (400 ttl are supplied
with this product for as many as 50% of the ordered multlmode ports. Additional cables required that are not supplied
with the 1/0 devices must be ordered separately. With lengths greater than 122 m. see Planning for Enterprise System
Connect/on Links. GA23-0367. for other conSiderations.
2. Using a 62.5/125 micrometer trunk cable, a maximum length of 3 km Is allowed, based on link budget conSiderations.
Using a 50/125 micrometer trunk cable. the maximum length Is 2 km. The maximum cable length of a channel to controlunit path may also be control-unit dependent. For more Information. see the link budget calculations In Planning for
Enterprise System Connection Links.
3. IBM multi mode 62.5/125 micrometer fiber optic jumper cables are available In these lengths: 4 m (12 ttl. 7 m (20 tt). 13
m (40 tt). 22 m. (70 tt). 31 m (100 ttl. 46 m (150 tt). 61 m (200 tt). 77 m (250 tt). 92 m (300 ttl. 107 m (350 ttl. 122 m (400 ttl.
manufactured to +0. -2% tolerances. Custom lengths from 4 m (12 tt) to 500 m (1640 ttl may be purchased. English
dimensions are approximate. For Information on multlmode 62.5/125 micrometer fiber optic jumper cables. see
Chapter 3. "ESCON Cabling Information" on page 3-1.
4. Odd-numbered cable connector IDs (for example. 1.3) are for cable-orderlng purposes only. When making the actual
physical connection decisions. the cable connector ID Implications of TO or FROM do not apply. because any port can be
either a logical TO or FROM.
5. When ordering the Extended Distance Feature. single-mode 9/125 micrometer fiber optic jumper cables are not supplied
and must be purchased. For Information on single-mode fiber optic jumper cables. see Chapter 3. "ESCON Cabling
Information" on page 3-1.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9033-3
9033 ESCON Director
This page is intentionally left blank.
9033-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
9034 ESCON Converter
9034 ESCON Converter Model 1
Specifications:
Plan View (Not to Scale): English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
Height
110
(4-1/2)
Side
260
(10-1/4)
Front
440
(17-1/4)
mm
(in.)
Service Clearances:
40
(1-3/4)
115
(4-3/4)
mm
(inches)
I
Front
765
(30)
I
L
1
j
1.275
(50-1/4)
n5
J_____________(~l_~~_
Right
40
(1-1/2)
Left
40
(1-1/2)
5.5 kg (12 Ib)
Weight:
I
I
Rear
250
(10)
Heat Output:
32.3 W
31.9 W
(97.6 BTU/hr)
(96.6 BTU/hr)
Airflow:
at 120 V
at 220 V
.83 m3/min (30 cfm)
Power Requirements:
0.051 kVA
0.057 kVA
at 120 V
at 220 V
Phases:
25
Voltage:
-"11/04--:--14-:--1 (1) 305
~
~
(12)
520
(20-1/2)
100 -125 V ac at 50/60 Hz
and
200 - 240 V ac at 50/60 Hz
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
1ooe - 40 0 e (50°F -104°F)
8%-80%
27°e (80.6°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
If you plan to install one or more 9034s with 110
V ac power on a raised floor, you must locate
the power receptacles above the floor.
If a 9034 is being installed on a wall shelf or in
an equipment closet, the cable opening at the
rear of the shelf should be approximately 305
mm (12 in.) by 115 mm (4-1/2 in.) from the rear of
the 9034.
10oe-52°e
(50°F -125.6°F)
8%-80%
27°e (80.6°F)
Power Cords:
The power cord has a separate grounding conductor. Power provided to this unit must also
provide a separate grounding conductor.
A 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with country standard
plug, is supplied based on the 3-digit country
code.
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9034·1
9034 ESCON Converter
When an alternative to the 2.7 m (9 ft) power
cord is required, use one of these specify feature
codes:
Specify
code
Voltage
Length
meters
(feet)
Plug
type
SrD
CountryZ
120
2.7
(9)
H
9513
120
4.3
(14)
H
9986
120
1.8
(6)
H
US
9890
120
1.8
(6)
J
US
9891
120
4.3
(14)
J
US,
Canada
9931
220
4.3
(14)
K
9895
220
1.8
(6)
K
US
9511
220
1.8
(6)
L
US
9896
220
1.8
(6)
A2
US
9894
220
4.3
(14)
L
US,
Canada
9801
220
4.3
(14)
A2
US,
Canada
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
1
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
5.7
5.7
42.0
42.0
Note:
1
See Appendix A, "Power Plug and Power Cord
Style Specifications" on page A-1 for the plug type.
I
For all other countries, the 3-dlglt country code Is
used to provide a cord with the plug most commonly
used In that country.
9034-2
< LpA>m
LwAd
US
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
9034 Enclosure
9034 Enclosure
Plan View (Not to Scale) English measurements are shown in parentheses.:
1----,
I
100
)
1
(4
If an enclosure is being installed on a raised
floor, the floor opening required for the fiber and
copper cables must not be more than 395 mm
(15-1/2 in.) by 190 mm (7-112 in.).
T)
915
190
(7-t) ,
------rt
510
(20)
f
The 9034 enclosure is shown fully-populated with
8 9034s. The enclosure does not provide any
power.
2,340
(92)
Note: When plannjng for an enclosure, it is
recommended that all the 9034s installed in the
same enclosure have a single common power
switch, for example a power box with 8 receptacles controlled by one power switch.
915
(36)
Specifications: Dimensions:
Height
80 mm
(3.0 in.)
Base
Base Opening
25
1) ~Ioo___-I~ 480
(
(18-3/4)
Shelf
25
140 mm
(5-112 in.)
Width
480 mm
(18-3/4 in.)
395 mm
(15-1/2 in.)
480 mm
(19 in.)
Depth
510 mm
(20 in.)
190 mm
(7-112 in.)
425 mm
(16-3/4 in.)
(1)
530
(20-3/4)
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Front
915
(36)
Rear
915
(36)
Right
25
(1 )
Left
25
(1 )
Note: In a non-air-conditioned environment, a
maximum of 2 enclosures may be placed alongside each other with the required clearance.
Weight:
Enclosure base, shelf,
and 9034
Each additional shelf
and 9034
Fully populated
(includes 8 9034s)
12 kg (28 Ibs)
8 kg (18 Ibs)
70 kg (155 Ibs)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9034-3
9034 Enclosure
9034 Cabling Schematic:
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Std
3797
Fiber
Optic
Jumper
Cable
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Std
3797
Std
0185
Conn
Conn
10
ID
---1
Number
of
2
I
I
~
Bus/Tag
Signal
Cables
Notes
Conn
ID
Comments
1
1
Fiber optic jumper cable
1,2,3
2
2
Bus and tag cables
4
Cables
Notes:
1. Using 62.5/125 micrometer cable, a maximum length of 3 km Is allowed, based on link budget considerations. Using
50/125 micrometer trunk cable, the maximum length Is 2 km. The maximum cable length of a channel to control-unit path
may also be control-unit dependent. For more Information, see the link budget calculations In Planning for Enterprise
Systems Connection Links.
2. This product Is supplied with one IBM fiber optic jumper cable, available In these lengths: 4 m (12 tt), 7 m (20 tt), 13 m
(40 tt), 22 m (70 tt), 31 m (100 tt), 46 m (150 tt), 61 m (200 tt), 77 m (250 tt), 92 m (300 tt), 107 m (350 tt), 122 m (400 tt) and
manufactured to +0, -2% tolerances. Custom lengths up to 500 m (1640 tt) may be purchased. English dimensions
are approximate.
3. For connections beyond 122 m, see Planning for Enterprise Systems Connection Links for other considerations.
4. Supplied with downstream 110 device, maximum length Is 122 m (400 tt).
Duplex Fiber
Optic cable
Host
Channel Attachment Feature
9034
~---------.~
ComrolUntt
A maximum of eight
control units for each 9034.
Figure 10. Typical Configuration in One Building
Duplex Fiber
Optic Cable
Host
Ig':'~'r~~~h- --::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::---::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::=-Building One
Distribution Panel
Fiber
Optic
Trunk
cable
Duplex Fiber
Optic Cable
Bus Cable
u_n_I1J_:--:-~__.IL_9_03_4_-.Jr:::::::::::=::::::::--:::::::=:::::::::::::::::-
LCo_nt_r_o_1
Tag cable
Building Two
Figure
1,.
9034-4
Distribution Panel
Typical Configuration in Two Buildings
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
,--
9035 ESCON Converter
9035 ESCON Converter
Model 2
Plan View (Not to Scale) English measurements are shown in parentheses.:
H=
H:::
Specifications:
Dimensions:
Side
460
(18-1/4)
Front
220
(8-3/4)
mm
(in.)
Height
190
(7-314)
Service Clearances:
mm
(inches)
Rear
255
(10)
Front
255
(10)
Weight:
Right
3
(1/4)
Left
3
(114)
11.5 kg (25 Ib)
Heat Output:
33W
112 BTU/hr to air (maximum)
at 120-127 VAC
32W
108 BTU/hr to air (maximum)
at 220-240 VAC
Airflow:
1 m3/min (30 cfm)
Power Requirements:
kVA:
0.084 (maximum)
Phases:
Voltage:
100 -127 V ac at 50/60 Hz
and
200 - 240 V ac at 50/60 Hz
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-40°C (50°F-104°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80.6°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Rei Humidity
Max Wet Bulb
10°C-52°C
(50°F -125.6°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80.6°F)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9035-1
9035 ESCONConverter
Power Cords:
The power cord has a separate grounding conductor. Power provided to this unit must also
provide a separate grounding conductor.
A 2.7 m (9 tt) power cord with country standard
plug, is supplied based on the 3-digit country
code.
When an alternative to the 2.7 m (9 tt) power
cord is required, use one of these specify feature
codes:
Specify
code
Voltage
Length
meters
(feet)
Plug
type
SrD
CountryZ
120
2.8
(9)
H
9513
120
4.3
(14)
H
9986
120
1.8
(6)
H
US
9890
120
1.8
(6)
J
US
9891
120
4.3
(14)
J
US,
Canada
9931
220
4.3
(14)
K
9895
220
1.8
(6)
K
US
9511
220
1.8
(6)
L
US
9896
220
1.8
(6)
A2
US
9894
220
4.3
(14)
L
US,
Canada
9801
220
4.3
(14)
A2
US,
Canada
1
US
Note:
1
z
See Appendix A, "Power Plug and Power Cord
Style Specifications" on page A-1 for the plug type.
For all other countries, the 3-dlglt country code Is
used to provide a cord with the plug most commonly
used In that country.
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22"7072.
m
LwAd
9035-2
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
OperatIng
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
6.2
6.2
46.0
46.0
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
9035 ESCON Converter
9035 Cabling Schematic
Conn
ID
Conn
ID
cable
Group
Fe.lure
Code
3797
Std
Fiber
Optic
Jumper
Cable
BuslTag
Signal
Cables
Feature
Code
Cable
Group
Std
Std
Conn
ID
0185
Number
of
Cables
2
Comments
Notes
3797
1
1
Bus and tag cables
1
2
Fiber optic jumper cable
2.3.4
Notes:
1. Supplied with the 9035. the maximum length Is 122 m (400 tt).
2. Using 62.5/125 micrometer cable. a maximum length of 3 km Is allowed. based on link budget considerations. Using
50/125 micrometer trunk cable. the maximum length Is 2 km. The maximum cable length of a channel to control-unit path
may also be control-unit dependent. For more Information. see the link budget calculations In Planning for Enterprise
Systems Connection Links. GA23-0367. Contact your marketing representative for more Information about supported
devices. distances. data rates. and modes.
3. The downstream device provides one IBM fiber optic jumper cable, available in these lengths: 4 m (12 tt), 7 m (20 tt). 13
m (40 tt). 22 m (70 tt). 31 m (100 tt), 46 m (150 tt). 61 m (200 tt). 77 m (250 tt), 92 m (300 tt). 107 m (350 tt). 122 m (400 ttl.
Custom lengths may be purchased from 4 m (12 tt) to 500 m (1640 tt). in 1 tt Increments. English dimensions are
approximate.
4. For connections beyond 122 m, see Planning for Enterprise Systems Connection Links. GA23-0367 for other considerations.
Host
BusC8ble
r
Tag Cable
I
Jj I
Duplex Fiber
Optic cable
9035
r::::=-===::-.:::::::::.,
3990
I
A maximum of eight
control units for
each parallel channel
Figure 12. Typical Configuration in One Building
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9035-3
9035 ESCON Converter Model 2 Rear Panel
Host
-
Duplex Fiber
Optic Cable
Bus Cable
r:::::::::::;:-L
1_9_03_5_-.Jr:::::::::oo:::::::::::::::=::::::::=::::JIIIIII
Tag Cable
Building One
Distribution Panel
Duplex Fiber
r-a._--I-Jr-
r=-=-=::::::=~~~'~"~O_-::::=O=::::-
3990
L.....-_ _ _.....J
Building Two
Distribution Panel
Figure 13. Typical Configuration in Two Buildings
9035 ESCON Converter Model 2 Rear Panel
Power
Cable
Receptacle
Bus and Tag Cable
Receptacle Assembly
\
r-'
II
~
@
~
~m0~usln '~g ::
~
JII
L
'~
~usout'~1 ~~_~~~5~
I
r
~1~~
m[
@
....,
-
if
~::5~l
@
'=
~
J~
.agout~~ ~~~_~:5~
I
J~
agln
I
~~ ::_~ ::3~
~
Priority
High
I----"Low
I~ V
Service Mode
Service
Normal
/
/~
/
'----
/ U----
Fiber Optic
Cable
Receptacle
9035-4
Aber
Optic
Trunk
Cable
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
9037 Sysplex Timer
9037 Sysplex Timer
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
Specifications:
urements are shown in parentheses.
Dimensions:
190
r----------' t
(7-112)11·.
rU
--r-r-.~
Height
225
(9)
Service Clearances:
t
g1
140
Side
715
(28-1/4)
915
(36)
t :.~
(5-1/2)
Front
480
(19)
mm
(in.)
715
(28-1/4)
Right
25
(1 )
Left
100
(4)
Rear
915
(36)
Front
915
(36)
mm
(in.)
Weight:
30 kg
(65 lb.)
+
Heat Output:
121 W
(415 BTU/hr)
t
Airflow:
4.3 m3 /min.
(150 cfm)
915
(36)
L._
100 ---...l
(4),
'------- 25
l
Air flows from the rear of the machine to the
front.
Acoustical Data:
1(1)
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
< LpA>m
LwAd
Operating
(bels)
Idling
(bels)
Operating
(dB)
Idling
(dB)
6.9
6.9
53
53
Power Requirements:
0.21 kVA
at 220 V
Phases:
Hz:
Voltage:
50/60
200-240 V ac
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9037-1
9037 Sysplex Timer
Power Cord:
Environment, Operating:
No specify code is required to order the default
option. The correct power cord will be supplied,
based on the 3-digit country code.
Temperature: 10° to 40°C (50° to 104°F)
Relative Humidity: 80/0 to 80%
Max Wet Bulb: 27°C (80°F).
Environment, Nonoperating:
Specify
code
Length
meters
(feet)
Plug
type·
STD
3.2
(10.5)
K
3.2
(10.5)
A2
3.2
(10.5)
L
9986
1.7
(5.5)
K
US
9896
1.7
(5.5)
A2
US
9511
1.7
(5.5)
L
US
9801
9894
CountrY
US,
Temperature: 10°C to 52°C (50°F to 125.6°F)
Relative Humidity: 80/0 to 800/0
Max Wet Bulb: 27°C (80.6°F)
Canada
US,
Canada
US,
Canada
Note:
•
I
See Appendix A, "Power Plug and Power Cord
Style Specifications" on page A-1 for the plug type.
For all other countries, the 3-dlglt country code Is
used to provide a cord with the plug most commonly
used In that country.
9037-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
9037 Sysplex Timer
9037 Cabling Schematic:
Feature
Code
Ports
Std
4040
4040
4048
Fiber
Optic
Jumper
Cables
1
2
3
Fiber
Optic
Jumper
Cables
1
2
4
3
4
Fiber
Optic
Jumper
Cables
3
4
Fiber
Optic
Jumper
Cables
1
2
3
4
1
2
Copper Synch.
Cable
4048
Feature
Code
Number
of
Cables
Comments
Notes
Std
4
Fiber optic jumper cable pIn 14F3797
1,2,3
4040
4
Fiber optic jumper cable pIn 14F3797
1,2,3
4040
4
Fiber optic jumper cable pIn 14F3797
1,2,3
4040
4
Fiber optic jumper cable pIn 14F3797
1,2,3
4048
1
Copper synchronization cable
4
Notes:
1. Cables are not Included. They must be ordered separately, using the part number listed and the required length (see
note 3).
2. Using 62.5/125 micrometer cable, a maximum length of 3 km Is allowed, based on link budget considerations. Using
50/125 micrometer trunk cable, the maximum length Is 2 km. For more Information, see the link budget calculations In
Planning for Enterprise Systems Connection Links.
3. IBM fiber optic jumper cables are available In these lengths: 4 m (12 tt), 7 m (20 tt), 13 m (40 tt), 22 m (70 tt), 31 m (100
tt), 46 m (150 tt), 61 m (200 tt), 77 m (250 tt), 92 m (300 tt), 107 m (350 tt), 122 m (400 tt), manufactured to +0, -2%
tolerances. Custom lengths up to 500 m (1640 tt) may be purchased. English dimensions are approximate.
~
Three meter cable (9.8 tt) Is Included with feature and cannot be ordered separately.
Chapter 1. Machine Speclflcatlons and Cabling Schematics
9037-3
9037 Sysplex Timer
This page is intentionally left blank.
9037-4
Input/Output-Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
IBM 9343 Storage, Cont,rollers
Specifications
IBM 9343 Storage Controller Models
C02, CC2, C04, CC4, D04, and DC4
Dimensions :
Front
Plan View (Not to Scale)
mm
(inches)
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Side
Height
750
980
(29-1/2) (38-1/2)
1580
(62-1/4)
Use IBM Physical Planning Template, GX22-7143.
-1
Service Clearances:
r
--~ ..............., ....
750
(29-1/2)
I
I
I
I
1
-r-
I
+
I
+
978
Y
I
(38-1/2)
-t
-/
+
+
--:--1----'
1L'f
+ - 150
L ______~__ (29-1/2)
~
I
I
}70
I
(2-314)
___________
JI
Floor Load Rating
Front
Rear
X
V
340 kg/m2
mm
1143
889
889
813
(70 Ib/ft2)
(inches)
(45)
(35)
(35)
(32)
240 kg/m2
mm
1150
815
1347
1347
(50 Ib/ft2)
(inches)
(45)
(32)
(53)
(53)
Floor Load: The right and left service clearances are
required for floor loading. If the floor has strength
other than those noted above, see your structural
engineer for more information.
"weight: 351 kg (774 Ibs) estimate with two Model
1s (812s) or 2s (822s) installed.
Weight Maximum: 753 kg (1660 Ibs) estimate with
16 Model 1s (812s) or 2s (822s) installed.
Airflow: 5.4 ml/min (190 ft3/min) with two Model
1s (812s) or 2s (822s) installed.
Airflow Maximum: 19.3 ml/min (680 ft3/min) with
16 Model 1s (812s) or 2s (822s) installed.
Acoustical Data:
For definitions, see "Acoustics" in Chapter 3 of
IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7072.
LWAd
Operating Idling
(bels)
(be Is)
7.0
I
7.0
m
Operating
(dB)
I
52
I
Idling
(dB)
52
Note:
Acoustic data with ten Model 1s
(812s) or 2s (822s) installed.
Chapter 1. Machine Speclflcatlons'and Cabllng,Schematlcs
9343-1
IBM 9343 Storage Controllers
Input Voltages:*, **
Supply
Three Phase Wye
Single Phase
Three Phase Delta
49 - 61
49 - 61
49 - 51
Frequency Range (Hz)
Voltage Range (V)
200 - 240
200 - 240
380 - 415
Voltage Tolerances (V)
180 - 259
180 - 259
333 - 448
Notes:
•
Proper Feature Option must be selected when ordering box (see Sales Manual for details), to identify
installation voltage.
••
Verify proper voltage selection on primary power box during installation.
Heat Output and Power Requlrements:*, **
Configuration
Track Following
Maximum Seek Rate·"
Max kVA
MaxkW
kBTU/hr
Max kVA
MaxkW
kBTU/hr
C02, CC2
(8 modules)
1.2
1.1
3.75
1.7
1.6
5.45
C02, CC2
(12 modules)
1.6
1.5
5.11
2.4
2.3
7.84
C04, CC4, 004,
and DC4
(16 modules)
2.2
2.0
6.82
3.5
3.3 ............
11.25............
Notes:
•
Power requirements and heat output is the same for all input voltages. This product is not phase sensitive. Values may vary with installed features and manufacturing variations.
••
Phase imbalance: In a three (3) phase application, a phase imbalance may exist. In a Wye configuration,
under worst case conditions, one phase may have 9.0 amperes maximum current. In a Delta configuration, under worst case conditions, one phase may have 13.0 amperes maximum current.
... Maximum seek rate-50 SIO/sec of average length seeks .
•••• Steady state seek rate power consumption with 16 modules is 2.5 kW (8.53 kBTU/hr).
9343-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
IBM 9343 Storage Controllers
Power Connectlon:*
Phases
Single Phase .... •
Three Phase Delta· ....
Three Phase Wye ........
Plug (watertight)
Hubbell 330PSW
Hubbell 420P9W
No Conn.
Plug (non-watertight)
Nema LS-30P
Nema L15-20P
No Conn.
Receptacle
(watertight)"''''
Hubbell 330R6W
Hubbell 420R9W
No Conn.
Receptacle (nonwatertight)
Nema L6-30R
Nema L15-20R
No Conn.
Power Cord Style (AWG)
12/3
14/4
14/5
No. of Shields for Power
Cord
1
1
1
Bulk 00 for power cord
mm(inches)
12.5 (.5)
12.5 (.5)
15.24 (.6)
Notes:
•
The power cord is shipped with the box. Select receptacle, which the customer provides, ·for the specific
type of installation: watertight for raised floor (under floor) connection or non-watertight for office environment.
••
For a watertight receptacle, a back box is required with an internal jumper connection from the back box
to the ground wire. Hubbell E:c1ck Boxes BB20-1W with 3/4 inch hub or BB30-1W with a one inch hub. An
inline connector cannot be used.
•••
Single phase and three (3) phase delta power cords are also available without a plug for hard wired
installations.
••••
For three phase Wye applications, the customer receptacle should have over current protection device of
1S amperes maximum.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb
Notes:
Environment, Nonoperating:
10°C-40°C (50°F-104°F)'"
8%-80%
27°C (80.S0F)"''''
•
The upper limit of temperature must be derated
(lowered) 1.0°C for every 137 meters of elevation
above 915 meters.
••
The upper limit of wet bulb temperature must be
derated (lowered) 1.0oC for every 274 meters of
elevation above 305 meters.
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb
10°C-52°C (50°F-125.S0F)
8%-80%
27°C (80.S0F)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9343-3
IBM 9343 Storage Controllers
For ESCON environment (Models D04 and DC4):
IBM 9343 Storage Controller Models
C02, CC2, C04, CC4, 004, and OC4
Cabling Schematic
Cabl e
Group
Conn
ID
3797
For parallel environment (Models C02, CC2, C04
and CC4):
Cable
Group
Conn
ID
Conn
ID
181
182 < - - Channel A
183
184 < - - Channel B
185
186 < - - Channel A
187
188 < - - Channel B
8185
21A
23A
2sA
27A
From IBM 9343 for parallel environment:
Model
Channel
Group
No.
No. of
Cables
C02, CC2,
C04, and
CC4
A
0185
1178
B
0185
A
B
1178
C04 and
CC4
9343-4
Max Length
Conn.ID
meters
2
101
122
(400)
1,3
1
21A
122
(400)
2
2
103
122
(400)
1,3
1178
1
23A
122
(400)
2
0185
2
105
122
(400)
1,3
1178
1
25A
122
(400)
2
0185
2
107
122
(400)
1,3
1
27A
122
(400)
2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
(ft)
Notes
IBM 9343 Storage Controllers
To IBM 9343 for parallel environment:
Model
Conn 10
Notes
C02, CC2, C04, and CC4
102
1,3
C02, CC2, C04, and CC4
104
1,3
C04, CC4
106
1,3
C04, CC4
108
1,3
From IBM 9343 for ESCON environment:
Model
Channel
Group
No.
D04, DC4
A
3797
Max Length
No. of
Cables
Conn. 10
meters
(ft)
Notes
1
151
122
(400)
3,4,5
B
3797
1
153
122
(400)
3,4,5
A
3797
1
155
122
(400)
3,4,5
B
3797
1
157
122
(400)
3,4,5
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9343-5
IBM 9343 Storage Controllers
Notes:
1. An IBM 9343 Model C02 or CC2 contains one
storage cluster. A model C04 or CC4 contains two storage clusters. Each storage
cluster may be attached to 2 processor channels directly or by an intervening switching
device.
a. For blue buss and tag cables (group
0185), the maximum cable length is 122
meters (400 feet). For existing gray buss
and tag cables (group 3920), the
maximum cable length is 91 meters (300
feet). For either cable, the maximum
length must be reduced by 4.5 meters
(15 feet) for each intervening control unit
or switch between this unit and the
channel.
b. Whichever type of channel cable is used
(it can be a mixture or blue and gray as
long as they are used in matched pairs),
all EMC shields, tailgate shields, and
cable clamps must be in place and properly fastened. If shields and cable
clamps cannot be properly positioned
and fastened with existing gray channel
cables (because of their size), new
cables must be ordered.
The IBM 9343 Model D04 and DC4 subsystems attach to the following ESCON
processor channels:
ES/99SS (all)
ES/9S9S-9S21
ES/399S-J
4. The IBM 9343 Model D04 or DC4 will directly
attach to the ES/ESCON LED channel but will
not attach directly to an ESCON Extended
Distance Feature channel. For attachment to
an ESCON Extended Distance Feature (XDF)
channel, an ESCON director must be positioned between the XDF channel and the IBM
9343 Storage Controller.
5. Fiber optic jumper cables are required to
attach an IBM 9343 with ESCON adapters to
dynamic data routers. Duplex t~ duplex
62.5/125 micron fiber optic jumper cables
(part number 14F3797) are available from
IBM in standard lengths up to 122 meters
(400 feet). Custom lengths are available
above 122 meters (400 feet) to a maximum
length of 500 meters (1640 feet). The jumper
cables are stocked in the following 11 fixed
lengths:
c. If the IBM 9343 is attached to the channel
via a 3044 channel extender, the
maximum distance (copper plus fiber
optic cable) is 245 meters (800 feet). No
other type of control unit may be
attached to a 3044 that has DASD
attached.
2. Power Sequence and control cables are
optional and should be ordered if the installation uses power sequencing controls. This
cable is not cluster dependant.
3. The IBM 9343 Models C02, CC2, C04, and
CC4 subsystems attach to the following
processor channels:
3S8X
ES/9SSS-9221
ES/9seS-9121
ES/937S
ES/4381
4381, 4361, 4341
ES/3S9S
3S9S
ES/9SSS-9S21
9343-6
3.9
3.9
4.5
3.9
3.9
3.9
4.5
3.9
4.5
MB/sec
and 4.5 MB/sec
MB/sec
MB/sec
and 4.5 MB/sec
MB/sec
MB/sec
and 4.5 MB/sec
MB/sec
lS.S MB/sec
17.S MB/sec
lS.S MB/sec
4
7
13
22
meters
meters
meters
meters
(12
(29
(4S
(7S
feet)
feet)
feet)
feet)
31
46
61
77
meters
meters
meters
meters
(lflS
(15S
(298
(258
feet)
feet)
feet)
feet)
92 meters
IS7 meters
122 meters
(39S feet)
(358 feet)
(48S feet)
One jumper per port is included with each
installed ESCON adapter feature, but it must
be ordered separately.
6. For either ESCON channel type (for example,
XDF or LED), the maximum distance the IBM
9343 Model D04 or DC4 can be located from
the host processor is 29,529 feet or 9 000
meters.
InpuUOutput EquIpment InstallatIon Manual-PhysIcal PlannIng
9345 Direct Access Storage Device
9345 Direct Access Storage Device Models 1 and 2
Plan View (Not to Scale): English meas-
Specifications: Dimensions:
urements are shown in parentheses.
Front
211.5
(8.3)
mm
(inches)
Side
768
(30.2)
Height
173.2
(6.8)
Weight: 27 kg (60 Ibs)
Airflow: 0.99 m 3/min (35 tt3/ min)
Heat Output and Power Requirements:'"
Voltage
+36 V dc
-36 V dc
Total
Track Following
86 W
(0.29 BTU/hr)
25W
(0.08 BTU/hr)
111 W
(0.37 BTU/hr)
Maximum Seek Rate
114 W
(0.39 BTU/hr)
61 W
(0.21 BTU/hr)
175 W
(0.60 BTU/hr)
Note:
Power is supplied from the 9343 Model C02, C04,
or 004.
Environment, Operating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb
10°C-40°C
(50°F -104°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80.6°F)
Environment, Nonoperating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb
10°C-52°C
(50°F - 125.6°F)
8%-80%
27°C (80.6°F)
Chapter 1. Machine Specifications and Cabling Schematics
9345-1
9345 Direct Access Storage Device
This page is intentionally left blank.
9345-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
General Cabling Information
Chapter 2. General Cabling Information
GENERAL CONTROL-TO-CHANNEL CABLING
Generally, the cable available to connect up to eight control
units to a channel is limited to 200 feet. Exceptions to this
are noted on the cabling schematics for the individual
control units. (See also ··Systemj370 Model 145 Cabling
Schematic.") All control units are connected to the
channels serially. All channels exceeding 100 feet must be
reviewed and approved by the Installation Planning
represen ta tive.
I
Power Sequence
and Control *
(1 Each - - Control Unit
Position)
"
... -
-i,
--
~
-- "
_....
/
Channell * *
•
~
\
-
110 I nterface Cables
-
I
Channel 2
--..
-
l:
J.;-
I
Control
Unit
Control
Unit
#1***
#1***
,"
.... - -, ,
(
'-
_.... / \- -
Power Sequence
and Control*
j
~
I
Control
Unit
#3
Control Unit
#2 (With
Two-Channel
Capability)
•
,
Control
Unit
#3
1 ...
j
To Additional/
Control Units
(Max 8)
* On IBM 3032 and 3033 Processor Complexes, the power sequence and control cabies (no EPO) go to the PDU.
On the IBM 3031 Processor Complex, the power sequence and control cables (no EPO) go to the 3031 Processor
(frame 02).
* * The channel may be a separate machine (such as the IBM 2860) or integral to the system processor.
*** Machines with two-byte interface must be installed first on the channel.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1977, 1993
2-1
General Cabling Information
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER CABLING
The channel-to-channel adapter (CTCA), SF 1850 and
SF 1851, is considered as if it were a control unit on each
of the channels affected, except when the Model 145 is
the host system. The adapter then requires two control unit
positions on both X- (host) and Y- (guest) interfaces. For
the IBM 3081 Processor Complex, the adapter reduces the
maximum external I/O interface cable length for the Y(guest) channel with the CTCA by 9.1 meters (30 feet). The
adapter requires external cables to both the host and guest
channels, except the IBM 2860 Selector Channel.
The channel-to-channel adapter can be installed as follows:
1. IBM 2860 Selector Channel: The host side is physically
wired internally, first on the channel and then to the
select out line (highest priority). The guest side may be
cabled in any control unit physical position and any
priority position on the select out or select in line.
2. IBM System/370 Models 145, 155,158, IBM 3031 anG
3032 Processors (with Director 1), and 3081,3083, anG
3084 Processors: The CTCA is in the same frame as the
channel connectors and may be assigned to any contro
unit position(s) or any priority on the host or guesl
channel. When the CTCA is physically the first contro
unit on the host channel, specify 1.2 meters (4 feet) oj
cable to connect the CTCA to channel connectors.
3. IBM 3032 Processor (with Director 2) and IBM 303~
Processors: The CTCA is in a different frame than thf
channels and can be assigned any control unit positior
or priority on the host or guest channel. When tht
CTCA is physil.:ally the first control unit on the hOSI
channel, specify 3 meters (10 feet) of cable for the 303:
and 1.8 meters (6 feet) of cable for the 3033.
In each of the preceding steps, the guest-side (Y) cablin~
should be specified as required.
Channel-to-Channel Adapter in First Control Unit Position
(See Note 2)
(Y-side)
(See Note 1)
Channel 2
Control Unit
#3
___ -I
L
#1
Control
Unit
Control
Unit
#2
#2
Control
Unit
Control'
Unit
#3
Notes:
1. X refers to the host channel; Y refers to the guest channel.
2. X-side; internal machine wiring (IBM 2860 Selector Channel).
2-2
Control
Unit
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
#4
General Cabling Information
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER CABLING
Channel-to-Channel Adapter in Any Control Unit Position
r - - - - - ----------,
,
I
Channell
(X-channell
(See Note)
~~
'I/O
lint erface
I
I
I
1-.-
---
~----
Channel-to-Channel Adapter
(X-side)
(See Note)
Channel 1
Control Unit
#3
(Y-side)
(See Note)
Channel 2
Control Unit
#2
I
•~
I
I
I
I
I
Channel 2
(Y-channell
(See Note)
I/O Interface ~
I
I
------• - - - _ _ -1
Control
Unit
#1
Control
Unit
#1
•
I
Control
Unit
#2
Control
Unit
#3
I
Control
Unit
Control
Unit
#4
#4
1
~
•
Note: X refers to the host channel; Y refers to the guest channel.
Chapter 2_ General Cabling Information
2-3
:General Cabling' Information
This page is intentionally left blank.
'2-4
,Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
General Cabling Information
DIRECT CONTROL CABLING
Multiple Processors (Notes 1 and 2)
,..----.
SF 3622
Processor
#1
I
Processor
Processor
#2
#3
Direct Control
Direct Control
(1 Cable)
(1 Cable)
Direct Control (1 Cable)
Noles:
1. Cabling shown above is in addition to basic channel requirements.
2. Processor may be System/360 or System/370.
Chapter 2. General Cabling Information
2-5
General Cabling Information
MACHINES WITH INTEGRAL OR ABUTTED CONTROLS
3540-81 ,
82
3881-1
2-6
3541
3542
3543
3544
3545
816
817
818
819
820
3886-1
84 1
822
823
824
825
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
General Cabling Information
MACHINES WITH INTEGRAL OR ABUTTED CONTROLS
GrollP
No.
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
3541
3542
3543
3544
3545
No. of
Cahles
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
Max
1-;'0111
3881-1
3881-1
3881-1
3881-1
3881-1
3886-1
3886-1
3886-1
3886-1
3886-1
3540
3540
3540
3540
3540
To
Multiplexer Channel
Channel
Selector Channel
Channel-to-C'hannel Adapter
Control Unit
Multiplexer Channel
Channel
Selector Channel
Channel-to-Channel Adapter
Control Unit
Multiplexer Channel
Channel
Selector Channel
Channel-to-Channel Adapter
Control Unit
1·C'IlXlh (fl)
Notcs
150
2
1
1,3
1
1
150
2
1
1,3
1
1
150
2
1
1,3
1
Notes:
1. Total cable length of 200 feet (unless modified by general control-to-channcl schematic) available to attach
us many as ci!!ht control units.
2. Power sequence and control. This machine must have the power sequence and
control installed for proper operation.
3. To channel-to-channel adapter (SF 1850).
4. See the following page.
Chapter 2. General Cabling Information
2-7
General Cabling Information
MACHINES WITH INTEGRAL OR ABUTTED CONTROLS
Notes: (Continued)
4. The "to" machine and attachment options for 331 O-AI, A2/B 1, B2; 3333/3330, 3340-A2/3340-B 1 or B2; 3340-A2/3344-B2
or B2F, and 3350-A2 or A2F/3350-B2 or B2F/3350-C2 or e2F or 3370 AI, Bl are shown in the following table. Unless
otherwise specified, each DASD string may contain up to four attached machines.
To Machine
Frame
Attachment Options
3115-0 (DDA)
01
One 3340-A2 with one 3340-Bl or B2.
3115-2 (DDA)
01
One 3340-A2 with up to three 3340-Bls, 3340-B2s, or 3344s.
3125-0 (DDA)
01
One 3333-1 with one 3330-1 or 2
or
One 3340-A2 with up to three 3340-Bls or B2s.
3125-2 (DDA)
01
Two 3340-A2 each controlling up to three 3340-Bls or 3340-B2s or one
3333-1 with one 3330-1 or 2. One 3340-A2 can attach 3344(s).
3135,3138 (lFA, SF 4655)
01
Up to three 3333s and/or 3340-A2s. One 3340-A2 can attach 3344(s).
The 3340-A2 with 3344(s) and the 3333 arc mutually exclusive.
3145,3148 (ISC, SF 4660)
03
Up to four 3333s, 3340-A2s and/or 3350-A2s or A2Fs in any combination.
Up to two 3340-A2 can attach 3344(s). Attachment of one or more 3340-A2s
with 3344(s) is mutually exclusive with attachment of either 3333s or 3350-A2s
or A21'"s. Each 3350-A2 or A2F can attach one 3350-C2 or C2F for a maximum
of four 3350-A2s or A2Fs and four 3350-C2s or C2Fs.
3158,3158-3/3168,3168-3 (ISC
per path, SF 4650). Power sequence
and control (cable group 3332 not
required for 3350-C2) enters frame
15 (3067-2,3) on 3168 or 3168-3
02
Up to four 3333s, 3340-A2s and/or 3350-A2s or A2Fs in any combination. Up
to two 3340-A2s can attach 3344(s). Attachment of one or more 3340-A2s
with 3344(s) is mutually exclusive with attachment of either 3333s or 3350-A2s or
A2Fs. Each 3350-A2 or A2F can attach one 3350-C2 or (,2F for a maximum of
four 3350-A2s or A2Fs and four 3350-C2s or C2Fs.
3158,3158-3/3168,3168-3 (lSC
per path, SF 4650, with staging
adapter, SF 7220). Power sequence
and control (cable group 3332) enters
frame 15 (3067-2,3) on 3168 or
3168-3
02
Up to four 3333s and/or 3350-A2s or A2Fs in any combination. At least one
3333 is required for staging or de staging operations.
3345 Model 3,4, or 5 for System/370
Model 145 (signal, cable group 3330
only). Power sequence and control
(cable group 3332 not required for
3350-C2) enters frame 03
02
Up to four 3333s, 3340-A2s and/or 3350-A2s or A2Fs in any combination. Up
to two 3340-A2s can attach 3344(s). Attachment of one or more 3340-A2s with
3344(s) is mutually exdusive with attachment of either 3333s or 3350-A2s or
A2Fs. Each 3350-A2 or A2F can attach one 3350-C2 or C2F for a maximum of
four 3350-A2s or A2Fs and four 3350-(,2s or C2Fs.
3830-2
-
Up to four 3333s, 3340-A2s and/or 3350-A2s or A2Fs in any combination. Up
to two 3340-A2s can attach 3344(s). Attachment of one or more 3340-A2s with
3344(s) is mutually exclusive with attachment of either 3333s or 3350-A2s or
A2Fs. Each 3350-A2 or A2F can attach one 3350-C2 or C2F for a m.lximum of
four 3350-A2s or A2F2s and four 3350-C2s or C2Fs.
3830-3
-
Up to four 3333s and/or 3350-A2s or A2Fs in any combination.
3880
-
See "3880 Storage Control Models 1-4, 11, 13, 21, and 23 Cabling Schematic."
4331 DASD Adapter
(SF 3201)
-
Up to four strings of 3310/3340/3370 direct access storage devices may be attached.
Up to two strings may be 3340s.
2-8
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
ESCON Cabling Information
Chapter 3. ESCON Cabling Information
Ordering Fiber Optic Jumper Cables
Some fiber optic jumper cables are provided with ESCON Directors and ESCON-capable devices. Additional fiber optic jumper cables must be purchased. For more information, see the cabling schematic
for the ESCON product.
Multimode Fiber Optic Jumper Cables: Multimode duplex to duplex 62.5/125 micrometer fiber
optic jumper cables can be ordered with ESCON products from IBM U.S.A., Latin America, and Canada
using cable group 3797 and specifying one of these standard lengths: 4 m (12 ft), 7 m (20 ft), 13 m (40
ft), 22 m (70 ft), 31 m (100 ft), 46 m (150 ft), 61 m (200 ft). 77 m (250 ft), 92 m (300 ft), 107 m (350 ft), or 122
m (400 ft).
Multimode duplex-to-duplex fiber optic jumper cables can be purchased from IBM U.S.A., Latin
America, and Canada in the above lengths and in custom lengths from 4 m (12 ft) to 500 m (1640 ft)
using cable assembly part number 14F3797 and specifying the length. Custom lengths require longer
delivery times.
To order or purchase multimode fiber optic jumper cables from an IBM Authorized Distributor or in
EMEA or AP, use the part numbers shown below.
Duplex
to
Blconlc
Duplex
to
Length
Duplex
to
Duplex
4 m (12 tt)
7 m (20 tt)
13 m (40 tt)
22 m (70 tt)
31 m (100 tt)
46 m (150 tt)
61 m (200 tt)
77 m (250 tt)
92 m (300 tt)
107 m (350 tt)
122 m (400 tt)
Custom Z
74F5412
74F5413
74F5414
74F5415
74F5416
74F9718 1
74F5417
74F9719 1
74F9720 1
74F9721 1
74F5418
74F5436
74F5427
74F5428
74F5429
74F5430
74F5431
74F9726 3
74F5432
74F9727'
74F9728 3
74F9729 3
74F5433
74F5437
ST
Duplex
to
Fe/PC
Duplex
to
None
74F5419
74F5420
74F5421
74F5422
74F5423
74F9722 3
74F5424
74F9723 3
74F97243
74F97253
74F5425
74F5426
74F5404
74F5405
74F5406
74F5407
74F5408
74F9786 3
74F5409
74F9715'
74F9716 3
74F9717 3
74F541 0
74F5411
74F5395
74F5396
74F5397
74F5398
74F5399
74F8682 3
74F5401
74F8683 3
74F86843
74F8685 3
74F5402
74F5403
Notes:
This cable is not available from IBM Authorized Distributers in the U.S.A., Latin America, or Canada.
Custom lengths from 4 m (12 tt) to 500 m (1640 tt) may be ordered using the custom part number from the
appropriate column and specifying the length. Custom lengths require longer delivery times.
Available in EMEA only, on request.
Multimode Fiber Optic Adapters and Couplers: Adapters and couplers used to join connectors on multi mode fiber optic jumper cables include:
Duplex-to-ST adapter
Duplex-to-FC/PC adapter
Duplex-to-Duplex coupler
FC/PC-to-FC/PC coupler
ST-to-ST coupler
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1977, 1993
part
part
part
part
part
number
number
number
number
number
74F5442
74F8679
74F8681
74F5443
74F5444
3-1
ESCON CabHng InformaUon
Single-Mode Fiber Optic Jumper Cables: Single-mode 9/125 micrometer fiber optic jumper
cables can be purchased from IBM U.S.A., Latin America, and Canada using cable assembly part
number 42F8253 and specifying one of these standard lengths: 4 m (12 tt), 13 m (40 tt), 22-m (70 tt), 31
m (100 tt), 61 m (200 tt), 92 m (300 tt), or 122 m (400 tt).
Custom lengths from 4 m (12 tt) to 500 m (1640 tt) can be ordered from IBM U.S.A., Latin America and
Canada using part number 42F8253 and specifying the length. Custom lengths require longer delivery
time.
To order single-mode fiber optic jumper cables from an IBM Authorized Distributor or in EMEA or AP,
use the part numbers shown below.
Length
Duplex-to-Duplex
4 m (12 tt)
13 m (40 tt)
22 m (70 tt)
31 m (100 tt)
61 m (200 tt)
92 m (300 tt)
122 m (400 tt)
02G4982
02G4983
02G4984
02G4985
02G4986
02G4987
02G4988
Note:
Single-Mode fiber optic jumper cables in
custom lengths from 4 m (12 tt) to 500 m (1640
tt) can be ordered using part number 02G4989
and specifying the length. Custom lengths
require longer delivery times.
Single-Mode Fiber Optic Adapters and Couplers: Adapters and couplers used to join connectors on single-mode fiber optic jumper cables include:
Duplex-to-ST adapter
Duplex-to-FC/PC adapter
Duplex-to-duplex coupler
part number 73F5419
part number 74F9753
part number 73F5418
Trunk Cable: For trunk cable specifications, see Planning for Enterprise System Connection Links,
GA23-0367.
3-2
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
Appendix A. Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
USA and Canada 60 Hz Power Receptacles and Plugs
60 Hz Power Receptacles and Plugs
Power
Plug
Reference
(IBM)
-
A
A1
A2
A6
8
81
Manufacturer
or
Speclflcatlont
NEMA
RS
RS
RS
RS
RS
HH or
I EC-309
Plug 2
1-15P
3720
3720U-1
3720U-2
3720U-6
3730
420P9V
Inllne
Connector
1-15R
3913
3913U-1
3913U-2
3913U-6
3914
-
Receptacle·
1-15R
3743
3743U-1
3743U-2
3743U-6
3744
420R9V
or 420R9W
or 420R9
Schematic:
Face of
Receptacle-
Diagram
1
Diagram
35
Diagram
51
Diagram
34
Diagram
35
Diagram
42-
Diagram
46
Service
Rating
(Amperes)
15
20
20
15
20
15
20
Nominal
Voltage
120
208/240
120
208/240
208/240
2081240
208/240
Phases
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
No
grounding
conductor
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
ConductorsFeatures'
Adapter
Type
60 Hz Power Receptacles and Plugs
Power
Plug
Reference
(IBM)
Manufacturer
or
Speclflcatlont
Plug
2
82
C
C1
0
NEMA
RS
HH or
I EC-309
RS
330P6W
3760
"
01
02
RS
HH
DS3516MP
JPS334H
L15-20P
3750
Inllne
Connector
-
3933
-
3934
DS3516FP
JCS334H
Receptacle·
L15-20R
3753
330RGW
3754
DS-3516FR
JRS-334H
Schematic:
Face of
Receptacle-
Diagram
60
Diagram
40
Diagram
46
Diagram
36
Diagram
48
Diagram
44
Service
Rating
(Amperes)
20
30
30
30
30
30
2081240
208/240
208/240
208/240
208/240
208/240
Nominal
Voltage
Phases
3
1
1
3
3
3
Conductors-
4
3
3
4
5
4
Waterproof
Locking
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Featuresl
Adapter
Type
(C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1977, 1993
A-1
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
60 Hz Power Receptacles and Plugs
Power
Plug
Reference
(IBM)
Manufacturer
or
Specification'
E
E1
F
F3
NEMA
RS
RS
Plug!
7328
Inllne
Connector
7428
G
H
RS
RS
RS
JPS-1534D
JPS-1534LK
5-15P
460P9V
JPS-1034H
JCS-1034H
JCS-1534D
JCS-1534LK
5-15R
JRSA-1034H
or
JRSR-1034H
JRSA-1534D
or
JRSR-1534D
JRSA-1534LK7
or
JRSR-1534LK
5-15R
Receptacle·
7324
460R9V
or 460R9W
or 460R9
Schematic:
Face of
Receptacle'
See
Diagram
47
See
Diagram
46
See
Diagram
45
See
Diagram
44
See
Diagram
44
See
Diagram
4
Service
Rating
(Amperes)
60
60
100
150
150
(400 Hz)
15
120
Nominal
Voltage
208/240
208/240
208/240
208/240
208/240
400 Hz
Phases
3
3
3
3
3
1
Conductors'
4
4
4
4
4
3
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Waterproof
FSA
Nonlocklng
N
Q
Features/
Adapter
Type
60 Hz Power Receptacles and Plugs
Power
Plug
Reference
(IBM)
Manufacturer
or
Specification'
Plug!
J
K
L
M
NEMA
RS
RS
RS
RS
RS
L5-15P·
6-15P
L6-15P
5-20P
L5-20P
L6-20P
Inlln8
Connector
L5-15R
6-15R
L6-15R
5-20R
L5-20R
L6-20R
Receptacle·
L5-15R
6-15R
L6-15R
5-20R
L5-20R
L6-20R
,
Schematic:
Face of
Receptacle'
Diagram
7
Diagram
5
Diagram
10
Diagram
30
Diagram
8
Diagram
11
Service
Rating
(Amperes)
15
15
15
20
20
20
Nominal
Voltage
120
208/240
208/240
120
120
208/240
Phases
1
1
1
1
1
1
Conductors'
3
3
3
3
3
3
Locking
Nonlocklng
Locking
Nonlocklng
Locking
Locking
Features/
Adapter
Type
A-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
60 Hz Power Receptacles and Plugs
Power
Plug
Reference
(IBM)
R
S
T
55
-
-
-
Manufacturer
or
Specification'
NEMA
RS
RS
RS
RS
RS
HH or
IEC-309
L6-30P
14-30P
6-20P
L6-30P
L14-30R
Plug'
5-30P
L5-30P
Inllne
Connector
5-30R
L5-30R
L6-30R
14-30R
6-20R
L6-30R
L14-30R
Receptacle·
5-30R
L5-30R
L6-30R
14-30R
6-20R
L6-30R
L14-30R
Schematic:
Face of
Receptacle"
Diagram
31
Diagram
9
Diagram
12
Diagram
55
Diagram
29
Diagram
12
Diagram
60
Service
Rating
(Amperes)
30
30
30
30
20
30
30
Nominal
Voltage
120
120
208/240
208/240
208/240
208/240
208/240
Phases
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Conductors"
3
3
3
4
3
3
4
Nonlocklng
Locking
Locking
Nonlocklng
-
-
-
Features/
Adapter
Type
Notes:
1. For U.S. and Canada, NEMA is the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, RS is the
Russelstoll division of Amerace Corporation, HH is Hubbell Wiring Device division of Hubbell Incorporated, and IEC is the International Electrotechnical Commission.
2. These plug types (or equivalent) are supplied with the machines. Customer provides matching
receptacles.
3. When a RussellStoll inline connector is used with flexible metal conduit or liquid-tight flexible metal
conduit, a RussellStoll FSA or JPA adapter is required. See the RussellStoll catalog for the correct
adapter and bushing size. size.
4. The 3-phase receptacle must be wired for correct phase rotation, looking at the face of the receptacle and a clockwise direction from the ground pin, the sequence will be phase 1, phase 2, and
phase 3.
5. Diagrams are not to scale and are for visual identification only. Size and interlock of actual receptacle may differ from diagrams.
6. Number of conductors includes one insulated eqUipment grounding conductor green or green and
yellow.
7. Includes angular adapter.
8. Hospital service plug version of L5-15 is available.
Appendix A. Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
A-3
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
IBM World Trade Power Receptacle and Plugs
Power Receptacles and Plugs
Schematic:
Face of
Receptacle
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram
38
28
2
5e
16
26
15
32
2e
15
2.5
2.5
6/1e
6/1e
6/16
1e
1e
lee
125
15@
125
1e@
25e
25e
25e
25e
25e
25e
25e
259
Phases
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Conductors
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
Service Rating:
Amperes
Nominal Voltage
52
Figure 14 (Part 1 of 3). Plugs and Receptacles used in IBM World Trade
Power Plugs and Receptacles
Schematic:
Face of
Receptacle
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram
17
6
24
25
23
33
53
1e
Hl
1e
1e/16
13
15
15
15
16
25e
25e
25e
25e
25e
258
25e
25e
258
Phases
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Conductors
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Service Rating:
Amperes
Nominal Voltage
54
56
Figure 14 (Part 2 of 3). Plugs and Receptacles used in IBM World Trade
Power Receptacles and Plugs
Schematic:
Face of
Receptacle
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram
14
18
22
43
41
27
46
28
48
16
16
16
5
18
16
16/32
25
3e
258
259
25e
Phases
1
1
1
3
3
3
2 or 3
3
3
Conductors
3
3
3
5
5
5
3, 4,
or 5
5
5
Service Rating:
Amperes
Nominal Voltage
22e/389 22e/389 22e/389 229/389 229/38e
Figure 14 (Part 3 of 3). Plugs and Receptacles used in IBM World Trade
A-4
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
ege
19
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
Power Receptacles by Country
Slngle·Phase (By Diagram Number)
Country
Double Insulated
Grounded
100·125 V
Afghanistan
200·250 V
100·125 V
200·250 V
Multl·Phase (By
Diagram
Number)
18
14,16
Algeria'*'
18,46
14,16
46
Andorra'*'
18,46
14,16
46
Angola
18,46
14,16
27,28,46
Antigua
Argentina
Aruba
4
Austria
Australia
Bahamas
4
Bahrain
Bangladesh
Barbados
4
Belgium
23
23
2,6,11,29
14,16
5,18
14,16
18,46
14,16
6,53,54
6
27,28,46
5
23,46
23
22
22
46
5
18,46
14,16
46
18,46
14,16
46
23
Belize
Benin'*'
Bermuda
4
5,23
Bolivia
4
5
Brazil
2,4,30,37
2,5,15,18,29
14,16
Brunei
23,46
23
46
Bulgaria
18,46
14,16
46
none
Burma
22
Burundi
18,46
14,16
46
Cameroon'*'
18,46
14,16
46
Canada
Cayman Islands (British W.lnd.)
4,7,8,30
3,5,11,34,35,40
4
5
none
36,42,44,45,47
Central African Rep.'*'
18,46
14,16
46
Chad'*'
18,46
14,16
46
23
23
Hard·Wlred
Chile
25
16,17
China (PR)
6
1,17
Hard-Wired
46
Channel Islands
Colombia
4
2,6,29
Costa Rica
4
5,11
Congo Brazzaville'*'
18,46
14,16
Curacao
5,18
14,16
23,46
23
18
14,16
18-,19,46
14,16
4
Cyprus
Czechoslovakia
Denmark
Dominican Rep.
4
Egypt
46
46
5
18
EI Salvador
4
5
Ecuador
4
5
14,16
Appendix A. Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
A-5
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
Slngle·Phase (By Diagram Number)
Country
Grounded
100·125 V
Ethiopia
Double Insulated
200·250 V
25
100·125 V
200·250 V
Multl·Phase (By
Diagram
Number)
14,16
FIJI
23,46
23
46
Finland
18,46
14,16
46
France*
18,46
14,16
46
18
14,16
Germany
18,46
14,16
27,28,46
Ghana
23,46
23
46
Greece
18,46
14,16
46
18,46
14,16
46
4
5,23
23
Haiti
4
5
Honduras
4
5
French Guiana
Guatemala
4
Gulnea*
Guyana
Hong Kong
5
23,46
14,23
Hungary
18
14,16
Iceland
18
14,16
India
46
23,46
23
18
16,17
Iran
18
14,16
Iraq
23,46
23
46
Ireland
23,46
23
Hard-Wired
Israel
32,46
32
46
Italy
25,46
16,25
46
18,46
14,16
46
Indonesia
Ivory Coast*
Jamaica
Japan
4
5
4,20,30,38
5,29,40,33
36,42,44,45,47
Jordan
18,23
16,23
Kenya
18,23,46
23
Korea (5)
4
18
14,16
23,46
23
Lebanon
18
14,16
Uberla
5
Kuwait
4
46
46
46
Ubya
25
Uechtensteln
24
16,17
Luxembourg
18
14,16
Macau
18
14,16
Malagasy"
18
14,16
Malawi
23,46
23
46
Malaysia
23,46
14,23
46
Mall"
18,46
14,16
46
Malta
46
25
23,46
23
Martinique
18
14,16
Maurltanla*
18,46
14,16
46
Mauritius"
18,46
14,16
46
A-6
InpuUQutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
Slngle.Phase (By Diagram Number)
Country
Mexico
Grounded
Double Insulated
100·125 V
200·250 V
4
10,11
100·125 V
200·250 V
Multi·Phase (By
Diagram
Number)
Monaco*
18,46
14,16
46
Morocco*
18,46
14,16
46
• Mozambique
Nepal
Netherlands
Netherlands Antilles
4
New Caledonla*
New Zealand
Nicaragua
18
14,16
23
23
18,46
14,16
5,18
14,16
18,46
14,16
46
46
6,58
4,7
3,5
Nlger*
18,46
14,16
46
Nigeria
23,46
23
46
Norway
18,46
14,16
46
Oman
23,46
23
46
22
22
Pakistan
Panama (Rep.of)
4
Papua New Guinea
5
6
Paraguay
2,6,29
Peru
4
5
Philippines
4
4,5
Poland
14,16
18,46
14,16
23
23
Portugal
18,46
14,16
Qatar
23,46
23
18
14,16
Polynesia
Romania
Saudi Arabia
4
46
18
14,16
Senegal*
18,46
14,16
46
Sierra Leone
23,46
23
46
Singapore
46
23,46
23
Somalia
25
25
South Africa
22
22
Spain
18
14,16
Sri Lanka
22
22
18
14,16
Sudan
Suriname
4
5
Hard-Wired
27,28
Sweden
18,46
14,16
27,28,46
Switzerland
24,46
16,17
41,43,46
18
14,16
Syria
Taiwan
4
Tanzania
Thailand
Trinidad Tobago
Togo*
Tunlsla*
4
5
23,46
23
5,11
1
46
2,5
18,46
14,18
48
18
14,18
46
Appendix A. Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
A·7
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
Single-Phase (By Diagram Number)
Country
Grounded
100-125 V
Double Insulated
200-250 V
100-125 V
200-250 V
Multi-Phase (By
Diagram
Number)
Turkey
18
14,16
Uganda
23,46
23
46
United Arab Emirates (Dubal)
23,46
23
46
United Kingdom
23,46
23
Hard-Wired
Upper Volta*
18,46
14,16
46
2,6,29
14
Uruguay
4,7,8,9
30,31,37
USA
USSR
3,5,10,11
34,35,40
18
Venezuela
Viet Nam
Western Samoa
Yemen (Aden)
Yugoslavia
Zaire
Zambia
Zimbabwe
4,7,8
36,42,44
45,47,55
14,16
46
14,16
46
5
18,46
6
23
23
18,46
14,16
18
14,16
23,46
23
46
46
18
Note: *IBM activities In these countries are supported by IBM France and have requirements Identical to those of France.
**Used only for typewriters.
A-a
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
Power Receptacle Diagrams
0@~©~
1
2
3
4
5
@©©©©
6
7
8
9
10
©©€8~~
11
12
14
15
16
~©8@G:J
17
18
19
20
22
~ ® @ ~ 8
@~~~(J
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Appendix A. Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
A-9
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
Q~~©©
©~~©G
33
34
35
38
40
41
fod\ fod\
~~
44
45
35
42
37
43
~ ~ rfR\
~~~
45
@®[@]*~
47
48
50
51
52
~8©~@
53
54
55
~@©
58
A-10
59
50
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
55
57
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
Power Cord Style
Power
Cable
Cord Nominal 00
Style inches (nm)
Conductors
Number
of
Nominal 00*
Shields Quantity inches (nm)
AWG
No.
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A8
A9
8.528
8.518
G.57C:l
8.375
8.39S
8.568
8.398
8.374
(13.2)
(13.9)
(14.5)
(9.5)
(9.9)
(14.2)
(9.9)
(9.5)
1
1
1
1
8
8
8
S
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
8.864
G.C:l81
8.182
G.851
S.851
8.864
8.864
8.848
(1. 6)
(2.1)
(2.6)
(1.3)
(1.3)
(1.6)
(1.6)
(loS)
14
12
18
16
16
14
14
18
B1
B2
B3
8.713 (18.1)
8.693 (17 .6)
B.669 (17.S)
B
1
S
5
5
5
8.182 (2.6)
8.B64 (1.6)
8.S83 (2.1)
1B
14
.12
01
02
03
04
8.792
8.758
8.642
8.855
(2S.1)
(19.S)
(16.3)
(19.1)
2
1
2
1
5
5
5
5
8.182
8.182
8.S64
S.182
(2.6)
(2.6)
(1.6)
(2.6)
18
IS
14
1B
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
1.B24
1.48S
1.28B
1.2SB
1.2S8
1.24B
1. 44B
C:l.974
8.949
(26.B)
(35.6)
(3B.5)
(38.5)
(38.5)
(31.5)
(36.6)
(24.7)
(24.1)
1
8
2
8
1
2
1
B
1
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
4
B.129
8.232
S.184
B.184
8.184
G.184
8.232
8.129
8.184
(3.3)
(5.9)
(4.7)
(4.7)
(4.7)
(4.7)
(5.9)
(3.3)
(4.7)
8
4
6
6
6
6
4
8
6
F1
F2
F3
F4
1.488
1.646
1.646
1.293
(35.6)
(41.8)
(41.8)
(32.8)
8
1
5
5
5
4
8.292
8.292
8.292
C:l.292
(7.4)
(7.4)
(7.4)
(7.4)
2
2
2
2
3
C:l.848 (1.S)
18
-
8.B51 (1.3)
8.84S (1. S)
16
18
3
1
4
5
8.292
8.232
8.292
8.184
(7.4)
(5.9)
(7.4)
(4.7)
2
4
2
6
e
1
G1
G2
G3
G4
8.368 (9.1)
8.365 (9.3)
8
1
HI
1. 525 (38.7)
1
H2
H3
1.494 (37.9)
1.248 (31.5)
1
1
-
*This diameter refers to solid. bare wire.
Figure 15. Power Cord Style for World Trade
. Appendix A. Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
A-11
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
HOW TO INSTALL A POWER PLUG ON SHIELDED
CABLE
To make power cable shielding effective, the shield or
shields must be properly terminated at the plug end of the
cable. Because different plugs are used in different countries,
slight changes to the following instructions may be needed.
Step 4: Do not cut the inner (or only) shield. Unbraid and
carefully comb out the shield for 1 inch (25 mm) from the
end for 15 A-30 A cables or 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) from the
end for 45 A-60 A cables. The core is exposed. (See
®.)
Step 5: Remove the cable core for a minimum of 3/4 inch
(l9 mm) from the end; the conductors are exposed.
(See
©.)
Names of Bulk Cable Components
Conductors
Core
Outer Shield
(Only in two-shield cable)
* Trademark of E.I. du Pont de Nemour~ & Co. (Inc.)
Preparing Bulk Cable End for the Plug
Dimensions given are for reference only. Use your own
discretion to assure proper assembly of the cable and plug.
Step 1: Remove the outer jacket for 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)
from the end for 15 A-30 A cables or 2-3/4 inches (70 mm)
from the end for 45 A-60 A cables. If this is a one-shield
cable, go to step 4.
I
Step 2: (For two-shield cables only.) Remove the outer
shield as far back as the outer jacket. The Mylar separator is
exposed. Wrap one full turn of electrical tape over the
separator and another full turn of tape over the cut end of
the outer shield; overlap onto the outer jacket. This tape is
used to assure complete electrical isolation· between the
inner and the outer shields. (See
®.)
Outer Shield
Mylar Separator
Tape
~iClITO
~
~lIrGfJ
~
Step 6: Carefully lay the shield back over the cable outer
jacket; wrap tape around the shield for temporary protection. Note that on two-shield cables, the outer shield must
be insulated from the plug cap, equipment ground (earth)
wire, and conduit; the outer shield is grounded at the
machine end only. The inner (or only) shield should be
grounded through the shell of the plug to the branch circuit
conduit. ·Three-hundred-sixty-degree grounding of the
shield to the plug shell is desirable; that is, contact should
be between the shield and the shell at all points around the
edge, not just at one point.
Installing the Plug
These steps show the attachment of one type of plug;
modifications will be needed to allow for the different
physical designs of plugs used in various countries.
Install the clamp, brass washer, and bushing over the
Take the protective
prepared cable end as shown at
tape off the shield and slide the bushing over against the
shield. Carefully lay the shield back over
of the
bushing; be sure to spread the strands of the shield evenly
over the bushing surface.
1M"
{or only}
Shield
Step 3: (For two-shield cables only). Remove the Mylar
separator for 1 inch (25 mm) from the end for 15 A-30 A
cables or 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) from the end for 45 A-60 A
cables. Do not cut the inner shield.
A-12
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
®.
®
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
Slide the brass washer over the shield and up against the
mating surface of the bushing at
Wrap tape around
the shield for one full turn and trim off the remaining
shield strands. Install the clamp and be sure that the mating
surface is tightly against the brass washer.
®.
Install the proper terminals and put the rest of the plug
assembly together.
Power Plug and Power Cord Style Specifications
A-13
Power Plug and Power Cord 'Style Specifications
This page is intentionally left blank.
A-14
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Customer-Supplied Cables
Appendix B. Customer-Supplied Cables
CABLES BY MACHINE
IBM
Preassembled
Cable Assembly
Customer-Assembled Cables
Machine
M('Idel
Cable
Group
Number
3262
1 and 11
None
2577672
323921
1836418
None
For indoor use.
3262
1 and 11
None
1833108
5252750
1836419
None
Intended for indoor/outdoor use.
(Notes 2 and 3)
Bulk IBM
Port No.
Connector
Group
Connector
Imta Ilotion
Tools
Coble Description
(Note 1)
3277/3886
1/2
h
2577672
323921
1836418
None
Used to attach a display to a control unit.
For indoor use. (Note 1)
3277/3886
1/2
I
1833108
5252750
1836419
None
Used to attach a display to a control unit.
Intended for indoor/outdoor use.
(Notes 2 and 3)
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
IBM connector kit 1836418 contoins two BNC connectors (IBM 1836444; commercial source is Bendix 30220-3). Maximum cable length is 2,000 feet.
IBM connector kit 1836419 contains two BNC connectors (IBM 1836477; commercial source is Bendix 39100-16). Maximum cable length is 2,000 feet.
Bulk cable (IBM 5252750) is a special RG62A;U outdoor coaxial coble. Jacket must meet the minimum requirements for underground feeder and branch
circuit coble (UL subject 493). It must also be weatherproof and sunlight.resistant.
Part to Be Ordered
Specify via MES*
Bulk Cable
(outdoor)
IBM part 5252750,
including cable length
Bulk Cable
(indoor)
IBM part 323921,
including cable length
Preassembled
Cables
(outdoor)
IBM part 1833108,
including cable length
Preassembled
Cables
(indoor!
IBM part 2577672,
including cable length
BNC-Type
Connectors
(outdoors)
(two in kit; one
kit per cable length)
Connector group
IBM part 1836419
BNC·Type
Connectors
(indoors)
(two in kit; one
kit per cable length)
Connector group
IBM part 1836418
*MES = Miscellaneous Equipment Specification
submitted by IBM Marketing Representative
Coaxial Signal Cable and Components
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1977, 1993
B-1
Customer-Supplied Cables
CABLE DESCR IPTIONS
Part 323921-Commercial Designation RG62A/U*
OD
Conductor
Copperweld * *
AWG Size
#22
Illches (mm)
Illsulation Type
0.242 (6.1)
Flame-Retardant
Polyethylene
Solid-40~1,
Condlll:tivi ty
Cover
PVC
Color Black
Average Thickness
0.031 inch <0.79 mm)
Shield
Copper Braid
90~~; Minimum
Coverage
Source: IBM or customer-seleded source.
* Must meet specifica tionslisted here.
** Maximum resistance of 44 ohms/l 000 feet.
Part 5252750-Commercial Designation RG62A/U* (Modified for Outdoor Use per UL Subject 493)
OD
COil dll C tor
Copperweld
Solid-40'tr,
Conductivity
A WG Size
#22
Inches (mm)
Insulatioll Type
0.260 (6.6)
Flame-Retardant
Polyethylene
Cover
PVC <1
--I
1·1
1_-
Coble Entry and Exit Area in
Bose of Machine. Locating
dimensions are measured from
edge of frome, not cover.
This does nof Indicate floor
cutout.
Cable Exit Area,
Recommended
------.
} Service Area Boundary
(Service clearances are measured
_e-.e-F'eoture)
from machine with covers closed)
(Without
+
o
Power Cord Exit, 50/60 Hz
Power Cord Exit. 400 Hz
Power cords ere supplied in 4.2-m (14-foot) lengths
unless otherwise noted on the specification page.
The length is measured from the symbol
or 0.
e
,------
Nonralsed Floor Cable Exit
Meter Location
T
Standard Equipment Outllno
(Shows machine wlth covers closed)
Leveling Pads or Glides (90 mm
[3-1/2"J Typical Diameter)
Locafing dimensions are measured
from edge of frome, not cover.
Legs
CI
Swinging Gote
Casfers
Locafing dimensions are measured
from edge of frame, not cover.
T
Unit Emergency Switch
Optional Equipment Oufline
Hinged Covers
Cusfomer Engineer
Indicafor Panel
Single
CE
In Cabling Schematics:
~1
~
~
~
~
Indicates Cable Group
from a machine
Blfold
Offset Blfold
Indlcafes Cable Group
to a machine
Copyright IBM Corp. 1977, 1993
c:::=:J.
II
II
II
_I
Tambour Canister
E-1
Standard Symbols
This page is intentionally left blank.
E-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
condo Conductor.
A
cant. Continuous.
A. Ampere.
cony. Converter.
ac. Alternating current.
CRT. Cathode-ray tube.
ADU. Automatic dialing unit.
C-T-C. Connector-to-connector.
ambient.
Environment.
CTCA. Channel-to-channel adapter control.
AWG. American wire gauge.
ctrl. Control.
B
Cu. Copper.
blk mpxr. Block multiplexer.
CWo Copperweld.
B/M. Bill of Material.
bpi.
Bits per inch.
bps.
Bits per second.
D
DAA. Data access arrangement.
DASD. Direct access storage device.
BSC. Basic storage controller.
DASF. Direct access storage facility.
BSM. Basic storage module.
DAU. Data adapter unit.
BTU. British thermal unit.
dB. Decibel.
bus. One or more conductors used for transmitting
signals or power.
c
dc. Direct current.
DCE. Data circuit-terminating equipment.
dlst. Distribution.
C. (1) Celsius. (2) Coupler.
dply. Display.
CCITT. Consulting Committee of International Telephone & Telegraph (WT).
CDU. Coolant distribution unit.
CEo Customer engineer.
DRC.
Data recording control.
E
EBCD. Extended binary-coded decimal.
CER. Customer engineering room.
cfm. Cubic feet per minute.
EBCDIC. Extended binary-coded decimal interchange
code.
ch. Channel.
EC. Engineering change.
chan. Channel.
EDR. Effective data rate.
cm. Centimeter.
EIA. Electronic Industry Association.
cnsl. Console.
EPO. Emergency power off.
coax. Coaxial.
(C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1977, 1993
X-1
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
K
F
F.
(1) Fahrenheit. (2) Front.
kb.
Kilobyte.
FBM. Field bill of materials.
kbps.
FCC.
kcallhr.
Federal Communications Commission.
Kilobytes per second.
FE. Field engineering.
kg.
FE DAU.
kg/mI.
Field engineering data adapter unit.
fro
Frame.
kVA.
ft.
(1) Foot. (2) Feet.
kW.
Kilogram.
Kilograms per square meter.
Kilovolt ampere.
Kilowatt.
kybd. Keyboard.
G
gpm.
Kilocalories per hour.
Gallons per minute.
L
L. Left.
H
LA.
Line adapter.
H. (1) Height. (2) Hubbell.
lb. Pound.
Hertz (Hz). A unit of frequency equal to one cycle
per second.
LIB.
Line interface base.
hp. (1) High pressure. (2) Horsepower.
LIC.
Line interface coupler.
Hz. Hertz.
lumens/mI. Lumens per square meter.
M
I. Impulsive noise.
m. Meter.
ICA. Integrated communications adapter.
max. Maximum.
10. Identification.
MCM. Thousand circular mils.
IDA. Integrated data adapter.
m3/mln. Cubic meter per minute.
IFA. Integrated file adapter.
MES. Miscellaneous equipment specification.
1M - PP. Installation manual- physical planning.
mfg. Manufacturing.
In .. Inch.
MG. Motor generator.
I/O. Input/output.
min. (1) Minimum. (2) Minute.
IPA.
mm. Millimeter.
Integrated printer adapter.
IPCEA. International Power Cables Engineering Association.
ISC. Integrated storage controls.
modem. Modulator/demodulator.,
modulator/demodulator. Device that modulates and
demodulates signals transmitted over communication
facilities.
MP. Multiprocessing.
mpxr. Multiplexer.
X-2
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
Polyvinyl chloride.
ms. Millisecond.
PVC.
MSC. Mass storage control.
pwr. Power.
MSF.
Mass storage facility.
MSS.
Mass storage system.
MTU.
Magnetic tape unit.
R
R. Rear.
RIS. Russell & Stoll.
N
rdr. Reader.
N/A.
(1) Not applicable. (2) Not available.
reI.
Relative.
NEC.
National Electric Code.
rfl. radio-frequency interference.
NEMA.
National Electrical Manufactures' Association.
RPL. Remote program loader.
NFPA.
National Fire Protection Association.
RPQ. Request for price quotation.
no •.
Number.
nom. Nominal.
NTT.
Nippon Telephone and Telegraph.
rt. Right.
s
S. Side.
o
SC. Specify code.
OCR. Optical Character recognition.
SCU.
Storage control unit.
00. Outside diameter.
SOA.
Synchronous data adapter.
Original equipment manufacturer.
OEM.
oersted. Centimeter-gram-second electromagnetic
unit of magnetic intensity.
SOLC. Synchronous data link control.
sec. Second.
seq. Sequential.
opt. Optional.
p
service clearance. Minimum space required to allow
working room for the machine operator and/or the
customer engineer for servicing the unit.
PIS. Pass and Seymour.
SF. (1) Special feature. (2) Sales feature.
PCOU.
POU.
pH.
Power and coolant distribution unit.
Power distribution unit.
Hydrogen-ion concentration.
port. Entry/exit in mass storage control of 3851 for
attachment of external devices.
sir. Selector.
SNA. System network architecture.
std. Standard.
stg. Storage.
SVP. Service processor.
ppm.
Parts per million.
proc.
Processing.
psI.
Pounds per square inch.
T
T. Prominent discrete tones.
pslg.
Pounds per square inch gauge.
TNL. Technical newsletter.
PTT.
Postal telephone and telegraph.
TPS.
Two-processor switch.
Glossary 01 Terms and AbbreViations
X-3
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
v
u
UK.
United Kingdom.
V. Volt.
UL.
Underwriters Laboratory.
VFL. Variable field length.
UPS.
Uninterrupted power supply.
w
U.S.. United States.
W. Watt.
WE. Western Electric.
VIT. World Trade.
X-4
InpuUOutput Equipment Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Readers' Comments
IBM System/360, System/370,
4300, 9370, and ES/9000 Processors
Input/Output Equipment
Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Publication No. GC22-7064-13
Overall, how satisfied are you with this publication?
0~
Very
Satisfied
Satisfied
Neutral
Dissatisfied
Very
Dissatisfied
Overall satisfaction
How satisfied are you that the information is:
Easy to find
Easy to understand
Accurate
Complete
Well organized
Applicable to your tasks
THANK
YO U I
Please tell us how we can improve this publication:
Mall your comments using the attached mailer or:
• Call toll-free: 1-800-426-9021
• Fax this form to: (914) 432-9405
Note that IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. We appreciate your comments.
Name
Company or Organization
Phone No.
Address
----- -----
- --..:.":::
:S!~E: ®
Readers' Comments
GC22-7064-13
Fold and Tape
Please do not staple
Cut
Alor
Fold and Tape
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPL V MAIL
FIRST CLASS MAIL
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
International Business Machines Corporation
Information Development
Department 898
PO 80X 950
POUGHKEEPSIE NY 12602-0950
111.11111.1.111111.11111.111.111.111.1.1.1111111.1.1
Fold and Tape
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
CU
GC22-7064-13
Ale
Readers' Comments
IBM System/360, System/370,
4300, 9370, and ES/9000 Processors
Input/Output Equipment
Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Publication No. GC22·7064-13
Overall, how satisfied are you with this publication?
0~
Very
Satisfied
Satisfied
Neutral
Dissatisfied
Very
Dissatisfied
Overa" satisfaction
How satisfied are you that the information is:
Easy to find
Easy to understand
Accurate
Complete
We" organized
App"cable to your tasks
THANK
YOU I
Please tell us how we can improve this publication:
Mall your comments using the attached mailer or:
• Call toll-free: 1·800-426·9021
• Fax this form to: (914) 432·9405
Note that IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. We appreciate your comments.
Name
Company or Organization
Phone No.
Address
--- :S~E:- ®
---.=..:..:
- ------
Readers' Comments
GC22-7064-13
Fold and Tape
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLV MAIL
FIRST CLASS MAIL
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
International Business Machines Corporation
Information Development
Department B98
PO BOX 950
POUGHKEEPSIE NY 12602-0950
1.1111111.1.11111111.111.111.111.111.1.1.11.11.1.1.1
Fold and Tape
GC22-7064-13
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
Cut
Alol
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2013:01:19 16:13:37-08:00 Modify Date : 2013:01:19 17:31:54-08:00 Metadata Date : 2013:01:19 17:31:54-08:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.52 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:4fc3d2fd-ea70-426b-9a11-8cb7022fc557 Instance ID : uuid:c65d9cdb-7be0-4074-bfeb-ca4dd0827e66 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 518EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools